39267903 Structure SHIP C | Damages | License

St ruct ure

www.ShipConstructor.com
© Copyright 2010ShipConstructor Software Inc. –Jun. 24, 10
ShipConst ruct or 2011 St ruct ure
Publ i shed 2010-06-2 4
Copyri ght
Copyri ght © 2010 Shi pConst ruct or Sof t ware Inc.
Inf ormat i on i n t hi s Shi pConst ruct or manual i s t he propert y of Shi pConst ruct or Sof t ware Inc. No part of i t can be reproduced, t ransl at ed,
resol d, rent ed, adapt ed, modi f i ed, st ored i n a ret ri eval syst em or t ransmi t t ed i n any f orm or by any means, i n whol e or i n part . Al l Ri ght s
Reserved.
Trademarks
Shi pConst ruct or
Aut oMagi c
Smart Part s
Dat abase Dri ven Rel at i onal Obj ect Model
DDROM
Are al l regi st ered t rademarks of Shi pConst ruct or Sof t ware Inc.
ShipConst ruct or Sof t ware Inc.
Sui t e 304
3960 Quadra St reet
Vi ct ori a, BC
Canada V8X 4A3
Tol l Free: 1-888-210-7420
Phone: 1-250-479-3638
Fax: 1-250-479-0868
Inf ormat i on: i nf o@Shi pConst ruct or.com
Support : support @Shi pConst ruct or.com
Sal es: SSI@Shi pConst ruct or.com
Websi t e: www.Shi pConst ruct or.com
SHIPCONSTRUCTOR LICENSE AGREEMENT
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE INSTALLATION, YOU MUST ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. INDICATE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF THIS AGREEMENT BY CLICKING
ON THE APPROPRIATE BUTTON. IF YOU CLICK ON “REJECT,” INSTALLATION WILL ABORT.
Li cense Grant . Shi pConst ruct or Sof t ware Inc., #304 – 3960 Quadra St reet , Vict oria, B.C. Canada, V8X 4A3 (“ SSI” ) grant s
t o t he person accept ing t his Agreement (t he “Li censee” ) a non-excl usi ve, non-t ransf erable right t o use (t he “Li cense” )
i n obj ect code f orm t hose program modul es, appl i cat i on programmi ng i nt erf ace (“API” ), any ot her mat erials provided
by SSI under t hi s Agreement , and al l upgrades, revisions, f ixes, updat es or enhancement s t o any of t he f oregoing
(“ Li censed Mat eri al s” ) specif ied in t he Licensee’s purchase order or request (“ Invoice) solely on t he sof t ware and
hardware list ed in t he Licensed Mat erials manual (“Syst em Conf igurat ion” ).
Academic Inst it ut ions/ Trial Versions.
A. In t he event t hat t he Li censee qual i f i es as an academi c i nst i t ut i on user i n accordance wi t h SSI’s
specif icat ions (an “Academi c Li censee” ), t he Academic Licensee and it s f acult y, employees and st udent s may
use t he Licensed Mat erials f or t he singular purpose of eit her t eaching, t raining users or undert aking research
provi ded t hat t he Li censed Mat eri al s, and al l copi es of t he Li censed Mat eri al s, remai n at al l t i mes at t he
Academi c Li censee’s premi ses and t he Licensed Mat eri al s are used f or no ot her purpose t han t hat set f ort h
above. The above rest rict ions are in addit ion t o t he rest rict ions on use set out in Sect ion 5 below.
B. In t he event t hat t he Licensee receives a t rial version of t he Licensed Mat erials f or evaluat ion purposes, t he
t erms and condit ions of t his Agreement , excluding Sect ions 15-19, shal l cont i nue t o appl y subj ect t o t he
f ollowing provisions:
t he License pursuant t o Sect ion 1 above shall t erminat e at t he end of t he specif ied t rial period;
t he Li censee shal l ret urn t he Hardware Key t o SSI i mmedi at el y upon expi ry of t he speci f i ed t ri al peri od and i n
any event wit hin 28 days of t he expiry of t he specif ied t rial period;
in t he event t hat t he Licensee does not ret urn t he Hardware Key in accordance wit h Sect i on 2B.(b) above, SSI
shall be ent it led t o invoice t he Licensee f or and t he Licensee shall pay f or t he cost s of t he Hardware Key
plus all shipping and handling expenses and SSI administ rat ive charges; and
in t he event t hat t he Licensee elect s t o and does acquire a License, t he t erms and condit ions of t his Agreement ,
excluding Sect ion 2B herein, shall cont inue on and apply.
Ownershi p. Al l ri ght s, t i t l e and i nt erest s i n and t o t he Li censed Mat eri al s and rel at ed document at i on shal l remai n t he
sol e propert y of SSI. Licensee shall not remove or alt er any propriet ary right s not ices on t he Licensed Mat erials and
t he document at i on, and shal l reproduce such not i ces on any copi es t hat i t makes. Li censee shal l be l i abl e f or t he
securit y of t he Licensed Mat erials and t he document at ion in it s possession.
Expert i se Requi red. Licensee is responsible f or evaluat ing whet her t he Licensed Mat erials meet s Licensee’s
requirement s, and f or operat ing t he Licensed Mat erials and t he result s obt ained. The Licensed Mat erials are
int ended f or ship modeling and const ruct ion purposes only, and must be used by a person who has expert ise and
knowledge in t his f ield. The Licensed Mat erials requires independent conf irmat ion of t he reliabilit y and accuracy of
all designs, drawings and ot her Licensed Mat erials out put . An SSI represent at ive may be made available under a
separat e consul t i ng agreement , as t he Li censee’s request t o provi de t rai ni ng and consul t at i on on t he operat i on or
int egrat ion of licensed mat erials.
Limit at ions on Use.
Licensee shall:
(a) not make more copies of t he Licensed Mat erials t han are necessary f or t he Licensee’s inst allat ion of
t he Licensed Mat erials and shall only creat e backup copies f or archival or emergency rest art purposes;
(b) maint ain a log of t he number of and locat ion of all originals and copies of t he Licensed Mat erials;
(c) include SSI’s copyright , t rademark and propriet ary not ices on any complet e or part ial copies of t he
Licensed Mat erials in t he same f orm and locat ion as t he not ice on any original work;
(d) not at t empt t o def eat any copy prot ect ion;
(e) not modif y, any document at ion, including any user manuals;
(f ) not modif y, t ranslat e, reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble t he Licensed Mat erials;
(g) not subl i cense, t ransf er, assi gn, sell, loan, rent or lease t he Licensed Mat erials ot her t han as permit t ed
in t his Agreement ;
(h) use t he Licensed Mat erials f or it s own int ernal use only;
(i) not permit any t hird part y t o use t he Licensed Mat erials; and
(j) t horoughly t est any and all cust om int erf aces in accordance wit h general engineering principles.
6. Delivery and Inst allat ion. All Licensed Mat erials will be delivered in an elect ronic f ormat by media or met hod as SSI
may el ect and wi l l be sent t o t he Li censee’s desi gnat ed emai l address or shipping address as specif ied in t he
Invoice. Licensee agrees t o be responsible f or inst allat ion of t he Licensed Mat erials.
7. Term of Li cense. The License t erm commences on t he delivery of t he Licensed Mat erials t o t he Licensee, and,
subject t o Sect ion 2B above, i s ei t her perpet ual i f so request ed on t he Order, or on a mont h t o mont h rent al or
lease basis. If Licensee chooses a lease opt ion t he license convert s t o a perpet ual t erm on Licensee’s payment
of t he bal ance of t he perpet ual Li cense f ee (pri or mont hl y payment s recei vi ng 80% credi t ). Al l Li censes are
subject t o t erminat ion in accordance wit h t his Agreement .
8. Syst em Conf igurat ion. Operat ion of t he Licensed Mat erials requires use of t he specif ied Syst em Conf igurat ion, which
Licensee shall acquire and implement . SSI shall not be responsible f or any operat ional problems caused by t he
Syst em Conf igurat ion.
9. Hardware Keys. Licensed Mat erials use requires “ Hardware Keys” supplied by SSI, which can be used only at t he
sit e(s) aut horized by SSI. In t he event of a f ailure of t he Licensee’s Syst em Conf igurat ion, t he Licensee may
upon advising SSI use t he Hardware Keys and Licensed Mat erials on anot her syst em and/ or locat ion.
10. License Fees. Licensee shall pay t o SSI t he License f ees applicable f or t he Li censed Mat eri al s as set out i n and i n
accordance wit h SSI’s Invoice.
11. Servi ces. Support services af t er t he Warrant y Period (as def ined in Sect ion 15 below) are provided by SSI under t he
t erms of t he SSI Subscript ion Agreement . Inst allat ion, consult ing, t raining and implement at ion services, if
request ed by t he Licensee, shall be provided by separat e agreement and at an addit ional charge.
12. Taxes. All amount s payable by Licensee t o SSI are exclusive of all commodit y t axes, including but not limit ed t o
appl i cabl e sal es, use, val ue added, cust om dut i es, exci se t axes and ot her si mi l ar government charges, al l of
which will be paid by Li censee. If Li censee i s requi red by l aw t o wi t hhol d any t axes, t hen Li censee shal l pay SSI
a gross amount of money such t hat t he net amount received by SSI af t er deduct ing or wit hholding t he required
t axes is equal t o t he amount of t he f ee originally charged by SSI.
13. Int erest Charges. If any amount payable under t his Agreement is not paid wit hin 30 days of becoming due, SSI shal l
have t he right t o impose a charge of 2% per mont h (24% annually) on t he unpaid balance of t he amount , f rom
t he due dat e unt il t he dat e of receipt of all amount s in arrears including int erest .
14. Purchase Orders. Any purchase order (an “ Order” ) del i vered by Li censee shal l at al l t i mes be deemed t o i ncorporat e
t his Agreement by ref erence and shall be subject t o t he applicable provisions of t his Agreement . Any provisions
of an Order shall not apply and shall not be binding upon SSI unless t hey relat e t o inf ormat ion which was
request ed by SSI. In t he event of a conf l i ct or an i nconsi st ency bet ween t he provi si ons of an Order and t he
t erms and condi t i ons of t hi s Agreement , t hi s Agreement shal l govern and supersede t o t he ext ent of such
conf l ict or inconsist ency.
15. Li mi t ed Warrant y. SSI warrant s t hat during a period of 90 days f rom t he dat e of delivery of t he Licensed Mat erials t o
Licensee (t he “Warrant y Peri od” ), t he Licensed Mat erials will perf orm subst ant ially in accordance wit h t he
Licensed Mat erials document at ion specif icat ions, when used in accordance wit h t his Agreement on a properly
operat ing Syst em Conf igurat ion. SSI’s sole obligat ion under t his Warrant y, and Licensee’s exclusive remedy,
shal l be t o use reasonabl e commerci al ef f ort s t o correct Errors (a bug, def ect or ot her probl em i ncurred by a
user in operat ing t he Sof t ware t hat prevent s t he Sof t ware f rom perf orming in a manner consist ent wit h t he
applicable specif icat ions set out in t he User Manual) t hat t he Licensee ident if ies t o SSI t hrough f ixes or
workarounds f ree of charge. If SSI determines that it is unable to make the Licensed Materials perform substantially
as warranted, Licensee may terminate the License and receive a refund of a portion of the License Fees paid t o dat e.
16. WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS. THE LIMITED WARRANTY CONTAINED IN SECTION 15 IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. ALL OTHER CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES, AND REPRESENTATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE EXCLUDED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO CONDITIONS,
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES RELATING TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. SSI DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE COMPLETELY ERROR FREE OR THAT ITS
OPERATION WILL BE CONTINUOUS AND UNINTERRUPTED.
17. Maint enance Servi ces. Licensee may elect , at t he expiry of t he Warrant y Period, t o obt ain maint enance, support and
upgrade servi ces f rom SSI i n accordance wi t h and subj ect t o t he t erms of SSI’s st andard Subscri pt i on
Agreement .
18. Loss of Dat a. SSI shall not be responsible f or any loss of or damage t o f iles or dat a caused by t he Licensed
Mat erials, or be required t o rest ore or rebuild f iles or dat a. Licensee shall implement ing adequat e backup
procedures t o avoid any loss of f iles and dat a.
19. Modif icat ions. SSI may, f rom t ime t o t ime, provide t he Licensee wit h revisions t o t he Licensed Mat erials (t he
“ Revi sed Li censed Mat eri al s” ). The Li censee shal l t est any ext ernal appl i cat i ons usi ng t he revi sed API bef ore
implement ing t he new version. While it is SSI’s int ent ion t hat t he Revised Licensed Mat erials shall be backward-
compat ible wit h t he immediat ely prior version of t he Licensed Mat erials, SSI does not guarant ee or warrant t hat
t his shall be so, and SSI shall have no liabilit y what soever t o t he Licensee f or any f ailure of t he Revised Licensed
Mat erials t o be backward compat ible wit h any prior version of t he Licensed Mat erials. Modif icat ions request ed
by t he Licensee shall be subject t o prior writ t en agreement as t o scope and f ees payable. Ownership of all
Licensed Mat erials modif icat ions shall vest in SSI. SSI does not warrant , guarant ee or ot herwise commit t o
support ing Licensed Mat erials t hat has been superseded by Revised Licensed Mat erials.
20. Conf ident ial Inf ormat ion. Each part y will not use t he conf ident ial inf ormat ion of t he ot her part y f or any purpose
except f or t he purpose described in t his Agreement , and shall not disclose it t o any ot her person except on a
conf ident ial basis t o it s employees and represent at ives who have a need-to-know t he conf i dent ial inf ormat ion for
such purposes. Thi s Sect ion 23 shall not apply t o conf ident ial inf ormat ion which (a) is or has become readily
avai l abl e t o t he publ i c i n t he same f orm ot her t han by an act or omi ssi on of t he recei vi ng part y, (b) was l awf ul l y
obt ained in t he same f orm by t he receiving part y f rom a t hird part y not under an obligat ion of conf idence t o t he
di scl osi ng part y, (c) was i n t he receiving part y’s possessi on i n t he same and mat eri al f orm pri or t o i t s recei pt
f rom t he disclosing part y and did not ot herwise originat e f rom t he disclosing part y, or (d) is required t o be
disclosed by operat ion of law.
21. Terminat ion. This Agreement may be t erminat ed by eit her part y, immediat ely by writ t en not ice, if t he ot her part y
commi t s a breach of any mat eri al provision of t his Agreement , including a f ailure t o make payment when due,
and f ails t o correct or rect if y such breach wit hin 30 days of receipt of t he not ice request ing it t o do so. SSI shall
be ent it led t o place t ime-l ock devi ces and ot her di sabl i ng f eat ures in t he Licensed Mat erials t hat become
ef f ect ive in t he event t hat t he Licensee has f ailed t o comply wit h it s payment obligat ions hereunder and as set
out in SSI Invoices.
22. Ef f ect of Terminat ion. Upon t erminat ion of t his Agreement Licensee shall immediat el y cease usi ng t he Li censed
Mat erials, and wit hin 14 days of t erminat ion ret urn all Hardware Keys t o SSI.
23. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL SSI BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR PROFITS, ECONOMIC
LOSS OR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO THIS
AGREEMENT OR THE LICENSED MATERIALS, HOWEVER CAUSED, EVEN IF SSI HAD OR SHOULD HAVE HAD ANY
KNOWLEDGE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
24. DAMAGES LIMITATION. THE MAXIMUM LIABILITY OF SSI FOR ALL CLAIMS AND DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER
FOR FUNDAMENTAL BREACH OR ANY OTHER CAUSE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT, SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE
AGGREGATE TO THE TOTAL OF ALL FEES PAID BY LICENSEE.
25. LIMITATION OF NON-APPLICABILITY. IN SOME JURISDICTIONS THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES OR
LIABILITY MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE, AND IN SUCH JURISDICTIONS SSI HEREBY LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.
26. Appl i cabl e Law. This Agreement shall be subject t o and const rued in accordance wit h t he laws of the Provi nce of
Brit ish Columbia, Canada, excluding it s conf lict of laws rules and t he applicat ion of t he UN Convent ion on
Cont ract s f or t he Int ernat ional Sale of Goods.
27. Ref erences. SSI shall be allowed t o incorporat e Licensee’s name in SSI’s cust omer ref erence list and t o use it f or
market i ng.
28. Di sput e. If any di sput e ari ses under t hi s Agreement , a good f ai t h at t empt t o resol ve t he di sput e wi l l be made by
senior management of bot h part ies at a mut ually agreeable sit e and t ime. If t he part ies are unable t o reach
agreement wit hin 30 days af t er a request f or such meet ing, t he disput e shall be ref erred t o arbit rat ion in
English, bef ore one arbit rat or in Vict oria, Brit ish Columbia, Canada, in accordance wit h t he Commercial
Arbit rat ion Act of t he Brit ish Columbia.
29. Ent i re Agreement . This Agreement cont ains t he ent ire agreement bet ween t he part ies and shall supersede all prior
discussions and agreement s bet ween t he part ies regarding it s subject mat t er.
30. Amendment . Any amendment of t hi s Agreement must be i n wri t i ng and si gned by dul y aut hori zed represent at i ves of
t he part ies.
31. Waiver. The waiver by any part y of a breach by t he ot her part y of t his Agreement shall not be const rued as a waiver
by such part y of any succeeding breach by t he ot her part y of t he same or anot her provision.
32. Assignment s. Li censee may not assi gn or t ransf er t he Li cense or Li censee’s ri ght s or obl i gat i ons under t hi s
Agreement wi t hout SSI’s pri or wri t t en consent , and any such assi gnment or t ransf er wi t hout consent shal l be
null and void. A t ransf er of all or subst ant ially all of t he vot ing st ock of t he Licensee shall const it ut e a t ransf er
f or t hese purposes and shall be subject t o SSI’s prior writ t en consent .
33. Successors and Assi gns. Thi s Agreement wi l l bi nd and enure t o t he benef i t of t he part i es and t hei r respect i ve
successors and permit t ed assigns.
34. Severabilit y. In t he event t hat any provi si on of t hi s Agreement i s decl ared i nval i d, i l l egal or unenf orceabl e by a court
having jurisdict ion, t hen t he remaining provisions shall cont inue in f ull f orce and ef f ect .
35. Force Majeure. Except as relat ed t o Licensee’s obligat ion t o make payment s t o SSI, neit her part y shall be liable f or
delays or non-perf ormance if such delays or non-perf ormance are beyond such part y' s reasonable cont rol. A
del ayed part y shal l prompt l y not i f y t he ot her part y i n wri t i ng st at i ng t he cause of t he del ay and i t s expect ed
durat ion and shall use commercially reasonable ef f ort s t o remedy a delay or non-perf ormance as soon as
reasonably possible.
36. Survi val. The provisions of Sect ions 0, 5, 10, 12, 13, 16 and 18-28 shall survive t he expiry or t erminat ion of t his
Agreement .
37. Language. It is t he express will of t he part ies t hat t his Agreement and relat ed document s have been prepared in
Engl i sh. C’est l a vol ont é expresse des part i es que l a présent e Convent i on ai nsi que l es document s qui s’y
rat t achent soient rédiges en anglais.
#363338
28/05/2010
Cont ent s
i
Cont ent s
SHIPCONSTRUCTOR LICENSE AGREEMENT......................................................................................................................... ii
Shi pConst ruct or 1
Get t i ng St art ed 7
St art ShipConst ruct or ...............................................................................................................................................................7
ShipConst ruct or CUI Files ........................................................................................................................................................7
Check Your Syst em Font..........................................................................................................................................................8
Open a Project ........................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Get Licenses ........................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Re-Login t o ShipConst ruct or ................................................................................................................................................ 14
Reload a Project Dat abase .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Change Your Password ......................................................................................................................................................... 14
Drawi ngs 15
Open a Drawing...................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Creat e a Drawing ................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Lock or Unlock a Drawing..................................................................................................................................................... 16
Rename a Drawing................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Delet e a Drawing ................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Save a Drawing ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Cl osi ng a Drawi ng.................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Set Up Composit e Drawings................................................................................................................................................. 17
Insert (Link) a Drawing int o Anot her Drawing................................................................................................................... 18
Conf iguring Viewport Dependant Display Opt ions............................................................................................................ 19
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs 20
Export To Dwg......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Export Drawi ngs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Object Enabler ........................................................................................................................................................................ 24
Vi ews........................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
Windows and Edit ors............................................................................................................................................................. 25
St ruct ure 27
St ruct ural Desi gn Workf l ow..............................................................................................................................27
St ruct ure Li brary Set up 29
Cont ent s
i i
Overvi ew ..............................................................................................................................................................29
Suppl i ed Li brari es.................................................................................................................................................................. 29
Cat alog Set up Workf low....................................................................................................................................29
Proj ect Set t i ngs ..................................................................................................................................................29
Set Proj ect Set t i ngs............................................................................................................................................................... 29
Import Proj ect Set t i ngs......................................................................................................................................................... 30
Export Proj ect Set t i ngs.......................................................................................................................................................... 30
User Permi ssi ons................................................................................................................................................30
Mat eri al s..............................................................................................................................................................31
Creat e a Mat erial ................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Creat e a Grade ....................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Rename a Mat erial or Grade ............................................................................................................................................... 32
Import Mat erials and Grades............................................................................................................................................... 32
Export Mat erials and Grades................................................................................................................................................ 32
Delet e a Mat erial or Grade................................................................................................................................................... 33
View Mat erial Usage.............................................................................................................................................................. 33
Manuf act urers.....................................................................................................................................................34
Creat e a Manuf act urer .......................................................................................................................................................... 34
View Manuf act urers Usage................................................................................................................................................... 34
Fi ni shes................................................................................................................................................................35
Creat e a Finish Type .............................................................................................................................................................. 35
Creat e a Finish ....................................................................................................................................................................... 35
Rename a Finish or Finish Type .......................................................................................................................................... 36
Import Finishes and Finish Types........................................................................................................................................ 36
Export Finishes and Finish Types ........................................................................................................................................ 36
Delet e a Finish or Finish Type.............................................................................................................................................. 36
Insul at i on .............................................................................................................................................................36
Text St yl es ...........................................................................................................................................................36
Creat e a Text St yl e................................................................................................................................................................. 37
Del et e a Text St yl e................................................................................................................................................................. 37
Accessory Packages ..........................................................................................................................................37
Nami ng Convent ions..........................................................................................................................................37
Naming Convent ions Window.............................................................................................................................................. 38
Act ivat e a Naming Convent ion ............................................................................................................................................ 42
Rename a Naming Convent ion ........................................................................................................................................... 42
Delet e a Naming Convent ion ............................................................................................................................................... 42
Managing Aliases................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Generat ing Names in Groups............................................................................................................................................... 43
Nami ng Convent i on Concept s..........................................................................................................................44
Dat abase El ement s............................................................................................................................................45
Label St yl es .........................................................................................................................................................46
Add a Label St yle ................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Cont ent s
i i i
Di mensi on St yl es................................................................................................................................................47
Add a Dimension St yle.......................................................................................................................................................... 47
Bi l l of Mat eri al s...................................................................................................................................................47
BOM Funct ionalit y Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 47
BOM Def i ni t i ons Manager .................................................................................................................................49
Predef ined Assembly Format ...........................................................................................................................51
User-Def ined At t ribut es .....................................................................................................................................51
Creat e a User-Def ined At t ribut e .......................................................................................................................................... 51
Assi gn a User-Def ined At t ribut e t o a Part or St ock .......................................................................................................... 52
Def ault Values on Required User-Def ined At t ribut es....................................................................................................... 53
Import a User-Def ined At t ribut e .......................................................................................................................................... 53
St ock Cat al og......................................................................................................................................................53
Creat e a St ock ........................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Edit a St ock ............................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Creat e a Prof i l e St ock Shape............................................................................................................................................... 56
Edi t a Prof i l e St ock Shape.................................................................................................................................................... 66
Creat e a Cut out Type............................................................................................................................................................. 66
Creat e a Cut out ...................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Vi ew Cut out Usage................................................................................................................................................................. 68
Import St ocks ......................................................................................................................................................................... 69
Export St ocks.......................................................................................................................................................................... 69
View St ock Usage................................................................................................................................................................... 69
Pi ecemark St yl es................................................................................................................................................70
Creat e a Pi ecemark St yl e..................................................................................................................................................... 70
Edit Piecemark St yle ............................................................................................................................................................. 71
Act ivat e a Piecemark St yle .................................................................................................................................................. 71
View Piecemark Usage ......................................................................................................................................................... 72
Ori ent at i on Icon ..................................................................................................................................................72
Markl i ne St yl es ...................................................................................................................................................73
Creat e a Markline St yle ........................................................................................................................................................ 73
View Markline St yle Usage ................................................................................................................................................... 74
Set Up Markline Symbols ..................................................................................................................................................... 74
Assign Markline St yles.......................................................................................................................................................... 77
Fl ange Cat al og....................................................................................................................................................79
Creat e a Flange St andard..................................................................................................................................................... 79
Edit a Flange........................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Delet e a Flange ...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Import Flanges ....................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Export Flanges........................................................................................................................................................................ 80
View Flange Usage................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Corner Treat ment s .............................................................................................................................................81
Creat e a Corner Treat ment .................................................................................................................................................. 81
Delet e a Corner Treat ment................................................................................................................................................... 82
Vi ew Corner Treat ment Usage ............................................................................................................................................. 82
Cont ent s
i v
Pl at e Green St andards ......................................................................................................................................83
Creat e a Plat e Green St andard ........................................................................................................................................... 83
View Plat e Green St andard Usage ...................................................................................................................................... 84
Bevel St andards .................................................................................................................................................85
Creat e a Bevel St andard....................................................................................................................................................... 85
View Bevel St andard Usage ................................................................................................................................................. 86
Aut omat i c Bevel s ...............................................................................................................................................88
NC Machi nes .......................................................................................................................................................90
Creat e an NC Machine .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Edit an NC Machine ............................................................................................................................................................... 90
Delet e an NC Machine .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Import NC Machines.............................................................................................................................................................. 91
Export NC Machines .............................................................................................................................................................. 91
View NC Machine Usage ....................................................................................................................................................... 91
Endcut s ................................................................................................................................................................92
Creat e an Endcut ................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Delet e an Endcut ................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Import Endcut s....................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Export Endcut s........................................................................................................................................................................ 94
View Endcut Usage ................................................................................................................................................................ 94
Prof ile Green St andards....................................................................................................................................95
Creat e a Prof ile Green St andard ......................................................................................................................................... 95
View Prof ile Green St andard Usage.................................................................................................................................... 96
St andard Part s Def i ni t i on .................................................................................................................................97
Set Up St andard Part Types ................................................................................................................................................. 97
Creat e a St andard Part ......................................................................................................................................................... 98
Edit a St andard Part .............................................................................................................................................................. 99
Rename a St andard Part ...................................................................................................................................................... 99
View St andard Part Usage.................................................................................................................................................... 99
Common Part s Cat alog (CPC) ....................................................................................................................... 100
Make a Project a CPC Project ............................................................................................................................................100
Associat e a CPC Project wit h Anot her CPC Project ........................................................................................................101
Import a St ock f rom t he CPC.............................................................................................................................................102
Di spl ay CPC St ock Propert i es ............................................................................................................................................102
Associat e a St ock wit h a Dif f erent CPC St ock ................................................................................................................103
Drawi ng Templ at es ......................................................................................................................................... 104
Insert Empt y BOM Wizard .............................................................................................................................. 105
St ruct ure Set up 107
Import a Hull Model ........................................................................................................................................ 107
Use a Hull Model f rom t he Hull Module ...........................................................................................................................107
Unit Set up ......................................................................................................................................................... 107
Creat e Uni t s ..........................................................................................................................................................................107
Cont ent s
v
Del et e Uni t s ..........................................................................................................................................................................108
Product Hi erarchi es ........................................................................................................................................ 108
Set t i ng Up Mul t i pl e Product Hi erarchi es...................................................................................................... 109
Set Up Product Hierarchy Drawings..................................................................................................................................111
Set Up Assembly Levels......................................................................................................................................................115
Set Up User-Def i ned At t ribut es..........................................................................................................................................116
Set Up Assemblies...............................................................................................................................................................118
Assign Part s, Spools, or Assemblies t o Assemblies.......................................................................................................121
Find, Zoom, Remove, Hide, and Show Part s ...................................................................................................................123
Renaming Part s ...................................................................................................................................................................124
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s 125
Import a Hull Model f rom ShipCAM.............................................................................................................. 125
Pl anar Groups .................................................................................................................................................. 125
Creat e a Planar Group Drawing Templat e.......................................................................................................................126
Creat e Planar Group Drawings ..........................................................................................................................................126
Creat e Curved Model Drawings .........................................................................................................................................131
Edit Planar Group Propert ies .............................................................................................................................................132
Del et e a Pl anar Group.........................................................................................................................................................132
Transf er Object s f rom One Planar Group Drawing t o Anot her .....................................................................................132
Transf er Object s f rom a Unit Drawing t o a Planar Group Drawing ..............................................................................133
Creat e a UCS Out of Plane wit h t he Current UCS............................................................................................................135
Creat e a UCS Parallel t o t he Current UCS........................................................................................................................136
Act ivat e a UCS......................................................................................................................................................................137
Select a UCS Viewpoint .......................................................................................................................................................138
Undo.......................................................................................................................................................................................139
St ruct ural Model i ng Layers............................................................................................................................ 139
Act ivat e a Layer ...................................................................................................................................................................139
Deact ivat e a Layer ...............................................................................................................................................................140
Copy Object s f rom One Layer t o Anot her.........................................................................................................................140
Move Object s f rom One Layer t o Anot her ........................................................................................................................140
Obj ect Di spl ay .................................................................................................................................................. 140
Hide or Show Object s ..........................................................................................................................................................140
Display Object s in Wiref rame, Hidden Line, or Shaded Mode......................................................................................141
Display Inf ormat ion f or an Object wit hin an MLinked Drawing....................................................................................141
Export a Shi pConst ruct or Drawing t o an Aut oCAD only Drawing ............................................................ 141
Model St ruct ure 143
DDROM Best Pract i ces................................................................................................................................... 144
Concept ual Design St age ...................................................................................................................................................144
Maxi mi ze DDROM Ef f ect iveness (Relat ionship Management ) ....................................................................................144
Const ruct ion Line Management ........................................................................................................................................146
General Use Tips ..................................................................................................................................................................147
St ruct ural Model i ng......................................................................................................................................... 147
Cont ent s
vi
Dat abase...............................................................................................................................................................................147
3D Unit Drawings .................................................................................................................................................................147
Const ruct ion Lines...............................................................................................................................................................147
St ruct ure Part Relat ionships..............................................................................................................................................151
Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s .............................................................................................................................153
Mark Group Int ersect ions...................................................................................................................................................153
Pl at e Part s........................................................................................................................................................ 154
Plat e Part Creat ion ..............................................................................................................................................................154
Copy a Plat e..........................................................................................................................................................................155
Mirror a Plat e........................................................................................................................................................................156
Move a Plat e.........................................................................................................................................................................156
Det ail a Plat e........................................................................................................................................................................156
St i f f eners .......................................................................................................................................................... 163
St if f ener Creat ion.................................................................................................................................................................163
St if f ener Edit .........................................................................................................................................................................165
St if f ener Trimming ..............................................................................................................................................................165
St if f ener Cut out s..................................................................................................................................................................166
St if f ener At t ach t o Plat e Part ............................................................................................................................................169
St if f ener Moldline ................................................................................................................................................................169
St if f ener Moving...................................................................................................................................................................170
Twi st ed St i f f eners............................................................................................................................................ 170
Twist ed St if f ener Edit ..........................................................................................................................................................171
Twist ed St if f ener Trimming................................................................................................................................................172
Twist ed St if f ener Cut out s ...................................................................................................................................................172
Twist ed St if f ener Moldline..................................................................................................................................................172
Twist ed St if f ener Moving ....................................................................................................................................................172
Twist ed St if f ener Clean Geomet ry ....................................................................................................................................172
Facepl at es ........................................................................................................................................................ 173
Faceplat e Creat ion ..............................................................................................................................................................173
Faceplat e Edit .......................................................................................................................................................................174
Faceplat e Trimming ............................................................................................................................................................174
Faceplat e Cut out s................................................................................................................................................................174
Faceplat e Moldline ..............................................................................................................................................................174
Faceplat e Moving.................................................................................................................................................................175
Corrugat ed Pl at es............................................................................................................................................ 175
Corrugat ed Plat e Creat ion..................................................................................................................................................175
Corrugat ed Plat e Edit ..........................................................................................................................................................179
Curved Pl at es ................................................................................................................................................... 179
Curved Plat e Creat ion .........................................................................................................................................................179
Curved Plat e Edit .................................................................................................................................................................183
Curved Plat e Product ion Inf ormat ion ...............................................................................................................................184
Pl anks ............................................................................................................................................................... 184
Planks Creat ion....................................................................................................................................................................185
Planks Edit ............................................................................................................................................................................186
Adding and Removing Cut Lines t o a Plank Collect ion .................................................................................................187
Split t ing Plank Collect ions .................................................................................................................................................188
Delet ing Plank Collect ions .................................................................................................................................................188
Cont ent s
vi i
St andard Part s................................................................................................................................................. 188
St andard Bracket s At t ached t o St i f f eners .................................................................................................. 188
Mi rror Part s ...................................................................................................................................................... 190
Mirror Part s About t he Cent erline .....................................................................................................................................190
Mirror Cat amaran Hulls ......................................................................................................................................................190
Pi ecemarks ...................................................................................................................................................... 190
Changing a Piecemark Size ...............................................................................................................................................190
Change a Piecemark Posit ion ...........................................................................................................................................191
Part User-Def ined At t ribut es.......................................................................................................................... 191
Check Int erf erences........................................................................................................................................ 192
Creat e an Int erf erence Drawing ........................................................................................................................................193
Checking Int erf erences.......................................................................................................................................................193
Check Local Int erf erences..................................................................................................................................................195
Repl i cat e Obj ect s t o Ot her Pl anar Groups .................................................................................................. 196
Transf er Obj ect s t o anot her Pl anar Group................................................................................................... 196
Miscellaneous Geomet ry Tasks .................................................................................................................... 197
Insert a Label or Dimension From a Point t o a St ruct ural Group.................................................................................197
Tool pat h ................................................................................................................................................................................198
Dihedral Angle......................................................................................................................................................................199
Convert a 3D Object t o a 2D Object ..................................................................................................................................200
Project Shapes .....................................................................................................................................................................200
Reduce t he Number of Vert ices on Polylines..................................................................................................................200
Convert an Ellipse or Spline t o a Polyline ........................................................................................................................201
Set Up Snapping ..................................................................................................................................................................201
Inval i d Part s ..................................................................................................................................................... 202
Check St ruct ure 204
Check Product Hi erarchy................................................................................................................................ 204
Check a Unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 204
Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs ........................................................................................................... 205
Fl yThrough 206
St art Fl yThrough .............................................................................................................................................. 207
Approval Drawi ngs 209
Creat e an Approval Drawing Templat e ............................................................................................................................209
Creat e an Approval Drawing ..............................................................................................................................................210
Insert a Planar Group int o an Approval Drawing ............................................................................................................210
Save a Bound Approval Drawing.......................................................................................................................................211
Cont ent s
vi i i
Assembl y Drawi ngs 212
Set Up Assembl y Drawi ngs............................................................................................................................ 213
Set Up an Assembly Drawing Templat e...........................................................................................................................213
Rel abel Al l .............................................................................................................................................................................216
Relabel f rom a select ed BOM............................................................................................................................................217
Rel abel f rom Part s ..............................................................................................................................................................217
Set Up an Assembly Drawing BOM St yle .........................................................................................................................217
Select Predef ined Templat es.............................................................................................................................................218
Generat e Assembl y Drawi ngs ....................................................................................................................... 218
Set Up t he Keymap Drawing..............................................................................................................................................218
Generat ing Assembly Drawings ........................................................................................................................................219
Edit Assembly Drawings................................................................................................................................. 223
Updat e Part s in an Assembly Drawing.............................................................................................................................223
Insert Keywords int o an Assembly Drawing ....................................................................................................................225
Updat e All Keywords ...........................................................................................................................................................225
BOM Tables...........................................................................................................................................................................226
Updat e BOMs........................................................................................................................................................................228
Edit BOM Collect or Opt ions ................................................................................................................................................228
Viewport Display Opt ions....................................................................................................................................................229
List only Visible.....................................................................................................................................................................229
Insert a Weld Symbol Table int o an Assembly Drawing................................................................................................229
Updat e Weld Symbol Tables in an Assembly Drawing ..................................................................................................229
Insert an Orient at ion Icon int o an Assembly Drawing ...................................................................................................230
Mark an Assembly’s CG Posit ion in an Assembly Drawing...........................................................................................231
Change t he View in an Assembly Drawing ......................................................................................................................231
Rot at e an Assembly in an Assembly Drawing ................................................................................................................231
Insert a Qualit y Cont rol Mat rix int o an Assembly Drawing............................................................................................231
Manual Labeling f rom BOM ...............................................................................................................................................232
Pl ot Assembl y Drawi ngs................................................................................................................................. 233
Plot an Assembly Drawing .................................................................................................................................................233
Inspect a Plot t ed Assembly Drawing................................................................................................................................233
Pl at e Nest i ng 233
Nest i ng Set up................................................................................................................................................... 234
Set Up Nest Opt ions and Colors.........................................................................................................................................234
Set Up a Nest Naming Convent ion....................................................................................................................................234
Set Up NC Machines f or Nest ing .......................................................................................................................................235
Set Up St ocks f or Nest ing...................................................................................................................................................235
Set Up a Nest BOM Def init ion............................................................................................................................................235
Set Up Nest Templat es .......................................................................................................................................................235
Set Up Nest Drawings and Nest s .................................................................................................................. 238
Creat e a Nest Folder............................................................................................................................................................238
Creat e a Nest Drawing........................................................................................................................................................239
Re-creat e a Nest Drawing...................................................................................................................................................239
Insert a Nest int o a Nest Drawing .....................................................................................................................................240
Insert Part s int o a Nest .......................................................................................................................................................241
Remove Part s f rom a Nest .................................................................................................................................................252
Cont ent s
i x
Re-nest a Nest ......................................................................................................................................................................252
Updat ing Part s in a Nest .....................................................................................................................................................253
Assign or Unassign Part s t o a Nest ...................................................................................................................................254
Slide a Part Along a Plat e Edge or Part Edge..................................................................................................................255
Move or Rot at e Part s wit hin a Nest ..................................................................................................................................257
Finding Part s in a Nest Drawing........................................................................................................................................257
Labelling Part s .....................................................................................................................................................................258
List Un-nest ed Part s in an Assembly ................................................................................................................................258
Posit ion Part s Next t o each ot her .....................................................................................................................................259
Hide or Show Nest ed Part s, Revised Part s, or NC Cut t ing Pat hs .................................................................................260
Insert Keywords int o a Nest ...............................................................................................................................................261
Edit t he St ock Plat e of a Nest ............................................................................................................................................261
Del et e a Nest ........................................................................................................................................................................261
Fi nd a Nest ............................................................................................................................................................................261
Set Up Bri dges ................................................................................................................................................. 262
Assign t o NC-Machine .........................................................................................................................................................264
Insert a Bri dge ......................................................................................................................................................................264
Delet e Bridges......................................................................................................................................................................265
Set Up Remnant s ............................................................................................................................................ 265
Creat e a Remnant ...............................................................................................................................................................265
Edit a Remnant ....................................................................................................................................................................267
Delet e a Remnant ...............................................................................................................................................................268
Check and Fi x Nest s........................................................................................................................................ 268
Check Nest Drawings f or Errors and Un-nest ed Part s....................................................................................................268
Updat e Nest Keywords and BOMs.....................................................................................................................................269
Check Nest s f or Collisions..................................................................................................................................................269
Re-i nsert Part s Int o a Nest .................................................................................................................................................270
Generat e NC Code f or Nest s.......................................................................................................................... 270
Export Nest s t o NC-Pyros ....................................................................................................................................................270
Generat e NC Code f or Nest s ..............................................................................................................................................272
Export Part s t o Individual Drawings..................................................................................................................................272
Import Cut t ing Pat hs Int o Nest s........................................................................................................................................272
Updat e Nest BOMs...............................................................................................................................................................273
Pl ot Nest s ......................................................................................................................................................... 273
Generat e Nest Report s................................................................................................................................... 274
Prepare Work Package .................................................................................................................................. 274
Prof i l e Pl ot s 274
Set Up Prof ile Plot Templat es ....................................................................................................................... 276
Prof ile Plot Drawing Templat e...........................................................................................................................................276
Prof ile Sheet Templat e .......................................................................................................................................................276
Prof ile Plot Templat e ..........................................................................................................................................................277
Creat e a Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng........................................................................................................................ 279
Set Up Prof ile Plot s ......................................................................................................................................... 280
Cont ent s
x
Insert Prof ile Plot s Int o a Prof ile Plot Drawing........................................................................................... 281
Updat ing Prof ile Plot s..................................................................................................................................... 283
Zoom Int o a Prof ile Plot wit hin a Prof ile Plot Drawing.............................................................................. 284
Print Prof ile Plot s ............................................................................................................................................ 284
Check Prof i l e Pl ot s.......................................................................................................................................... 284
Updat e Prof ile Plot BOMs............................................................................................................................... 285
Prof i l e Nest i ng 285
Set Up Prof ile St ocks ...................................................................................................................................... 285
Sel ect an Assembl y and St ock f or Prof i l e Nest i ng..................................................................................... 285
Creat e or Delet e Prof ile Nest s or Remnant s............................................................................................... 287
Creat e Empt y Prof ile Nest s or Remnant s........................................................................................................................287
Delet e a Prof ile Nest or Remnant .....................................................................................................................................288
Add and Remove Part s t o and f rom Prof i l e Nest s..................................................................................... 289
Manually Add Part s t o Prof ile Nest s.................................................................................................................................289
Aut omat ically Creat e Prof ile Nest s f or Select ed Part s..................................................................................................290
Remove Part s From Prof ile Nest s.....................................................................................................................................291
Changing Part s and St ocks and Checking Prof ile Nest s........................................................................... 291
Issue and Un-issue Prof ile Nest s................................................................................................................... 292
Issue Prof ile Nest s...............................................................................................................................................................292
Un-issue Prof ile Nest s .........................................................................................................................................................293
Generat e Prof ile Nest Report s ...................................................................................................................... 293
Generat e a Summary Report or Det ailed Report ...........................................................................................................294
Generat e a St ock Usage Report ........................................................................................................................................294
Set Prof ile Nest s t o Cut or Un-cut ................................................................................................................. 295
Set Prof ile Nest s t o Cut .......................................................................................................................................................295
Set Prof ile Nest s t o Un-cut .................................................................................................................................................296
Part Propert y Label s 296
Placing Field Labels.............................................................................................................................................................297
Copying Field Labels............................................................................................................................................................297
Leader Di st ri but i on Li nes 298
Set Leader Insert ion Mode .................................................................................................................................................302
Export To Dwg 302
Export i ng usi ng t he Graphi c User Int erf ace................................................................................................. 302
Command Li ne Export .................................................................................................................................... 304
Cont ent s
xi
Command Prompt ...............................................................................................................................................................305
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands 309
Manager Menus............................................................................................................................................... 309
St ruct ure Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 323
St ruct ure > Prof iles > Endcut Catal og ..............................................................................................................................339
Tool bars ............................................................................................................................................................ 343
Equipment Toolbar ..............................................................................................................................................................343
Hull Toolbar...........................................................................................................................................................................343
Hull Curve Toolbar................................................................................................................................................................343
Hull Expand Toolbar.............................................................................................................................................................343
Hull Pin Jig Toolbar ..............................................................................................................................................................344
Hull Porcupine Toolbar........................................................................................................................................................344
Hull St ringer Toolbar............................................................................................................................................................344
Hull Surf ace Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................344
Labels Toolbar ......................................................................................................................................................................344
Penet rat ions Toolbar ...........................................................................................................................................................344
ShipConst ruct or Toolbar .....................................................................................................................................................344
St ruct ural Tools Toolbar ......................................................................................................................................................344
St ruct ure Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................344
St ruct ure Plat e Flyout .........................................................................................................................................................345
St ruct ure Flange Plat e Flyout ............................................................................................................................................345
St ruct ure Green Flyout ........................................................................................................................................................345
St ruct ure Part Object s Flyout .............................................................................................................................................345
St ruct ure Corner Treat ment Flyout ...................................................................................................................................346
St ruct ure St if f ener Flyout ...................................................................................................................................................346
St ruct ure Faceplat e Flyout .................................................................................................................................................347
St ruct ure Display Toolbar ...................................................................................................................................................347
Ut ilit ies Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................................................347
Layers Flyout.........................................................................................................................................................................347
Shi pConst ruct or Menu .................................................................................................................................... 348
ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or ..............................................................................................................................................348
ShipConst ruct or > Manager ...............................................................................................................................................362
ShipConst ruct or > Project > New Project ........................................................................................................................362
ShipConst ruct or > Project > Copy Project........................................................................................................................362
ShipConst ruct or > Model Link ...........................................................................................................................................362
ShipConst ruct or > Planar Group > Transf er Object s t o Group......................................................................................363
ShipConst ruct or > Penet rat ion Manager .........................................................................................................................363
ShipConst ruct or > Check > Check Project .......................................................................................................................364
ShipConst ruct or > Check > Check Unit ............................................................................................................................364
ShipConst ruct or > Check > Check Templat es.................................................................................................................364
ShipConst ruct or > Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs ..............................................................................................365
ShipConst ruct or > Product Hierarchy ...............................................................................................................................365
ShipConst ruct or > Prof ile Nest ing.....................................................................................................................................365
ShipConst ruct or > Revisions..............................................................................................................................................367
ShipConst ruct or > FlyThrough ...........................................................................................................................................369
ShipConst ruct or > Licensing ..............................................................................................................................................369
ShipConst ruct or > ShipConst ruct or Help >......................................................................................................................372
ShipConst ruct or > About ShipConst ruct or .......................................................................................................................372
Cont ent s
xi i
SC St ruct ure Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 372
SC St ruct ure > Mark Group Int ersect ions ........................................................................................................................372
SC St ruct ure > Show / Hide Opt ions.................................................................................................................................373
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > New................................................................................................................................................376
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit.................................................................................................................................................379
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Flange ...................................................................................................................................380
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Flange....................................................................................................................................381
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Green.....................................................................................................................................382
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Green.....................................................................................................................................382
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Object s..................................................................................................................................383
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Remove Object s ..........................................................................................................................385
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Cut out s….......................................................................................................................385
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Corner Treat ment > Insert .........................................................................................................386
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Corner Treat ment > Remove.....................................................................................................387
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Corner Treat ment > Display ......................................................................................................387
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Bevel > Creat e .............................................................................................................................388
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Bevel > Edit ..................................................................................................................................388
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Bevel > Remove ..........................................................................................................................388
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Dat um Lines .................................................................................................................389
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Weld Shrinkage Icon ...................................................................................................389
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Invalid Boundary Diagnost ic......................................................................................................390
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New .........................................................................................................................................391
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New f rom Point s....................................................................................................................393
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Edit ..........................................................................................................................................393
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > At t ach t o Plat e.......................................................................................................................393
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New Twist ed...........................................................................................................................394
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Edit Twist ed............................................................................................................................395
SC Struct ure > St if f ener > Clean Geomet ry of Twist ed .................................................................................................395
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Insert .......................................................................................................................395
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Edit ..........................................................................................................................396
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Trim .........................................................................................................................................397
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Insert Weld Seam Relief s ....................................................................................................398
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Ext ract Neut ral Axis ..............................................................................................................398
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Ext ract Mold Line...................................................................................................................399
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > New .......................................................................................................................................399
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Edit ........................................................................................................................................400
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Copy and Rot at e 180 .........................................................................................................401
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Cut out > Insert .....................................................................................................................401
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Cut out > Edit ........................................................................................................................401
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Trim .......................................................................................................................................401
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Ext ract Neut ral Axis ............................................................................................................402
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Ext ract Mol d Li ne ................................................................................................................402
SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > New...........................................................................................................................402
SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > Edit ............................................................................................................................404
SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > Ext ract Cross-sect ion..............................................................................................404
SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > New ..................................................................................................................................405
SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Edit ...................................................................................................................................406
SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Def ine New Out er Toolpat h ..........................................................................................407
SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Ext ract Product ion Inf o .................................................................................................407
SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Import Curved Plat e From Rhino.................................................................................407
SC St ruct ure > Planks > New.............................................................................................................................................407
SC St ruct ure > Planks > Edit Collect ion ...........................................................................................................................409
SC St ruct ure > Planks > Split Plank Collect ion...............................................................................................................409
Cont ent s
xi i i
SC St ruct ure > Planks > Delet e Plank Collect ion ...........................................................................................................409
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edit ................................................................................................................................................409
SC St ruct ure > Part s > List .................................................................................................................................................410
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Find................................................................................................................................................411
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Relat ionships ...............................................................................................................................411
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Inf ormat ion ..................................................................................................................................412
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edit Component ...........................................................................................................................414
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Ext ract Component s ...................................................................................................................417
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Add Manual Cut out s ...................................................................................................................417
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Boundary Diagnost ic ..................................................................................................................418
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Inf ormat ion.............................................................................................................418
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Relat ionships .........................................................................................................419
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Convert t o User Const ruct ion Line ......................................................................420
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Edit Of f set ...............................................................................................................420
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Swap Const ruct ion Line........................................................................................420
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Replace Hull Trace ................................................................................................421
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Add Bevel Angles...................................................................................................421
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Show Bevel Angles................................................................................................422
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Hide Bevel Angles..................................................................................................422
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Clear Bevel Angles….............................................................................................423
SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part …..............................................................................................................................423
SC St ruct ure > Convert To St ruct ure Part ........................................................................................................................423
SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part at St if f ener….........................................................................................................423
SC St ruct ure > Transf er Object s To Group .......................................................................................................................427
SC St ruct ure > Move Planar Group ...................................................................................................................................427
SC St ruct ure > Replicat e Object s t o Ot her Group...........................................................................................................427
SC St ruct ure > Check Group DWG....................................................................................................................................428
SC St ruct ure > Show Unused Object s...............................................................................................................................429
SC Ut i l i t i es Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 429
SC Ut ilit ies > 3D Viewpoint .................................................................................................................................................429
SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS..................................................................................................................................................429
SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS X ..........................................................................................................................................431
SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS Y...........................................................................................................................................431
SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Swap UCS XY Axis ............................................................................................................................432
SC Ut ilit ies > Hide Object s..................................................................................................................................................432
SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide Object s..............................................................................................................................................432
SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide All Object s........................................................................................................................................432
SC Ut ilit ies > Clip Current View..........................................................................................................................................433
SC Ut ilit ies > Remove Clip..................................................................................................................................................434
SC Ut ilit ies > 3D t o 2D ........................................................................................................................................................435
SC Ut ilit ies > Ort hographic Project ion ..............................................................................................................................436
SC Ut ilit ies > Remove Vert ices Below Tolerance ............................................................................................................436
SC Ut ilit ies > Convert Ellipse/ Spline t o Polyline .............................................................................................................437
SC Ut i l it ies > Layer > Act ivat e............................................................................................................................................437
SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Deact ivat e .......................................................................................................................................437
SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Copy Geomet ry t o ..........................................................................................................................438
SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Move Geomet ry t o .........................................................................................................................438
SC Ut ilit ies > Toolpat h.........................................................................................................................................................438
SC Ut ilit ies > Fillet ................................................................................................................................................................439
SC Ut ilit ies > Mirror about Cent erline...............................................................................................................................439
SC Ut ilit ies > Dihedral Angle ..............................................................................................................................................439
SC Ut ilit ies > Reload Drawing ............................................................................................................................................440
Cont ent s
xi v
SC Ut ilit ies > Creat e Qualit y Mat rix...................................................................................................................................440
SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Propert y Label ..............................................................................................................443
SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Copy Field Label ...........................................................................................................443
SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Copy Field Label Quick ................................................................................................443
SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Edit Field Label .............................................................................................................443
SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Replace Object Ref erences........................................................................................443
SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Set Single Click Field Label ........................................................................................444
SC Ut ilit ies > List It em wit hin Block/ Xref .........................................................................................................................444
SC Ut ilit ies > Check Local Int erf erences ..........................................................................................................................444
SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o DWG…............................................................................................................................444
SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o NWD...............................................................................................................................445
SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o NWC...............................................................................................................................445
SC Ut ilit ies > Snap ...............................................................................................................................................................445
SC Ut ilit ies > Random Color ...............................................................................................................................................445
SC Ut ilit ies > ShipCAM > Import Files ..............................................................................................................................446
SC Ut ilit ies > ShipCAM > Convert IGES t o Mesh .............................................................................................................446
Command Line Commands........................................................................................................................... 446
Plat e Part Ext ract Polyline..................................................................................................................................................446
Creat e Boundary Polyline ...................................................................................................................................................446
Creat e Boundary Polyline Debug.......................................................................................................................................447
Creat e Boundary Polyline f rom Out side Pickpoint .........................................................................................................447
Show Plat e Part Const ruct ion Lines .................................................................................................................................447
Hide Plat e Part Const ruct ion Lines...................................................................................................................................447
Show Plat e Part Const ruct ion Lines Only.........................................................................................................................447
Show Plat e Part and It s Const ruct ion Lines Only ...........................................................................................................448
Show Ext ended Dat a ...........................................................................................................................................................448
Fix Ident ical Part Names ....................................................................................................................................................448
Clean Geomet ry of all Twist ed St if f eners.........................................................................................................................448
Di agnost i c Commands ................................................................................................................................... 449
Command Trace - Enable ...................................................................................................................................................449
Command Trace - Di sabl e ..................................................................................................................................................449
Debug Trace - Enable ..........................................................................................................................................................449
Debug Trace - Log ................................................................................................................................................................449
Debug Trace - Disable .........................................................................................................................................................450
Perf ormance Monit or - St art ..............................................................................................................................................450
Perf ormance Monit or - End ................................................................................................................................................450
Perf ormance Monit or - Di spl ay..........................................................................................................................................450
Save St ruct ure Drawing St at e............................................................................................................................................450
Load St ruct ure Drawing St at e f rom File...........................................................................................................................451
Dat aManager Dump............................................................................................................................................................451
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence 453
Tool bars ............................................................................................................................................................ 453
Assembly Toolbar ................................................................................................................................................................453
Leader Ut ils Toolbar (page Error! Bookmark not def ined.) ...........................................................................................453
Nest Toolbar..........................................................................................................................................................................454
Ribbon Tabs (page 1)...................................................................................................................................... 454
Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s Tab..................................................................................................................................................454
St ruct ure Product ion Tab....................................................................................................................................................458
Cont ent s
xv
Dist ribut ed Syst ems Product ion Tab ................................................................................................................................460
SC Approval Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 463
SC Approval > Insert Group................................................................................................................................................463
SC Approval > Save As Bound Approval...........................................................................................................................464
SC Assembl y Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 464
SC Assembly > Updat e Drawing........................................................................................................................................465
SC Assembly > Orient at ion Icon ........................................................................................................................................465
SC Assembly > CG Point .....................................................................................................................................................466
SC Assembly > Insert Keywords........................................................................................................................................466
SC Assembly > Updat e All Keywords................................................................................................................................467
SC Assembly > St ruct ure Drawing Opt ions......................................................................................................................467
SC Assembly > Pipe Drawing Opt ions ..............................................................................................................................467
SC Assembly > HVAC Drawing Opt ions ............................................................................................................................467
SC Assembly > Equipment Drawing Opt ions...................................................................................................................468
SC Assembly > Viewport Opt ions ......................................................................................................................................468
SC Assembly > Set Viewport Display Opt ions .................................................................................................................468
SC Assembly > Insert BOM Table......................................................................................................................................469
SC Assembly > Updat e BOMs ............................................................................................................................................469
SC Assembly > Edit Collect or Opt ions ..............................................................................................................................469
SC Assembly > Toggle List Only Visible............................................................................................................................469
SC Assembly > Label > Manual Label f rom BOM...........................................................................................................470
SC Assembly > Label > Copy Label f rom BOM ...............................................................................................................470
SC Assembly > Label > Relabel All ...................................................................................................................................470
SC Assembly > Label > Relabel f rom BOM .....................................................................................................................471
SC Assembly > Label > Relabel f rom Part s.....................................................................................................................471
SC Assembly > Adjust Leader Spacing.............................................................................................................................471
SC Assembly > At t ach t o Viewport Tracking ...................................................................................................................471
SC Assembly > Creat e Leader Dist ribut ion Line.............................................................................................................472
SC Assembly > Set Leader Insert ion Mode .....................................................................................................................472
SC Assembly > Toggle Dist ribut ion Line St ret ch Mode .................................................................................................472
SC Assembly > Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Line ..............................................................................................................472
SC Assembly > Insert Weld Symbol Table .......................................................................................................................473
SC Assembly > Updat e Weld Symbol Tables...................................................................................................................473
SC Assembly > Global Dimension t o Point ......................................................................................................................473
SC Assembly Templat e Menu........................................................................................................................ 473
SC Assembly Templat e > Orient at ion Icon ......................................................................................................................474
SC Assembly Templat e > Insert Keywords ......................................................................................................................475
SC Assembly Templat e > St ruct ure Drawing Opt ions....................................................................................................475
SC Assembly Templat e > Pipe Drawing Opt ions ............................................................................................................476
SC Assembly Templat e > HVAC Drawing Opt ions ..........................................................................................................476
SC Assembly Templat e > Equipment Drawing Opt ions.................................................................................................476
SC Assembly Templat e > Viewport Opt ions ....................................................................................................................476
SC Assembly Templat e > Set Viewport Display Opt ions ...............................................................................................477
SC Assembly Templat e > Insert Weld Symbol Table .....................................................................................................477
SC Assembly Templat e > Insert BOM Table ....................................................................................................................477
SC Assembly Templat e > Edit Collect or Opt ions ............................................................................................................477
SC Assembly Templat e > Toggle List Only Visible..........................................................................................................478
SC Assembly Templat e > Updat e f rom a Previous Version ..........................................................................................478
SC Product Hierarchy Menu........................................................................................................................... 478
SC Product Hierarchy > Develop Product Hierarchy.......................................................................................................478
Cont ent s
xvi
SC Int erf erence Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 479
SC Int erf erence > Check Int erf erences ............................................................................................................................479
SC Plat e Nest Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 480
SC Plat e Nest > Nest > New...............................................................................................................................................480
SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Delet e...........................................................................................................................................482
SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Find...............................................................................................................................................482
SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Re-Nest.........................................................................................................................................482
SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Edit St ock Plat e ..........................................................................................................................482
SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Plot ...............................................................................................................................................483
SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Assign t o NC-Machine................................................................................................................483
SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > New ......................................................................................................................................483
SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > Delet e ..................................................................................................................................483
SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Edit Remnant......................................................................................................................484
SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Edit Remnant Label ...........................................................................................................484
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Insert .............................................................................................................................................484
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Re-i nsert .......................................................................................................................................484
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Remove ........................................................................................................................................485
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Slide Along ...................................................................................................................................485
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Move/ Rot at e................................................................................................................................485
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Align ..............................................................................................................................................485
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Rot at e Short est Dimension .......................................................................................................486
SC Plat e Nest > Part > List .................................................................................................................................................487
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Find................................................................................................................................................487
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Snap ..............................................................................................................................................487
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Align wit h H or V..........................................................................................................................487
SC Plat e Nest > Part > List Un-nest ed Part s....................................................................................................................488
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DWG..........................................................................................................488
SC Plat e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DXF............................................................................................................488
SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Visibilit y ....................................................................................................................................488
SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Act ivat e All ...............................................................................................................................489
SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Flip NC-Pyros............................................................................................................................489
SC Plat e Nest > Insert Keywords.......................................................................................................................................489
SC Plat e Nest > Aut o Label f rom BOM Index ..................................................................................................................489
SC Plat e Nest > Label Propert ies......................................................................................................................................490
SC Plat e Nest > Nest Manager ..........................................................................................................................................490
SC Plat e Nest > Check Nest s and BOM............................................................................................................................493
SC Plat e Nest > Updat e Nest s and BOM..........................................................................................................................493
SC Plat e Nest > Nest Collision Check ...............................................................................................................................493
SC Plat e Nest > NC-Pyros > Export To ..............................................................................................................................494
SC Plat e Nest > NC-Pyros > Import From ........................................................................................................................496
SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > New ...........................................................................................................................................496
SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > Delet e .......................................................................................................................................496
SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > Updat e ......................................................................................................................................496
SC Plat e Nest Templat e Menu ...................................................................................................................... 497
SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Def ine Border.........................................................................................................................497
SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Insert Keywords.....................................................................................................................497
SC Nest Templat e > Insert BOM Table .............................................................................................................................500
SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Updat e f rom a Previous Version .........................................................................................500
SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Check Drawing.......................................................................................................................500
SC Prof ile Plot s Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 500
Cont ent s
xvi i
SC Prof ile Plot s > Insert Prof i l e Pl ot s ...............................................................................................................................500
SC Prof ile Plot s > Opt ions ..................................................................................................................................................503
SC Prof ile Plot s > Zoom......................................................................................................................................................507
SC Prof ile Plot s > Print Plot s..............................................................................................................................................508
SC Prof ile Plot s > Check Prof ile Drawings.......................................................................................................................509
SC Prof ile Plot s > Updat e All BOMs ..................................................................................................................................510
SC Prof ile Plot Templat e Menu ..................................................................................................................... 510
SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Draw Border ..........................................................................................................................510
SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Draw Web Vi ew Area...........................................................................................................511
SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Insert Keywords....................................................................................................................511
SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Insert BOM Table..................................................................................................................513
SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Replace Legacy Keywords..................................................................................................514
SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e Menu.................................................................................................................. 514
SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Draw Border ......................................................................................................................514
SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Draw Area ..........................................................................................................................514
SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Insert Keywords ................................................................................................................515
SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Replace Legacy Keywords ..............................................................................................515
Index 517
Shi pConst ruct or
1
Shi pConst ruct or
ShipConst ruct or is a set of sof t ware t ools f or planning t he product ion of ships and of f shore st ruct ures, designing and
modeling hull, st ruct ure, piping, HVAC, penet rat ions, and equipment , and generat ing product ion document at ion t o enable
ef f i ci ent f abri cat i on.
Assembl y sequence
Shi pConst ruct or
2
Product i on out put
Not e: ShipConst ruct or consist s of several modules t hat you can purchase separat ely. This document describes
f eat ures in various ShipConst ruct or modules. If you do not have a license f or all ShipConst ruct or modules, you may
not be able t o use some of t he f eat ures described in t his document . For more inf ormat ion on ShipConst ruct or
modules and licensing, visit www.ShipConst ruct or.com.
Project s, Models, Drawings and Libraries
All work in ShipConst ruct or is done on a specif ic project . A project represent s a single vessel. As you work on a project ,
you build a t hree-dimensional digit al model of t he vessel.
3D product model court esy of Mari net t e Mari ne Corp. and Genoa Desi gn Int ernat i onal
Shi pConst ruct or
3
Dat abase Dri ven Relat ional Object Model (DDROM)
ShipConst ruct or uses a f undament ally new t echnology f or creat ing, st oring, and updat ing part inf ormat ion: t he Dat abase
Driven Relat ional Object Model (DDROM).
DDROM is similar t o paramet ric modeling. Paramet ric modeling is a way of def ining geomet ry in which geomet ric
dependencies are built -in, so t hat edit ing one shape will cause ot her shapes t o change size or locat ion.
For example, when you updat e a part af t er it has been def ined, any object s relat ed t o t he part t hat are af f ect ed by t he
updat e are also modif ied.
When you work in ShipConst ruct or, you creat e and work wit hin drawi ngs. Each drawing is only an int erf ace bet ween you
and t he model t hat is st ored in t he dat abase. The model is a t hree-dimensional represent at ion of t he ent ire vessel. Each
project cont ains many model drawings, but only one model.
Obj ect s i n t he dat abase
Manager
Anot her part of each project is the Manager. Manager is where you set up st ock it ems and ot her rules or convent i ons.
Shi pConst ruct or
4
Workspace and Tools
Most ShipConst ruct or t ools are available wit hin Aut oCAD f rom special menus and t oolbars or by t yping commands in t he
command line.
The ShipConst ruct or menu and SC Ut ilit ies menu are always available. Ot her menus are also available depending on t he
t ype of drawing you have open.
Shi pConst ruct or
5
Shi pConst ruct or menu
SC Ut i l i t i es menu
The t oolbars available t o you when using ShipConst ruct or are cont rolled by t he current Aut oCAD Workspace you have
loaded. ShipConst ruct or provides several predef ined workspaces; ShipConst ruct or, Pipe, HVAC, and St ruct ure. Loading a
given workspace can be done using t he Aut oCAD Workspaces t oolbar, t he workspace command, or t he wsset i ngs
command. More inf ormat ion on using workspaces can be f ound in t he Aut oCAD help document at ion.
Toolbar but t ons wit h a small black t riangle let you access a Flyout t oolbar cont aining more t ools.
You can also access cert ain ShipConst ruct or t ools by clicking t he right mouse but t on. The menu t hat appears depends on
t he t ype of object you select or click on. These menus are called ri ght -click menus (or somet imes shortcut menus).
Shi pConst ruct or
6
You can also use many of Aut oCAD’s t ools when working on a ShipConst ruct or project .
Some ShipConst ruct or t ools run independent ly of Aut oCAD.
Navigat or
One of t he most f requent ly used t ools is Navigat or. Navigat or let s you open and creat e drawings and is f ound at
Shi pConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348).
Get t i ng St art ed
7
Get t i ng St art ed
This sect ion describes how t o st art running ShipConst ruct or and how t o perf orm basic administ rat ive t asks in
Shi pConst ruct or.
St art Shi pConst ruct or
To st art ShipConst ruct or
1. Do eit her of t he f ollowing:
• From t he Windows St art but t on, choose St art > All Programs > ShipConst ruct or2009 > ShipConst ruct or2009.
• On t he Windows Deskt op, double-click t he ShipConst ruct or short cut icon. Do not use t he Aut oCAD short cut .
Make sure you see t he ShipConst ruct or and SC Ut ilit ies menu in t he menu bar. If not , cont act your syst em
administ rat or, or see t he Installation Guide f or t roubleshoot ing inf ormat ion.
Shi pConst ruct or CUI Fi l es
ShipConst ruct or inst alls t wo separat e CUI f iles which are used t o display t he ShipConst ruct or menus and t oolbars.
ShipConst ruct orCUI.cui is set at t he Ent erprise Cust omizat ion File and cont ains all of ShipConst ruct ors menus and
t ool bars. ShipConst ruct or2009.cui is set as t he Main Cust omizat ion File and is an empt y CUI f ile where any
cust omizat ions or changes made by t he user can be saved, t his includes cust om commands, t oolbars, and menus. If you
have exist ing CUI f iles t hat cont ain cust omizat ions you would like t o bring in t o ShipConst ruct or t hey can be loaded as
Part ial CUI Files under ShipConst ruct or2009.cui using t he CUI Edit or in Aut oCAD.
Get t i ng St art ed
8
To load a part ial cui f ile
1. St art ShipConst ruct or.
2. Run t he Aut oCAD cui command.
3. Select and right click on t he Part i al CUI Fi l es node under SHIPCONSTRUCTOR2009 in t he Cust omizat ion in All CUI
Files t ree, and select t he Load part ial cust omizat ion f ile opt ion.
4. Browse t o t he CUI f ile you want t o load as a part ial cui f ile.
5. Cl i ck OK t o apply your changes and close t he dialog.
Check Your Syst em Font
ShipConst ruct or’s windows are designed f or t he small syst em f ont (96 dpi). If you are using t he large syst em f ont , some
ShipConst ruct or windows will not display properly.
Get t i ng St art ed
9
To check your syst em f ont
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > 3D Viewpoint (page 429) t o open t he Select View window.
If you are using t he small syst em f ont , t he circles are aligned wit h t he 3D grid point s.
Smal l syst em f ont
If you are usi ng t he large syst em f ont , t he circles are misaligned wit h t he grid.
Get t i ng St art ed
10
Large syst em f ont
To set your syst em f ont
Not e: The f ollowing inst ruct ions are f or Windows XP and may be slight ly dif f erent f or ot her operat ing syst ems.
1. Ri ght -click on your Windows Deskt op and choose Propert ies (or f rom t he Windows St art menu, choose St art >
Cont rol Panel t o open t he Cont rol Panel, t hen double-click t he Display icon) t o open t he Display Propert ies window.
2. Select t he Set t ings t ab.
Get t i ng St art ed
11
3. Cl i ck Advanced t o open t he opt ions window f or your display device.
Get t i ng St art ed
12
4. Set DPI Set t ing t o Normal Size (96 DPI).
5. Cl i ck OK.
Not e: You may need t o re-st art your comput er. You may also need your Windows inst allat ion CD if small f ont s are
not already loaded on your hard drive.
Check your syst em f ont (see above) again t o make sure ShipConst ruct or windows display properly.
Not e: If t ext is t oo small f or you t o read, reduce t he resolut ion of your display. In t he Display Propert ies window,
select t he Set t i ngs t ab and set Screen resolut ion t o a lower value. For example, if your current Screen resolut ion
is 1280 x 1024, reduce it t o 1024 x 768. However, do not use a Screen resolut ion less t han 1024 x 768.
Open a Proj ect
Not e: For more inf ormat ion on project set up and administ rat ion, see t he Project Management manual.
To open a project
Not e: You can also open a project f rom Manager by choosing File > Change Project .
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or t o open Navigat or.
If you do not current ly have a project open (f or example, af t er init ially st art ing ShipConst ruct or), t he Regist er Project
window appears.
If you current ly have a project open, Navigat or appears. Select t he project f rom t he component list (f or example,
SC2009Demo) and click Change Project t o open t he Regist er Proj ect window.
Get t i ng St art ed
13
2. Select t he project f rom t he list or click Browse t o locat e a project f ile. (A ShipConst ruct or project f ile has a * .pro
ext ensi on.)
3. Ent er your User name and Password.
Not e: For t he project t emplat es, t he User name is Shi pConst ruct or and t he Password is shipcon.
If you do not have a user account , ask your syst em administ rat or t o set one up, or see User Accounts in t he Project
Management manual f or det ails.
4. Cl i ck Open.
Not e: If t his is t he f irst t ime you open a project af t er st art ing ShipConst ruct or, t he Licensing window appears. See
Get Licenses (page 13) f or det ails.
Get Li censes
You can t urn on and of f licenses t o enable or disable ShipConst ruct or modules. You can purchase ShipConst ruct or
modules separat ely at various levels (based on number of part s). You can also use a combinat ion of local locks (locat ed
on your comput er) and net work locks (locat ed on a net work-accessible comput er).
For det ails on set t ing up licenses, see t he Installation Guide.
To t urn on or of f licenses
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Licensing (page 369) t o open t he Licensing window.
Get t i ng St art ed
14
2. Set t he opt ions (see Li censi ng Wi ndow (page 370)).
3. Cl i ck OK.
Re-Logi n t o Shi pConst ruct or
If you have dif f erent user account s f or dif f erent roles, you may need t o change who you are logged in t o ShipConst ruct or
as. To do so, re-open t he project and ent er a dif f erent user name and password (see Open a Proj ect (page 12)).
Rel oad a Proj ect Dat abase
Whenever you or anyone else makes changes t o a project in Manager, you must reload t he project dat abase f or t he
change t o appear in your ShipConst ruct or session.
To reload t he project dat abase
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he project node in t he component t ree on t he lef t side of Navigat or (f or example, SC2009Demo).
3. Cl i ck Reload DB.
Change Your Password
User passwords are conf igured using t he Administ rat or ut ilit y. Please consult t he sect ion Change User Passwords in t he
Project Management manual.
Drawi ngs
15
Drawi ngs
Drawings give you access t o t he project model dat a. ShipConst ruct or saves t he part s in t he drawings but act ually st ores
t he part s in t he dat abase. If t here is any discrepancy bet ween t he drawing and t he dat abase, t he dat abase is considered
t o be correct .
Not e: ShipConst ruct or st ores Aut oCAD object s in t he drawings only (not in t he dat abase).
Open a Drawi ng
To open a drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
Not e: To open a drawing f rom a unit ot her t han t he current unit , select t he project at t he t op of t he component
list , t hen select t he unit in t he Uni t list .
Drawi ngs
16
2. Select t he t ype of drawing in t he component list (f or example, St ruct ure or Pipe).
Not e: To open a unit drawing, select t he unit name in t he component list (f or example, U12).
3. Select t he drawing in t he drawing list .
Not e: To open t he drawing in read-only mode, click on t he Read Only check box.
4. Cl i ck Open.
Creat e a Drawi ng
To creat e a drawing
Not e: The following procedure describes how t o creat e drawings in general. For inf ormat ion on creat ing specif ic
t ypes of drawing, see t he appropriat e sect ion of t his manual.
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
Not e: To creat e a drawing f or a unit ot her t han t he current unit , select t he project at t he t op of t he component list
(f or example, SC2009Demo), t hen select t he unit in t he Uni t list .
2. Select t he t ype of drawing in t he component list (f or example, St ruct ure or Pipe).
Not e: If t he drawing list cont ains f olders, select t he f older f or t he sub-t ype of drawing.
3. Cl i ck New.
Not e: The New but t on label may be dif f erent f or dif f erent drawing t ypes (f or example, New Piping, New
Arrangement , Creat e, or Creat e Spool Dwg).
The New Drawing window appears.
4. Type a File Name f or t he drawing.
Not e: To open t he new drawing, click on t he Open new drawing check box.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Lock or Unl ock a Drawi ng
You can lock drawings so ot hers can open t hem and view t hem but not save any changes t o t he drawing.
To lock or unlock a drawing
1. In Navigat or, click t he padlock icon beside t he drawing name.
• A dark padlock icon means t he drawing is locked.
• A dimmed padlock icon means t he drawing is unlocked.
Not e: If clicking t he lock icon does not seem t o work, you may not have permissions t o lock or unlock t he
appropriat e drawing f iles.
Rename a Drawi ng
To rename a drawing
1. In Navigat or, ri ght -click on t he drawing name and choose Rename.
2. Ent er a new name.
3. Press Ent er.
Drawi ngs
17
Del et e a Drawi ng
To delet e a drawing
1. In Navigat or, ri ght -click on t he drawing name and choose Delet e.
Save a Drawi ng
It is import ant f or t he user t o click Save in Aut oCAD t o save t he current (st ruct ural) drawing periodically. This ensures t hat
t he drawing and t he project dat abase remain synchronized.
Not e: The aut omat ic saving f eat ure t hrough Aut oCAD will not save ShipConst ruct or drawings.
Cl osi ng a Drawi ng
Erased part s are delet ed f rom t he dat abase when t he drawing is closed and you have saved t he drawing. If Aut oCAD
crashes wit hout closing a drawing, any part s t hat were delet ed in t hat session will be lef t in t he dat abase. The next t ime
t he drawing is opened, a synchronize warning will ask you t o choose t o keep t he object s t hat are only in t he dat abase.
Set Up Composi t e Drawi ngs
You can creat e composit e drawings in ShipConst ruct or and use Aut oCAD’s Xcl i p f unct ion t o creat e composit e deck or
f rame drawings. Composit e drawings make t he design process easier and l et you see exact ly what is happening around a
deck or specif ic f rame, including t he st ruct ure, pipe, equipment, and HVAC component s, wit hout making any permanent
changes t o your drawings.
To creat e a composit e drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Choose Mlink Composit e in t he component list .
Drawi ngs
18
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a File Name f or t he drawing.
5. Cl i ck OK.
The Mlink Manager window appears.
6. Select t he drawings you want displayed in t he composit e drawing.
7. Cl i ck OK.
Insert (Li nk) a Drawi ng i nt o Anot her Drawi ng
Each drawing cont ains a relat ively small port ion of t he ent ire project . Somet imes you want t o see more of t he project
t han is cont ained in a single drawing. To do so, you can insert (link) ot her drawings int o t he current drawing. This t ype of
link is ref erred t o as a model link or ml i nk. When you mlink ot her drawings int o t he current drawing, t he object s in t hose
drawi ngs are visible in t he current drawing. However, you cannot modif y object s t hat are mlinked int o t he current
drawi ng.
For example, if you are modeling st ruct ural component s, you may want t o see ot her st ruct ural element s, equipment , or
piping by mlinking t hem int o t he current planar group drawing. Similarly, if you are modeling piping, you may want t o see
a f ew key st ruct ural drawings by mlinking t hem int o t he current pipe drawing. Mlinking let s you easily see t he spat ial
relat ionships bet ween drawings.
You can also use mlinks t o cont rol which drawings are included in a unit drawing. In some cases, it may t ake a long t ime
f or ShipConst ruct or t o open t he unit drawing because you have very complex planar group drawings. If so, you may want
t o t emporarily remove cert ain mlinked drawings t o allow t he unit drawing t o load f ast er. In ot her cases, you may want t o
use mlinks t o include pipe and equipment in t he unit drawing.
You can also use mlinks t o creat e a composit e drawing of t he ent ire vessel (see Set Up Composit e Drawings (page 17)).
Not e: It can t ake several minut es f or ShipConst ruct or t o mlink all unit drawings int o a composit e drawing. (For
example, it can t ake over t hirt y minut es t o mlink all nine unit s of a reasonably sized project and pipe and equipment
int o a composit e drawing.)
To mlink drawings int o t he current drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Model Link (page 362) t o open t he MLink Manager.
Drawi ngs
19
2. Select t he drawings t o insert (link) int o t he current drawing.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Tip: Af t er insert ing (linking) a drawing int o anot her drawing, you can use Aut oCAD’s xclip f unct ion t o hide part s of
t he linked drawing. For det ails, see xclip in AutoCAD Help.
To reload mlinked drawings
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Model Link (page 362) t o open t he MLink Manager.
2. Cl i ck Reload.
To remove an mlinked drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Model Link (page 362) t o open t he MLink Manager.
2. Remove t he checkmark f rom t he drawings t o remove t he drawing f rom t he current mlinked drawing.
Tip: To remove all mlinked drawings, click Uncheck All.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Conf i guri ng Vi ewport Dependant Di spl ay Opt i ons
Viewport s in ShipConst ruct or can be conf igured wit h a subset of t he opt ions available globally. These select ions will only
show inside t he specif ied viewport . This can be done inside of a Templat e or a product ion drawing.
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs
20
Conf igurat ion changes made t o t he Viewport Display Opt ions will override t hose same set t ings in t he global display
opt ions. Each opt ion will def ault t o using t he global opt ion, even if ot her opt ions are overrode unless t he Use Global
Opt ion check box is unchecked t he global opt ion f or t hat value will be used. If t he Use Global Value opt ion is unchecked
t hen t he value of t hat row will be used t o det ermine t he display set t ings f or t hat viewport .
1. Ent er t he command SCVIEWPORTDISPOPTIONS on t he command line.
2. If you were previously inside of a model space viewport t he opt ions f or that viewport will be displayed, else you
will be prompt ed t o select t he viewport t hat you wish t o conf igure.
3. Once a viewport has been select ed t he Viewport Display Opt ions window will appear. The opt ion grid has t hree
columns.
• Opt ion: The names of t he dif f erent opt ions as well as cat egories under which t he opt ions are
organi zed.
• Use Global Opt ion: If checked t hen t he global display opt ions will be used inst ead of t hese opt ions, if
unchecked t hen t he viewport specif ic opt ion will be used.
• Value: The viewport specif ic value f or t his opt ion. This value will only be used if t he Use Global Opt ion is
unchecked.
Below t he grid is t he Descript ion f ield, it will cont ain a descript ion of t he select ed opt ion.
4. Once conf igurat ion is done click OK t o cont inue.
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs
ShipConst ruct or drawings are similar t o st andard Aut oCAD drawings, except t hey cont ain many cust om object s. If you are
running Aut oCAD (wit hout ShipConst ruct or) and t ry t o open a ShipConst ruct or drawing, t he f ollowing message appears.
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs
21
You can inst all t he ShipConst ruct or Object Enabler (page 24), a f ree download f rom www.ShipConst ruct or.com, t hat let s
you open ShipConst ruct or drawings in Aut oCAD.
You may also generat e a document f rom your original ShipConst ruct or drawings t hat can be opened wit hout
ShipConst ruct or inst alled or t he ShipConst ruct or Object Enabler (page 24) t here are a number of met hods depending on
what you wish t o produce.
• Export To Dwg: A f unct ion t o export a single ShipConst ruct or drawing.
• Export Document s: An Export ed Document t hat includes t he ent it ies f rom one or more original ShipConst ruct or
drawi ngs.
• Bound Approval Drawings: An Approval Drawing t hat has been export ed int o nat ive f ormat t o avoid
modif icat ions t o t he source drawings modif ying it and t o allow it t o be viewed independent of ShipConst ruct or.
Export To Dwg
The Export To Dwg f eat ure provides you wit h t he abilit y t o export a ShipConst ruct or document t o a nat ive Aut oCAD
document t hat can be viewed wit hout t he use of ShipConst ruct or or t he ShipConst ruct or Object Enabler. The user is given
t he abilit y t o select what element s of a drawing are export ed and separat e t he element s of complex ShipConst ruct or
part s ont o separat e layers in t he new document .
Any part s t hat are MLinked int o t he drawing being export ed will have local copies creat ed out of nat ive Aut oCAD ent it ies
using t he same set t ings t o det ermine what element s of part s are included and t he layer t hey are placed upon.
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export To Dwg…(page 444) or t ype SCEXPORTDWG at t he command line
If ShipConst ruct or t hinks t he drawing may have been modif ied you will be asked if you wish t o save t he current
drawing, t he drawing must be saved f or an export t o proceeded.
2. A Save As window will appear wit h a generat ed name f or t he document . Set t he f ile name and locat ion as
needed. Click Save and t he Export To Dwg Conf igurat ion window will appear.
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs
22
3. The Export To Dwg Conf igurat ion: The int erf ace t o conf igure t he export will display t he available opt ions in the
main grid. It ems t hat are displayed under anot her it em are dependent upon t he it em above t hem t o be enabled
f or t hem t o be enabled.
Exampl e: St ruct ure>Part >Solid>Green is set t o Show in t he above pict ure, but if St ruct ure>Part >Solid was set
t o Hide t hen any dependant values, such as Green, would be be t reat ed as having t he value Hide and t he t ree
under Solid would be collapsed f or easier navigat ion.
Not e: The conf igurat ion opt ions f or each module are discussed in t he module’s display opt ion document at ion.
Layer Templates
The Layer Template feature allows you to separate elements of the drawing out onto separate layers based
on what option it is related to and the original layer it was placed upon.
The default setting for a layer template, <Source Layer>, means that that element will be left on exactly the
same layer as it is in the original drawing.
If you wish to create an exported document that has all of the Structure solids on a layer called _SOLIDS
then replace the layer template for Structure>Plate>Solids with _SOLIDS. If the layer does not already
exist a new layer with that name will be created and all solids from structure elements will be placed upon
it. Note that while the Stiffener Green is also a solid it is dealt with separately and if you wish it to be on
the _SOLIDS layer it will also need to have the same Layer Template. You may place as many or as few
options on the same layer as you wish.
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs
23
Exampl e: If an ent it y on layer _REV is exploded wit h t he t emplat e “ _SCEnt it y<Source Layer>” it will be placed
on t he layer “ _SCEnt it y _REV”
Not e: <Source Layer> is a special t oken in a Layer Templat e, it ref ers t o t he Source Layer and it will be
replaced wit h t he name of t he source layer.
The but t ons on t he bot t om lef t of t he window are used t o manage conf igurat ions.
• Use Current Display Opt s will read t he current global display opt ions f rom t he source Approval Document
and conf igure t he UI accordingly.
• Load From File allows you t o read in an previous Bound Approval Document Conf igurat ion and conf igure
t he UI accordingly.
• Save t o File allows you t o save t he current set t ings in t he UI t o a t ext f ile t hat can be used t o conf igure ot her
Bound Approval Document conf igurat ions.
Export Drawi ngs
ShipConst ruct or drawings can be export ed t o st andard Aut oCAD drawing f ormat . This let s you use t he solid model in
ot her applicat ions t hat do not support t he object enabler. During export , ShipConst ruct or convert s all cust om object s t o
st andard Aut oCAD object s. St ruct ure part s are export ed as 3D solids and product ion geomet ry. In t he st andard Aut oCAD
drawing, export ed solids are on t he DrawingName_SOLID layer and product ion geomet ry is on t he
DrawingName_PRODUCTION layer.
To export ShipConst ruct or drawings
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Sel ect Export in t he component list .
3. Cl i ck New t o open t he New Export Drawing window.
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs
24
4. Click t he check box f or t he drawings t o include in t he export ed drawing.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Obj ect Enabl er
You will not be able t o open ShipConst ruct or drawings in plain Aut oCAD wit hout ShipConst ruct or or t he ShipConst ruct or
Object Enabler. The object enabler is a separat e inst allat ion t hat contains a port ion of ShipConst ruct or t hat allows t he
cust om object s t o be accessible. The object enabler cont ains no commands and is not connect ed t o t he project dat abase.
You cannot edit part s or const ruct ion lines. Changes or addit ions t o non-ShipConst ruct or object s are permit t ed.
Not e: Object Enabler is available as a f ree download f rom www.ShipConst ruct or.com. Do not inst all bot h t he object
enabler and ShipConst ruct or on t he same comput er.
Export i ng Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ngs
25
Vi ews
You can adjust t he view wit hin any drawing.
Select a 3D or 2D Vi ew
To select a 3D or 2D view
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > 3D Viewpoint (page 429) t o open t he Select View window.
2. Select t he 3D t ab.
3. Select a point wit hin t he 3D ship hull image.
Not e: You can also manually ent er t he viewpoint values beside VPoi nt .
4. Cl i ck OK.
Swi t ch Bet ween Paper Space and Model Space
Each drawing cont ains t wo t ypes of views.
• The model space view represent s your model in t hree-dimensions. You use t he model space view f or modeling and
draf t i ng.
• The paper space view represent s your model in t wo-dimensions as it would be print ed or plot t ed on paper. You can
use t he paper space view f or creat ing a f inished layout f or print ing or plot t ing.
To swit ch bet ween paper space and model space
1. At t he bot t om of t he drawing window, click t he Model t ab t o swit ch t o model space or click t he Layout t ab t o swit ch
t o paper space.
Not e: A drawing can have more t han one Layout t ab.
Wi ndows and Edi t ors
When a window or edit or opens, t here are numerous f eat ures designed t o hel p you accomplish t he t ask you are doing.
Some of t he most commonly used f eat ures are t he f ollowing:
• If inf ormat ion is sort ed in a column; you can click t he column name t o sort t he list alphanumerically.
• Click t he column name a second t ime t o sort t he inf ormat ion in reverse alphanumerical order.
• If a window consist s of more t han one t abbed panel, you can move bet ween t abs using t he lef t and right arrow keys
(onl y when a t ab name is highlight ed).
• Press Tab t o navigat e among t he window’s element s.
• Press Esc t o close a window.
St ruct ure
27
St ruct ure
The St ruct ure manual is organized t o lead you t hrough st eps t o set up a project .
Not e: Bef ore you can work in ShipConst ruct or, you must creat e a project . Typically, t he proj ect manager creat es t he
ShipConst ruct or project . See t he Project Management manual f or det ails on project administ rat ion.
St ruct ural Desi gn Workf l ow
The workf low of ShipConst ruct or will dif f er bet ween companies due t o t he specif ic work processes of t he company. The
f ollowing example is a t ypical high-level f lowchart of t he St ruct ure discipline.
St ruct ure
28
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
29
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
Overvi ew
Each project cont ains various libraries wi t h al l t he st ocks, mat erials, and st andards t hat you will use in t he project . Bef ore
you begin work on a project , you must set up t hese project libraries. You can also import project libraries f rom anot her
project or f rom an XML f ile t hat you have export ed f rom anot her project . Virt ually all t he set t ings can be changed af t er
part s have been modeled.
This manual describes how t o set up general libraries and st ruct ure libraries. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails on set t ing
up pipe libraries, t he Equipment and Penetrations manual f or set t ing up equipment libraries and penet rat ion st andards,
and t he HVACmanual f or det ails on set t ing up HVAC libraries.
Suppl i ed Li braries
ShipConst ruct or comes wit h t hree t emplat e XML f iles t hat cont ain sample st andards and st ocks. By def ault t hese f iles
are f ound at C:\ Program Files\ ShipConst ruct or2009\ Project Templat es.
• Met ricTemplat e.XML – met ric st ocks and st andards
• Imperi al Templ at e.XML – imperial st ocks and st andards
• PipeCat alog.XML – pipe cat alogs
Cat al og Set up Workf l ow
This manual is organized in t he order t hat you will t ypically set up a project .
Proj ect Set t i ngs
There are cert ain set t ings t hat ShipConst ructor uses t hroughout a project . Bef ore you begin work on a project , you must
set t hese project set t ings. We recommend t hat you do not modif y cert ain project set t ings af t er you have begun work on a
project . See General > Project Set t ings (page 309) f or det ails.
You can also import project set t ings f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat you have export ed f rom anot her
project . We recommend t hat you do not modif y t he project set t ings af t er you have begun work on a project .
Set Proj ect Set t i ngs
To set t he st ruct ure opt ions
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Project Set t ings (page 309) t o open t he Project Set t ings window.
3. Open t he St ruct ure sect ion and set t he opt ions. See General > Project Set t ings (page 309).
4. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Project Set t ings window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
30
Import Proj ect Set t i ngs
To import project set t ings
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Project Set t ings (page 309) t o open t he Project Set t ings window.
3. Cl i ck Import t o open a File Browser.
4. Select a project f ile (* .PRO) or XML f ile (* .XML).
5. Cl i ck Open.
Export Proj ect Set t i ngs
To export project set t ings
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Project Set t ings (page 309) t o open t he Project Set t ings window.
3. Cl i ck Export XML t o open a File Browser.
4. Ent er a name f or t he XML f ile.
5. Cl i ck Save.
User Permi ssi ons
See t he Project Management manual f or det ails on how t o use User Permi ssi ons.
ShipConst ruct or is designed t o be used by a t eam of people. Each company will have dif f erent t ypes of people, so we will
present a t ypical case.
St ruct ure Team Rol es
Project Manager:
• Schedules and plans t he project
• Organizes t eam
• Corresponds wit h client
St ruct ural Designer:
• Approves cont ract drawings
• Creat es st ruct ural det ail design
St ruct ural Lead:
• Ensures t hat st andards are maint ained
• Is responsible f or t he model
Bui l d St rat egi st :
• Develops t he build st rat egy f or t he project
• Coordinat es scheduling
Modeler:
• Models all st ruct ure and generat es part s
Nest er:
• Creat es nest and nest s part s
• Tracks st ock
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
31
Product ion Det ailer:
• Det ails assembly drawings
CAD Administ rat or:
• Creat es users and maint ains dat abases
• Manages communicat ion about issues wit h ShipConst ruct or Sof t ware Inc. and applies pat ches
People in t he t eam may have more t han one of t hese roles. The dif f erent roles in t he project require dif f erent
permissions. We recommend t hat you set up permission groups f or each role.
Mat eri al s
Each part is f abricat ed f rom a specif ic t ype of mat erial (f or example, Aluminum 5086). You must set up t he mat erials you
plan t o use in t he project . In ShipConst ruct or, a material is act ually a grouping of mat erial grades. For example, t he
mat erial Aluminum might cont ain t he grades 5086, 6061, and 5052.
Creat e a Mat eri al
To creat e a mat erial
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
3. Cl i ck New Mat erial.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
32
4. Type a name f or t he mat erial and press Ent er.
Creat e a Grade
To creat e a grade
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
3. Select t he Mat erial in which t o creat e a grade.
4. Cl i ck New Grade.
5. Ent er a name f or t he grade and press Ent er.
6. Make sure Densit y Unit s is set t o t he unit s you want t o use t o specif y t he densit y.
7. Doubl e-click t he Densit y f ield f or t he new grade, ent er a value (measured in t he Densit y Unit s), and press Ent er.
ShipConst ruct or uses densit y values t o calculat e part weight .
Rename a Mat eri al or Grade
To rename a grade
1. Choose Shi pConstruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
3. Double-click t he mat erial or grade t o rename (or right -click t he mat erial or grade and choose Rename).
4. Ent er a new name f or t he mat erial or grade and press Ent er.
Import Mat eri al s and Grades
To import mat erials and grades
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
3. Cl i ck Import t o open a File Browser.
4. Select a project f ile (* .PRO) or XML f ile (* .XML).
5. Cl i ck Open.
6. Check t he mat erials in t he Import column t hat you want t o import and click OK.
Export Mat eri al s and Grades
To export mat erials and grades
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
3. Check t he Export check boxes f or t he mat erials and grades t o export .
4. Cl i ck Export XML t o open a File Browser.
5. Ent er a name f or t he XML f ile.
6. Cl i ck Save.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
33
Del et e a Mat eri al or Grade
To delet e a mat erial or grade
Not e: You cannot delet e a mat erial or grade t hat is current ly in use in t he project . You can produce a log of all
st ocks/ st andards t hat use a part icular mat erial grade by select ing t he mat erial grade which is checked “ In Use” , and
cl i cki ng Usage Log.
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
3. Select t he mat erial or grade.
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
Vi ew Mat eri al Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he st ocks t hat use a select ed mat erial grade. A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es
t hat t he mat eri al grade is being used by st ocks.
To list all st ocks using a specif ic grade
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
3. Select t he grade you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all st ocks using t he select ed grade.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
34
Manuf act urers
A manuf act urer is a company t hat manuf act ures cert ain it ems used in your project (f or example, pipe st ock and
i nsul at i on). When you create such an it em, you must assign it a manuf act urer.
Creat e a Manuf act urer
To creat e a manuf act urer
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Manuf act urers (page 315) t o open t he Manuf act urers window.
3. Cl i ck New t o creat e a new manuf act urer.
4. Ent er a name f or t he manuf act urer and press Ent er.
Vi ew Manuf act urers Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he st ocks t hat use a select ed manuf act urer. A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es
t hat t he manuf act urer is being used by st ocks.
To list all st ocks using a specif ic manuf act urer
5. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
6. Choose General > Mat erials (page 314) t o open t he Mat erials window.
7. Select t he grade you want .
8. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all st ocks using t he select ed manuf act urer.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
35
Fi ni shes
Part s of t en have a finish applied t o t hem (f or example, paint ). You must set up t he f inishes you plan t o use in t he project .
A finish type is a group where you can set up similar t ypes of f inishes. For example, you may have a f inish t ype named
Pai nt t hat cont ains f inishes like ant if ouling, primer, and enamel.
Creat e a Fi ni sh Type
To creat e a f inish t ype
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Finishes window.
3. Cl i ck New Type.
4. Type a name f or t he f inish t ype and press Ent er.
Creat e a Fi ni sh
To creat e a f inish
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Fini shes window.
3. Select t he f inish t ype t hat t he new f inish will belong t o.
4. Cl i ck New Finish.
5. Type a name f or t he f inish and press Ent er.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
36
Rename a Fi ni sh or Fi ni sh Type
To rename a f inish or f inish t ype
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Finishes window.
3. Doubl e-click t he f inish or f inish t ype t o rename (or right -click t he f inish or f inish t ype and choose Rename).
4. Type a new name and press Ent er.
Import Fi ni shes and Fi ni sh Types
To import f inishes
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Fini shes window.
3. Cl i ck Import t o open a File Browser.
4. Select a project f ile (* .PRO) or XML f ile (* .XML).
5. Cl i ck Open.
Export Fi ni shes and Fi ni sh Types
To export f inishes
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Finishes window.
3. Check t he Export check boxes f or t he f inishes and f inish t ypes t o export .
4. Cl i ck Export XML t o open a File Browser.
5. Ent er a name f or t he XML f ile.
6. Cl i ck Save.
Del et e a Fi ni sh or Fi ni sh Type
To delet e a f inish or f inish t ype
Not e: You cannot delet e a f inish or f inish t ype t hat is current ly in use in t he project .
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Finishes window.
3. Select t he f inish or f inish t ype.
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
Insul at i on
Insulat ion is not used by t he St ruct ure module. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails on insulat ion.
Text St yl es
Text st yles let you cont rol t he appearance of plat e part t ext (marklines and piecemarks) in product ion drawings.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
37
To set up a t ext st yle, you must set up bot h a ShipConst ruct or t ext st yle name (which applies t o t he ent ire project ) and an
Aut oCAD t ext st yle wit h t he same name t hat def ines t he appearance of t he t ext , which applies t o an individual drawing.
Whenever you insert t ext of a cert ain st yle, ShipConst ruct or f ormat s it using t he Aut oCAD t ext st yle of t he same name (or
usi ng the St andard st yle if t here is not an Aut oCAD t ext st yle wit h t he same name).
For example, t o st andardize t he appearance of piecemark t ext in assembly drawings, you would do t he f ollowing. Set up
a ShipConst ruct or t ext st yle named Piecemark and an Aut oCAD t ext st yle named Piecemark in t he assembly drawing
t emplat e. When insert ing t ext in any drawing, use t he ShipConst ruct or t ext st yle Piecemark. You do not necessarily need
t o set up an Aut oCAD t ext st yle named Piecemark in all drawings, since it is t he appearance of t ext in t he assembly
drawing t hat you are t rying t o st andardize. Conversely, dif f erent modelers can set up t heir own Aut oCAD t ext st yles
named Piecemark in t heir own drawings. As long as t hey use t he ShipConst ruct or t ext st yle Piecemark, all t ext of t hat
st yle will be f ormat t ed consist ent ly in t he assembly drawings.
Creat e a Text St yl e
To creat e a t ext st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Text St yles (page 316) t o open t he Text St yles window.
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he t ext st yle and press Ent er.
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Text St yles window.
Del et e a Text St yl e
To delet e a t ext st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Text St yles (page 316) t o open t he Text St yles window.
3. Select t he t ext st yle you want t o delet e.
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Text St yles window.
Accessory Packages
Accessory packages are not used by t he St ruct ure module. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails on accessory packages.
Nami ng Convent i ons
Naming convent ions cont rol how ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically names element s of your project such as drawings, part s,
spools, penet rat ions, and so on.
There are many t ypes of naming convent ions. ShipConst ruct or organizes t hem wit hin a t ree.
You can set up several dif f erent naming convent ions wit hin each cat egory, but only one naming convent ion in each
cat egory can be t he active naming convent ion t hat is used by ShipConst ruct or.
A naming convent ion is composed of elements. You set up a naming convent ion by choosing various element s, arranging
t hem in order, and set t ing t heir values. When ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically generat es a name, it f ormat s t he name
using t he element s of t he act ive naming convent ion.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
38
Nami ng Convent i ons Wi ndow
The Naming Convent ions window consist s of t hree inf ormat ion views.
• Naming Convent ions t ree (lef t )
• Naming Convent ion Element s list (t op right )
• Element Det ails list (bot t om)
Naming Convent ions Tree
The Naming Convent ions t ree displays all t he ShipConst ruct or ent it y t ypes t hat names can be generat ed f or and t he
naming convent ions creat ed f or t hose ent it ies. For each naming convent ion, ShipConst ruct or uses t he Act ive column t o
show if t he naming convent ion is t he act ive naming convent ion f or t he ent it y t ype. Through t he InUse column,
ShipConst ruct or shows if t here are any ent it ies in t he project t hat have a name generat ed wit h each naming convent ion.
Naming convent ions can be def ined at any level in t he t ree and apply t o an ent it y t ype and all of it s children ent it y t ypes.
For example, you def ine a naming convent ion PartNameConvention (convent ion A) f or St ruct ure > Part s and a naming
convent ion PlateNameConvention (convent ion B) f or St ruct ure > Part s > Plat e.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
39
If you creat e a part of any t ype ot her t han St ruct ure > Part s > Plat e, ShipConst ruct or will use naming convent ion A t o
generat e t he name. If you creat e a St ructure > Part s > Plat e, ShipConst ruct or will apply naming convent ion B.
You can def ine mult iple naming convent ions f or each ent it y t ype. Depending on t he t ype of ent it y, ShipConst ruct or may or
may not allow you t o pick a name convent ion t o use when creat ing ent it ies. In cases where you are not of f ered a choice,
t he Act ive nami ng convent ion is used.
Naming Convent ion El ement s Li st
A naming convent ion consist s of element s t hat can be added, removed, and re-ordered. The element s list shows t he
element s of a naming convent ion and t heir order. The element s list shows element propert ies in t he select ed naming
convent ion. Changing t he propert ies of an element is done using t he Det ails list .
There are t hree t ypes of element s:
1. St at ic st rings
2. Dat abase it ems
3. Aut o-Increment i ng numbers
Static strings are user-ent ered t ext such as a word or a symbol (f or example, a hyphen (-) t o separat e ot her element s).
Database items are a propert y of t he ent it y f or which t he name is being generat ed. For example, t he spec t hat an HVAC
duct belongs t o or t he t hickness of t he plat e st ock t hat a plat e part is made f rom. There are many dif f erent t ypes of
dat abase it ems t o choose f rom depending on t he ent it y t ype t hat you are def ining a naming convent ion f or. The
propert ies of a dat abase it em element are as f ollows:
• Number of charact ers – The maximum number of charact ers t o display f rom t he dat abase it em st ring.
• St art Poi nt -- The posit ion t o st art count ing t he number of charact ers f rom. The opt ions are Beginning or End.
• Of f set – The number of charact ers t o skip f rom t he of f set bef ore including t he number of charact ers.
• Use As Name Seed – Indicat es whet her or not t o use t his element when det ermining t he next aut o-number
choice. This will be explained in more det ail below.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
40
Auto-Incrementing numbers are used t o f acilit at e t he creat ion of unique names. The propert ies of an aut o-increment ing
number are t he f ollowing:
• Number of digit s – A number represent ing t he minimum number of digit s used t o display t he aut o-number. Can
be set t o Aut o t o aut omat ically use as many digit s as t he number consist s of . For example, if t he generat ed
number is 56 and t he number of digit s is set t o 4, t he aut o-number would display as 0056. If t he number of
digit s was set t o Aut o t he number would display as 56.
• St art Val ue – The aut o-number of t he f irst generat ed name.
• Increment – The increment al value t o add t o each aut o-number t o calculat e t he next number. For example, an
increment of 1 would creat e 6, 7, 8, 9, and an increment of 3 would creat e 6, 9, 12, 15.
• Recycle Numbers – A yes or no value. If you set t he value t o yes, t hen any ent it ies t hat are renamed or delet ed
will have t heir name go back int o a pool t o be re-used again. For example, if you have recycling enabled and you
creat e plat e part s named P-67, P-68, and P-69 and t hen delet e part P-68, t he next plat e part t hat you creat e will
have t he name P-68, not P-70.
El ement Det ai l s Li st
The Det ails list shows t he propert ies of t he element select ed in t he Element s list .
Creat e a Naming Convent ion
Bef ore being able t o add, edit , and remove element s, creat e and change aliases, and modif y t he naming convent ion
it self , you must creat e your naming convent ion.
To creat e a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. In t he Name Convent ions pane, select t he t ype of naming convent ion t o creat e. Creat ing a lower level naming
convent ion will override one at a higher level.
4. Cl i ck New. ShipConst ruct or creat es a new ent ry in t he t ree wit h a def ault name.
5. Type a name f or t he naming convent ion and press Ent er.
6. Add element s t o t he naming convent ion. See Add an Element t o a Naming Convent ion (page 40)
Add an El ement t o a Nami ng Convent i on
To add an element t o a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
41
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. In t he Name Convent ions pane, select t he naming convent ion.
Any exist ing element s are displayed in t he Element s pane.
Under Element s, a but t on wit h one of t he labels described above allows you t o add an element .
If t he label doesn’t mat ch t he element you want t o add, click t o show t he ot her t ypes of element s.
Not e: Make sure each naming convent ion consist s of at least one St at ic element and one Aut oNumber el ement .
4. The new element is list ed under Element s and is aut omat ically select ed.
The element ’s propert ies are list ed in t he window.
5. Set t he Val ue f or each Propert y. See Edit an Element of a Naming Convent ion (page 41).
6. Cl i ck Test t o generat e a sample name.
7. If you are sat isf ied wit h your convent ion, click OK t o close t he Naming Convent ions window.
Edit an Element of a Naming Convent ion
To edit an element of a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. Under Name Convent ions, select t he naming convent ion.
4. Under Element s, select t he element you want t o edit .
5. Beneat h t he Element s pane, set t he Value f or each Propert y.
6. Cl i ck Test t o generat e a sample name.
7. If you are sat isf ied wit h your convent ion, click OK t o close t he Naming Convent ions window.
Re-order Element s in a Naming Convent ion
To re-order element s in a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. Under Name Convent ions, select t he naming convent ion.
The naming convent ion’s element s are list ed in t he Element s pane in order.
4. From t he Element s pane, select t he element and t hen click the up and down arrows t o move t he element
up or down in t he list
5. Cl i ck Test t o generat e a sample name.
6. If you are sat isf ied wit h t he convent ion, click OK t o close t he Naming Convent ions window.
Remove an Element f rom a Naming Convent ion
To remove an element f rom a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. Under Name Convent ions, select t he naming convent i on.
4. Under Element s, select t he element you want t o remove.
5. Under Element s, click Del et e.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
42
Act i vat e a Nami ng Convent i on
Because you can set up many naming convent ions, you must choose one t o be t he act ive naming convent ion f or a
proj ect .
To act ivat e a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. Under Name Convent ions, select t he naming convent ion you want t o act ivat e.
4. Cl i ck Set Act ive.
A checkmark appears beside t he naming convent ion, indicat ing t hat it is t he act ive naming convent ion f or t hat
cat egory.
Rename a Nami ng Convent i on
To rename a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. Under Name Convent ions, select t he naming convent ion you want t o rename.
4. Cl i ck Rename.
5. Ent er a new name and press Ent er.
Del et e a Nami ng Convent i on
To delet e a naming convent ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. Under Name Convent ions, select t he naming convent ion you want t o delet e.
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
Managi ng Al i ases
Aliases are used in naming convent ions t o cust omize t he way t hat some dat abase it ems are displayed. For example,
when def ining a naming convent ion f or a st ruct ure plat e part , you may include t he part side in t he name. By def ault t he
part sides are displayed as Port, Starboard, and Centerline. You may, however, want t o short en t hose t o PT, ST, and C.
This can be accomplished using naming convent ion aliases.
To st art t he alias manager
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317) t o open t he Naming Convent ions window.
3. Click t he Manage Al i ases but t on on t he bot t om lef t on t he Naming Convent ions window t o open t he Alias Manager
window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
43
To def ine an alias
1. Open t he Alias Manager.
2. Select t he Dat abase It em you wish t o creat e an alias f or f rom t he drop-down box.
3. Doubl e-click under t he Alias column t he row corresponding t o t he it em you wish t o creat e an alias f or.
4. Type your alias and press t he Ent er key.
5. Click t he OK but t on.
Generat i ng Names i n Groups
The Generat e Names window is used f or generat ing names f or groups of it ems wit hout having t o open drawings.
To open t he Generat e Names window
1. Click t he Generat e Names but t on in t he Naming Convent ion window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
44
The Generat e Names window displays a hierarchy of ShipConst ruct or ent it ies represent ing cat egories of nameable it ems
in ShipConst ruct or.
To Regenerat e Names f or a Set of ShipConst ruct or Ent it ies
1. Click t he checkboxes in t he t ree corresponding t o t he ShipConst ruct or ent it ies t hat you wish t o regenerat e names f or
2. Click t he Generat e but t on
For all of t he ent it ies cont ained in t he groups select ed in t he t ree, ShipConst ruct or regenerat es names using t he Name
Convent ion t hat was used t o generat e t he original name. Any ent it ies t hat do not have an exist ing generat ed name will
not have names generat ed f or t hem.
ShipConst ruct or also at t empt s t o keep t he same aut o number f or t he regenerat ed names. For example, you change a
naming convent ion t o remove t he part side element . The part whose name is Unit 01-Port -436 will be renamed t o Unit 01-
436 if t hat name is available. Ot herwise, it will t ake t he next available name. This f eat ure is also benef icial because when
regenerat ing names, if t he naming convent ion def init ion has not been changed, part s t hat already have a generat ed
name will not have t heir name changed.
There are t wo addit ional checkbox opt ions on t he Generat e Names window.
• Al l It ems
• Use Act ive Name Convent ion
Select ing t he All It ems opt ion will generat e names f or all ShipConst ruct or ent it ies t hat match t he groups select ed in t he
t ree regardless of whet her or not t hey have an exist ing generat ed name. If t he Use Act i ve Name Convent ion opt ion is not
set , ent it ies t hat have an exist ing generat ed name have t heir names regenerat ed using t he Name Convent ion t heir name
was last generat ed wit h. Ent it ies t hat do not have a generat ed name will have a name generat ed using t he current Act ive
Name Convent ion.
Select ing t he Use Act ive Name Convent ion opt ion will cause all generat ed names t o be generat ed using t he current act i ve
Name Convent ion f or t heir cat egory.
Nami ng Convent i on Concept s
Underst anding Seeding
Seeding allows you more cont rol over how your names are generat ed. This is best illust rat ed by an example. Suppose you
have a naming convent ion def ined wit h t hree element s: Mat erial - Syst em - Aut o-number. The aut o-number st art ing
number is one and t he increment is one. The f irst part you creat e may have a name like:
M1-FreshWat er-001
In t his example, t he part is made f rom a mat erial named M1 and is in t he Fresh Wat er syst em. For t his example we will
assume t hat bot h t he Mat erial element and t he Syst em element are seeds. If you creat e a new part t hat was also made
f rom mat erial M1 and in syst em Fresh Wat er, t he name will be as f ollows:
M1-FreshWat er-002
If you creat e a t hird part t hat was made of mat erial M1 but was in t he Salt Wat er syst em, ShipConst ruct or will generat e a
part name as f ollows:
M1-Sal t Wat er-001
Not ice how t he number has rest art ed at 1. This is because one of your seed element s has changed, in this case t he
Syst em. If you creat e a f ourt h part , t his t ime back in t he Fresh Wat er syst em but wit h mat erial M2, ShipConst ruct or would
generat e a name as f ollows:
M2-FreshWat er-001
Again t he numbering scheme has changed because t he combinat ion of your t wo seed element s does not mat ch anyt hing
we have seen previously. If you now creat e a f if t h and sixt h part made f rom mat erial M2 and in syst em Fresh Wat er,
ShipConst ruct or will generat e t he names as f ollows:
M2-FreshWat er-002
M2-FreshWat er-003
To f urt her illust rat e t he nat ure of seeding, consider t he f ollowing example. To make t hings simple, pret end t hat you are
again working wit h a f resh project and have not generat ed t he names above. You def ine a name convent ion ident ical t o
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
45
t he one in t he example above (Mat erial - Syst em - Aut o-number) except t hat inst ead of bot h t he Mat erial and Syst em
element s being seeds, only t he Mat erial is a seed element . Following t he same procedure as above your part names will
look as f ollows:
M1-FreshWat er-001
M1-FreshWat er-002
M1-Sal t Wat er-003
Not ice how even t hough t he syst em changed f rom Fresh Wat er t o Salt Wat er, t he numbering scheme did not change; it
cont inued count ing up. This is because t he syst em is not a seed element . If you creat e t wo more part s, t he names will be
as f ollows:
M2-FreshWat er-001
M2-Sal t Wat er-002
Not ice how t he numbering scheme changed t he f irst t ime because t he mat erial element changed but cont inued count ing
up t he second t ime.
Dat abase El ement s
The power in naming convent ions lies in t he abilit y t o generat e names based on ent it y at t ribut es st ored in t he dat abase.
The f ollowing are descript ions of all t he dat abase element s current ly support ed by ShipConst ruct or.
Assembl y
Assembly ret urns t he primary build st rat egy assembly name of an ancest or assembly of your ent it y. Which level’s
assembly name is ret urned depends on which Assembly Tree Level you select f rom t he Tree Level drop-down list . The list
of assembly levels depends on how you st ruct ure your Product Hierarchy t ree.
Not e: If t he part is in an assembly wit h a level higher t han select ed assembly t ree level, not hing is ret urned f or t hat
el ement .
Ext rusion Prof ile St andard Type
Ext rusion Prof ile St andard Type applies t o st if f eners. Examples of ext rusion prof ile st andard t ypes are angle, bulb f lat ,
st ruct ural pipe, cust om, and t ee. Ext rusion prof ile st andard t ypes can be aliased using t he Naming Convent ion Alias
Manager.
File Pat h
File Pat h applies t o Plat e Nest s. It ret urns t he pat h t o t he plat e nest drawing st art ing f rom t he Nest f older. The purpose of
t he f ile pat h element is t o allow users t o put t he build st rat egy locat ion in t he plat e nest name.
This is done by creat ing a direct ory st ruct ure in t he Nest s f older t hat mat ches t he build st rat egy and t hen put t ing plat e
nest drawings at t he appropriat e locat ion in t he f older st ruct ure.
Major St ock Type
Major St ock Type applies t o all St ruct ure part s. Examples of major st ock t ypes are plat e, ext rusion, corrugat ed and plank.
Major st ock t ypes can be aliased using t he Naming Convent ion Alias Manager.
Mat eri al
Mat eri al ret urns t he mat erial name of t he st ock.
Mat eri al Grade
Mat erial Grade ret urns t he mat erial grade of t he st ock.
Nest Drawi ng
Nest Drawi ng ret urns t he nest drawing name of plat e nest s.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
46
Nomi nal Si ze
Nominal Size ret urns t he nominal size of t he pipe st ock.
Part Si de
Part Si de ret urns t he side of t he ship on which t he st ruct ure part lies.
Part Type
Part Type applies t o St ruct ure part s. Examples of part t ypes are plat e, st if f ener, corrugat ion, f aceplat e, and plank. Part
t ypes can be aliases using t he Naming Convent ion Alias Manager.
Pl anar Group Model Drawi ng
Planar Group Model Drawing ret urns t he planar group model drawing t hat t he st ruct ure part is modeled in.
Pl at e St ock Lengt h
Plat e St ock Lengt h ret urns t he lengt h of t he plat e st ock it em t hat the st ruct ure part is made f rom.
Pl at e St ock Wi dt h
Plat e St ock Widt h ret urns t he widt h of t he plat e st ock it em t hat t he st ruct ure part is made f rom.
Pressure Rat i ng
Pressure Rat ing ret urns t he pressure rat ing of t he pipe st ock.
Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng
Prof i l e Plot Drawing ret urns t he prof ile plot drawing name of prof ile nest s.
Proj ect
Proj ect ret urns t he name of t he ShipConst ruct or project .
Remnant
Remnant ret urns t he name of t he remnant t hat t he plat e nest was cut f rom.
Sheet St ock
Sheet St ock ret urns t he name of t he sheet st ock t hat t he HVAC st ock is made f rom.
St ock
St ock ret urns t he name of t he st ock t hat t he part is made f rom.
Syst em
Syst em ret urns t he spec level, syst em level, or branch level syst em name of t he syst em of your ent it y. Which level is
ret urned depends on your select ion in t he Tree Level drop-down list .
Not e: If t he ent it y is in a syst em wit h a level higher t han t he select ed syst em t ree level, not hing is ret urned f or t hat
el ement
Thi ckness
Thi ckness ret urns t he t hickness of t he plat e st ock t hat t he plat e part is made f rom.
Label St yl es
Label st yles are used in product ion out put drawings. Label st yles apply t o annot at ions in product ion drawings.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
47
Add a Label St yl e
To add a label st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Product ion Out put > Label St yles (page 320) t o open t he Label St yles window.
3. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Label St yl es.
Di mensi on St yl es
Dimension st yles are used in product ion out put drawings. The name of t he dimension st yle must mat ch t he name in t he
dimension st yles in t he drawing.
Add a Di mensi on St yl e
To add a dimension st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Product ion Out put > Dimension St yles (page 320) t o open t he Dimension St yles window.
3. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Di mensi on St yl es.
Bi l l of Mat eri al s
The ShipConst ruct or Bill of Mat erials (BOM) includes cust omizable and convenient f unct ions:
• Management of all product ion drawing BOMs is perf ormed t hrough a unif ied int erf ace, t he BOM Def init ions
manager.
• BOMs have f ull merging, sort ing, and grouping capabilit y – even on hidden columns.
• You have cont rol of object list ing order in t ables.
• Column heading aliasing.
• BOM t ables use st andard Aut oCAD t ables.
• BOM Funct ionalit y is ident ical regardless of drawing t ype.
• Consist ent it em numbering across all sheet s.
• Updat ing wit hout losing f ormat t ing.
BOM Funct i onal i t y Overvi ew
Shi pConstruct or project s can have any number of user-cust omizable BOM def init ions available f or use in t arget
product ion drawing t ypes. As shown in t he f ollowing diagram, mult iple t ables can be insert ed in a product ion drawing,
each ref erencing a mast er list .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
48
One mast er list exist s per BOM def init ion. The f irst t ime a BOM t able is insert ed in a drawing, it s mast er list is creat ed.
Subsequent t able insert ions all ref erence t he init ial mast er list .
BOM cont ent is det ermined at t he t ime of BOM updat e. Collect ors, specif ied by t he BOM def init ion, organize t he object s in
t he drawing int o relevant groups (f or example, Pipe, Accessories, and Spools) and process t he BOM dat a int o dat a blocks.
The dat a blocks are t hen compiled int o t he mast er list wit h t he t ables being updat ed t o ref lect t he mast er list dat a.
The order of t he it ems list ed in t he BOM depends on primary and secondary f act ors. The primary order is det ermined by
t he collector. Each collect or provides it s own f ormat t ed dat a block. Wit hin each dat a block, t he row order is det ermined
by t he f ield sort order specif ied of t he BOM def init ion.
Collect ors process t he dat a f or t heir respect ive object s according t o t he f ormat specif ied by t he BOM def init ion. Theref ore,
each block of collect or dat a is sort ed according t o t he field sort order specif ied by t he BOM def init ion.
It em numbering is perf ormed on t he mast er list at t he t ime of BOM updat e. Tables insert ed wit h t he List Only Visible
opt ion ret rieve t heir it em numbering f rom t he mast er list t o ensure consist ent numbering across all sheet s. It em numbers
can have user-def ined pref ix t ext (f or example, SP–001).
To underst and how collect or use works, we will use an example: You have a Pipe arrangement drawing t hat cont ains
st ruct ure, pipe, and HVAC, and you need t wo dif f erent bills of mat erials: a pipe st ock BOM and spool list .
The pipe st ock BOM must list all pipe it ems, HVAC it ems, and connect ion accessories, but not st ruct ure. This can be
achieved by creat ing t wo BOM def init ions, one f or t he st ocks and one f or t he spool list .
The st ock BOM should list t he object s in a specif ic order: Pipe object s, HVAC object s, Pipe connect ion accessories, and
t hen HVAC connect ion accessories.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
49
To creat e a st ock BOM t hat accomplishes t he requirement , a BOM def init ion is creat ed t hat includes t he f ollowing
collect ors: Pipe Part , HVAC Part , Pipe Connect ion Accessories, and HVAC Connect ion Accessories. Order t hem as
specif ied above; t he BOM list s t he it ems in t he order specif ied
To creat e t he spool list , anot her BOM def init ion is creat ed t hat only includes t he pipe spool collect or.
Bot h of t hese BOMs can exist in t he same drawing.
Virt ually all ot her aspect s of a BOM can be cust omized, including t he f ollowing:
• It ems included and t heir order.
• User-def ined column header t ext .
• Each f ield can be sort ed ascending or descending, in user-def ined sequence.
• Rows can be merged dependent or independent of equivalent f ield dat a.
• Field propert ies such as unit s, display f ormat (decimals or f ract ions), and rounding can be edit ed individually.
BOM Def i ni t i ons Manager
ShipConst ruct or int egrat es all Bill of Mat erials management t hrough t he BOM Def init ions manager. The BOM Def init ions
manager let s you creat e and edit exist ing BOMs f or all product ion drawing t ypes.
Access t he BOM Def init ions manager t hrough Manager (General > Product ion Out put > Bill Of Mat erials (page 320)).
To creat e a BOM def init ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Product ion Out put > Bill Of Mat erials (page 320) t o open t he BOM Def init ions window.
3. Select t he t ype of drawing in t he BOM Def init ions list t hat you want t o creat e a BOM f or.
4. Cl i ck New.
5. Ent er t he St yle Name and f ill in t he remaining it ems in t he BOM Def init ions list .
6. Wit h t he st yle select ed, Click Add/ Remove in t he Fields sect i on.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
50
7. Place a check next t o each f ield you want t o include in t he BOM. For BOMs t hat include st ruct ure part s only include
f ields t hat have Module S. P is f or Pipe, H is f or HVAC.
Not e: For st ruct ure BOMs you should always include Part Name and Quant it y f ields. It em # is required f or labeling
part s.
8. Cl i ck OK t o ret urn t o t he BOM Def init ions window. You will see t hat t he f ields are added t o t he f ields list .
9. Use t he and but t ons t o organize t he order of t he columns. The t op f ield will be t he lef t most column in t he
t abl e.
10. Review t he Collect ors sect ions t o ensure t he t ypes of part s t hat you want in t he BOM t able are in t he Included
collect or list . Assign a label st yle t o each collect or t hat you want labeled.
11. Cl i ck OK t o close t he BOM Def init ions.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
51
Predef i ned Assembl y Format
The predef ined assembly f ormat allows you t o set up which t emplat es are used f or each assembly level when t he Use
Predef ined Templat es opt ion is select ed.
Set t ing up t he predef ined t emplat es requires an Assembly Template drawing. See Assembly Drawings (page 212).
User-Def i ned At t ri but es
User-def ined at t ribut es let you def ine cust om at t ribut es t o hold arbit rary dat a associat ed wit h a part (f or example, model
number, process codes, or cust om ident if iers), making it easier t o manage part s. You can set up user-def ined at t ribut es
f or St ruct ure, Pipe, and HVAC. At t ribut es assigned t o part s can have f our st at es: not required, required and deferrable,
required and not deferrable, and f inally, required default deferred. St ock at t ribut es have t wo: required or not required.
The same at t ribut e can be assigned t o dif f erent object t ypes, each wit h t heir own required st at e and def aul t val ue.
Creat e a User-Def i ned At t ri but e
To creat e a user-def ined at t ribut e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > User-Def ined At t ribut es (page 326) t o open t he User-Def i ned At t ri but es window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
52
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he at t ribut e and press Ent er.
5. Opt ionally, add a descript ion.
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he User-Def ined At t ribut es window.
Assi gn a User-Def i ned At t ri but e t o a Part or St ock
To assign a user-def ined at t ribut e t o a part or st ock
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > User-Def ined At t ribut es (page 326) t o open t he User-Def i ned At t ri but es window.
3. Select t he at t ribut e on t he lef t side of t he window
4. Select t he part or st ock on t he right side of t he window.
5. Cl i ck t he right arrow but t on .
The at t ribut e is now list ed beneat h t he part or st ock.
Not e: To remove an at t ribut e f rom a part or st ock, select t he at t ribut e on t he right side of t he window and click
t he l ef t arrow but t on .
6. Set t he required st at e.
7. Opt ionally, set a def ault value.
8. Cl i ck OK t o close t he User-Def ined At t ribut es window.
When you add a user-def ined at t ribut e t o st ocks or a st ock size, t he at t ribut e will appear as an addit ional column in
t he st ock list (or st ock size list ). Required at t ribut es appear wit h a * af t er t heir name.
When you add a user-def ined at t ribut e t o part s, t he at t ribut e will appear on t he User At t ribut es t ab of t he Part
Propert i es window. Required at t ribut es will already be assigned t o t he part . See Part User-Def i ned At t ri but es (page
191).
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
53
Def aul t Val ues on Requi red User-Def i ned At t ri but es
Required user at t ribut es do not have t o have a def ault value, wit h one not able except ion. If t he at t ribut e is eit her
“ required” (f or st ocks and st ock sizes) or “ required not def errable” (f or part s), and t hose object s already exist , t hen a
def ault value must be provided.
For example, if an at t ribut e is assigned t o t he plat e part t ype, and it is set as “ required not def errable” , and t here are no
plat e part s creat ed yet , t hen t he at t ribut e does not need a def ault value. However, if some plat e part s already exist , a
def ault value must be provided.
This is because an object cannot have a required at t ribut e wit hout a value: all t he exist ing object s will need a value f or
t he new at t ribut e.
This requirement prevent s t he User-Def ined At t ribut es window f rom closing, if t here are any missing def ault values. A
message window will appear list ing t he at t ribut e name and t he object t ype f or t hat at t ribut es.
Import a User-Def i ned At t ri but e
To export a user-def ined at t ribut e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > User-Def ined At t ribut es (page 326) t o open t he User-Def i ned At t ri but es window.
3. Click Import UDAs but t on
4. Browse t o t he select ed xml or pro f ile
5. Click OK
St ock Cat al og
St ocks are t he raw mat erials t hat shipyard workers f abricat e part s f rom. There are several dif f erent t ypes of st ruct ure
st ocks:
Plat e st ocks – These are solid plat es used t o f abricat e plat e part s. See Pl at e Part s (page 154).
Corrugat ed plat e st ocks – These are corrugat ed plat es used t o f abricat e cert ain plat e part s. See Corrugat ed Plat es (page
175).
Prof ile st ocks – These are used t o f abricat e st if f eners and f aceplat es. See St i f f eners (page 163) and Faceplat es (page
173).
Plank st ocks – These st ocks are used t o aut omat ically divide a predef ined area (f or example, a deck or bulkhead) int o
planks. See Pl anks (page 184).
Creat e a St ock
To creat e a st ock
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Select t he t ype of st ock you want t o creat e.
To creat e a plat e st ock, corrugat ed plat e st ock, or plank st ock, select Plat e, Corrugat ed Plat e, or Pl ank.
To creat e a prof ile st ock, select t he t ype of prof ile st ock (f or example, Angle or Bulb Flat ).
4. Cl i ck New.
5. Type a name f or t he st ock and press Ent er.
6. Set t he St ock Propert ies (see below). See St ruct ure St ock Cat alog (page 324) f or more det ails.
7. Cl i ck Edi t Si zes t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Available Sizes window and specif y t he available sizes.
8. Cl i ck Apply t o save t he changes.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
54
9. Cl i ck OK t o close t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
Pl at e St ock Propert ies
Name – The name of t he st ock.
Thi ckness -- The t hickness of t he plat e st ock.
Mat eri al – The mat erial t he st ock is made of .
Col or – The color used t o draw part s made of t his st ock
Flg Inner Rad(X Thick) – This value is mult iplied by t he t hickness of t he plat e and used when f langing a plat e. The value
represent s t he inside radius of t he f lange. It af f ect s bot h t he solid represent at ion of t he f lange and t he expanded
represent at i on. Each f lange inst ance can override t his value.
Nest Part Of f set – The minimum dist ance bet ween t wo nest ed part s on t his plat e st ock.
Nest Edge Of f set – The minimum dist ance bet ween t he edge of a nest ed part and t he edge of t he plat e st ock.
NC Machine – Let s you set propert ies f or t he plat e st ock t hat relat e t o t he NC machine t hat will be used t o cut part s
nest ed on t his plat e st ock.
NC Machine, Enabled – This is t he NC machine t hat will cut any nest s creat ed f rom t his st ock. The Enabled check box
must be checked t o ent er t he f ollowing inf ormat ion. A check in t he check box indicat es t hat t he displayed plat e
st ock can be cut on t hat NC machine.
Cut Feed – This is t he rat e at which t he NC machine will be able t o cut t his plat e st ock. ShipConst ruct or uses t his
value t o est imat e t he t ime necessary t o process t he nest .
Mark Feed – This is the rat e at which t he NC machine will mark t his plat e st ock. ShipConst ruct or uses t his value t o
est imat e t he t ime necessary t o process t he nest .
Pierce Time – This is t he amount of t ime required f or t he NC machine t o pierce t he plat e st ock. ShipConst ruct or uses
t his value t o est imat e t he t ime needed t o process t he nest .
Bridge Widt h – This is t he widt h of bridges bet ween part s nest ed on t his plat e st ock. (Bridges connect t wo adjacent
pl at e part s.) See Set Up Bridges (page 262).
Manuf act urer – The manuf act urer of t he st ock (opt ional).
Descript ion – A descript ion of t he st ock (opt ional).
Max St rain Threshold (%) – The maximum allowable st rain on a plat e when expanding a curved plat e. A warning appears
when t he t hreshold is exceeded. Posit ive st rain values ref er t o expansion. Negat ive st rain values ref er t o compression.
This value is det ermined by experience f or dif f erent plat e mat erials and t hicknesses using dif f erent f orming met hods.
Min St rain Threshold (%) - The minimum allowable st rain on a plat e when expanding a curved plat e. A warning appears
when t he t hreshold is exceeded. Posit ive st rain values ref er t o expansion. Negat ive st rain values ref er t o compression.
This value is det ermined by experience f or dif f erent plat e mat erials and t hicknesses using dif f erent f orming met hods.
Corrugat ed Plat e St ock Propert ies
For a descript ion of general st ock propert ies, see Plat e St ock Propert ies (page 54). In addit ion t o t he propert ies, you can
edit a corrugat ed plat e st ock’s shape drawing.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
55
Shape Drawi ng
Cl i ck t o creat e or edit t he corrugat ed plat e st ock’s shape drawing (using polylines and poi nt s). The shape must be an
open 2D polyline in t he WCS XY plane. This polyline, and t he bend line point markers, must be t he only object s in t he
drawing. The lower lef t corner of t he polyline is t he insert ion point when you creat e t he solid. Creat e point s using
Aut oCAD’s poi nt command, and place t hem at key locat ions on t he prof ile t o represent bending point s. These will be
used t o generat e bend lines when generat ing expanded geomet ry. Bend lines are st raight lines on t he surf ace of t he f lat
plat e used t o f orm t he corrugat ion prof ile. They are always parallel t o each ot her.
Corrugat i on prof i l e wi t h hi ghl i ght ed bend l i ne markers
Prof ile St ock Propert i es
For a descript ion of general st ock propert ies, see Plat e St ock Propert ies (page 54). In addit ion t o t he general propert ies,
prof ile st ock propert ies include t he f ollowing.
Shape – The shape of t he st ock’s cross sect ion. To creat e or edit st ock prof ile shapes, see Creat e a Prof ile St ock Shape
(page 56).
Kerf – The gap, or kerf , bet ween part s in a prof ile nest .
Smallest Remnant – The minimum lengt h of t his st ock t hat can be used f or creat ing st ock remnant s. This is used during
prof ile nest ing. Lef t over pieces smaller t han t his value will be considered scrap.
Cut out – List s t he cut out t ype.
Not e: The Cut out opt ion does not appear if you have not def ined any cut out t ypes. To def ine cut out t ypes, click Cut out
Types in t he St ruct ure St ock Cat al og.
Plank St ock Propert ies
For a descript ion of general st ock propert ies, see Plat e St ock Propert ies (page 54). In addit ion t o t he general propert ies,
plank st ocks have t he f ollowing propert ies and opt ions.
Wi dt h – The ef f ect ive widt h of an individual plank (t hat is, t he t ot al plank widt h minus any overlap).
Shape Drawing – Click t o creat e or edit t he plank st ock’s cross sect ion shape. The shape can consist of circles or
pol yl i nes. The shape must represent one closed region but can have holes.
Edi t a St ock
To edit a st ock
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Select t he st ock t ype t o list st ocks of t hat t ype.
4. Set t he St ock Propert ies. See Creat e a St ock (page 53).
5. Cl i ck Apply t o save t he changes.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
56
6. Cl i ck OK t o save t he changes and close t he St ruct ure St ock Cat al og.
Creat e a Prof i l e St ock Shape
To creat e a prof ile st ock shape
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Cl i ck Edit Shapes t o open t he Prof ile Shapes window.
4. Under Prof ile St andards select t he t ype of prof ile st ock t hat you want t o creat e a prof ile shape f or.
5. Cl i ck New.
6. Type a name f or t he prof ile shape and press Ent er.
7. Set t he prof ile st ock Propert ies (see below).
8. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Prof ile Shapes window.
9. Cl i ck OK t o close t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
Angle St ock Shape Propert ies
Shape Name – The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
57
Web Height -- A
Flange Lengt h – B
Web Thickness – C
Flange Thickness –D
Flange Fillet Radius – E
Corner Fillet Radius – F
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
58
Web Fillet Radius – G
Bulb Flat St ock Shape Propert i es
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
Web Height – A
Flange Lengt h – B
Web Thickness – C
Bulb Radius – D
Inside Corner Radius – E
Web Fillet Radius – F
Flange Taper Angle – G
Bulb Nose Height – H
Channel St ock Shape Propert ies
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
59
Web Height – A
Flange Lengt h – B
Web Thickness – C
Flange Thickness – D
Flange Fillet Radius – E
Corner Fillet Radius – F
Flange Taper Angle – G
Fl at Bar St ock Shape Propert i es
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
60
Widt h – A
Thi ckness – B
Rect Tube St ock Propert ies
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
61
Hei ght – A
Wi dt h – B
Thi ckness – C
Corner Radius – D
Round Bar St ock Shape Propert i es
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
62
Out er Diamet er – A
St ruct ural Pi pe St ock Shape Propert i es
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
63
Out er Diamet er – A
Inner Diamet er – B
Tee St ock Shape Propert ies
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
64
Web Height – A
Flange Lengt h – B
Web Thickness – C
Flange Thickness – D
Flange Fillet Radius – E
Corner Fillet Radius – F
W St ock Shape Propert ies
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
65
Web Height – A
Flange Lengt h – B
Web Thickness – C
Flange Thickness – D
Flange Fillet Radius – E
Corner Fillet Radius – F
Flange Taper Angle – G
Cust om St ock Shape Propert i es
Shape Name -- The name of t he shape. The shape is usually named af t er t he prof ile st ock.
The shape can be only one cont iguous region t hat is def ined by mult iple closed polylines or circles. The moldline point of
t he shape is t aken t o be t he (0,0) point in t he cross sect ion drawing.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
66
Not e: Component t rimming of st if f eners does not apply t o cust om shaped st ocks.
Edi t a Prof i l e St ock Shape
To edit a prof ile st ock shape
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Cl i ck Edit Shapes t o open t he Prof ile Shapes window.
4. Under Prof ile St andards select t he prof ile shape.
5. Set t he prof ile st ock Propert ies (see Creat e a Prof ile St ock Shape (page 56)).
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Prof ile Shapes window.
7. Cl i ck OK t o close t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
Creat e a Cut out Type
Cut out s are added t o t he plat e part af t er t he part is def ined. The part solid is aut omat ically updat ed wit h t he product ion
inf ormat ion when a cut out is added. Bef ore a prof ile can creat e a cut out t hrough a plat e part , you must creat e a cut out
t ype. That is, t he st ock of t he prof ile must have a cut out shape associat ed wit h t he st ock.
To creat e a cut out t ype
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Cl i ck Cut out Shapes t o open t he Cut out s window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
67
4. Cl i ck New Type.
5. Type a name f or t he cut out t ype and press Ent er.
6. Cl i ck OK t o save t he changes.
The new cut out t ype will be list ed as a column in t he st ock list in t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
Creat e a Cut out
To creat e a cut out shape and associat e it wit h a st ock
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Cl i ck Cut out Shapes t o open t he Cut out s window.
4. Cl i ck New Cut out . Select ing a Cut out Type and a Prof ile will aut omat ically name t he new cut out f rom t he Prof i l e wit h
capit al let t ers f rom t he Cut out Type. Typically, you will name t he cut out f rom t he size of t he prof ile.
5. Type a name f or t he cut out and press Ent er.
6. Click Edit Cut out t o edit t he shape of t he cut out . You cannot f inish creat ing a cut out wit hout edit ing it . You will see a
when no polyline is assigned t o a cut out .
7. ShipConst ruct or will swit ch applicat ions t o Aut oCAD.
8. If you have a prof ile select ed or t he cut out is associat ed wit h a st ock, you will see t he f ollowing window.
9. Cl i ck Yes t o insert a polyline f or t he cross sect ion of t he prof ile st ock. This polyline can remain af t er you are f inished
because it is f lagged as being a prof ile and not t he cut out .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
68
10. You can now draw t he cut out shape. If you are creat ing a cut out f or a prof i l e, be aware of t he posit ion and
orient at ion of t he prof ile.
Not e: The cut out does not need t o ext end below Y=0 because ShipConst ruct or ext ends t he ends of t he polyline t o
account f or cases when t he cut out would not int ersect t he edge of a plat e. The cut out should be an open polyline.
11. You will see a window t hat l et s you save t he cut out t o t he dat abase or cancel t he edit .
12. Cl i ck Save t o save t he cut out t o t he dat abase.
13. Select t he correct cut out t ype.
14. Cl i ck OK.
15. You will see t he Cut out Type columns on t he right side of t he St ock Propert i es list .
16. Select t he prof i l e st ock t o add t he cut out t o.
17. In t he Cut out Type column, select t he correct cut out shape f rom t he drop-down list .
Vi ew Cut out Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed cut out . A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es t hat t he
cut out is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic cut out
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Catal og.
3. Cl i ck Cut out Shapes t o open t he Cut out s window.
4. Select t he cut out you want .
5. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed cut out .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
69
Import St ocks
To import st ocks
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open the St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Cl i ck Import t o open a File Browser.
4. Select a project f ile (* .PRO) or XML f ile (* .XML).
5. Cl i ck Open.
Export St ocks
Export ing a st ock includes t he sizes of t he st ock, endcut s associat ed wit h t he st ock, and cut out s associat ed wit h t he
st ock.
To export st ocks
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. In t he st ruct ure st ock list , check t he check boxes f or t he st ocks t hat you want t o export .
4. Cl i ck Export XML t o open a File Browser.
5. Type a name f or t he XML f ile.
6. Cl i ck Save.
Vi ew St ock Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed st ock. A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es t hat t he
st ock is being used by part s.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
70
To list all part s using a specif ic st ock
6. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
7. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
8. Select t he st ock you want .
9. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed st ock.
Pi ecemark St yl es
Piecemark st yles cont rol how piecemarks are f ormat t ed on plat es, st if f eners, f aceplat es, and st andard part s.
Creat e a Pi ecemark St yl e
To creat e a piecemark st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Piecemark St yles (page 326) t o open t he Piecemark St yles window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
71
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a St yl e Name f or t he piecemark st yle and press Ent er.
5. Set t he opt ions f or t he piecemark st yle:
Text St yl e – The t ext st yle f or t he piecemark. See Text St yles (page 36).
Text Si ze – The size of piecemark t ext .
Text NC Process – Whet her t he piecemark’s t ext will be marked on part s (Mark) or not (No Process) during NC
cut t ing. This opt ion only applies t o part s t hat are NC cut .
Bubbl e St yl e – The st yle of bubble surrounding t he piecemark’s t ext .
Bubble NC Process – Whet her t he piecemark will be marked on part s (Mark) or not (No Process) during NC cut t ing.
6. In t he Assign St yles list , change t he Piecemark St yle f or t he Piecemark Type you want t o assign t he new st yle t o.
Click in t he area of t he specif ic Piecemark St yle t o show t he arrow f or t he drop-down list .
7. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Pi ecemark St yl es window.
Edi t Pi ecemark St yl e
To edit a piecemark st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Piecemark St yles (page 326) t o open t he Piecemark St yles window.
3. Doubl e-click t he f ield t o edit and ent er a new value.
4. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Pi ecemark St yl es window.
Act i vat e a Pi ecemark St yl e
To act ivat e a piecemark st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Piecemark St yles (page 326) t o open t he Piecemark St yles window.
3. In t he Assign St yles pane, select t he Piecemark Type.
4. Select t he Piecemark St yle f or t he select ed Piecemark Type.
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Pi ecemark St yl es window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
72
Vi ew Pi ecemark Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part t ypes t hat use a select ed piecemark st yle. A check mark in t he In Use column
indicat es t hat t he piecemark st yle is being used by part t ypes.
To list all part t ypes using a specif ic piecemark st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Piecemark St yles (page 326) t o open t he Piecemark St yles window.
3. Select t he piecemark st yle you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part t ypes using t he select ed piecemark st yle.
Ori ent at i on Icon
An orient at ion icon is a symbol t hat you can insert ont o plat e part s t o ident if y t heir orient at ion. Orient at ion icons can
simplif y assembly and help avoid cost ly mist akes.
An orient at ion icon consist s of t wo direct ion arrows and keywords indicat ing t he direct ions. There are t wo set s of direct ion
keywords, St arboard/ Port Only and Inboard/ Out board Only. You can choose t o use eit her set or bot h set s. You can also
specif y t he t ext used f or each direct ion.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
73
To set up an orient at ion icon
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Orient at ion Icon (page 327) t o open t he Orient at ion Icon window.
3. To insert an orient at ion icon ont o plat e part s by def ault , t urn on Insert Orient at ion Icons in Plat e Part s.
4. Set t he Propert i es.
5. To specif y t he t ext used f or direct ion keywords (in any language), set t he Direct ion Aliases.
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Orient at ion Icon window.
When creat ing part s, you can uncheck t he Insert Orient at ion Icon checkbox t o not insert an orient at ion f or t hat part . This
set t ing is remembered when creat ing subsequent plat e part s in t hat drawing.
Markl i ne St yl es
Markline st yles cont rol how marklines are f ormat t ed on st if f eners, f lange f oldlines, corrugat ed plat e f oldlines, and dat um
l i nes. Al l marklines on plat e part s have a st yle t hat is cont rolled in t he Markline St yles window.
Creat e a Markl i ne St yl e
To creat e a markline st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
74
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he markline st yle and press Ent er.
5. Set t he markline st yle Propert i es. See St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329).
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Markline St yles window.
Vi ew Markl i ne St yl e Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed markline st yle. A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es
t hat t he markline st yle is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic markline st yle
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
3. Select t he markline st yle you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed markline st yle.
Set Up Markl i ne Symbol s
Markline symbols are used on marklines t o generat e special symbols. Markline symbols l et you cust omi ze al l generated
symbols.
When set t ing up symbols, it is recommended t o draw t hem t o a nominal size 1. This l et s you specif y a size in t he
markline as t he act ual size you want f or product ion.
Valid object s f or markline symbols are lines, arcs, circles, and polylines.
When you creat e a markline symbol, t he (0,0) point in t he drawing is t he ref erence point used when adding it t o a
markline. If t he symbol is int ended t o be at t he end of a markline, draw t he symbol in t he posit ive X direct ion. When t he
symbol is applied t o the end of t he markline, t he symbol is mirrored. For st if f ener marklines, t he t hrow direct ion of t he
st if f ener is in t he posit ive Y direct ion.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
75
Creat e a Markl i ne Symbol
To creat e a markline symbol
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
3. Cl i ck Edit Symbols t o open t he Markline Symbols window.
4. Cl i ck New.
5. Type a name f or t he markline symbol and press Ent er.
6. To break t he markline where each symbol is insert ed, set Break Markline t o Yes.
7. Cl i ck Edit Symbol.
ShipConst ruct or opens a blank drawing.
Not e: A window named Save Mark Symbol appears in t he t op lef t corner of t he screen.
8. Use Aut oCAD’s drawing t ools t o creat e t he symbol out of lines, arcs, polylines, or ellipses.
9. Cl i ck Save in t he Save Mark Symbol window.
ShipConst ruct or ret urns t o t he Markline Symbols window.
10. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Markl i ne Symbols window.
11. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Markline St yles window.
Edi t a Markl i ne Symbol
To edit a markline symbol
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
3. Cl i ck Edit Symbols t o open t he Markline Symbols window.
4. Select t he markline symbol you want t o edit .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
76
5. Cl i ck Edit Symbol.
ShipConst ruct or opens t he symbol’s drawing.
Not e: A window named Save Mark Symbol appears in t he t op lef t corner of t he screen.
6. Use Aut oCAD’s drawing t ools t o edit t he symbol.
7. Cl i ck Save in t he Save Mark Symbol window.
ShipConst ruct or ret urns t o t he Markline St yles window.
8. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Markline St yles window.
Del et e a Markl i ne Symbol
To delet e a markline symbol
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
3. Cl i ck Edit Symbols t o open t he Markline Symbols window.
4. Select t he markline symbol t o delet e.
5. Cl ick Del et e.
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Markl i ne Symbols window.
7. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Markline St yles window.
Vi ew Markl i ne Symbol Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he markline st yles t hat use a select ed markline symbol. A check mark in t he In Use
column indicat es t hat t he markline symbol is being used by markline st yles.
To list all markline st yles using a specif ic markline symbol
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
3. Cl i ck Edit Symbols t o open t he Markline Symbols window.
4. Select t he markline symbol you want .
5. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all markline st yles using t he select ed markline symbol.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
77
Assi gn Markl i ne St yl es
You can cont rol which markline st yles can be used f or st if f eners, f lange f oldlines, corrugat ed plat e f oldlines, and dat um
l i nes.
To assign markline st yles
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
3. Cl i ck Assi gn St yl es t o open t he Assign Markline St yles window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
78
4. Under Assigned St yles, select a Markline Type.
5. Under Current St yles, select a Markline St yle.
6. Cl i ck Add St yle t o add t he select ed markline st yle t o t he select ed markline t ype.
7. Cont inue adding markline st yles t o markline t ypes.
8. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Assign Markline St yles window.
9. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Markline St yles window.
Vi ew Markl i ne St yl e Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a markline st yle of a markline t ype. A check mark in t he In Use column
indicat es t hat t he markline st yle of a markline t ype is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic markline st yle of a markline t ype
5. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
6. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Markline St yles (page 329) t o open t he Markline St yles window.
7. Cl i ck Assi gn St yl es t o open t he Assign Markline St yles window.
8. Select t he markline st yle of a markline t ype t hat you want .
9. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed markline st yle of a markline t ype.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
79
Fl ange Cat al og
A flange is t he result of bending t he edge of a plat e. A f lange is int ended t o st rengt hen t he plat e or at t ach t he plat e t o
anot her object . You must predef ine t he various t ypes of f langes you plan t o use in your project in Manager. During
st ruct ural modeling, you can t hen insert a f lange ont o a plat e by select ing it f rom t he list of pre-def ined f langes.
Creat e a Fl ange St andard
To creat e a f lange
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Flange Cat alog (page 333) t o open t he Flange Cat alog window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
80
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he f lange and press Ent er.
5. Set t he values f or t he f lange. See Flange Library Window (page 334).
When you select a f ield t o edit , t he corresponding value becomes highlight ed in t he image on t he right of t he
window.
6. Cl i ck OK t o cl ose t he Flange Cat alog window.
The bend radius of t he f lange f or product ion is det ermined by t he f lange and f oldline correct ions. The bend radius f or t he
solid is set f rom t he Flg Inner Rad (X Thick) column in t he Plat e St ock Edit or. This can be overridden f or each inst ance.
Edi t a Fl ange
To edit a f lange
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Flange Cat alog (page 333) t o open t he Flange Cat alog window.
3. Click t he f ield of t he f lange you want t o edit .
4. Ent er a new value or set t ing.
5. Press Ent er
Del et e a Fl ange
To delet e a f lange
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Flange Cat alog (page 333) t o open t he Flange Cat alog window.
3. Select t he f lange you want t o delet e.
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
Import Fl anges
To import f langes
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Flange Cat alog (page 333) t o open t he Flange Cat alog window.
3. Cl i ck Import t o open a File Browser.
4. Select a project f ile (* .PRO) or XML f ile (* .XML).
5. Cl i ck Open.
Export Fl anges
To export f langes
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Flange Cat alog (page 333) t o open t he Flange Cat alog window.
3. Check t he Export check boxes f or t he f langes t o export .
4. Cl i ck Export XML t o open a File Browser.
5. Ent er a name f or t he XML f ile.
6. Cl i ck Save.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
81
Vi ew Fl ange Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed f lange. A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es t hat t he
f l ange is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic f lange
10. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
11. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Flange Cat alog (page 333) t o open t he Flange Cat alog window.
12. Select t he f lange you want .
13. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed f lange.
Corner Treat ment s
Corner t reat ment s def ine dif f erent t ypes of scallops, f illet s, and snipes t hat you can apply t o plat e part s during det ailing.
Changing t he corner t reat ment st andard changes all inst ances of t he corner t reat ment s.
Creat e a Corner Treat ment
To creat e a corner t reat ment
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Corner Treat ment s (page 336) t o open t he Corner Treat ment s window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
82
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he corner t reat ment and press Ent er.
5. Select t he Corner Treat ment Type: Scal l op, Fillet , or Sni pe.
6. Set t he corner t reat ment Radius.
7. Cl i ck Apply t o save t he changes, or click OK t o save t he changes and close t he Corner Treat ment s window.
Del et e a Corner Treat ment
To delet e a corner t reat ment
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Corner Treat ment s (page 336) t o open t he Corner Treat ment s window.
3. Select t he corner t reat ment .
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
5. Cl i ck Apply t o save t he changes, or click OK t o save t he changes and close t he Corner Treat ment s window.
Vi ew Corner Treat ment Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed corner t reat ment . A check mark in t he In Use column
indicat es t hat t he corner t reat ment is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic corner t reat ment
1. Choose Shi pConstruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Corner Treat ment s (page 336) t o open t he Corner Treat ment s window.
3. Select t he corner t reat ment you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed corner t reat ment .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
83
Pl at e Green St andards
You can now def ine one or more st andards f or plat e green (f or example, uni t break green and assembly green). These
can t hen be added t o plat e part s in a paramet ric f ashion. You can lat er change t he value (t he size of t he ext ra mat erial),
and all part s using t he st andard will be updat ed.
Not e: There must be a markline st yle def ined and assigned t o pl at e green bef ore you can open t his window.
Creat e a Pl at e Green St andard
To creat e a plat e green st andard
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Green St andards (page 336) t o open t he Plat e Green St andards window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
84
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he plat e green st andard and press Ent er.
5. Set t he Wi dt h.
6. Select t he Markl i ne St yl e.
Cl i ck Apply t o save t he changes, or click OK t o save t he changes and close t he Plat e Green St andards window.
Vi ew Pl at e Green St andard Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed plat e green st andard. A check mark in t he In Use column
indicat es t hat t he plat e green st andard is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic plat e green st andard
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Green St andards (page 336) t o open t he Plat e Green St andards window.
3. Select t he plat e green st andard you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed plat e green st andard.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
85
Bevel St andards
A bevel st andard is a def init ion of a bevel t hat can be used by NC-Pyros t o generat e bevel cut t ing NC codes.
Creat e a Bevel St andard
To creat e a bevel st andard
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Bevel St andards (page 338) t o open t he Bevel St andards window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
86
3. Cl i ck New t o creat e a new bevel code.
4. Assign t he bevel code t o plat e st ocks as f ollows:
Under Bevels, select t he bevel code t o assign t o plat e st ocks. Under Assign t o St ock, click t he check boxes f or t he
plat e st ocks t o assign t he bevel code t o.
5. Under Assign t o St ock, ent er t he values f or Lef t Angle, Lef t Height , Right Angle, and Right Height . (Lef t and right ref er
t o t he t wo out er t orches of a t hree t orch head.)
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Bevel St andards window.
Vi ew Bevel St andard Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed bevel st andard. A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es
t hat t he bevel st andard is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic bevel st andard
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Bevel St andards (page 338) t o open t he Bevel St andards window.
3. Select t he bevel st andard you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed bevel st andard.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
87
Lef t and Ri ght Expl ai ned
The f ollowing view is of a plat e wit h a bevel lying on t he NC t able. This would be t he case when t he t orch is t raveling int o
t he screen.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
88
Aut omat i c Bevel s
ShipConst ruct or can add bevels t o plat e part s aut omat ically. Aut omat ic beveling will add a simple bevel cut t o plat e part s
based on t he angle of t he hull surf ace adjacent t o t he plat e. Bevel angl es are cal cul at ed aut omat ically and st ored wit h
const ruct ionlines. The angle is det ermined f rom t he angle of t he hull surf ace at each point on t he line, as shown here:
If t he moldline const ruct ionline shown here is used t o creat e a plat e part , bevels will be added t o t he part f rom t he raw
angles st ored on t he const ruct ion line. Bevels are creat ed dynamically and updat ed wit h t he const ruct ionline – if t he
angles change, t he bevels on t he part will be updat ed t o ref lect t he new angles.
Aut omat ic beveling is conf igured t hrough t he Bevel Set t ings dialog.
To conf igure aut omat ic beveling:
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > Bevel Set t ings (page 338) t o open t he Bevel Set t i ngs window.
The Bevel Set t i ngs window is displayed. The conf igurat ion set t ings are explained below.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
89
Enable Aut omat ic Bevels – Turns automat ic bevels on or of f . When t his checkbox is checked, bevels will be added t o all
plat es t hat have bevel angles on t heir const ruct ion lines, including plat es t hat have already been creat ed.
Boundary Type – Select s t he t ype of boundary t o creat e when adding aut omat ic bevels. Largest perimet er will creat e a
boundary f rom t he f art hest out side pat h around t he part . This may be t he markside out line, non-markside out line, or a
combinat ion of bot h. Normal – Markside will always use t he markside out line. The boundary t ype will depend on t he
machine used t o cut t he plat es.
Display Set t ings – These set t ings af f ect how t he bevel inf ormat ion is displayed in t he model drawing and how it is
export ed t o NCPyros:
Text St yl e – The t ext st yle used in t he model drawing used when displaying bevels.
Text Si ze – The size of t he t ext used t o display bevels.
Text Of f set – The dist ance f rom t he edge of t he plat e t o t he bevel t ext .
Towards Plat e Symbol – Symbol t o display in f ront of t ext f or bevels t hat are cut t owards t he plat e.
Away From Plat e Symbol – Symbol t o display in f ront of t ext f or bevels t hat are cut away f rom plat e.
Export Deci mal Pl aces – Number of decimal places t o use when export ing bevel inf ormat ion t o NC Pyros.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
90
NC Machi nes
NC machines cut plat es f rom plat e st ock. You must set up your NC machines bef ore plat e nest ing occurs. See Pl at e
Nest ing (page 233).
Creat e an NC Machi ne
To creat e an NC machine
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > NC Machines (page 337) t o open t he NC Machines window.
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he NC machine and press Ent er.
5. Set t he Fast Feed (f ast t ravel f eed rat e). See NC Machines Window (page 338).
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he NC Machines window.
Edi t an NC Machi ne
To edit an NC machine
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > NC Machines (page 337) t o open t he NC Machines window.
3. Doubl e-click t he f ield you want t o edit , ent er t he new value you want , and press Ent er.
4. Cl i ck OK t o close t he NC Machines window.
Del et e an NC Machi ne
To delet e an NC machine
Not e: You cannot delet e an NC machine t hat has been assigned t o a plat e. You must f irst delet e any plat es t hat are
using t he NC machine.
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
91
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > NC Machines (page 337) t o open t he NC Machines window.
3. Select t he NC machine.
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he NC Machines window.
Import NC Machi nes
To import NC machines
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > NC Machines (page 337) t o open t he NC Machines window.
3. Cl i ck Import t o open a File Browser.
4. Select a project f ile (* .PRO) or XML f ile (* .XML).
5. Cl i ck Open.
Export NC Machi nes
To export NC machines
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > NC Machines (page 337) t o open t he NC Machines window.
3. Check t he Export check boxes f or t he NC machines t o export .
4. Cl i ck Export XML t o open a File Browser.
5. Ent er a name f or t he XML f ile.
6. Cl i ck Save.
Vi ew NC Machi ne Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he plat e nest s t hat use a select ed NC machine. A check mark in t he In Use column
indicat es t hat t he NC machine is being used by plat e nest s.
To list all plat e nest s using a specif ic NC machine
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Plat es > NC Machines (page 337) t o open t he NC Machines window.
3. Select t he NC machine you want .
4. Cli ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all plat e nest s using t he select ed NC machine.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
92
Endcut s
An endcut def ines how prof ile st ocks can pot ent ially be cut at t heir end. You can set up several dif f erent t ypes of endcut s
and t hen apply t hem t o individual st if f ener part s as necessary. The end of a st if f ener can have eit her endcut s or t rims
applied. Endcut s are predef ined shapes, whereas t rims are plane sect ion cut s t hat can be at any angle t o t he end. Trims
are applied on a per inst ance basis.
Creat e an Endcut
To creat e an endcut
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Endcut Cat alog (page 339) t o open t he Endcut Cat alog window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
93
3. Cl i ck New Endcut .
4. Ent er a name f or t he endcut and press Ent er.
5. Cl i ck Assi gn St ock t o open t he Endcut Assignment window.
6. Check t he check box f or each st ock t hat you want t o use t he endcut wit h.
7. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Endcut Assigment window.
8. Set t he Endcut Preview St ock t o one of t he assigned st ocks t o display a preview of t he endcut .
The preview shows t he overall ef f ect of t he endcut on t he select ed prof ile st ock (t hat is, even if t he endcut consist s of
several cut s).
One endcut is composed of one or more cuts.
9. Cl i ck Add Cut t o add a cut t o t he endcut .
10. Select t he cut t ype (f or example, Radius, Rect angle, or Triangle).
11. Select whet her t he cut is Applied t o t he Web or Flange of t he prof ile st ock.
12. Specif y t he size of t he cut by set t ing t he Size val ues.
Not e: The Si ze values are dif f erent f or each cut t ype.
An image below each list ed propert ies indicat es t he propert y’s def i nit ion.
To specif y a const ant value, ent er t he value. To specif y a variable value (based on t he web or f lange dimensions of
t he prof ile st ock), click t o open t he Endcut Formula window, and ent er a f ormula.
13. Specif y t he posit ion of t he cut by set t ing t he Origin values.
Not e: When you select or edit an Origin value, t he image below changes t o indicat e t he ef f ect of t he values.
To specif y a const ant value, ent er t he value. To specif y a variable value (based on t he web or f lange dimensions of
t he prof ile st ock), click t o open t he Endcut Formula window and ent er a f ormula.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
94
14. Specif y t he dept h of t he cut by set t ing t he Dept h values.
Not e: When you select or edit a Dept h value, t he image below changes t o indicat e t he ef f ect of t he values.
To specif y a const ant value, ent er t he value. To specif y a variable value (based on t he web or f lange dimensions of
t he prof ile st ock), click t o open t he Endcut Formula window, and ent er a f ormula.
15. If necessary, add addit ional cut s t o t he endcut .
16. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Endcut Def init ions window.
Del et e an Endcut
To delet e an endcut
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Endcut Cat alog (page 339) t o open t he Endcut Cat alog window.
3. Select t he endcut .
4. Cl i ck Delet e Endcut .
Import Endcut s
To import endcut s
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Endcut Cat alog (page 339) t o open t he Endcut Cat alog window.
3. Cl i ck Import t o open a File Browser.
4. Select a project f ile (* .PRO) or XML f ile (* .XML).
5. Cl i ck Open.
Export Endcut s
To export endcut s
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Endcut Cat alog (page 339) t o open t he Endcut Cat alog window.
3. Check t he Export check boxes f or t he endcut s you want t o export .
4. Cl i ck Export XML t o open a File Browser.
5. Ent er a name f or t he XML f ile.
6. Cl i ck Save.
Vi ew Endcut Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed endcut . A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es t hat t he
endcut is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic endcut
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Endcut Cat alog (page 339) t o open t he Endcut Cat alog window.
3. Select t he endcut you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed endcut .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
95
Prof ile Green St andards
Like plat e green, prof ile green is t he ext ra st ock or ext ra mat erial used wherever you have t o join assemblies t oget her
and need ext ra st ock t o compensat e f or t olerances in product ion. You can now def ine one or more st andards f or prof ile
green t hat can t hen be added t o prof ile part s in a paramet ric f ashion. You can lat er change t he value (t he size of t he
ext ra mat erial), and all part s using t he st andard will be updat ed.
Creat e a Prof i l e Green St andard
To creat e a prof ile green st andard
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Green St andards (page 342) t o open t he Prof i l e Green St andards window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
96
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a name f or t he prof ile green st andard and press Ent er.
5. Set t he Lengt h.
6. Cl i ck Apply t o save t he changes, or click OK t o save t he changes and close t he Prof ile Green St andards window.
Vi ew Prof i l e Green St andard Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s t hat use a select ed prof ile green st andard. A check mark in t he In Use column
indicat es t hat t he prof i l e green st andard is being used by part s.
To list all part s using a specif ic prof ile green st andard
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Green St andards (page 342) t o open t he Prof i l e Green St andards window.
3. Sel ect t he prof i l e green st andard you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s using t he select ed prof ile green st andard.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
97
St andard Part s Def i ni t i on
St andard part s are usually bracket s or similar it ems. By set t ing t hem up as st andards, you can simply insert t hem int o
your design during modeling. ShipConst ruct or list s t hem separat ely in BOMs. Of t en st andard bracket s are NC cut using
f ixed rout ines at t he NC-cut t ing machine. (For example, st andard bracket s can be cut using mult iple t orches, reducing NC-
cut t i ng t i me.)
St andard part s are plat e or st if f ener part s t hat are shipyard st andards. St andard part s can be arranged by t ypes in t he
St andards Part Types t ree. St andard part s can be changed af t er part s are insert ed int o t he st ruct ure model.
Set Up St andard Part Types
You can organize st andard part s by set t ing up st andard part types and organizing t hem int o groups and sub-groups.
To set up st andard part t ypes
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St andard Part s (page 342) t o open t he St andard Part s window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
98
3. Under Part Types, select t he group t hat you want t o creat e a sub-group wit hin. By def ault t here is one group:
St andard Part Types.
4. Cl i ck New Type t o creat e a new st andard part t ype.
5. Ent er a name f or t he group.
6. Cont inue creat ing groups and sub-groups.
7. Cl i ck Apply t o save changes or OK t o save changes and close t he St andard Part s window.
Creat e a St andard Part
To creat e a st andard part
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St andard Part s (page 342) t o open t he St andard Part s window.
3. Under Part Types, select t he group or sub-group t hat you want t o creat e a st andard part wit hin.
4. Cl i ck New Part t o creat e a new st andard part .
5. Ent er a name f or t he part and press Ent er.
A message appears asking if you want t o edit t he part now.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
99
6. Cl i ck Yes and you will be f orwarded t o Aut oCAD t o creat e a st andard part .
7. Creat e a plat e part as you would normally do in t he st ruct ure model. The (0,0) posit ion in t he drawing det ermines t he
insert ion point of t he st andard part .
8. Cl i ck t o save t he st andard part and ret urn t o Manager.
Not e: There must be a st ock def ined in t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog of t he t ype of st andard part you want t o
creat e
All ot her rules of creat ing plat e part s apply when creat ing a st andard part .
Edi t a St andard Part
To edit a st andard part
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St andard Part s (page 342) t o open t he St andard Part s window.
3. Under Part Types, select t he group or sub-group t hat you want t o creat e a st andard part wit hin.
4. Under Part s, select t he part you want t o edit .
5. Cl i ck Edit Part t o swit ch t o Aut oCAD.
Rename a St andard Part
To rename a st andard part
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St andard Part s (page 342) t o open t he St andard Part s window.
3. Under Part Types, select t he group or sub-group t hat t he st andard part belongs t o.
4. Under Part s, double-click t he Name f ield and ent er a new name.
5. Cl i ck Apply t o save changes or OK t o save changes and close t he St andard Part s window.
Vi ew St andard Part Usage
It is possible t o see a list of all t he part s of a select ed st andard part . A check mark in t he In Use column indicat es t hat t he
st andard part exist s.
To list all part s of a specif ic st andard part
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. St ruct ure > St andard Part s (page 342) t o open t he St andard Part s window.
3. Select t he st andard part you want .
4. Cl i ck Usage Log.
ShipConst ruct or displays a list of all part s of t he select ed st andard part .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
100
Common Part s Cat al og (CPC)
The Common Part s Cat alog (CPC) is a shared cat alogue of st ocks t hat was est ablished by U.S. shipyards. The CPC shares
part inf ormat ion wit hin and bet ween mult iple shipyards and comput er syst ems in order t o st reamline design, product ion,
lif e cycle maint enance, business processes, and sharing and t rading invent ory. See ht t p:/ / www.nsrp.org/ f or addit ional
inf ormat ion on CPC. You can import t he f ollowing st ocks f rom t he CPC int o ShipConst ruct or project s:
• Pl at es
• Corrugat ed plat es
• Prof i l es
• Fi ni shes
• Insul at i ons
Make a Proj ect a CPC Proj ect
In order t o access t he CPC, you must enable your ShipConst ruct or project t o be a CPC Project by having ShipConst ruct or
connect ed t o t he CPC dat abase.
To make a project a CPC project
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Project Set t ings (page 309) t o open t he Project Set t ings window.
3. Open t he Common Part s Cat alog sect i on.
4. Click t he CPC GUID f ield t o display t he but t on.
5. Cl i ck t o open t he Common Part s Cat alog window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
101
6. Sel ect Project uses CPC.
7. Cl i ck Connect t o open t he Select CPC Dat abase window.
8. Set Server t o t he server of your CPC dat abase. Cont act your CPC Manager f or inf ormat ion regarding server and
dat abase.
Not e: ShipConst ruct or at t empt s t o connect t o t he server using NT Aut hent icat ion t hat should be previous set up t o use
t he CPC dat abase.
9. Select t he Dat abase f rom t he list t o t he CPC dat abase.
10. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Select CPC Dat abase window.
11. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Common Part s Cat alog window.
The CPC f ields in t he Project Set t ings window are aut omat ically set t o t he appropriat e values.
12. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Project Set t ings window.
Associ at e a CPC Proj ect wi t h Anot her CPC Project
A CPC Project is a ShipConst ruct or project connect ed t o t he CPC dat abase.
St ock it ems in t he CPC do not cont ain all product ion inf ormat ion t hat ShipConst ruct or requires. Af t er import ing a CPC
st ock int o ShipConst ruct or, you must manually ent er t he addit ional inf ormat ion in your project .
If you have ot her CPC project s, you can associat e t he current CPC project wit h t hem bef ore import ing st ocks f rom t he
CPC. Whenever you import st ocks f rom t he CPC, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically searches associat ed project s and
ret rieves any of t he missing product ion inf ormat ion, saving you f rom re-ent ering it . You can associat e a CPC project wit h
any number of ot her CPC project s, and ShipConst ruct or will search t hrough t hem in t he order list ed.
To associat e a CPC project wit h anot her CPC project
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > CPC Associat ed Project s (page 323) t o open t he CPC Proj ect s window.
3. Cl i ck New t o creat e a new ent ry.
4. Ent er t he name of t he Server and Proj ect f or t he CPC project t o associat e wit h t he current project .
5. Use t he up and down arrows t o place t he list of project s in t he order t hat you want ShipConst ruct or t o check f or
st ocks.
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he CPC Proj ect s window.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
102
Import a St ock f rom t he CPC
Import a St ruct ure St ock f rom t he CPC
You can import t he f ollowing st ruct ure st ocks f rom t he CPC:
• Pl at es
• Corrugat ed plat es
• Prof i l es
To import a st ruct ure st ock f rom t he CPC
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog (page 324)
3. Select t he t ype of st ock t o import .
To import a plat e st ock or corrugat ed plat e st ock, select Plat e or Corrugat ed Plat e.
To import a prof ile st ock, select t he t ype of prof ile st ock (f or example, Angle, Bulb Flat , and so on).
4. Under CPC, select whet her t o import Met ric or Imperial st ocks.
Not e: The CPC sect ion only appears if t he project is a CPC project . See Make a Project a CPC Project (page 100).
5. Cl i ck CPC Import t o open t he Sel ect CPC St ock window. The window list s eit her met ric or imperial st ocks in t he CPC.
6. Select t he st ock you want t o import .
7. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Select CPC St ock window.
The Import Plat e St ock From CPC window appears.
8. Do eit her of t he f ollowing:
• To import t he CPC st ock as an available size of an exist ing st ock, select t he exist ing st ock f rom t he list and click
OK.
• To import t he CPC st ock as a new st ock (and available size), click New Pl at e.
Import a Finish or Insulat ion From t he CPC
See Finishes (page 35) f or inf ormat ion on f inishes. See Insulation in t he HVACmanual f or inf ormat ion on insulat ion.
To import a f inish or insulat ion f rom t he CPC
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose eit her General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Finishes window or General > Insulat ion (page 316) t o open
t he Insulat ion window.
3. Cl i ck CPC Import t o open t he Sel ect CPC St ock window.
Not e: The CPC Import but t on only appears if t he project is a CPC project . See Make a Project a CPC Project (page
100).
4. Select t he it ems you want t o import .
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Select CPC St ock window and import t he it em.
Di spl ay CPC St ock Propert i es
Display Propert ies For a CPC St ruct ure St ock
To display propert ies f or a CPC st ruct ure st ock
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
103
3. Select t he st ock or one of t he st ock’s available sizes.
4. Cl i ck Edi t Si zes t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Available Sizes window. (See St ruct ure St ock Cat alog (page 324).)
5. Doubl e-click t he CPC Cat alog Num f ield.
Two but t ons appear in t he f ield: .
6. Cl i ck t o open t he CPC – Vi ew St ock window.
Di spl ay Propert ies For a CPC Finish or Insulat ion
To display propert ies f or a CPC f inish or insulat ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose t he appropriat e locat ion:
• General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Finishes window
• General > Insulat ion (page 316) t o open t he Insulat ion window
3. Doubl e-click t he CPC Cat alog Num f ield f or t he f inish or insulat ion.
Two but t ons appear in t he f ield: .
4. Cl i ck t o open t he CPC – Vi ew St ock window.
Associ at e a St ock wi t h a Di f f erent CPC St ock
Af t er you have import ed a st ock f rom t he CPC, it becomes a ShipConst ruct or st ock. You can t hen choose t o associat e t he
ShipConst ruct or st ock wit h a dif f erent st ock f rom t he CPC.
Associ at e a St ruct ure St ock wit h a Dif f erent CPC St ock
To associat e a st ruct ure st ock wit h a dif f erent CPC st ock
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog (page 323) t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
3. Select t he st ock or one of t he st ock’s available sizes.
4. Cl i ck Edi t Si zes t o open t he St ruct ure St ock Available Sizes window.
5. Doubl e-click t he CPC Cat alog Num f ield.
Two but t ons appear in t he f ield: .
6. Cl i ck (f inger) t o open t he Select CPC St ock window.
7. Select t he CPC st ock.
8. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Select CPC St ock window.
Associat e a Finish or Insulat ion wit h a Dif f erent CPC Finish or Insulat ion
To associat e a f inish or insulat ion wit h a dif f erent CPC f inish or insulat ion
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose t he appropriat e locat ion:
• General > Finishes (page 315) t o open t he Finishes window.
• General > Insulat ion (page 316) t o open t he Insulat ion window.
3. Doubl e-click t he CPC Cat alog Num f ield f or t he f inish or insulat ion.
Two but t ons appear in t he f ield: .
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
104
4. Cl i ck (f inger) t o open t he Select CPC St ock window.
5. Select t he CPC st ock.
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Select CPC St ock window.
Drawi ng Templ at es
ShipConst ruct or creat es drawings t hat let you specif y t emplat es t o propagat e st andards. These t emplat es are creat ed on
t he Templat es page of Navigat or. Templat e drawings can cont ain st yles, user layers, views, and possibly object s. Changes
t o t emplat e drawings do not af f ect exist ing drawings.
Requi red Templ at es
• Assembly
• Pi peSpool
• HVACSpool
• Prof ilePlot Sheet
• Prof i l ePl ot
• Nest
• PipeArrangement
• HVACArrangement
• Equipment Arrangement
Opt i onal Templ at es
• St ruct ure
• Nest Drawi ng
• Pipe
• HVAC
• Equi pment
• Hul l
• PinJig
• Approval
• Prof ilePlot Drawing
• Composit e
Opt ional t emplat es only allow one t emplat e drawing. If no t emplat e drawing is available, a blank Aut oCAD drawing is
creat ed. It is not t he acad.dwt t emplat e.
To creat e a new t emplat e f rom an exist ing non-ShipConst ruct or drawing
1. If t he t emplat e you are creat ing is an opt ional t emplat e, remove any exist ing t emplat es f rom Navigat or.
2. In Windows Explorer, copy t he drawing t o t he correct f older in ShipConst ruct or.
3. In Navigat or, select t he Templat es page.
4. Open t he drawing t hat was copied int o ShipConst ruct or.
5. Af t er t he drawing is open you will be asked t o regist er t he drawing. Click Yes.
To delet e a t emplat e drawing
1. In Navigat or, select t he Templat es page.
2. Select t he t emplat e drawing you want t o delet e.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
105
3. Ri ght -click and choose Delet e.
4. Cl i ck Yes t o conf irm t he delet e.
To rename a t emplat e drawing
If you renamed a t emplat e drawing using Windows Explorer, Navigat or will display t wo icons: a gray one wit h t he old
f ilename, and a blue one wit h t he new f ilename. Choosing t o open eit her drawing will prompt you t o updat e t he
dat abase wit h t he new f ilename.
1. In Navigat or, select t he Templat es page.
2. Select t he t emplat e drawing you want t o rename
3. Ri ght -click and choose Rename.
4. Ent er t he new name.
Insert Empt y BOM Wi zard
The BOM Def init ion Wi zard is used f or insert ing inst ances of a part icular BOM int o a drawing. Mult iple t ables can be
insert ed int o a single drawing.
1. St ep 1 of t he wizard let s you specif y which BOM def init ion you want t o inset in t he BOM. The int erf ace is similar t o
t he BOM Def init ions window; however, it is a read-only view f or select ion purposes. Select a BOM def init ion t o
advance t o t he next page.
2. St ep 2 let s you select BOM t ypes. BOM f unct ionalit y depends on t he product ion drawing t ype. All drawing t ypes
except f or Nest and Prof ile plot s require t hat t he BOM be insert ed in paper space only. Nest and Prof ile Plot s are
insert ed in model space only.
St ruct ure Li brary Set up
106
Tabl e Opt i ons
All rows generat ed by t he collect ors are compiled int o t he BOM dat a mast er set . You can cont rol t he it ems list ed in t he
BOM by choosing one of t he t wo opt ions:
• Li st Al l – List s all it ems in t he compiled mast er BOM.
• List Only Visible – It ems displayed in t he BOM will be based on object s’ viewport visibilit y. It ems t hat are visible in
any of t he viewport s wit hin t he layout will be list ed. Object layer visibilit y and viewport clipping are respect ed.
The numbering of it ems remains consist ent across all layout s regardless of whet her Li st Al l or List Only Visible is chosen.
Maximum number of rows per t able – Specif ies t he maximum number of dat a rows t hat a t able will cont ain bef ore a new
t able is creat ed.
Wrap Propert ies – Choices are enabled when a value great er t han zero is ent ered in t he Maximum number of rows per
t abl e f ield.
• Table wrap direct ion – Direct ion t hat new t ables should be added.
• Spacing – Space bet ween newly creat ed t ables.
Label Opt ions
The labeling procedure works in conjunct ion wit h t he BOM. Only object s t hat are ref erenced by a part icular BOM are
labeled. Label t ext is ret rieved f rom t he column specif ied by t he BOM def init ion.
The label st yle used f or labeling is def ined in t he BOM def init ion.
ShipConst ruct or marks viewport s t hat you select wit h Aut oCAD xdat a. Once select ed, t he object s in t he viewport will be
labeled every t ime t he SCRELABELALL or SCRELABEL command is run. You can manage select ed viewport s in t wo ways:
• Using t he BOM Def init ions Wizard
• Using t he SCVPORTOPTIONS command
• Min leader lengt h -The minimum leader lengt h used when labeling. This value is st ored on a per-viewport basis. The
wizard remembers t he last used value per layout .
St ruct ure Set up
107
St ruct ure Set up
Import a Hul l Model
You can import a 3D wiref rame model (f rame lines, longit udinal bulkhead lines, deck lines, and so on) f rom Hull,
ShipCAM, or anot her f airing program as a st art ing point f or st ruct ural modeling. If you are using t he Hull module f or
lof t ing operat ions (plat e def init ion and expansion), t he model needs t o be insert ed int o a Hull drawing. Ot herwise,
proceed t o creat ing unit s bef ore import ing dat a.
Use a Hul l Model f rom t he Hul l Modul e
See t he Hull manual.
Uni t Set up
You must decide how you want t o divide your vessel (project ) int o product ion unit s (also known as blocks). The size of a
unit is usually det ermined by t he maximum weight t hat t he shipyard can handle. Once you have decided where t he unit
breaks will occur, you can set up and name t he unit s in ShipConst ruct or. When you creat e a unit in ShipConst ruct or, you
simult aneously creat e a unit drawing.
A t ypi cal uni t
Creat e Uni t s
To creat e a unit
Not e: You can creat e a unit f rom wit hin an empt y drawing or f rom within a drawing t hat cont ains t he sect ions f or t he
new unit .
St ruct ure Set up
108
1. In t he Navi gat or, select t he Proj ect page.
2. Cl i ck New Unit t o open t he New Unit window.
3. In t he Unit Name t ext box, t ype a unit name.
4. Select whet her t o creat e a blank drawing as a new unit drawing (t he def ault ), or use t he current drawing as a new
unit drawing.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Del et e Uni t s
There is no easy way t o delet e a unit , because each unit is linked t o so many ot her part s of a project .
To delet e a unit
1. Use t he Navigat or t o delet e all planar group drawings, pipe drawings, HVAC drawings, and equipment arrangement
drawings f or t he unit .
2. Use Windows Explorer t o delet e t he f older f or t he unit .
3. Use t he Product Hierarchy window t o delet e t he unit .
Product Hi erarchi es
Product hierarchies are t he sequence of grouping part s t oget her. The build st rat egy is t he main product hierarchy. The
build st rat egy is t he sequence t hat t he part s in your project will be physically assembled in. Product hierarchy is also
ref erred t o as product work breakdown st ruct ure (PWBS).
Product hierarchies consist of several levels. At t he lowest level, individual part s are assembled t o f orm minor
assemblies. At t he next level, minor assemblies are combined t o f orm panels. At subsequent levels, panels are combined
t o f orm assemblies, assemblies are combined t o f orm st ages, st ages are combined t o f orm unit s, and unit s are
combined t o f orm t he complet ed project .
St ruct ure Set up
109
The f irst st ep in developing a product hierarchy is t o divide your project int o unit s. See Uni t Set up (page 107). The t op
level of t he product hierarchy is always t he project , and t he project is always divided int o unit s. Typically you perf orm t his
st ep of t he product hierarchy bef ore you begin designing part s. (Some shipyards pref er t o name t heir project based on t he
unit t hey belong t o.)
Next , you set up t he available sub-levels t hat you pot ent ially want t o use wit hin your unit s. See Set Up Assembly Levels
(page 115). These levels are ref erred t o as assembly levels. The levels list ed above are ShipConst ruct or’s def ault
assembly levels, but you can modif y t hem as necessary.
Not e: The word assembly has several meanings. In t he general sense, an assembly (or assembly level) ref ers t o any
level wit hin or under t he unit . In t he specif ic sense, an assembly ref ers t o t he level above panel (t hat is, an assembly
is composed of several panels). An assembly (or assembly it em) can also mean any it em of several part s (f or
exampl e, assembly XYZcould ref er t o a panel, a unit , or ot her it em).
Next , you decide which specif ic st ages t o use f or each specif ic unit , which specif ic assemblies t o use f or each specif ic
st age, and so on. See Set Up Assemblies (page 118). For example, you may want t o divide unit U12 int o f ive st ages:
COLDOUTFIT, HOTOUTFIT, HVAC, PIPING, and STRUCTURE. At t he lowest level, you assign individual part s t o assemblies.
See Assign Part s, Spool s, or Assemblies t o Assemblies (page 121). Obviously, you cannot perf orm t his st ep in the product
hi erarchy process unt il you have act ually creat ed your part s.
When assigning part s t o assemblies, it is helpf ul t o use a product hierarchy drawing so you can see all part s wit hin a unit .
See Set t ing up Mult iple Product Hierarchies (page 109).
Finally, you must decide on a t ime schedule f or each assembly, indicat ing when it will be complet ed.
Set t i ng Up Mul t i pl e Product Hi erarchi es
You can set up mult iple hi erarchies wit hin a project . For example, in addit ion t o t he build st rat egy used f or assembly, you
may want t o creat e a separat e hierarchy used f or a SWBS breakdown, anot her f or weight qualit y cont rol and analysis,
and a t hird f or paint planning. There is a designat ed product hierarchy (called t he build st rat egy) t hat is t he only product
hi erarchy used f or nest ing, creat ing assembly drawings, and creat ing arrangement drawings.
To creat e a new product hierarchy
1. Cl i ck in t he Assembly Toolbar.
St ruct ure Set up
110
2. Choose Tools > Product Hierarchy > New.
3. Ent er a new Product Hierarchy name and click OK.
St ruct ure Set up
111
All part s will be assigned t o t he appropriat e unit assembly of t he new product hierarchy. Each product hierarchy has
it s own levels.
Set Up Product Hi erarchy Drawi ngs
A product hierarchy drawing cont ains all t he part s f or a unit , including st ruct ure, equipment , piping, HVAC, and so on. You
usual l y set up a product hierarchy drawing f or a unit so you can see t he part s as you develop a product hierarchy. You can
make a specif ic assembly visible and check t hat all required part s are in t hat build st age or change t he part s involved in a
build st age by dragging t hem t o anot her build st age.
Creat e a Product Hierarchy Drawi ng
To creat e a product hierarchy drawing
1. In Navigat or, select t he Product Hierarchy page.
St ruct ure Set up
112
2. Cl i ck New.
The New Product Hierarchy Drawing window appears.
St ruct ure Set up
113
3. Select t he drawings t o include in t he product hierarchy drawing.
4. Cl i ck OK.
The New Drawing window appears.
St ruct ure Set up
114
5. Ent er a name f or t he drawing.
6. Cl i ck OK.
Not e: If any part s are creat ed af t er you creat e a product hierarchy drawing, t he new part s will not appear in t he
drawing unless you updat e it .
Rename a Product Hierarchy Drawi ng
To rename a product hierarchy drawing
1. In Navigat or, select t he Product Hierarchy page.
2. Ri ght -click t he product hierarchy drawing and choose Rename.
3. Ent er a new name and press Ent er.
Del et e a Product Hierarchy Drawing
To delet e a product hierarchy drawing
1. In Navigat or, select t he Product Hierarchy page.
St ruct ure Set up
115
2. Ri ght -click t he product hierarchy drawing and choose Del et e.
Set Up Assembl y Level s
To set up assembly levels
Not e: You may want t o creat e a product hierarchy drawing bef ore set t ing up assembly levels (see Creat e a Product
Hierarchy Drawing (page 111)). The product hierarchy drawing will help you see t he part s as you develop a product
hi erarchy. You can make a specif ic assembly visible and check t hat all required part s are in t hat build st age or
change t he part s involved in a build st age by dragging t hem t o anot her build st age. (If you open an old product
hi erarchy drawing, any part s t hat have been creat ed af t er t he drawing was creat ed or updat ed do not appear in t he
drawi ng.)
1. Do eit her of t he f ollowing:
• Wi t hi n a product hierarchy drawing, choose SC Product Hierarchy > Develop Product Hierarchy (page 478)
• Wit hin any drawing, click on t he Assembly Toolbar (page 453)
The Product Hierarchy window appears.
St ruct ure Set up
116
Not e: When t he Product Hierarchy window is open, you can cont inue t o perf orm commands in t he drawing, such
as changing your view, changing t he shading mode, and so on.
The t abs represent dif f erent product hierarchies. The def ault product hierarchy is Build St rat egy. To select a dif f erent
product hierarchy, click it s t ab. To creat e a new product hierarchy, choose Tools > Product Hierarchy > New and ent er
a name f or t he product hierarchy. To delet e a product hierarchy, click it s t ab and t hen choose Tools > Product
Hi erarchy > Delet e. To rename a product hierarchy, click it s t ab and t hen choose Tools > Product Hierarchy >
Rename.
2. Choose Tools > Edit Levels t o open t he Edit Levels window.
This window list s t he levels of t he current product hierarchy. Lat er, you will assign part s and assemblies t o t he
various levels. A t ypical conf igurat ion f or levels is:
• Proj ect – The t op level of t he product hierarchy.
• Uni t – Every project must have at least one unit . A t ypical project consist s of several unit s. A smaller project may
have onl y one uni t (Hull plus wheel house).
• St ages – Of t en t he f inal assembly is carried out using many st ages t hat usually combine assemblies and
panels. A unit can cont ain several levels of st ages; in some cases, t here can be t went y levels of st ages bet ween
t he assembly and t he unit .
• Assembly – An assembly (also known as a 3D assembly) consist s of several panels, plus some individual part s.
A t ypical assembly might be a double bot t om, a wing t ank, or somet hing similar.
• Panel – A panel may be f lat or curved and t radit ionally consist s of one or more plat e part s plus several
st i f f eners.
You can add, delet e, or re-order levels t o suit your project .
To add a level, select t he level t o creat e a new level under, click New, and ent er a name f or t he level.
To delet e a level, select t he level and click Del et e.
To re-order a level, select t he level and click t he arrow but t ons t o move t he level up or down.
Set Up User-Def i ned At t ri but es
You can creat e your own at t ribut es f or assigning values t o Assemblies. User-def ined at t ribut es are assigned t o a product
hierarchy, and each Assembly in t hat product hierarchy will have it s own at t ribut e values. For more inf ormat ion, see User-
Def i ned At t ri but es (page 51).
St ruct ure Set up
117
To creat e a new user-def ined at t ribut e
1. From t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)) menu,
select Tools > User-Def ined At t ribut es…
2. Cl i ck New.
3. Ent er a name f or t he at t ribut e and press Ent er.
4. Opt ionally, add a descript ion.
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he User-Def ined At tri but es window.
To assign an user-def ined at t ribut e t o a Product Hierarchy
1. From t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)) menu,
select Tools > User-Def ined At t ribut es…
2. Sel ect t he at t ribut e on t he lef t side of t he window.
3. Select a product hierarchy on t he right side of t he window.
4. Click t he right arrow but t on t o assign.
The at t ribut e is now list ed under t he product hierarchy.
5. Change t he Required and Def aul t values as needed. Required at t ribut es must have def ault values, and will be
applied t o each assembly in t he product hierarchy.
To remove an user-def ined at t ribut e
1. From t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)) menu,
select Tools > User-Def ined At t ribut es…
2. Select t he at t ribut e t o be removed f rom a product hierarchy on t he right side of t he window.
3. Click t he lef t arrow t o remove.
St ruct ure Set up
11 8
Set Up Assembl i es
Add an Assembly t o t he Product Hierarchy
To add an assembly t o t he product hierarchy
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select an assembly t o add a sub-
assembly t o, and choose Tools > Assembly > New. This opt ion is also available if you right -click on t he assembly.
The New Assembly window appears.
2. Set t he opt ions:
• Name – The name of t he new assembly.
• Number – To creat e more t han one assembly, ent er t he number of assemblies t o creat e. (If you set Name t o
FR122 and set Number t o 3, ShipConst ruct or will creat e assemblies FR122, FR123, and FR124.) To creat e one
assembly, set Number t o 1.
• Int erval – If Number is great er t han 1, Int erval is t he int erval bet ween t he numbers used in t he assembly names.
• User-Def ined At t ribut es – You may specif y values f or any user-def ined at t ribut es assigned t o t he current Product
Hierarchy (see Set Up User-Def ined At t ribut es (page 116)). To specif y a value, select t he At t ribut e, make sure
at t ribut e is enabled wit h a check in t he checkbox, t hen t ype a value in t he Value f ield. At t ribut es can be reset t o
t heir def ault value by clicking on t he “ Reset ” but t on.
St ruct ure Set up
119
• Level – The level f or t he new assembly. (The list consist s of assembly levels below t he assembly you select ed in
t he Product Hierarchy window.)
• Fi ni shes – Al l f inishes.
• Select ed Finishes – Finishes assigned t o t he assembly. Select a f inish f rom t he Finishes list . Click t he lef t arrow
but t on t o assign t he f inish t o t he assembly. You can use t he up and down arrow but t ons t o reorder t he f inishes.
Click t he right arrow but t on t o unassign a f inish.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Rename an Assembly
To rename an assembly
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select t he assembly you want t o rename
and choose Tools > Assembly > Rename. This opt ion is also available if you right -click on t he assembly. Uni t -level
assemblies cannot be renamed.
The assembly name in t he t ree is now edit able.
2. Ent er a new name and press Ent er.
Edit an Assembly
To edit an assembly
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select t he assembly you want t o edit and
choose Tools > Assembly > Edit . This opt ion is also available if you ri ght -click on t he assembly.
The Edit Assembly window appears.
St ruct ure Set up
120
2. Change t he opt ions.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Delet e an Assembly
To delet e an assembly
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select t he assemblies you want t o delet e.
2. Choose Tools > Assembly > Delet e.
ShipConst ruct or delet es t he assemblies.
If t he assembly cont ains part s, ShipConst ruct or re-assigns t he part s t o t he parent of t he delet ed assembly.
If t he assembly cont ains sub-assemblies, ShipConst ruct or delet es t he sub-assembl i es.
Change t he Level of an Assembly
You may want t o change t he level of an assembly if you are adding a new assembly level but have already creat ed some
assembl i es and need t o move t hem up or down wit hin t he product hierarchy. If an assembly has t he level direct ly below
t he level of it s parent , and it s level is t he level direct ly above t he level of it s children, it s level cannot be changed.
To change t he level of an assembly
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select t he assemblies and choose Tools >
Assembly > Edit or ri ght -click on t he assembly.
St ruct ure Set up
121
The Edit Assembly window appears.
2. Select t he new level f or t he assemblies in t he Level list .
3. Cl i ck OK.
Copy an Assembly
To copy an assembly t o anot her assembly
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select t he assemblies you will copy and
choose Tools > Copy Assemblies. This opt ion is also available if you right -click on t he assembly.
2. Sel ect t he assembly t o past e t he copied assemblies t o and choose Tools > Past e Assemblies.
Assi gn Part s, Spool s, or Assembl i es t o Assembl i es
All t hree dif f erent t ypes of object s (assemblies, spools, and part s) in t he Product Hierarchy are assigned t o an assembly.
These assignment s can be modif ied by assigning t hose object s t o anot her assembly. There are t wo met hods t o do t his.
To assign part s or assemblies t o an assembly (met hod 1)
Not e: You cannot undo (Edit > Undo) a product hierarchy assi gnment .
1. Select t he part s (or spools or assemblies) in t he current drawing or in t he Product Hierarchy window.
If you select part s in t he drawing, t hey are aut omat ically select ed in t he Product Hierarchy window, and vice versa.
You can select mult iple part s by holding down t he Shi f t or Ct rl key.
2. In t he Product Hierarchy window, drag and drop t he select ed obj ect s ont o t he t arget assembly t o assign t hem t o.
St ruct ure Set up
122
To assign part s t o an assembly t hat is beyond t he limit s of t he Product Hierarchy window, while dragging t he part s,
move t he cursor above or below t he Product Hierarchy window t o scroll t he display wit hin t he Product Hierarchy
window up or down. (To scroll t o t he t op or bot t om of t he Product Hierarchy window, hold down t he Ct rl key while
dragging. To scroll one page at a t ime, hold down t he Shi f t key.)
You can assign an assembly t o anot her assembly only if t he moved assembly is below t he level of t he t arget
assembl y.
To assign part s t o an assembly (met hod 2)
Not e: You cannot undo (Edit > Undo) a product hierarchy assi gnment .
1. Select t he part s and/ or assemblies t o reassign.
2. Choose Tools > Assign t o Assembl y.
3. The Sel ect Assembly window appears.
4. Select t he assembly t o assign t he obj ect t o.
5. Cl i ck OK.
St ruct ure Set up
123
Fi nd, Zoom, Remove, Hi de, and Show Part s
To f ind a part
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), choose Tools > Find. This opt ion is also
avai l abl e i f you ri ght -click on an assembl y. The Find window can also be used t o search f or assemblies and/ or
spools.
The Fi nd window appears.
2. Ent er t he f ull or part ial name of t he part .
3. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or select s t he part .
4. If t he slect ed part is not t he one you were searching f or, you can choose Tools > Fi nd Next (or press F3) t o select t he
next part in t he t ree t hat cont ains t he specif ied search word.
To zoom in t o a part in t he drawing
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select t he part s or assemblies t o zoom in
t o.
2. Ri ght -cl ick on any of t he select ed part s or assemblies and choose Zoom To.
3. If t he part s are in t he current drawing, ShipConst ruct or will zoom t he drawing view so t he part s f ill t he view.
To remove part s f rom a drawing
Warni ng: If you remove part s f rom a planar group drawing or curved group drawing, t he part s will be delet ed.
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), select t he part s or assemblies.
2. Right -click on t he select ed part s and assemblies and choose Unload.
ShipConst ruct or removes t he part s f rom t he current drawing.
To hide or show part s in t he drawing
1. In t he Product Hierarchy window (see Set Up Assembly Levels (page 115)), click t he light bulb beside t he part or
assembl y.
• Part is in t he current drawing and it is visible.
• Part is in t he current drawing but is not visible (Hidden).
• Part is not in t he current drawing.
St ruct ure Set up
124
• Assembly or spool wit h some hidden part s and some visible part s
When you click on t he light bulb, ShipConst ruct or changes t he part ’s (or assembly’s) visibilit y in t he current drawing.
You can al so use SC Ut ilit ies > Hide Object s, SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide Object s, and SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide All Object s t o
hide or show (unhide) part s.
Renami ng Part s
Part s wit h generat ed names can be renamed t hrough a variet y of met hods. The most common one is being assigned t o a
new assembly. Renaming, or changing t he level of , an assembly t hat has part s assigned t o it (or any of it s children) will
al so regenerat e t he names of t hose part s. Names will only be generat ed f rom t he part assembly assignment s in t he
primary product hierarchy. Part s wit h user-def ined names (such as St andard Part s) will never be renamed.
Part s will be renamed only when t he current user owns t he part s f or t hat unit and t heir naming convent ion requires it .
Only St ruct ure part s and Hangers are af f ect ed by t his, because t he ot her part t ypes do not allow assembly element s in
t heir naming convent ions.
If a project is split in such a way t hat separat e users have cont rol of a unit ’s part s and t hat unit ’s product hierarchy, t hen,
af t er modif ying t he product hierarchy, t hose part s, wit h naming convent ions indicat ing t hat t he part s need t o be renamed
due t o t he modif icat ion, will not be renamed. If t he user makes a change t o t he product hierarchy t ree such t hat part s
t hat he does not own will be modif ied, a window will appear warning of him this, and opt ionally list ing t he af f ect ed part s.
By def ault , when part s are renamed, t hey use t heir current aut onumber: t he element s in t hat name relat ed t o t heir
locat ion in t he product hierarchy will be modif ied. However, some users pref er t o model all t heir part s bef ore def ining t he
complet e product hierarchy, and only assigning t hose part s lat er. This can cause part s t o have except ionally high
aut onumbers.
To allow t he user t o have t heir part s use t he lowest number possible, t here is an opt ion f or renaming. This opt ion is
available only t o St ruct ure.
In t he Opt ions menu, under Naming > St ruct ure, t here are t wo choices: Keep Aut onumber and Fi rst Avai l abl e. The def ault
is Keep Aut onumber. In t he bot t om right corner of t he Product Hierarchy window, t here is an image indicat ing t he current
naming opt ion: Keep Aut onumber uses a “ 05 -> 05” image, and First Available uses a “ 05 -> 01” image.
Keep Aut onumber does just t hat : part s will t ry and keep t heir aut onumber when renamed. If t hat aut onumber is
unavailable (t here may already be a part at t he t arget assembly wit h t hat number), t hen it will look at all t he ident ical
part s f or t he part and t ry use t heir aut onumbers, and if none of t hose are available, t hen it will use t he next available
number.
First Available will make t he part s use t he lowest aut onumbers possible. If t he part has ident ical part s, wit h generat ed
names, already at t he t arget assembly, t hen f ind t he lowest aut onumber f rom t hat group, and use t hat number f or t he
part being moved. If t he part doesn't have ident ical part s at t he t arget assembly, or none of t he ident ical part s have
generat ed names, t hen f ind t he next available aut onumber, and use t he lower bet ween t he next aut onumber and t he
part ’s current aut onumber. If t hat number is unavailable, t hen it will use t he aut onumber of an ident ical part , if it has any.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
125
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
ShipConst ruct or now st ores all geomet ry, part s, and so on, and t heir at t ribut es (f or example, mat erial, weight , revi si ons,
and product hierarchies) wit hin t he project dat abase. Whenever you open a drawing, ShipConst ruct or regenerat es t he
drawing using t he inf ormat ion in t he dat abase. Previously, ShipConst ruct or st ored geomet ry wit hin t he drawings.
Changes you make t o a drawing are not saved t o t he dat abase unt il you save t he drawing. In ShipConst ruct or2005 t he
dat abase is updat ed as you work in a st ruct ural drawing. If t wo users are edit ing dif f erent versions of a common
(ident ical or mirrored) part , t he f irst user t o save t heir drawing has t heir edit s saved t o t he dat abase; t he second user is
not if ied of a concurrency issue. In ShipConst ruct or changes t hat you make t o a drawing are not saved t o t he dat abase
unt il you save t he drawing.
Import a Hul l Model f rom Shi pCAM
Geomet ry t hat is used t o st art st ruct ural modeling can be import ed int o ShipConst ruct or f rom a variet y of programs.
ShipCAM f iles can be import ed direct ly int o a 3D unit drawing.
To import a hull model f rom ShipCAM
1. Open t he 3D unit drawing. See Creat e Unit s (page 107).
2. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > ShipCAM > Import Files (page 446)
3. Sel ect Frame, Wat erl i ne, But t ock, or Skewed sect ions f iles f rom t he ShipCAM project f older.
4. Check t hat t he posit ion and scale of t he geomet ry is correct bef ore proceeding.
Pl anar Groups
A planar group is a collect ion of part s t hat all lie wit hin t he same plane (f or example, a f rame, a bulkhead, a girder, a
deck, or a f ace on a deckhouse). Planar groups are also ref erred t o as planar group drawings, 2D planar groups, 2D
planar group drawings, and group drawings.
In general, you set up a planar group f or each major st ruct ural planar object by cut t ing sect ions t hrough t he hull surf aces.
Af t er you creat e planar groups, you work wit hin each planar group (in 2D) t o creat e t he part s f or t hat planar group.
When you creat e a planar group, ShipConst ruct or generat es a user coordinat e syst em (UCS) on t he molded line of t he
planar group named <drawing_name>_M (f or example, U12F112_M). For smaller part s, such as bracket s, it is more
convenient t o creat e new UCSs and def ine part s on t hose UCSs rat her t han creat ing planar groups f or all t he planes of t he
bracket s.
There are t hree ways t o creat e a planar group:
• Wit hin a unit drawing (as in ShipConst ruct or2005)
• Wit hin a hull drawing (new in ShipConst ruct or 2006)
• Wit hin a planar group drawing (new in ShipConst ruct or 2006)
When you creat e a planar group, ShipConst ruct or generat es a UCS on t he molded line of t he planar group and you can
creat e addit ional cust om UCSs t o use when you mark group int ersect ions f rom ot her planar groups.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
126
When creat ing a planar group, t he ShipConst ruct or New Frame Group window has been modif ied as f ollows:
• The def ault plat e t hickness has been removed f rom t he General t ab. (When def ining individual part s you will specif y
t he st ock t hat t hen def ines t he solid.)
• The new Product Hierarchy t ab let s you set a def ault assembly f or part s creat ed wit hin t he planar group. (When
creat ing a part , you can override t he def ault and assign t he part t o any assembly.)
• The new Advanced t ab let s you set t he markline st yle and creat e dat um lines on planar groups, f or example, t o help
align plat es. (Previously, creat ing dat um lines was separat e f rom creat ing planar groups.)
Creat e a Pl anar Group Drawi ng Templ at e
You can cont rol t he appearance of planar group drawings by set t ing up a planar group drawing t emplat e.
To creat e a planar group drawing t emplat e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Templat es page.
3. Select t he St ruct ure f older.
4. Cl i ck New St ruct ure.
The New Drawing window appears.
5. Ent er a name f or t he planar group drawing t emplat e.
6. Cl i ck OK.
Creat e Pl anar Group Drawi ngs
You can creat e planar group drawings f rom wit hin a unit drawing or Hull drawing. You can also creat e a planar group
drawing f rom an exist ing 2D st ruct ural drawing (f or example, if you have 2D design drawings cont aining t ypical f rames,
decks, and so on).
To creat e planar group drawings
1. From wit hin a unit drawing, hull drawing, or planar group drawing, do eit her of the f ollowing:
• Choose ShipConst ruct or > Planar Group > Creat e Planar Groups.
• In Navigat or, select t he St ruct ure page and click New.
2. Select t he object s t o creat e planar groups f rom (f or example, sect ions cut t hrough hull surf aces, such as a f rames,
decks, or girders).
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
127
3. Press Ent er.
ShipConst ruct or checks if each object is planar and det ermines whet her t he planar groups are decks, f rames,
longit udinal bulkheads, or arbi t rary groups, based on t he orient at ion of t he select ed object s. (An arbit rary group is
one t hat is orient ed in any direct ion, such as a cant ed f rame, a girder not parallel t o t he cent erline, or a sloping
deck).
Not e: If you are creat ing a planar group drawing based on geomet ry import ed f rom anot her CAD syst em, t he
geomet ry may not be as precise as geomet ry creat ed wit hin ShipConst ruct or. ShipConst ruct or uses a precise
int ernal t olerance value f or det ermining t he planarit y of an object , and a warning will be displayed if non-planar
object s are det ect ed. If OK is clicked t he operat ion will cont inue wit hout t he non-planar curves.
Alt ernat ely, if planar curves are det ect ed close t o each ot her but out side of t he Planar Group Tolerance value
def ined in Manager > General > Project Set t ings > St ruct ure, a warning will be displayed. If OK is clicked t hen t he
operat ion will creat e separate planar groups f rom t he curves ident if ied.
In eit her of t he above cases it is recommended t o use t he SC Ut ilit ies > 3D t o 2D command on t he curves f or
each planar group bef ore creat ing t he new planar group (in order t o ensure all curves are planar and on t he same
pl ane).
The New Frame Group window appears.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
128
4. Set t he opt ions:
• Name – ShipConst ruct or suggest s a name f or t he planar group drawing based on t he unit name and t he layer
name of t he f irst select ed object . ShipCAM and some ot her hull f airing programs can place export ed object s
ont o named layers. Ideally, t he layer names should indicat e t he name of a group, f or example FR_110.
• Def ault Thickness Throw – When creat ing plat es in t his planar group t his is t he def ault t hickness direct ion. Only
t he f irst part creat ed in t his planar group will def ault t o t his direct ion. Each subsequent ly creat ed part will use
t he t hrow direct ion of t he last creat ed part by def ault .
• Def ault Mark Side – The side of t he plat e t o mark by def ault f or any plat es wit hin t his planar group.
• Keep Geomet ry – If t his is not checked t hen t he geomet ry used t o creat e t he planar groups will be removed
af t er t he operat ion.
• Apply t o All – The select ed opt ions (including t hose in t he Product Hierarchy and Advanced t abs) will be applied
t o all of t he planar groups creat ed (wit h t he except ion of t he name, which is t aken f rom t he curves used t o
creat e t he planar group or t he layer t he curves reside on if no name is assigned t o t he curves).
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
129
Def ault Assembly – Let s you set t he assembly t hat is used when you def ine part s in t he planar group. This let s you
organize part s bef ore t hey are made. If modelers are not responsible f or assigning part s t o t he product hierarchy,
part s will not end up in one big pool of part s when t he build st rat egist organizes part s. If you do not select a def ault
assembly, t he Unit assembly is select ed.
Mark Dat um Line Locat ions – If you use dat um lines on part s, enable t his opt ion t o set up marking on plat e part s as
t hey are creat ed.
Edi t Locat i ons – Let s you creat e or edit locat ions and locat ion groups.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
130
Not e: You can lat er edit t hese values. See Edit Planar Group Propert ies (page 132).
5. If t he planar group is being creat ed using mult iple curves t he Join Coplanar Curves window will appear. If you wish t o
join t he curves, check t he Join Curves box and specif y a t olerance (maximum dist ance) f or t hem t o be joined.
6. Cl i ck OK t o creat e t he planar group drawing. A log f ile det ailing t he result s of t he operat ion will be displayed. Ensure
you check t he log f or any errors or warnings f rom t he creat ion process.
To creat e a planar group drawing f rom a 2D st ruct ural drawing
For t his example, we will suppose t hat you want t o use a 2D st ruct ural f rame (scant l i ng) drawing.
1. Make a copy of t he 2D st ruct ural f rame drawing.
2. In t he copy, erase all object s you do not want . There might be several f rames in t he same drawing.
3. Make sure t hat t he origin of t he f rame is at (0,0). This should be in t he world coordinat e syst em. Move t he f rame
object s if necessary.
4. We assume t hat you have a project wit h a unit already. If not , make a new project and creat e a unit wit h an empt y
drawi ng.
5. Open t he uni t drawing appropriat e f or t he project . This drawing might be of a complet ely new project wit h not hing in
it or it might already have several st ruct ural drawings.
6. In t he uni t drawing, make sure t he WORLD UCS is act ive. Do t his by using eit her UCS or UC on t he command line.
Draw a line at t he locat ion of t he f rame. For example, if t he f rame is at 50.2 m, draw a line giving t he values
manually as 50200,0,0 t o 50200,5000,0. Remember ShipConst ruct or drawings are in mill i met ers or inches.
7. Use t he Planar Group - “ New” f unct i on.
8. Select t he line at 50200.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
131
9. It is not obvious t o ShipConst ruct or t hat t he line is a f rame. The line could be part of a deck or a f rame. In t he window
select Frame and cl i ck OK.
10. You will see t he New Frame Group window. Ent er a name f or t he f rame and set t he t hrow and t hickness. Click OK t o
creat e t he ShipConst ruct or st ruct ural drawing.
11. Open t he ShipConst ruct or st ruct ural drawing. It cont ains just a single line.
12. Type DDINSERT at t he command line.
13. Insert t he f rame drawing you prepared at t he origin (0,0,0) by Specif y Paramet ers on Screen and check t he Explode
opt i on.
14. The f rame drawing is now insert ed in 3D space at t he correct locat ion and is ready f or det ailing. You may have some
clean up t o do.
15. Move object s t o t he correct draf t layers.
16. The drawing you insert ed may have creat ed several new layers in t he ShipConst ruct or st ruct ural drawing. We do not
need t hem any more. PURGE al l unused layers. Do not worry about delet ing ShipConst ruct or layers; they will be
recreat ed when needed.
Creat e Curved Model Drawi ngs
A curved model drawing is similar t o a planar model drawing, except a curved drawing cont ains curved plat es inst ead of
planar part s. You use curved model drawings t o add shell plat ing (in t he f orm of curved and expanded plat es). In curved
model drawings, all product ion dat a of t he expanded plat e is usually locat ed in t he XY plane of t he world coordinat e
syst em.
To creat e a curved group drawing
1. In Navigat or, select t he St ruct ure page.
2. Select t he Curved f older in t he drawing list .
3. Cl i ck New. The Creat e Curved Group Drawing window appears.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
132
4. Ent er a name f or t he new curved group drawing. Exist ing curved group drawings are list ed on t he right side of t he
window.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Edi t Pl anar Group Propert i es
To edit t he propert ies of a planar group
Not e: Make sure t he planar group drawing you want t o edit is not current ly open by someone else.
1. In a unit drawing, choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navi gat or.
2. Select t he St ruct ure page.
3. Select t he planar group drawing t hat you want t o edit .
4. Cl i ck Propert i es t o open t he Edit Planar Group Propert i es window.
5. Set t he opt ions. See Creat e Planar Group Drawings (page 126).
6. Cl i ck OK.
Del et e a Pl anar Group
To delet e a planar group
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he St ruct ure page.
3. Select t he planar group drawing you want t o delet e.
4. Cl i ck Del et e.
Transf er Obj ect s f rom One Pl anar Group Drawi ng t o Anot her
You can t ransf er object s f rom t he current planar group drawing t o any ot her planar group drawing. Transf erred object s
maint ain t heir posit ion wit hin t he ship’s coordinat e syst em. This can be usef ul if you want t o split a planar group drawing
i nt o t wo.
To t ransf er object s f rom one planar group drawing t o anot her
1. Select t he object s you want t o move or copy.
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Transf er Object s t o Group…
3. In t he warning window t hat appears, click Yes t o save t he current drawing and cont inue.
4. The Transf er Part s window appears.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
133
5. Check t he box next t o t he planar group you wish t o t ransf er t he select ed object s t o.
6. Cl i ck OK.
Transf er Obj ect s f rom a Uni t Drawi ng t o a Pl anar Group Drawi ng
To t ransf er object s f rom a unit or hull drawing t o a planar group drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Planar Group > Transf er Object s t o Group.
2. Select t he object s t o t ransf er. If t he object s do not uniquely ident if y a planar group t ype, you will see a window t hat
asks you t o select t he t ype.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
134
3. In t he Transf er Object s window, check t he box next t o t he planar group t hat you wish t o t ransf er t he object s t o and
cl i ck OK.
4. Choose whet her you wish t o convert t he lines t o HullTrace const ruct ion lines.
5. If t he planar group is being creat ed using mult iple curves t he Join Coplanar Curves window will appear. If you wish t o
join t he curves, check t he Join Curves box and specif y a t olerance (maximum dist ance) f or t hem t o be joined. Click
OK t o cont inue t o t ransf er t he object s t o t he select ed planar group.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
135
User Coordinat e Syst em (UCS)
Aut oCAD UCSs are used t hroughout ShipConst ruct or. In t he st ruct ure model drawings t hey def ine t he planes of part s.
These special UCSs are called planar group planes in ShipConst ruct or. ShipConst ruct or will creat e planar group planes
aut omat ically when a planar group model drawing is creat ed. For each planar group plane t here is a named UCS. You can
creat e your own named UCSs but t hey will not be st ored in t he dat abase unless convert ed t o planar group planes.
Wit hin each drawing t here are t wo coordinat e syst ems.
The world coordinat e syst em (WCS) is a f ixed syst em in which t he X axis is horizont al, t he Y axis is vert ical, and t he Z axis
is perpendicular t o t he XY plane. The origin (where t he X axis and Y axis int ersect ) is in t he lower lef t corner of t he
drawi ng.
The user coordinat e syst em (UCS) is a syst em t hat you can move and rot at e (relat ive t o t he WCS) t o make it easier t o
work on specif ic part s of your drawing. You can set up any number of UCSs wit hin a drawing, but only one UCS can be
act i ve (t his is called t he current UCS).
For more inf ormat ion on user coordinat e syst ems, see UCS in Aut oCAD Help.
ShipConst ruct or has t hese UCS opt ions:
• Dwgname_M (f or moldline) – Syst em-generat ed UCS at t he planar group molded line (t he same as Dwgname_C in
ShipConst ruct or2005).
• Dwgname_P+Dist (f or parallel) – User-def ined UCS parallel t o t he planar group molded line. This is similar t o
Dwgname_T in ShipConst ruct or2005, except you can have more t han one syst em per planar group. For example, f or
t he act ual (not def ault ) t hickness side of part s t here are t wo limit s: Dwgname_P+20 would be 20 mm f orward, or up,
f rom t he molded line and Dwgname_P-20 would be 20 mm af t , or down.
• Dwgname_U – User-def ined UCS:
• Dwgname_U_WL4000 – User-def ined ort hogonal UCS. For example, if you are wit hin a f rame drawing and
creat e a deck UCS, ShipConst ruct or will name it Dwgname_UWL4000 (f or wat erline). However, if you are wit hin
a deck drawing and creat e a deck UCS, ShipConst ruct or will name it Dwgname_P+Dist (f or parallel).
• Dwgname_U_001 – User-def ined arbit rary UCS such as skewed planes. By using t he ShipConst ruct or Act ivat e
UCS command, t he result ing plane is recognized by ShipConst ruct or and can lat er be ref erenced.
ShipConst ruct or st ores UCSs in t he dat abase as planar group planes. Any UCSs t hat are creat ed manually are not st ored
in t he dat abase.
Creat e a UCS Out of Pl ane wi t h t he Current UCS
To creat e a UCS out of plane wit h t he current UCS
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS (page 429) t o open t he UCS window.
2. Cl i ck New Out of Plane.
3. Click t he origin point .
OSNAP END is aut omat ically set .
4. Select a point along one axis of t he UCS.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
136
OSNAP END and NEAR are aut omat ically set .
5. To creat e a UCS perpendicular t o t he current one, press Ent er.
To creat e a skewed UCS, click a t hird point .
ShipConst ruct or creat es and names t he UCS using t he available UCSs.
Creat e a UCS Paral l el t o t he Current UCS
To creat e a UCS parallel t o t he current UCS
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS (page 429) t o open t he Act ivat e UCS window.
2. Select t he USC in t he list t hat you want t he new UCS t o be parallel t o.
3. Cl i ck Move Z
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
137
.
The Move Plane window appears.
4. Ent er a dist ance, direct ion and measurement met hod t o of f set t he new UCS f rom t he select ed UCS or click t he Pick
but t on t o select t he posit ion of t he new UCS
ShipConst ruct or creat es a new UCS using t he values set by t he user or t he picked locat ion.
Act i vat e a UCS
To act ivat e a UCS f rom an object
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS (page 429) t o open t he UCS window.
2. Cl i ck Act ivat e f rom Object .
3. Select t he object .
ShipConst ruct or calculat es t he UCS dif f erent ly f or dif f erent t ypes of object s:
• St andard Aut oCAD object s – ShipConst ruct or det ermines t he UCS plane of t he object .
• ShipConst ruct or part s – ShipConst ruct or let s you choose t he UCS:
• St i f f eners – ShipConst ruct or displays t he f ollowing window, let t ing you select one of f our UCSs associat ed
wit h an end of a st if f ener.
• Pl at es – ShipConst ruct or displays t he f ollowing window.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
138
To act ivat e a UCS
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS (page 429) t o open t he UCS window.
Select t he UCS f rom Act ivat e f rom list .
2. Cl i ck Act i vat e.
Sel ect a UCS Vi ewpoi nt
Select ing a UCS viewpoint is t he easiest way t o obt ain a plan view t o t he current ly act ive UCS, especially if t he UCS is
cant ed, such as f or a sloping deck.
To select a UCS viewpoint
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > 3D Viewpoint (page 429) t o open t he Select View window.
2. Click t he Plan t ab.
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
139
Views f or t he current UCS are list ed under Current UCS.
If you are current ly in a planar group drawing, t he views f or t he const ruct ion UCS are list ed under Const ruct ion UCS.
Not e: The view names are based on t he orient at ion of t he UCS, f or example, Looking Af t .
3. Select a view.
4. Cl i ck OK.
Undo
Wit h Aut oCAD you can backt rack your recent act ions using one of several met hods. For det ails, see Undo in Aut oCAD
Help.
St ruct ural Model i ng Layers
St ruct ural modeling layers in ShipConst ruct or are as f ollows:
• _Part cont ains t he part (now a ShipConst ruct or cust om ent it y and no longer an Aut oCAD block) and it s aut omat ically
generat ed solid.
• _REV cont ains revision inf ormat ion (as in ShipConst ruct or2005).
• _Draf t _Cut cont ains t he out er and inner cont ours of t he part .
• _Draf t _Mark cont ains geomet ry t o be marked on plat e part s.
• _Draf t _NoProcess cont ains geomet ry t hat will be ignored during NC cut t ing (as in ShipConst ruct or2005).
Act i vat e a Layer
When you act ivat e a layer, t he object s on t he layer become visible and available t o edit .
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
140
To act ivat e a layer
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Act ivat e (page 437) t o open t he Select Layer t o Act ivat e window.
2. Select t he layer you want t o act ivat e.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Deact i vat e a Layer
When you deact ivat e a layer, t he object s on t he layer become hidden and are unavailable f or edit ing (t hat is, t hey
become f rozen).
To deact ivat e a layer
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Deact ivat e (page 437) t o open t he Select Layer t o Deact ivat e window.
2. Select t he layer t o deact ivat e.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Copy Obj ect s f rom One Layer t o Anot her
To copy object s f rom one layer t o anot her
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Copy Geomet ry t o (page 438)
2. Select t he object s you want t o copy.
3. Press Ent er
The Copy Geomet ry t o Layer window appears.
4. Select t he layer t o copy t he object s t o.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Move Obj ect s f rom One Layer t o Anot her
To move object s f rom one layer t o anot her
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Move Geomet ry t o (page 438)
2. Select t he object s you want t o move.
3. Press Ent er
The Move Geomet ry t o Layer window appears.
4. Select t he layer t o move t he object s t o.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Obj ect Di spl ay
Hi de or Show Obj ect s
Somet imes it is dif f icult t o select an object when many ot her object s are near it . You can hide object s t o make it easier t o
see or select t he object s you are int erest ed in. This is especially helpf ul when many object s are on t he same layer.
Not e: When you hide an object , ShipConst ruct or does not move it t o a hidden layer. Inst ead, ShipConst ruct or simply
does not display t he object .
To hide object s
1. Select t he object s t o hide.
2. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Hide Object s (page 432)
St ruct ure Model i ng Concept s
141
To show object s
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide Object s (page 432)
ShipConst ruct or shows t he object s, one at a t ime, t hat you most recent ly hid.
If you choose SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide Object s (page 432) again, ShipConst ruct or will cont inue showing object s in t he
reverse order t hat you hid t hem.
To show all object s
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide All Object s (page 432)
Di spl ay Obj ect s i n Wi ref rame, Hi dden Li ne, or Shaded Mode
You can cont rol whet her object s in your drawing are displayed in wiref rame, hidden line, or shaded mode.
To display object s in wiref rame, hidden line, or shaded mode
1. Choose t he mode you want f rom View > Vi sual St yl es.
Di spl ay Inf ormat i on f or an Obj ect wi t hi n an MLi nked Drawi ng
You can list inf ormat ion on an object wit hin a model linked (mlinked) drawing, providing more inf ormat ion f or t he
designer during modeling, checking, or reviewing of a part icular area in t he 3D product model.
To display inf ormat ion f or an object wit hin an mlinked drawing
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > List It em wit hin Block/ Xref (page 444)
2. Select t he object wit hin your drawing t hat you want t o see inf ormat ion about .
The inf ormat ion appears wit hin t he command line.
Export a Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ng t o an Aut oCAD onl y Drawi ng
You may wish t o open a ShipConst ruct or drawing on a machine t hat does not have ShipConst ruct or. To f acilit at e t his
Shi pConst ruct or has a command t hat creat es a drawing cont aining only Aut oCAD ent it ies f rom any ShipConst ruct or
drawi ng.
To export a ShipConst ruct or drawing t o an Aut oCAD only drawing
1. Choose t he SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o Dwg…(page 444) menu command.
2. If any changes have been made t o t he current drawing, you will be asked if you wish t o save. Click Yes t o cont inue
wit h t he export .
3. In t he Save As window t hat appears, choose a locat ion and name f or t he export ed drawing and click Save.
4. The export will proceed and will open up t he new Aut oCAD drawing when it is complet e.
Not e: Everyt hing in t he ShipConst ruct or drawing will be export ed t o t he new drawing, including any hidden object s or
l ayers.
Not e: The export does not t ake t he St ruct ural Display Opt ions int o account ; t he solids, piecemarks and product ion inf o
of t he part s will all be visible in t he export ed drawing regardless of t he St ruct ural Display Opt ions (similar t o how t he
Aut oCAD explode command works f or part s). See SC St ruct ure > Show / Hide Opt ions (page 373) f or more
inf ormat ion on t he St ruct ural Display Opt ions.
Model St ruct ure
143
Model St ruct ure
St ruct ural modeling in ShipConst ruct or now uses a paramet ric-like workf low. Previously, you had t o creat e solids bef ore
creat ing part s. Now, you can creat e part s direct ly f rom const ruct ion lines.
The Dat abase Driven Relat ional Object Model (DDROM) dramat ically reduces t he amount of t ime you spend modeling
st ruct ural plat e part s and signif icant ly simplif ies t he process f or making lat e design changes. For example, if you move a
t ankt op up in one drawing, ShipConst ruct or will adjust t he height of all f rame plat e part s above and below it . Similarly, if
you exchange one f rame hull t race f or anot her, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es all relat ed f rame part s (plat es and
st i f f eners).
Not e: St if f eners are logically at t ached t o t he plat e part s and will, t heref ore, change t heir locat ion wit h changes in
t hickness, t hrow, or locat ion of t he plat e part . Subsequent releases of ShipConst ruct or will also aut omat ically updat e
st if f ener lengt hs.
Movi ng t he t ankt op up…
Model St ruct ure
144
…aut omat i cal l y modi f i es al l rel at ed part s
DDROM Best Pract i ces
Concept ual Desi gn St age
Wit h t he abilit y t o quickly creat e and easily updat e exist ing part s in ShipConst ruct or comes t he abilit y t o creat e macro
part s early in t he design st age t hat can t hen be easily modif ied or redef ined when t he design progresses. For example,
you can now creat e a single plat e f or an ent ire deck early on in t he design st age t o allow ot her disciplines t o st art using
t he concept ual model as an early ref erence model. This deck can t hen be st raked when t he st ruct ural design requires it
t o be. Alt ernat ively, due t o t he speed wit h which part s can be creat ed and modif ied, it may make sense t o st rake t he
deck early in t he process and make any required changes as and when necessary.
Def i ne Part s Earl y
In sharp cont rast t o ShipConst ruct or2005, part s in ShipConst ruct or can be creat ed as early as necessary, let t ing you st art
f leshing out a product hierarchy, perf orm early weight calculat ions, and so on when t hey are required. The exist ing part s
can be det ailed lat er in t he process, f urt her ref ining t he weight est imat es and det ail of t he model as you go. In f act , wit h
ShipConst ruct or you do not st art creat ing a solid model unt il you begin creat ing part s, so def ining part s is a necessary
st ep.
Maxi mi ze DDROM Ef f ect i veness (Rel at i onshi p Management )
To maximize t he updat abilit y of your 3D Product Dat a Model wit hin t he DDROM, you need t o plan t he design t o use t he
largest number of relat ionships possible. This can be done by minimizing t he number of act ions you have t o perf orm t hat
break t hese relat ionships. The best way t o minimize t hese act ions is t o t hink ahead and underst and where you want t o
go.
Model St ruct ure
145
DDROM Exampl e
The Goal
The six f rames shown in t he image below are all largely ident ical wit h t he except ion of minor hull f orm changes. These
changes are signif icant enough t o make t he part s on t he hull non-ident ical f rom f rame-t o-f rame. However, t he f rames are
similar enough t hat it does make sense t o replicat e t he part s of one f rame int o t he ot hers and make t he minimum
modif icat ions required.
Approach 1
The most obvious approach seems t o be t o creat e one side of one f rame, mirror all of t hose part s, and t hen replicat e t he
ent ire f rame t o t he ot her similar f rames. This approach has t wo major f ailings. The f irst f ailing is t hat only part s t hat have
been explicit ly mirrored will be considered mirrored f or product ion purposes (f or example, port and st arboard nest ing).
The second f ailing is caused by t he met hod in which t he result ing part s are relat ed t o each ot her. More import ant ly, as
shown in t he f ollowing diagram, t he f ailure is due t o t he way t he part s are relat ed t o each ot her af t er t he hull f orm
changes are made and t he replicat ed part s are no longer ident ical, breaking all ident ical def inint ions you creat ed.
Model St ruct ure
146
Approach 2
Because t he int ent ion is t hat part s in each f rame maint ain a primary mirrored relat ionship wit h it s port and st arboard
count erpart , even when we break t he ident ical nat ure across f rames, we want t o preserve t he relat ionship across f rames
t o allow it t o work wit hin t he DDROM. To achieve t his result , we can creat e one side of t he f irst f rame, replicat e t hose
part s t o t he similar f rames, and t hen perf orm t he mirror in each f rame. As you see f rom t he image below, a lit t le more
t hought and ef f ort when modeling will make t he result s more ef f ect ive in t he long run.
Const ruct i on Li ne Management
One of t he key element s t o ShipConst ruct or is const ruct ion line management . A const ruct ion line is a polyline ent it y t hat
is st ored in t he dat abase and can be used t o def ine t he boundary port ions of a ShipConst ruct or part . In a large project
t hat t akes advant age of t he DDROM t o it s f ull ext ent , you will have a large number of const ruct ion l i nes and managing
t hose lines will be key in underst anding how your model works.
There are f our major t ypes of const ruct ion li nes: User const ruct ion lines, PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines, HullTrace
const ruct ion lines, and Of f set const ruct ion lines. These const ruct ion lines f orm t he basis f or t he DDROM. How you creat e
and modif y t hem will impact t he complexit y and t he ease of updat ing your model.
Model St ruct ure
147
See Const ruct ion Lines (page 147) f or more det ails and procedures on const ruct ion lines.
Not e: In previous versions of ShipConst ruct or, you had t o t rim, ext end, break, and perf orm ot her procedures on draf t
lines t o achei ve one perf ect t oolpat h f or a single part . In Shi pConst ruct or, perf orming too many operat ions on
const ruct ion lines can inhibit your abilit y t o make changes lat er on. Not only does t rimming a const ruct ion line limit
how usable it is in ot her part s, it will also af f ect how usable t he line is in t he part t hat it is being t rimmed f or. For
exampl e, a hori zont al const ruct ion line in a f rame t hat is t rimmed t o t he HullTrace const ruct ion line f or t hat f rame
may no longer int ersect t he HullTrace if t he hull f orm is changed signif icant ly in t hat area. If it is lef t as a longer line,
t he l i ne will be less likely t o require user modif icat ion when changes happen or when it is replicat ed t o wider f rames
where it may not ot herwise int ersect t he new HullTrace. This concept applies in many areas.
General Use Ti ps
ShipConst ruct or int roduces us t o many new concept s and has many new f eat ures t hat should make it easier t o creat e,
edit , and manage complex 3D Product Dat a Models t han ever bef ore. Here are some simple t ips t o help you get st art ed:
• You can def ine planar groups f rom any drawing. Keeping all sect ion lines in a single read-only Cont rolLines.dwg will
make managing t hose sect ions much easier in t he long t erm.
• While you are st ill growing accust omed t o ShipConst ruct or and t he DDROM, pay at t ent ion t o t he relat ionships newly
creat ed part s and const ruct ion lines have t o ot her it ems in your model. Relat ionships f or part s and const ruct ion lines
can be viewed via SC St ruct ure > Part s > Inf ormat ion…(page 412) or SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line >
Inf ormat ion…(page 418), respect ively. This is also where relat ionships can be broken if curves are t o be added or
removed.
• Plan ahead. Think about t he model you are working t oward rat her t han just t he part you are t rying t o creat e.
• Part naming and updat ing part names has been great ly improved. Use naming convent ions whenever possible and
do not edit names manually unless you are sure you need t o. (If you edit a name manually, t he name is no longer a
generat ed name and t heref ore will not be updat ed t o ref lect lat er changes such as a change in product hierarchy
assignment .)
• Save drawings of t en. Aut o-save does not save t o t he ShipConst ruct or dat abase, and any conf lict s wit h ot her users of
t he DDROM will be uncovered on a save.
St ruct ural Model i ng
St ruct ural modeling in ShipConst ruct or is very dif f erent f rom previous versions of ShipConst ruct or. This document
provides an overview of t he new st ruct ural modeling workf low and highlight s some of t he improvement s.
Dat abase
ShipConst ruct or now st ores all geomet ry, part s, and so on, and t heir at t ribut es (f or example, mat erial, weight , revisions,
product hi erarchi es) wit hin t he project dat abase. Whenever you open a drawing, ShipConst ruct or regenerat es t he drawing
using t he inf ormat ion in t he dat abase. Previously, ShipConst ruct or st ored geomet ry wit hin t he drawings.
In Shi pConst ruct or, any changes you make t o a drawing are not saved t o t he dat abase unt il you save t he drawing. In
ShipConst ruct or2005, t he dat abase is updat ed as you work in a st ruct ural drawing. If t wo users are edit ing dif f erent
versions of a common (ident ical or mirrored) part , t he f irst user t o save t heir drawing has t heir edit s saved t o t he
dat abase; t he second user is not if ied of a concurrency issue.
3D Uni t Drawi ngs
As in ShipConst ruct or2005, t he purpose of t he 3D unit drawing is t o provide a 3D environment f or you t o def ine t he
geomet ry of planar groups and hull t races. You can def ine hull t race geomet ry using t he Hull module, using ShipCAM, or
using Aut oCAD drawings or geomet ry.
Const ruct i on Li nes
Const ruct ion lines are a new ent it y in ShipConst ruct or. They are draf t ing lines t hat are used t o def ine and edit t he
boundaries of each part . These draf t ing lines are meant t o be f or developing t he product ion part s.
Model St ruct ure
148
There are f our t ypes of const ruct ion lines: HullTrace const ruct ion lines, PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines, Of f set
const ruct ion lines, and User const ruct ion lines.
Not e: In ShipConst ruct or2005 you add det ails (f or example, scallops, cut out s) t o part boundaries before def ining t he
part . In ShipConst ruct or you add det ails after def ining t he part .
Modi f yi ng Const ruct i on Li nes
Whenever you modif y a const ruct ion line, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es all associat ed part s.
Const ruct ion lines can be linked t o anot her const ruct ion line, making it easy f or you t o modif y one const ruct ion line and
have all t he changes applied t o linked const ruct ion lines. When modif ying a const ruct ion line by moving, rot at ing,
ext ending, and so on, ShipConst ruct or will display t he Updat e Linked Object s window.
The const ruct i on l i ne wi t h obj ect handl e ed i s bei ng modi f i ed. The const ruct i on l i ne has t wo pl at e part s t hat use t he const ruct i on l i ne f or
def i ni t i on 03-F40-001P and 03-F4 0-0 02P, and one i dent i cal const ruct i on l i ne Handl e 179 (whi ch al so has t wo pl at e part s usi ng t he
const ruct i on l i ne f or def i ni t i on 0 3-FR40-001S and 03-FR4 0-002S).
Model St ruct ure
149
The Updat e Linked Object s window displays all t he linked const ruct ion lines and all t he part s t hat use t hose const ruct ion
lines. This window l et s you select which linked const ruct ion lines you want t o apply t he current modif icat ion t o. For any of
t he linked const ruct ion lines t hat are checked, t he current modif icat ion are applied t o t hem and t he part s t hat use t hem.
For any of t he linked const ruct ion lines t hat are not checked, no changes are applied t o t hem, and t he link bet ween t he
const ruct ion lines are broken.
Hul lTrace Const ruct ion Line
Very f ew modif icat ions can be done t o a Hul lTrace const ruct ion line. Once a hull t race is creat ed you will not be able t o
change t he shape of t he hull t race t he way you can f or User const ruct ion lines. You are abl e t o t rim, break, and ext end t he
Hul lTrace const ruct ion line but are not able t o move, rot at e, and edit grips. You should limit t he amount of t rimming and
ext ending done t o t he HullTrace const ruct ion line, as explained in t he Const ruct ion Line Management (page 146) sect ion.
You can replace a HullTrace const ruct ion line wit h anot her Hul lTrace const ruct ion line.
To replace a hull t race const ruct ion line:
1. Def ine a new hull t race and place it in t he planar group.
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Replace Hull Trace (page 421)
Select Original Hull Trace ConstructionLine:
3. Select t he original hull t race cont ruct ion line.
Sel ect new Hul l Trace:
4. Select t he new hull t race curve.
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es all part s associat ed wit h t he original hull t race. (See Const ruct ion Line
Relat ionships (page 150).)
Pl anarGroupPlane Const ruct ion Line
PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines represent t he int ersect ion of t wo planar group planes. (A planar group plane is like a
UCS, except t hat it resides in t he project dat abase. A UCS only resides in drawings.) You can creat e PlanarGroupPlane
const ruct ion lines using t he mark group int ersect ions command.
Not e: This command works similarly t o t he same command in ShipConst ruct or2005, except ShipConst ruct or creat es
a Pl anarGroupPlane const ruct ion line inst ead of an Aut oCAD polyline.
The creat ed Pl anarGroupPlane const ruct ion line is linked t o t he t wo planes t hat creat ed it . If one plane is modif ied
t hrough t he move planar group command, any PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line def ined by t hat plane will be
aut omat ically updat ed t o t he new int ersect ing plane. If t he planar group plane is used in def ining a plat e part boundary,
t he plat e part will also be updat ed aut omat ically.
There are t wo ways you can creat e PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines:
• ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically creat es PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines wit hin a planar group drawing when
you mark group int ersect ions. (That is, t o creat e PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines wit hin a planar group
drawing, simply mark group int ersect ions.)
• Shi pConstruct or aut omat ically creat es a PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line wit hin a planar group drawing
when you act ivat e a UCS using SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS (page 429). (ShipConst ruct or does not aut omat ically
creat e a PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line when you act ivat e a UCS using Aut oCAD’s UCS commands.)
Each PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line is direct ly relat ed t o a planar group, so t he only way t o modif y a
PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line is t o modif y (f or example, move) t he ent ire parent planar group. ShipConst ruct or will
t hen aut omat ically updat e all part s associat ed wit h t he PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line.
To move PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Move Planar Group (page 427).
2. Ent er t he amount t o move t he planar group and t he direct ion t o move it in.
3. ShipConst ruct or displays a window list ing ot her UCSs t hat you can choose t o move. Select t he UCSs t hat you want t o
move.
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es al l part s associat ed wit h t he PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line and any
const ruct ion line t hat is linked t o t hose PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines.
Model St ruct ure
150
Of f set Const ruct ion Lines
Of f set const ruct ion lines are creat ed f rom ot her const ruct ion lines and will maint ain t he of f set relat ionship wit h t he
original line. They are creat ed wit h t he Aut oCAD OFFSET command. If t he line select ed f or t he command is a const ruct ion
line, t hen a new of f set const ruct ion line will be creat ed.Of f set s can be creat ed f rom any t ype of const ruct ion line,
including ot her of f set const ruct ion lines. Modif icat ions t hat change t he shape of t he line are not allowed on of f set
const ruct ion lines, but it may be moved or rot at ed. The of f set const ruct ion line maint ains t he relat ionship wit h t he source
const ruct ion line, similar t o t he relat ionship bet ween ident ical const ruct ion lines, and changes t o one will af f ect t he ot her
(see Const ruct ion Line Relat ionships (page 150)).
The of f set value of an of f set const ruct ion line can be changed wit h t he SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Edit Of f set
(page 420) command.
User Const ruct ion Lines
User const ruct ion lines are t he most f lexible const ruct ion lines. Any Aut oCAD command t hat you can perf orm on an
Aut oCAD polyline, you can also perf orm on a user const ruct ion line. These lines represent arbit rary (user-def ined) part
boundaries. Wit hin t he planar group drawing, use Aut oCAD’s drawing t ools t o creat e lines, polyline, circles, and so on t hat
represent t he boundaries of part s. When you creat e a part t hat uses t hese lines as boundaries, ShipConst ruct or
aut omat ically convert s t he lines t o User const ruct ion lines. When you move or modif y User const ruct ion lines,
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es all associat ed part s.
There are several ways t hat a User const ruct ion line can be creat ed.
To convert an Aut oCAD line t o a const ruct ion line
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Convert t o User Const ruct ion Line (page 420)
2. Select a curve t o convert t o a user const ruct ion line.
Not e: Const ruct ion lines are made from polylines only, so circles will not remain as circles.
There are ot her ways t o add const ruct ion lines t o a drawing:
• When creat ing a plat e part or prof i l e part , all used geomet ry t hat is not al ready a const ruct ion line will be
convert ed int o User const ruct ion lines.
• Copyi ng or mirroring of a PlanarGroupPl ane const ruct ion line, Hul lTrace const ruct ion line, or User const ruct ion
line will creat e a new User const ruct ion line. Copying or mirroring an Of f set const ruct ion line will creat e anot her
Of f set const ruct ion line. The newl y creat ed const ruct ion line is linked t o t he original const ruct ion line, so if t he
original const ruct ion line is modif ied, t he new const ruct ion line will also be modif ied.
• When a st ruct ure part (plat e, st if f ener, and faceplat e) is copied or mirrored, all t he geomet ry is aut omat ically
copied in t he f orm of user or of f set const ruct ion lines, depending on t he source. Agai n, t hese const ruct ion lines
are linked t o t he original const ruct ion lines and will be modif ied when t he original line is modif ied.
Not e: You can rest ore most const ruct ion lines back int o Aut oCAD polylines by exploding t hem. You will not be able t o
explode const ruct ion lines associat ed wit h part s.
Const ruct i on Li ne Rel at i onshi ps
Const ruct ion lines are used t o def ine part s and can be linked t o ot her const ruct ion lines. ShipConst ruct or has a f eat ure t o
show you all t he inf ormat ion t hat relat es t o a const ruct ion line.
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Inf ormat ion…(page 418)
2. Sel ect one or mult iple const ruct ion lines.
Model St ruct ure
151
User const ruct i on l i ne wi t h Handl e 1a6 has an i dent i cal User const ruct i on l i ne (Handl e f 1) and an i dent i cal Pl anarGroupPl ane
const ruct i on l i ne (U12TTOP_M [Handl e 3e]). The Pl anarGroupPl ane const ruct i on l i ne i s used i n t he def i ni t i on of pl at e part U12F112-
PO23P.
To replace a const ruct ion line
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Swap Construct ion Line (page 420)
2. Select t he const ruct ion line t hat you want t o replace.
3. Select t he new const ruct ion line.
St ruct ure Part Rel at i onshi ps
In ShipConst ruct or, part s can have relat ionships t o ot her part s. This concept is not ent irely new since in
ShipConst ruct or2005 you had t he capabilit y of having PS part s and ident ical part s. In ShipConst ruct or2005 t he PS part
did not have an object associat ed wit h it during modeling unt il you broke t he link. In ShipConst ruct or, it is possible f or
part s t o have a mirrored relat ionship (similar t o PS part s in ShipConst ruct or2005) and also an ident ical part . In
ShipConst ruct or all part s have an object associat ed wit h t hem.
Di spl ayi ng Part Rel at i onshi ps
Choose SC St ruct ure > Part s > Relat ionships…(page 411).
Select a ShipConst ruct or st ruct ural part f or display.
The Relat ionships window displays all t he relat ionshi ps t hat you need t o know about t he part .
How t o Creat e Relat ed Part s
There are t wo t ypes of relat ionships bet ween part s. Part s can be relat ed as mirrors or ident icals.
To creat e mirrored part s
You can creat e mirrored part s using one of t wo met hods:
1. Use t he Aut oCAD command mirror.
2. Use t he ShipConst ruct or command SCMIRRORCL.
Af t er eit her of t hese t wo commands, t he source and t he dest inat ion part will be linked as mirrored part s. All needed
construct ion lines and at t ached part s (st if f eners, f aceplat es) are also aut omat ically mirrored. These part s also have t he
mirrored part s link wit h each ot her.
To creat e ident ical part s
1. Use t he Aut oCAD command Copy or Array.
Model St ruct ure
152
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Replicat e Object s t o Ot her Group (page 427)
The source and t he dest inat ion part will be linked as ident ical part s. All needed const ruct ion lines and at t ached part s
(st if f eners, f aceplat es) are also aut omat ically copied. These part s are also ident ical t o t heir original part s.
Removi ng Li nks Bet ween Part s
Through t he Part s Inf ormat ion window, you can remove links bet ween part s. This window provides a link t o t he
Rel at i onshi ps window f or t he select ed part . Opt ionally, it is possible t o launch t he Relat ionships window f or t he part
direct ly. See Displaying Part Relat ionships (page 151).
To remove t he link bet ween part s:
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Part s > Inf ormat ion…(page 412)
2. Sel ect t he part you want t o remove links f or.
3. Select t he part in t he Part s Inf ormat ion window.
4. The Relat ionships but t on is now enabled. Click it t o display t he Relat ionships window f or t he part select ed in t he
previous st ep.
5. ShipConst ruct or displays t he Relat ionships window. Uncheck all t he part s t hat you want t o break links wit h. Not e t hat
all part s checked will st ay linked t o each ot her. For example, in t he above image part s 0302-P04-S01, 0302-P04-
S02, 0302-P04-S03 will no longer be linked wit h part s 0302-P04-S04, 0302-P04-S05, but will remain linked wit h
each ot her.
6. The Break but t on will now be enabled. Click it t o break t he links bet ween part s.
7. Cl i ck Close when f inished edit ing t he relat ionships and ret urn t o t he Part s Inf ormat ion window.
Fixing Ident ical Part Names
There are sit uat ions t hat may cause t wo or more ident ical part s t o have ident ical relat ionships bet ween t hem but t he
part s have dif f erent names or dif f erent name st ruct ures. There are t wo commands t o correct t he part names of ident ical
part s depending on t he result s desired. Bot h t hese commands will correct ly handle part s in dif f erent assemblies and wit h
dif f erent part sides as long as your part naming convent ions are set up t o do so. Bot h commands should only be run in
planar group model drawings and will t ry and f ix t he names of ident ical part s t hat reside in t he current drawing as well as
in ot her drawings. Mult iple part s (even of dif f erent t ypes) can be select ed at once.
To f ix ident ical part names using t he name of a select ed part :
1. Open a planar group model drawing and select t he st ruct ure part s wit h t he names you wish t o use as a basis f or t he
names of t he part s wit h ident ical relat ionships t o t hem.
2. Run t he command SCFIXIDENTPARTNAMES
This will use t he part name of select ed part s (generat ed or non-generat ed) as t he basis f or t he names of all part s wit h
i dent ical relat ionships t o t hem.
Model St ruct ure
153
To f ix ident ical part names using t he lowest aut o-number:
1. Open a planar group model drawing and select t he st ruct ure part s t hat you wish t o f ix t he names of .
2. Run t he command SCGENERATEIDENTPARTNAMES
This will f ind t he generat ed part name wit h t he lowest aut o-number f or each select ed part and t heir ident icals and use
t hi s aut o-number t o regenerat e t he part names of all t he part s wit h an ident ical relat ionship t o t he select ed part s. Part s
t hat have non-generat ed names will be changed t o have generat ed names.
Updat i ng Mi rrored and Ident i cal Part s
When you change or edit part s t hat are relat ed t o ot her part s t he Updat e Linked Object s Window appears, giving you a
choice of which relat ed part s t o updat e.
The lef t side of t he window shows t he part s t hat are direct ly relat ed via an ident ical or mirrored relat ionship t o t he original
part you edit ed or changed. Checking t he box beside each part select s t hat part t o be updat ed wit h t he changes you
made t o t he original part . If t he box beside a part is not checked, t hat part will not be updat ed wit h any changes and t he
relat ionship bet ween it and t he original part will be removed. The right side of t he window shows a list of part s and t he
drawings t hey are in t hat will be updat ed or af f ect ed by t he changes you are maki ng t o t he checked part s. For any part
list ed t hat resides in t he current drawing you can right -click on it and select Zoom t o zoom t he current view t o t hat part .
The relat ionship of any part list ed on t he right side of t he window t o t he original part being changed can be seen by right -
clicking on t he part and select ing Find Relat ed Pat h.
Not e: All part s t hat are checked will remain relat ed t o each ot her but not t o t he unchecked part s. Likewise, t he
unchecked part s will al l remain rel at ed t o t he ot her unchecked part s, but not t o t he checked part s.
Mark Group Int ersect i ons
When creat ing or det ailing a st ruct ural part , you t ypically need inf ormat ion about ot her st ruct ural obj ect s t hat do or might
i nt ersect t he plane of t he part . You can f ind t his inf ormat ion by marking, in t he current drawing, t he int ersect ion of
various UCSs (corresponding t o ot her st ruct ural part s) wit h t he current UCS.
For example, if a f rame is int ersect ed by decks and girders, ShipConst ruct or cal cul at es t he int ersect ion lines bet ween t he
f rame and t he decks and girders by calculat ing t he int ersect ion of t heir UCSs in 3D space. The UCS can eit her be t he
const ruct i on or t hickness UCS or a specially creat ed UCS f rom ot her planar group drawi ngs.
To mark group int ersect ions
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Mark Group Int ersect ions (page 372) t o open t he Mark Group Int ersect ions Window (page
373).
Model St ruct ure
154
ShipConst ruct or insert s t he marks as f ollows. All lines are t en percent longer t han t he current ext ent s of t he drawing.
You will have t o t rim t he lines lat er t o t heir appropriat e sizes using st andard Aut oCAD t rimming.
Pl at e Part s
A plat e part is a part made f rom plat e st ock. Plat e part s are generally f lat . Plat e part s can also be f langed (see Plat e
Fl anges (page 159)).
Pl at e Part Creat i on
ShipConst ruct or uses a new process f or creat ing plat e part s. (It is st ill possible t o use t he ShipConst ruct or2005 process
f or creat ing plat e part s in ShipConst ruct or.)
The f ollowing improvement s have been made t o plat e part s:
• Plat e part s are now paramet rically def ined f rom const ruct ion lines. Moving a const ruct ion line will aut omat ically
modif y t he part associat ed wit h t he const ruct ion line.
• You can now modif y or remove holes, cut out s, scallops, and ot her element s wit hout having t o redef ine t he part . This
change makes model revisions much f ast er.
• Cut out s are now associat ed wit h st if f eners. When you change a st if f ener, t he cut out in t he plat e is aut omat ically
changed.
Not e: Replicat ed geomet ry may not be ident ical t o t he original geomet ry because st if f eners and cut out s may not
be in ident ical places.
• Piecemark and orient at ion icons are now placed aut omat ically, reducing draf t ing t ime.
• There is a new int erf ace f or creat ing plat e part s.
Previously, you assigned a part t o t he product hierarchy during part creat ion. Now, you assign t he part t o t he product
hi erarchy when edit ing t he part .
You can now def ine t he piecemark locat ion by select ing t he inside boundary point .
If t he plat e part will have holes, t hen you need one closed t oolpat h on t he _Draf t _Cut layer f or each hole.
To creat e a plat e part
Not e: Unlike ShipConst ruct or2005, you do not need t o def ine a closed t oolpat h and ext rude a solid bef ore def ining a
pl at e part .
Model St ruct ure
155
1. Def ine t he boundaries of t he part using Hul lTrace const ruct ion lines, PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines, Of f set
const ruct ion lines, User const ruct ion lines, and polylines. Use closed polylines t o def ine inner boundaries (holes).
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > New (page 376)
3. Cl i ck wit hin t he part boundaries.
The point t hat you click will become t he locat ion of t he part ’s piecemark.
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically det ect s t he part boundaries.
The Edit Propert ies window appears.
To edit a plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit (page 379) and select t he plat e part or ri ght -click on t he plat e part and choose
Edit Propert ies.
The Edit Propert ies window appears.
2. Set t he desired propert ies.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Not e: Changes made t o t he Part name, Product Hierarchy, Finishes and User At t ribut es are not applied t o t he
mirrored and ident ical part s at t his t ime.
A pl at e part (shaded)
Copy a Pl at e
To copy a plat e
A plat e part can be copied by using t he Aut oCAD COPY command.
Not e: All at t ached ext rusions and boundary const ruct ion lines will be copied wit h t he part . The plat e, at t ached
ext rusions and t he boundary const ruct ion lines will have an ident ical rel at i onshi p wit h t heir source.
Model St ruct ure
156
Mi rror a Pl at e
To mirror a plat e
A plat e part can be mirrored by t he f ollowing met hods:
• Using t he Aut oCAD MIRROR command.
• Using SC Ut ilit ies > Mirror about Cent erline (page 439)
Not e: All at t ached ext rusions and boundary const ruct ion lines will also be mirrored wit h t he part . The plat e, at t ached
ext rusions and t he boundary const ruct ion lines will have a mirror relat ionship wit h t heir source.
Move a Pl at e
To move a plat e
A plat e part can be moved by using t he Aut oCAD MOVE command.
Not e: You cannot use t he mouse t o drag a plat e part . This operat ion is disabled wit hin planar group model drawings.
If t he plat e you are moving has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o be moved.
Mirrored part s are moved relat ive t o t heir mirrored axis. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
Det ai l a Pl at e
Det ai ling a plat e part can include insert ing scallops or cut out s or adding marking.
In ShipConst ruct or2005 you insert det ails (scallops, cut out s, and so on) bef ore def ining t he part . In ShipConst ruct or you
can insert det ails af t er def ining t he part . When you det ail a part , ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es t he part and it s
associat ed const ruct ion lines.
Add, Remove, and Edit Obj ect s on an Exist ing Plat e Part
You may f orget t o include a marking line or similar object when def ining a plat e part . You can add object s lat er by using
t he Add Object s command. For each part t hat you run t he command on, you will be asked which object s you want t o add.
You can only add object s t o a plat e part . You can only add product ion object s t o a part .
There are several t ypes of object s t hat can be added t o a plat e part .
• Text object s
• Marklines (Use markline st yle def ined in Manager > St ruct ure > Plat es > Marking St yles > Assign St yles under t he
General Assigned St yles)
• Cut lines (if curve is on _Draf t _Cut l ayer, ot herwise cut lines are added as marklines)
To add an object t o a plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Object s (page 383)
2. Select all plat e part s t hat you want t o add an object t o.
3. Select t he object t o add t o all select ed plat e part s.
The select ed object s are added t o t he exist ing part .
To remove an object f rom a plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Remove Object s (page 385)
2. Select t he object on t he plat e part t hat you want t o remove.
To edit object s of a plat e part
You can modif y t ext , marklines, piecemarks, t he part orient at ion icon, and weld shrinkage propert ies of a plat e part.
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edit Component (page 414)
Model St ruct ure
157
2. Select on t he component of t he plat e part t hat you want t o edit . Depending on your select ion an edit window will
appear allowing you t o change t he set t ings f or t hat inst ance of t hat component .
Add a Manhol e t o a Pl at e
1. Make t he _Draf t _Cut layer t he current layer.
2. Draf t a manhole as a polyline using regular CAD draf t ing commands. Ensure t he polyline is closed.
3. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Object s (page 383).
4. Select t he plat e part and press Ent er.
5. Select t he manhole polyline and press Ent er.
Pl at e Corner Treat ment s
In ShipConst ruct or, you creat e corner t reat ment s on plat e part s af t er you have def ined a plat e part . The dif f erent t ypes of
corner t reat ment s support ed in ShipConst ruct or are snipes, f illet s, and scallops. Bef ore you can add corner t reat ment s,
you need t o make a corner t reat ment st andard in St ruct ure > Plat es > Corner Treat ment s (page 336).
To add a corner t reat ment
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Corner Treat ment > Insert (page 386).
Sel ect Pl at e part s:
2. Select all t he plat e part s t hat you want t o add corner t reat ments t o. Press Ent er.
3. Select t he corner t reat ment t hat you want t o add t o t he select ed plat e part s.
4. If you have Zoom t o part checked, ShipConst ruct or will zoom t o t he f irst plat e part t hat you select ed. Select t he
point s t hat you would like t o add t he corner t reat ment t o.
5. Press Ent er when you are done.
6. ShipConst ruct or will cycle t hrough t he plat e part s t hat you select ed t o add corner t reat ment s t o. Repeat St eps 4 and
5 unt il all corner t reat ment s have been added.
Model St ruct ure
158
Not e: You can al so use corner t reat ment s t o add weld seam relief s t o plat e part s.
Pl at e Cut out s
St if f ener cut out s are also added t o t he plat e part af t er t he part is def ined. The part solid and production inf ormat ion is
aut omat ically updat ed. Bef ore a prof ile can creat e a cut out t hrough a plat e part , t he st ock of t he prof ile must have a
cut out shape associat ed wit h t he st ock. Ref er t o t he Creat e a Cut out (page 67) sect ion t o do t his.
To add a cut out
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Cut out s…(page 385)
2. Select a plat e part .
Shi pConst ruct or det ermines all t he st if f eners t hat int ersect t he plat e and displays t hem in t he Cut out Manager.
The Cut out Manager displays all t he cut out s f or t he select ed plat e part . Through t he Cut out Manager, you can delet e
cut out s and edit t he cut out t ype (using t he drop-down menu in Cut out Type column). Cut out s are color coded as f ollows:
Green – New
Model St ruct ure
159
Red – Delet ed
Yel l ow – Modif ied
Cyan - Sel ect ed
Not e: Cut out s f or st if f eners t hat belong t o a dif f erent unit are added according t o t he Allow Remot e Prof ile Cut out s
opt ion, f ound in t he St ruct ure sect ion of t he project set t ings (General > Project Set t ings (page 309)). If t his is set t o
‘No’, t hese cut out s will show up as delet ed.
Not e: If a st if f ener is moved, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es all cut out s t hat t he st if f ener creat es.
Not e: If a prof ile st ock changes, ShipConst ruct or updat es all cut out s using t he new st ock’s def ined cut out and t ries t o
apply t he same cut out t ype.
Pl at e Fl anges
You can add f langes t o plat e part s. Adding a f lange t o a plat e f irst requires a f lange st andard t o be creat ed. See
Creat e a Flange St andard (page 79). A f lange can only be applied t o a st raight segment of a plat e part . See Flange
Cat al og (page 79) f or more inf ormat ion on f langes.
To add a f lange t o a plat e
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Flange (page 380).
Select edge on plate:
2. Cl i ck on t he edge of t he plat e on the segment that you want to flange. It is best t o pick near t he middle of t he edge
because lat er modif icat ion of const ruct ion lines could cause t he f lange t o move t o a dif f erent edge.
The Select Flange window appears.
3. Select t he f lange st andard, t he direct ion t o f lange, and t he angle t o bend t he plat e.
4. Cl i ck OK.
To edit a plat e f lange
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Flange (page 381)
Select Plate:
2. Cl i ck on t he plat e t hat cont ains t he f lange you want t o edit .
The Flange List window appears.
This window list s t he f langes at t ached t o t he specif ied plat e solid.
3. Select t he desired f lange f rom t he list , ri ght -cl i ck, and select Propert ies.
4. The Select Flange window appears, let t ing you change t he f lange.
5. Cl i ck OK t o save t he modif ied f lange.
6. Cl i ck (in t he upper right corner of t he Flange List window) t o close t he window.
Model St ruct ure
160
To remove a f lange f rom a plat e
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Flange (page 381).
Select Plate:
2. Cl i ck on t he plat e t hat cont ains t he f lange you want t o edit .
The Flange List window appears. This window list s t he f langes at t ached t o t he specif ied plat e solid.
3. Select t he desired f lange f rom t he list , right -cl i ck, and select Delet e.
4. Cl i ck (in t he upper right corner of t he Flange List window) t o close t he window.
Pl at e Green (or St ock)
In ShipConst ruct or2005, t o simulat e adding green st ock t o a plat e you have t o modif y t he part ’s t oolpat h af t er you
generat ed t he solid. In ShipConst ruct or we have green st andards t hat can be added t o t he plat e part . First you need t o
def ine green st andards in Manager under St ruct ure > Plat es > Green St andards. Af t er you def ine a green st andard, you
can add green t o a plat e part .
To add green t o a plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Green (page 382).
2. Sel ect t he plat e part you want t o add green t o. If t he plat e part has ident ical or mirrored part s t hen you will see t he
Updat e Linked Object s window. Select t he part s you want t o change.
Select the start point:
3. Select t he point on t he out er edge of t he part where t he green will st art .
Select the end point:
4. Select t he point on t he out er edge of t he part where t he green will end.
Select segment for green:
5. Sel ect a point on t he segment t o add t he green t o.
6. Cl i ck OK.
You can change t he st andard af t er you have added green t o part s, and t he part s are updat ed when t he drawing is opened
or when SC Ut ilit ies > Rel oad Drawing is run.
To change green on a plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Green (page 382).
2. Select t he plat e part t o edit green. All of t he separat e green port ions are list ed f or t he select ed plat e part .
Model St ruct ure
161
The current ly select ed green in t he list is highlight ed in cyan in t he drawing.
3. From t he drop list in t he st andard column you can change t he st andard t o a dif f erent st andard.
4. Cl i ck OK.
To remove green f rom a plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Green (page 382).
2. Sel ect t he plat e part t o edit green. All of t he separat e green port ions are list ed f or t he select ed plat e part .
The Edit Plat e Part Green window appears.
3. Select t he Green you want t o remove in t he list and click Remove.
4. Cl i ck OK.
Wel d Shri nkage Icon
Weld shrinkage is t he amount t hat a part shrinks when anot her part (f or example, a st if f ener) is welded t o it . You can
compensat e f or weld shrinkage by insert ing a weld shrinkage icon ont o a plat e part . During nest ing, ShipConst ruct or will
oversize t he plat e part in each direct ion of t he weld shrinkage icon by a specif ied amount . The weld shrinkage icon is not
marked on t he plat e.
Weld shrinkage depends on t he t ype of mat erial, paramet ers of welding, t he init ial t emperat ure of t he part (account ing
f or t he dif f erences in summer and wint er), and so on. Typically, shipyards use st at ist ical t est dat a f rom panel lines, dat a
f rom t est welds, or dat a f rom previous project s t o predict t he amount of weld shrinkage.
Not e: A good st art ing point f or large vessel st eel const ruct ion is 1 mm of weld shrinkage per one it em of cont inuous
weld.
To insert a weld shrinkage icon
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Weld Shrinkage Icon.
2. Select t he plat e part t o add t he weld shrinkage t o.
The Weld Shrinkage Icon window appears.
3. Set t he opt ions and t hen click OK.
4. The icon appears on t he plat e part .
5. Rot at e t he icon t o t he desired orient at ion. The direct ion of t he t wo axes should be aligned wit h t he st if f ener weld
di rect i ons.
Model St ruct ure
162
During nest ing, ShipConst ruct or oversizes t he plat e part in each direct ion of t he weld shrinkage icon by t he value
gi ven. In t he example above, t he amount is 6 mm in t he horizont al axis and 0 mm in t he vert ical axis. The icon can
be rot at ed in any direct ion t o accommodat e weld shrinkage depending on t he direct ion of t he welding.
To remove a weld shrinkage icon
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Weld Shrinkage Icon.
2. Select t he plat e part t o remove t he weld shrinkage f rom.
3. The Weld Shrinkage Icon window appears.
4. Uncheck t he Apply Weld Shrinkage check box.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Bevel Inf ormat i on
You can creat e t ext object s t o represent bevel inf ormat ion t hat will be used by NC-Pyros t o generat e bevel cut t ing NC
codes.
You can al so creat e Y-bevels using a single-t orch cut t ing machine t o perf orm mult iple-cut passes. Previously, you could
only creat e Y-bevels using a t hree-t orch cut t ing machine.
To insert bevel inf ormat ion
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Bevel > Creat e (page 388).
2. Select t he part t hat you want t o bevel.
Select plate part:
3. Select a point on t he cut pat h where t he bevel st art s.
Select start point to add bevel to:
4. Select a point on t he cut pat h where t he bevel ends.
Select end point to add bevel to:
5. Select t he correct one of t he t wo edges t hat you want t o bevel.
Select red or blue segment to add bevel to:
6. The Bevel Codes window appears:
Not e: If t he bevel is not a symmet rical bevel, you need t o det ermine t he correct direct ion of t ravel when cut t ing
t he part and which side of t he part is up when it is nest ed.
6. Sel ect t he bevel code t hat you want t o use and click OK. If t he bevel code does not appear in t he list , review your
bevel st andards (see St ruct ure > Plat es > Bevel St andards (page 338)).
Aut omat i c Bevel s and Plat es
If aut omat ic bevels are enabled in t he project t hen bevels will be added t o t he plat e part if necessary. The bevel angles
are st ored wit h t he const ruct ion line if t he line is part of a hull surf ace where t he plat e cont act s t he surf ace at an angle.
Model St ruct ure
163
Once aut omat ic bevels are conf igured and enabled, t here is no f urt her act ion required f rom t he user – t he bevels will
aut omat ically be added t o t he plat es. Aut omat ic bevels can be conf igured t hrough St ruct ure > Plat es > Bevel Set t ings
(page 338).
St i f f eners
A st if f ener is a part made f rom prof ile st ock or f lat bar st ock and f ast ened t o a plat e part t o st rengt hen it and make it
rigid. Most st if f eners are st raight , but some st if f eners are curved (f or example, f or f rames built up f rom prof iles).
Rules f or st if f ener st art and end posit ion
ShipConst ruct or uses t he f ollowing rule t o det ermine which side of a st if f ener is called t he st art and which side is called
t he end. Imagine yourself st anding in f ront of a workbench. The st if f ener is on t he workbench wit h t he lengt h f rom lef t t o
right . The moldline of t he web is closer t o you, and t he f lange (or t hickness of t he web) is lying down t oward t he
workbench surf ace. The lef t side of t he st if f ener is t he st art ; t he right side is t he end.
St i f f ener Creat i on
To creat e a st if f ener part
1. Creat e const ruct ion lines or Aut oCAD curves t hat def ine t he desired pat hs of t he st if f eners you want t o creat e.
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New (page 391) t o def ine t he st if f ener.
3. Select t he const ruct ion lines or Aut oCAD curves t o creat e t he st if f eners al ong and press Ent er.
Not e: Only parallel lines can be used t o creat e mult iple st if f eners at once. Ident ical relat ionships will be creat ed
bet ween t he newly creat ed st if f eners where possible.
4. If you want t o use only a port ion of t he select ed curves t o creat e t he st if f eners on, t ype S at t he command line and
press Ent er. You will be prompt ed t o select t wo point s along each of t he select ed curves t hat will be used as t he st art
and end point s of t he st if f ener.
Select Plate Parts To Attach to <Enter for None> or [Select stiffener ends]:
5. If you want t o at t ach t he new st if f eners t o any plat e part s, select t he plat e part s in t he drawing.
Select Plate Parts To Attach to <Enter for None> or [Select stiffener ends]:
Not e: If mult iple plat e part s are select ed and t he plat e part s have varying t hicknesses, t hen t he st if f ener will be
at t ached t o t he surf ace of t he plat e wit h t he largest t hickness, possibly result ing in a gap bet ween t he st if f ener
and t he ot her select ed plat es. If none are select ed t hen t he st if f ener will not be at t ached t o any plat e part s.
6. Press Ent er.
Model St ruct ure
164
Not e: If a linear ent it y was select ed as t he ext rude line and t he ent i t y’s normal is not aligned wit h one of t he axes
of t he WCS, you will be prompt ed t o select t he axis t hat t he new st if f eners will use f or their def ault web direct ion.
The St if f ener Propert ies window appears.
7. Set t he desired propert ies. See St i f f ener Propert i es Wi ndow (page 391) f or det ails.
8. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or does t he f ollowing:
• Creat es t he st if f ener part including t he solid.
• Creat es a st if f ener markline f or each st if f ener on any plat e part s t hey are at t ached t o.
• If an Aut oCAD ent it y was select ed in St ep 1, it will be convert ed t o a user const ruct ion line and moved t o t he
_Draf t _Mark layer. (You can lat er move t he st if f ener by moving t he const ruct ion line.)
• Calculat es bending inf ormat ion t o st ore in t he dat abase.
Not e: ShipConst ruct or places t he st if f ener’s piecemark on t he st if f ener in t he plane of t he web whereas
ShipConst ruct or2005 places t he st if f ener piecemark on t he plat e part .
Not e: If t he creat ed st if f ener is t o be at t ached t o a plat e part , t hen t he const ruct ion line used t o creat e it must be
on t he same plane as t he plat e part . This is t rue even if t he st if f ener is t o be at t ached t o t he t hickness side of t he
plat e. In t his case, ShipConst ruct or will aut omat ically of f set t he st if f ener by t he plat e t hickness.
Model St ruct ure
165
To creat e a st if f ener f rom point s
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New f rom Point s (page 393).
2. Def ine t he pat h of t he st if f ener by select ing st art and end point s f or t he st if f ener. You can keep select ing st art and
end point s t o creat e mult iple parallel st if f eners at t he same t ime. Press Ent er af t er you are done def ining t he pat hs
f or all t he new st if f eners.
3. If you want t o at t ach t he new st if f eners t o any plat e part s, select t he plat e part s in t he drawing. If none are select ed
t hen t he st if f ener will not be at t ached t o any plat e part s. Press Ent er.
Select Plate Parts To Attach to <Enter for None> or [Select stiffener ends]:
The St if f ener Propert ies window appears.
4. Set t he desired propert ies (see St if f ener Propert ies Window (page 391) f or det ails).
5. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or does t he f ollowing:
• Creat es t he st if f ener part s including t he solid.
• Creat es a st if f ener markline f or each st if f ener on each plat e part t hey are at t ached t o.
• Creat es user const ruct ion lines on t he _Draf t _Mark layer f or each of t he st if f eners. (You can lat er move t he
st if f ener by moving t he const ruct ion line.)
Not e: ShipConst ruct or places t he st if f ener’s piecemark on t he st if f ener in t he plane of t he web, whereas
Shi pConst ruct or2005 places t he st if f ener piecemark on t he plat e part .
St i f f ener Edi t
To edit a st if f ener
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Edit (page 393) or ri ght -click on t he st if f ener and choose Edit Propert ies.
The St if f ener Propert ies window appears.
Set t he desired propert ies (see St if f ener Propert ies Window (page 391) f or det ails).
2. Cl i ck OK.
3. If t he st if f ener t hat is being edit ed has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you will be asked which of t hese part s you
want t o be updat ed wit h t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or does t he f ollowing:
• Updat es t he st if f ener and any select ed mirrored and ident ical part s.
• Updat es all marklines and cut out s t hat ref erence t he updat ed st if f eners.
• Re-cal cul at es bending inf ormat ion t o st ore in t he dat abase.
Not e: Changes made t o t he Part name, Product Hierarchy, Finishes and User At t ribut es are not applied t o t he
mirrored and ident ical part s at t his t ime.
St i f f ener Tri mmi ng
To t rim a st if f ener (similar f or t wist ed st if f eners and f aceplat es)
ShipConst ruct or let s you apply more t han one t rim t o each end of a st if f ener, faceplat e or t wist ed st if f ener. The t rims can
also be applied t o specif ic component s of t he st if f ener (f or example, t rimming just t he f lange and leaving t he web)
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Trim (page 397) or ri ght -click t he st if f ener and choose Tri m.
2. Select t he st if f ener you want t o t rim. The St if f ener Trims window appears.
Model St ruct ure
166
3. Set t he desired opt ions (see St if f ener Trim Window (page 397)).
Not e: If t he select ed t rim plane is closer t o t he end t hat is not current ly assigned t o t he t rim being edit ed, you will be
asked if you want t o swit ch t he end of t he st if f ener t he t rim is applied t o.
4. Cl i ck OK.
Not e: If any of t he t rims are not valid, an inf ormat ive message appears describing t he error and t he St i f f ener
Tri ms window is kept open so t hat you can f ix t he problem bef ore t he t rims are saved.
5. If one or more of t he select ed t rim planes does not complet ely pass t hrough t he prof ile of t he st if f ener part being
t rimmed, you will be asked if you want t o ext end t he st if f ener t o t he t rim plane. If you choose Yes, t he st if f ener is
ext ended so t hat t he ent ire prof ile of t he st if f ener int ersect s t he t rim plane. If you choose No, only t he port ion of t he
st if f ener t hat int ersect s t he t rim plane is removed.
6. If t he part being t rimmed has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you will be asked which of t hese part s you want t o
updat e wit h t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or does t he f ollowing:
• Updat es t he st if f ener and any select ed mirrored and ident ical part s wit h t he new t rim inf ormat ion.
• Updat es all marklines and cut out s t hat ref erence t he updat ed st if f eners.
• Tri m angles are calculat ed t o be st ored in t he dat abase. Please see our online knowledgebase f or det ails on
t ri m angl es.
St i f f ener Cut out s
To add a cut out t o a st if f ener (similar f or t wist ed st if f eners and f aceplat es)
ShipConst ruct or let s you add cut out s t o t wist ed st if f eners or f aceplat es as well as st if f eners. The cut out s can only be
applied t o t he web of t he select ed part .
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Insert (page 395) or ri ght -click on t he st if f ener and choose Add Cut out .
Model St ruct ure
167
2. Select t he st if f ener you want t o add cut out s t o.
The Insert Cut out window appears.
3. Select t he cut out prof ile t o be used t o creat e t he cut out s in t he st if f ener and click OK. A preview on t he right shows
t he shape of t he current ly select ed cut out .
4. Select t he posit ion along t he web of t he st if f ener t o insert t he cut out . An out line of t he cut out shape is displayed at
t he cursor t o aid in placing t he cut out . Typing M at t he command line and pressing Ent er will mirror t he cut out
prof i l e.
Choose Cutout Insert Point<Mirror>:
5. Once t he insert ion point of t he cut out is select ed, you can modif y t he orient at ion of t he cut out using t he cursor t o
select t he rot at ion of t he cut out prof ile or using t he f ollowing command opt ions.
• OR – Ort hogonal
• T – Tangent ial
• P – Perpendicular
• C – Cust om
• B – Re-pick t he cut out posit ion
• OF – Of f set t he cut out prof ile a specif ied amount along t he direct ion of t he web at t he cut out insert ion point
• M – Mirror t he cut out prof ile
Angle<ORtho/Tangent/Perpendicular/Custom/Back/OFfset/Mirror>:
6. Lef t -cl i ck when t he cut out prof ile is in t he correct posit ion.
7. Repeat St eps 4 and 5 as many t imes as needed t hen press Ent er or Esc t o f inish.
8. If t he st if f ener t hat you are adding t he cut out s t o has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you will be asked which of
t hese part s you want t o updat e wit h t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or adds all t he cut out s t o t he st if f ener and any select ed mirrored and ident ical part s.
To edit a cut out on a st if f ener (similar f or t wist ed st if f eners and f aceplat es)
ShipConst ruct or let s you edit cut out s on t wist ed st if f eners and f aceplat es as well as st if f eners.
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Edit (page 396) or ri ght -click on t he st if f ener and choose Edit Cut out .
2. Select t he st if f ener whose cut out s you want t o edit .
The Cut out List window appears.
Model St ruct ure
168
3. Select t he cut out t o be edit ed
4. To delet e t he select ed cut out , right -click on it and choose Delet e.
5. To move t he select ed cut out , right -click on it and choose Move. Select a new posit ion f or t he cut out in t he drawing
and t he cut out will move t o t hat posit ion keeping it s original orient at ion.
To edit t he select ed cut out double-click it , ri ght -cl i ck on it , and choose Propert ies or press Ent er.
The Edit Cut out s window appears.
6. Set t he desired opt ions (see Edit Cut out s Window (page 396) f or det ails).
7. Cl i ck OK.
The Cut out List window appears.
8. Cl i ck Close in t he Cut out List window when you are done edit ing t he cut out s.
If t he st if f ener t hat you are adding t he cut out s t o has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you are asked which of t hese
part s you want t o updat e wit h the changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or updat es t he cut out s on t he st if f ener and any select ed mirrored and ident ical part s.
To insert weld relief s t o a st if f ener (similar f or t wist ed st if f eners and f aceplat es)
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Insert Weld Seam Relief s (page 398) or ri ght -click on t he st if f ener and choose
Insert Weld Seam Relief s.
2. Select t he st if f ener you want t o add weld seam relief s t o.
3. Select t he st art point of t he weld seam line. This must be a st raight line. If you are using a curved weld seam, pick
only one st if f ener at a t ime and use t he Osnap Nearest t o pick a point close t o t he point where t he weld seam
int ersect s t he st if f ener. Press Ent er.
4. Select t he end point of t he weld seam line. If using a curved weld seam, t hen pick only one st if f ener at a t ime and
use t he Osnap Nearest and pick a point close t o t he point where t he weld seam int ersect s t he st if f ener. Press Ent er.
Model St ruct ure
169
The Insert Cut out window appears.
5. Select t he weld insert relief cut out shape you want t o use and click OK.
6. If t he st if f ener that you are adding t he cut out s t o has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you are asked which of t hese
part s you would like t o be updat ed wit h t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page
153).
ShipConst ruct or adds t he weld seam relief t o t he st if f ener and any select ed mirrored and ident ical part s.
St i f f ener At t ach t o Pl at e Part
During t he creat ion of a st if f ener you can at t ach it t o one or more plat e part s but if f or some reason a st if f ener needs t o
be at t ached t o a plat e part af t er it has been creat ed t his command can be used.
To at t ach a st if f ener t o a plat e part af t er t he st if f ener has been creat ed
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > At t ach t o Plat e (page 393)
2. Select t he st if f eners you want t o at t ach t o plat e part s and Press Ent er.
3. Select t he plat e part s you wish t o at t ach t he select ed st if f eners t o and Press Ent er.
The Select Markline St yle window appears.
4. Select t he markline st yle f or t he st if f ener marklines t o use on t he at t ached plat es and Click OK.
If t he plat e part s you are at t aching t he st if f eners t o have any mirrored or ident ical part s, you are asked which of t hese
plat e part s you wish t o at t ach st if f eners t o as well. For each plat e part select ed a new st if f ener is creat ed and at t ached t o
it in t he same relat ive posit ion as t he original plat e part and st if f ener.
ShipConst ruct or does t he f ollowing:
• Creat es any valid at t achment s bet ween t he select ed st if f eners and plat e part s.
• Adds a St if f ener marklines t o t he plat e part s where any st if f eners were at t ached.
• Of f set s t he posit ion of st if f eners t hat were at t ached t o t he t hickness side of any plat e part s so t hey sit on t op of
t he at t ached plat e part s.
Not e: Only valid at t achment s bet ween plat e part s and st if f eners will be made. If a st if f ener is not in the same plane
as t he plat e part , no connect ion will be made bet ween t his plat e part and st if f ener.
St i f f ener Mol dl i ne
To ext ract t he moldline f rom a st if f ener
Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Ext ract Mold Line (page 399)
1. Select t he st if f ener t o ext ract t he moldlines f rom.
The moldlines of t he select ed st if f eners are post ed t o t he drawing on t he _REV layer.
Model St ruct ure
170
To ext ract a neut ral axis f rom a st if f ener
Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Ext ract Neut ral Axis (page 398).
1. Select t he st if f ener t o ext ract t he neut ral axis f rom.
The neut ral axes of t he select ed st if f ener are post ed t o t he drawing on t he _Draf t _NoProcess l ayer.
St i f f ener Movi ng
To move a st if f ener
A st if f ener part can be moved by t he f ollowing met hods:
• Using t he Aut oCAD MOVE command.
• Moving t he const ruct ion line t he st if f ener is based on. See Modif ying Const ruct ion Lines (page 148).
• Moving a plat e part t he st if f ener is at t ached t o. (make sure t o move all t he plat e part s a st if f ener is at t ached t o
during t his operat ion)
Not e: You cannot use t he mouse t o drag a st if f ener part . This operat ion is disabled wit hin ShipConst ruct or drawings.
If t he st if f ener you are moving has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o be
moved. Mirrored part s are moved relat ive t o t heir mirrored axis. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
Twi st ed St i f f eners
A t wist ed st if f ener is a st if f ener whose f lange orient at ion t wist s about it s lengt h. These t ypes of st if f eners cannot current ly
be def ined in t he same way t hat regular st if f eners are. ShipConst ruct or can import ShipCAM .st r (st ringer) f iles int o a
st ruct ure drawing or export st ringers direct ly f rom t he hull module as new obj ect s called t wist ed st if f eners. These t wist ed
st if f eners cont ribut e weight and cent er of gravit y inf ormat ion t o t he project and can be included in st if f ener plot s.
To creat e a t wist ed st if f ener
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New Twist ed (page 394)
2. Browse t o and select t he st ringer f iles and t hen click Open.
Not e: The Twist ed St if f ener Import Unit s set t ing in your Project Set t ings should mat ch t he unit s t hat were used
when creat ing t he st ringer f iles being opened here. This describes how t o change t he t wist ed st if f ener import
unit s set t ing. See Twist ed St if f ener Import Unit s under General > Project Set t ings (page 309).
Model St ruct ure
171
The Twist ed St if f ener Propert ies window appears.
2. Set t he desired opt ions. See Twist ed St if f ener Propert ies Window (page 394) f or det ails.
3. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or creat es t he t wist ed st if f ener part .
Not e: ShipConst ruct or places t he st if f ener’s piecemark on t he st if f ener in t he plane of t he web, whereas
ShipConst ruct or2005 places t he st if f ener piecemark on t he plat e part .
To export a t wist ed st if f ener f rom a hull drawing
1. Open a hull drawing wit h t he st ringers you want t o export as t wist ed st if f eners.
2. Sel ect SC Hull > Export > To St ruct ure Drawing > Export St ringer or ri ght -click on t he st ringer and choose Export To
St ruct ure.
The Choose Group Drawing window appears.
3. Select t he planar group model drawing t hat you want t o creat e t he t wist ed st if f eners in and click OK.
The Twist ed St if f ener Propert ies window appears.
4. Set t he desired propert ies. See Twist ed St if f ener Propert ies Window (page 394) f or det ails.
5. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or creat es t he t wist ed st if f ener part including t he solid in t he select ed planar group model drawing.
Twi st ed St i f f ener Edi t
To edit a t wist ed st if f ener
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Edit Twist ed (page 395) or ri ght -click on t he st if f ener and choose Edit Propert ies.
The Twist ed St if f ener Propert ies window appears.
2. Set t he desired propert ies. See Twist ed St if f ener Propert ies Window (page 394) f or det ails.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Model St ruct ure
172
4. If t he t wist ed st if f ener t hat is being edit ed has any mirrored part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o
updat e wit h t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or updat es t he t wist ed st if f ener and any select ed mirrored part s using t he propert ies set in t he Twist ed
St if f ener Propert ies window.
Twi st ed St i f f ener Tri mmi ng
To t rim a t wist ed st if f ener
ShipConst ruct or let s you apply more t han one t rim t o each end of t he t wist ed st if f ener. The t rims can also be applied t o
specif ic component s of t he t wist ed st if f ener (f or example, t rimming just t he f lange and leaving t he web).
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Trim (page 397) or ri ght -click on t he st if f ener and choose Tri m.
2. See St ep 2 of To t rim a st if f ener under St if f ener Trimming (page 165)
Twi st ed St i f f ener Cut out s
To add a cut out t o a t wist ed st if f ener
ShipConst ruct or let s you add cut out s t o t wist ed st if f eners. The cut out s can only be applied t o t he web of t he select ed part .
See To add a cut out t o a st if f ener under St i f f ener Cut out s (page 166)
To edit a cut out on a t wist ed st if f ener
See To edit a cut out on a st if f ener under St if f ener Cut out s (page 166)
Twi st ed St i f f ener Mol dl i ne
To ext ract t he moldline f rom a t wist ed st if f ener
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Ext ract Mold Line (page 399)
2. Select t he t wist ed st if f eners t o ext ract t he moldlines f rom.
The moldlines of t he select ed t wist ed st if f eners are post ed t o t he drawing on t he current layer.
To ext ract a neut ral axis f rom a t wist ed st if f ener
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Ext ract Neut ral Axis (page 398).
2. Select t he t wist ed st if f eners t o ext ract t he neut ral axis f rom.
The neut ral axes of t he select ed t wist ed st if f eners are post ed t o t he drawing on t he current layer.
Twi st ed St i f f ener Movi ng
To move a t wist ed st if f ener
A st if f ener part can be moved by using t he Aut oCAD MOVE command.
Not e: You cannot use t he mouse t o drag a t wist ed st if f ener part . This operat ion is disabled wit hin ShipConst ruct or
drawi ngs.
If t he t wist ed st if f ener you are moving has any mirrored part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o be moved.
Mirrored part s are moved relat ive t o t heir mirrored axis. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
Twi st ed St i f f ener Cl ean Geomet ry
The purpose of t his operat ion is t o allow users t o correct issues t hat can arise f rom t he complexit y of t he t wist ed st if f ener
geomet ry. This operat ion may remove point s f rom t he part s underlying geomet ry so users should only use it if t hey need
t o. Under normal circumst ances t here should be no need t o use t his operat ion. Possible uses f or t his operat ion are:
• To reduce t he densit y of point s in t he t wist ed st if f ener model t o improve perf ormance and reduce complexit y.
Model St ruct ure
173
• To eliminat e abnormalit ies in t he geomet ry which are causing t he part t o model or plat e nest incorrect ly.
To clean t he geomet ry of a t wist ed st if f ener
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Clean Geomet ry of Twist ed (page 395)
2. Select t he t wist ed st if f eners t o clean t he geomet ry of .
The clean procedure is run on t he select ed t wist ed st if f eners and any mirrored part s.
Facepl at es
A f aceplat e is made f rom f lat bar and is at t ached t o t he f ace of a plat e part . Faceplat es are t ypically used on t he inside of
t hrough holes, such as manholes, or on t he f ree side of a plat e part t o st if f en t hat edge.
Facepl at e Creat i on
Creat e a f aceplat e
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > New (page 399)
2. Select t he plat e part s t o at t ach t he new f aceplat e t o and press Ent er.
3. Select t he const ruct ion lines or Aut oCAD curves t o creat e t he f aceplat e on.
The Facepl at e Propert i es window appears.
4. Set t he desired opt ions (see Faceplat e Propert ies Window (page 399) f or det ails).
5. Cl i ck OK.
6. Select t he st art point of t he f aceplat e along t he select ed pat h.
7. If Pat h was set t o Closed in t he Faceplat e Propert ies window, you are prompt ed t o select anot her point along t he
f aceplat e pat h t o indicat e t he direct ion t hat t he f aceplat e will be creat ed in. The direct ion is used when calculat ing
t he bending inf ormat ion. If Pat h was set t o Open in t he Faceplat e Propert ies window, you are prompt ed t o select t he
end point of t he f aceplat e. If t here is more t han one segment of t he f aceplat e pat h connect ing t he st art and end
point s, you are prompt ed t o select t he segment you want t o creat e t he f aceplat e on.
8. Select t he t hickness direct ion by picking a t hickness point so t hat t he direct ion f rom t he f aceplat e st art point you
select ed t o t he t hickness point is in t he general direct ion t hat t he f aceplat e should t hrow at t he st art of t he
f acepl at e.
ShipConst ruct or does t he f ollowing:
Model St ruct ure
174
• Creat es t he f aceplat e part including t he solid.
• Creat es a f aceplat e markline on t he plat e part s it is at t ached t o.
Facepl at e Edi t
To edit a f aceplat e
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Edit (page 400) or ri ght -click on t he f aceplat e and choose Edit Propert ies.
The Facepl at e Propert i es window appears.
2. Set t he desired propert ies. See Faceplat e Propert ies Window (page 399).
3. Cl i ck OK.
4. If t he f aceplat e being edit ed has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o
updat e wit h t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or updat es t he f aceplat e and any select ed mirrored and ident ical part s using t he propert ies set in t he
Faceplat e Propert ies window.
Faceplat e Tri mmi ng
To t rim a f aceplat e
ShipConst ruct or let s you apply more t han one t rim t o each end of t he f aceplat e.
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Trim (page 401) or ri ght -click on t he f aceplat e and choose Trim.
2. See St ep 2 of To t rim a st if f ener under St if f ener Trimming (page 165)
Facepl at e Cut out s
To add a cut out t o a f aceplat e
ShipConst ruct or let s you add cut out s t o f aceplat es.
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Cut out > Insert (page 401) or ri ght -click on t he f aceplat e and choose Add Cut out .
2. See To add a cut out t o a st if f ener under St i f f ener Cut out s (page 166)
To edit a cut out on a f aceplat e
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Cut out > Edit (page 401) or ri ght -click on t he f aceplat e and choose Edit Cut out s.
2. See To edit a cut out on a st if f ener under St if f ener Cut out s (page 166)
Facepl at e Mol dl i ne
To ext ract t he moldline f rom a f aceplat e
Choose SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Ext ract Mold Line (page 402)
2. Select t he f aceplat e t o ext ract t he moldlines f rom.
The moldlines of t he select ed f aceplat es are post ed t o t he drawing on t he _REV layer.
To ext ract a neut ral axis f rom a f aceplat e
Choose SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Ext ract Neut ral Axis (page 402)
4. Select t he f aceplat e t o ext ract t he neut ral axis f rom.
The neut ral axes of t he select ed f aceplat es are post ed t o t he drawing on t he _Draf t _NoProcess layer.
Model St ruct ure
175
Facepl at e Movi ng
To move a f aceplat e
A f aceplat e part can be moved by t he f ollowing met hods:
• Moving t he const ruct ion line t he f aceplat e is based on. See Modif ying Const ruct ion Lines (page 148).
• Moving a plat e part t he f aceplat e is at t ached t o. (make sure t o move all t he plat e part s a f aceplat e is at t ached t o
during t his operat ion)
Not e: You cannot use t he Aut oCAD MOVE command or t he mouse t o drag a f aceplat e part . These operat ions are
disabled wit hin ShipConst ruct or drawings.
Corrugat ed Pl at es
Corrugat ed plat es are somet imes used t o eliminat e t he need f or st if f eners. Corrugat ed plat e part s are creat ed f rom out er
and inner t oolpat hs and a prof ile curve.
The prof ile curve can be def ined in t wo ways:
• In t he model drawing, a f lat plat e st ock is used, cut t o t he expanded size, and t hen bent t o creat e t he corrugat ed
pl at e.
• From a corrugat ed plat e st ock. A st andard corrugat ed plat e st ock is purchased or bent f rom f lat plat e st ock
prior t o cut t ing.
Corrugat ed Pl at e Creat i on
To creat e a corrugat ed plat e f rom corrugat ed st ock
Not e: Unlike ShipConst ruct or2005, in ShipConst ruct or you do not need t o def ine a closed t oolpat h and ext rude a solid
bef ore def ining a corrugat ed plat e part .
1. Def ine t he boundaries of t he part using const ruct ion lines or polylines. Use closed polylines t o def ine inner
boundaries (holes). The boundaries need t o be in t he same plane as t he current UCS t o be considered. The boundary
should not be wider t han t he st ock widt h or longer t han t he st ock lengt h.
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > New (page 402)
3. Select a point wit hin t he part boundaries. ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically det ect s t he part boundaries. This point will
be used t o place t he piecemark as well.
The Corrugat ed Plat e Propert ies window appears.
Model St ruct ure
176
4. Select t he From Corrugat ed St ock opt ion.
5. Set t he desired propert ies. See Corrugat ed Plat e Propert ies Window (page 403).
6. Cl i ck OK.
Select Start:
7. Select t he st art point . This point corresponds t o t he (0, 0) point in t he corrugat ion st andard prof ile. Since t he
corrugat ion prof ile def ines t he neut ral axis line, t he solid will be cent ered on t he st art point .
Model St ruct ure
177
ShipConst ruct or creat es t he corrugat ed plat e part .
To creat e a corrugat ed plat e f rom f lat plat e
Not e: Unlike ShipConst ruct or2005, in ShipConst ruct or you do not need t o def ine a closed t oolpat h and ext rude a solid
bef ore def ining a corrugat ed plat e part .
1. Def ine t he boundaries of t he part using const ruct ion lines or polylines. Use closed polylines t o def ine inner
boundaries (holes). The boundaries need t o be in t he same plane as t he current UCS t o be considered. The boundary
needs t o include seams.
2. Creat e or select a UCS t hat is perpendicular t o t he boundary plane.
3. Draw t he corrugat ion prof ile polyline. It is a polyline t hat indicat es t he neut ral axis of t he cross-sect ion of t he
corrugat ed plat e. The corrugat ed part will be ext ruded f rom t he posit ion of t he corrugat ion prof ile polyline.
Hi nt : If t he corrugat ed bulkhead plat e sit s on a deck, draw t he corrugat ion prof ile polyline on t he deck.
4. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS (page 429) Change t he current UCS back t o t he original plane
5. Choose SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > New (page 402)
Model St ruct ure
178
6. Select a point wit hin t he part boundaries. ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically det ect s t he part boundaries. This point will
be used t o place t he piecemark as well.
The Corrugat ed Plat e Propert ies window appears.
7. Select t he From Flat Plat e St ock opt ion.
8. Set t he desired propert ies. See Corrugat ed Plat e Propert ies Window (page 403).
9. Cl i ck OK.
Sel ect corrugat i on prof i l e l i ne:
10. Select t he polyline drawn in st ep 3.
Choose Bend Marker Input Method [Select positions/Auto calculate]<Select positions>:
11. Def ine t he f old point s along t he corrugat ion prof ile polyline t o be used t o generat e t he f oldlines f or t he expanded
product ion inf ormat ion. This can be done aut omat ically by t yping A at t he command line and pressing Ent er. The
f oldlines are calculat ed aut omat ically f rom t he vert ex and bend inf ormat ion of t he select ed corrugat ion prof ile
polyline. Bend posit ions will be placed at line segment -t o-line segment int ersect ions and at t he midpoint of arcs. You
can also select point s along t he corrugat ion pat t ern polyline manually t o use as t he f old point s of t he corrugat ed
plat e part by pressing Ent er. If you choose t o select posit ions manually but t hen press ent er wit hout select ing any,
t he bend posit ions will be select ed aut omat ically.
ShipConst ruct or creat es t he corrugat ed plat e part .
Model St ruct ure
179
Corrugat ed Pl at e Edi t
To edit a corrugat ed plat e
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > Edit (page 404) or ri ght -click on t he plat e and choose Edit Propert ies.
2. Set t he desired propert ies in t he Corrugat ed Plat e Propert i es window. See Corrugat ed Plat e Propert ies Window (page
403).
3. Cl i ck OK.
Not e: You cannot edit t he t ype of st ock a corrugat ed plat e is made of . (For example: changing f rom a plat e st ock
t o a corrugat ed st ock and vise versa.)
4. If t he corrugat ed plat e being edit ed has any mirrored or ident ical part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want
t o be updat ed wit h t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or updat es t he corrugat ed plat e and any select ed mirrored and ident ical part s using t he propert ies set
in t he Corrugat ed Plat e Propert i es window.
Curved Pl at es
Curved Pl at e Creat i on
Curved plat e part s consist of a t rue 3D represent at ion and an expanded represent at ion f or nest ing.
To creat e curved plat es f rom ShipCAM or Maxsurf t o a curved model drawing
1. Open t he curved model drawing t hat you want t o insert t he new curved plat e part s int o.
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > New (page 405) t o open t he Select a ShipCAM Expanded Plat e window.
Not e: By def ault , ShipConst ruct or looks in t he Curved f older of t he current unit . When export ing expanded plat es
f rom ShipCAM, save t he export ed DXF f iles t o t his f older.
3. Select t he DXF f ile cont aining t he expanded and curved plat e and t hen click Open.
ShipConst ruct or insert s object s f rom t he DXF f ile int o t he curved model drawing and convert s t he expanded plat e
int o a curved plat e part . Addit ional object s like plat e checking dat a and f orming t emplat es are insert ed but not used.
Model St ruct ure
180
ShipConst ruct or asks you t o specif y an insert ion point f or t he expanded plat e. By def ault , ORTHO is on, and t he
suggest ed posit ion f or t he expanded plat e and addit ional inf ormat ion is out board of t he curved plat e (see t he above
i mage).
4. Move t he expanded plat e t o t he desired locat ion.
The Curved Plat e Propert i es window appears.
5. Set t he propert ies. See Curved Plat e Propert ies Window (page 405).
6. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or creat es a new curved plat e part consist ing of t he curved surf ace geomet ry and t he out er t oolpat h of
t he expanded plat e. Any addit ional inf ormat ion f rom t he import ed DXF f ile (f or example, markings and inner cut s)
will need t o be added t o t he curve plat e part manually (see To add product ion inf ormat ion t o a curved plat e part in
Model St ruct ure
181
t he Curved Plat e Product ion Inf ormat ion (page 184) sect ion below). The name of t he part is set t o t he name of t he
i mport ed DXF f i l e.
To export a curved plat e f rom a hull drawing
1. Open t he hull drawing t hat cont ains t he surf aces you want t o export as curved plat e part s.
Not e: To export a surf ace as a curved plat e part it must have a st ock assigned t o it and it must be expanded.
2. Choose SC Hull > Export > Export To St ruct ure.
The Choose Group Drawing window appears.
3. Select t he curved plat e drawing t hat you want t o creat e t he curved plat e part s in and click OK.
The Curved Pl at e Propert i es window appears.
Not e: If more t han one surf ace was select ed t o be export ed t he Curved Plat e Propert ies window will appear once
f or each surf ace. The view will be zoomed t o t he current surf ace and t he surf ace will be highlight ed in t he hull
drawi ng.
4. Set t he desired propert ies. See Curved Plat e Propert ies Window (page 405).
5. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or creat es a new curved plat e part consist ing of t he curved surf ace and expanded geomet ry. All
t oolpat hs and markings f rom t he select ed surf aces are export ed t o t he new curved plat e part s using t he st yles and
colors def ined in Manager. Once a hull surf ace has been export ed as a curved plat e part t here is no link kept
bet ween t he surf ace and t he curved plat e part . Any changes made t o t he surf ace af t er t he curved plat e part had
been creat ed will not be ref lect ed by t he curved plat e part . If st ock was added during t he surf ace expansion t he
NURBS curve def ining t he expanded boundary wit h t he added st ock is used as t he out er t oolpat h of t he curved plat e
part . The expanded boundary wit hout t he added st ock is added as a marking t o t he curved plat e part . All f orming
t emplat es f or t he export ed surf aces are copied t o t he dest inat ion curved plat e drawing and are placed on t he
Draf t _Cut layer so t hey can easily be made int o plat e part s if needed. Plat e check t ext f or t he export ed surf aces dat a
is copied t o t he dest inat ions drawing as AcDbMText and placed on t he Draf t _NoProcess layer.
Not e: If t he expanded hull surf ace cont ains an orient at ion icon, it s axes will be added t o t he curved plat e part as
a markline using t he Orient at ion Icon markline st yle. The axes’ labels are added as markline t ext .
Not e: Only visible markline labels on t he hull surf ace will be added t o t he curved plat e part as markline t ext .
The f ollowing markline st yles exist f or use by Hull surf aces and curved plat e part marklines:
• Proj ect i on Li ne
• Sect ion Line
• Girt h Line
• Expansion Line
• Roll Line
• Curved Plat e Green
• Iso Curvat ure Line
• Iso St rain Line
• Forming Cont rol
• Templat e Alignment Icon
• Orient at ion Icon
Model St ruct ure
182
To creat e a curved plat e f rom a Rhino f ile
Not e: This will creat e a curved plat e solid wit h invalid product ion geomet ry. The int ent ion is t hat Rhino surf aces can
be import ed f or visualizat ion purposes only, wit hout requiring a license f or t he Hull module.
1. Open t he curved model drawing t hat you want t o insert t he new curved plat e part s int o.
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Import Curved Plat e From Rhino (page 407) t o open t he Rhino File Import
window.
3. Select t he 3dm f ile cont aining t he desired curved surf aces and t hen click Open.
4. The NURBS Import window will appear. Set t he desired propert ies in t he NURBS Import window, t hen click OK.
Not e: The curves list ed in t his window will not be import ed int o t he drawing. Only t he meshes will be import ed,
and t hey will be convert ed int o curved plat es aut omat ically.
Model St ruct ure
183
5. The Curved Pl at e Propert i es window will appear. Set t he desired propert ies and click OK. This window will appear
once f or each import ed curved plat e.
See Curved Plat e Propert ies Window (page 405).
ShipConst ruct or creat es a curved plat e part consist ing of t he curved surf ace geomet ry and an X-shaped invalid out er
t oolpat h, represent ing t he expanded plat e.
Curved Pl at e Edi t
To edit a curved plat e
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Edit (page 406) or ri ght -click on t he plat e and choose Edit Propert ies.
The Curved Pl at e Propert i es window appears.
2. Set t he desired propert ies. See Curved Plat e Propert ies Window (page 405).
3. Cl i ck OK.
4. If t he curved plat e being edit ed has any mirrored part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o updat e wit h
t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or updat es t he curved plat e part and any select ed mirrored part s using t he propert ies set in t he Curved
Pl at e Propert i es window.
To def ine a new expanded out er t oolpat h f or a curved plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Def ine New Out er Toolpat h (page 407)
2. Select t he curved plat e part t o def ine a new expanded out er t oolpat h f or.
Not e: The new expanded out er t oolpat h must be a closed Aut oCAD curve or const ruct ion line.
3. If t he curved plat e being edit ed has any mirrored part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o updat e wit h
t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
Model St ruct ure
184
ShipConst ruct or replaces t he old expanded out er t oolpat h wit h t he select ed new one in t he curved plat e and any
select ed mirrored part s.
Not e: The curved surf ace is not updat ed t o ref lect t he new geomet ry of t he new expanded out er t oolpat h.
Curved Pl at e Product i on Inf ormat i on
To add product ion inf ormat ion t o a curved plat e part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Add Object s
2. Select t he product ion ent it ies you want t o add t o t he curved plat e part and press Ent er. Product ion ent it ies are added
as f ollows:
• Closed Aut oCAD curves or const ruct ion lines on t he _Draf t _Cut layer are added as inner t oolpat hs.
• Aut oCAD curves or const ruct ion lines on t he _Draf t _Mark or _Draf t _NoProccess layer are added as markings.
• Aut oCAD t ext ent it ies are added as mark t ext .
• SConCurvedPlat eMarklines ent it ies are added as markings.
• SConCurvedPlat eMarkt ext ent it ies are added as mark t ext .
3. Select t he curved plat e part t o add t he product ion ent it ies t o.
4. If t he curved plat e being edit ed has any mirrored part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o updat e wit h
t he changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or adds t he select ed product ion inf ormat ion t o t he curved plat e and any select ed mirrored part s.
To ext ract product ion inf ormat ion f rom curved plat e part s
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > Ext ract Product ion Inf o (page 407).
2. Select t he curved plat e part s t o ext ract t he product ion inf ormat ion f rom.
ShipConst ruct or copies t he product ion ent it ies f rom t he select ed part s and post s t hem t o t he current drawing. The
product ion ent it ies include t he out er t oolpat h, inner t oolpat hs, marklines and mark t ext .
To move t he product ion inf ormat ion of curved plat e part s
1. Select t he curved plat e part whose product ion inf ormat ion you want t o move.
2. Click one of t he grip point s of t he product ion inf ormat ion of t he select ed curved plat e part .
3. Select t he desired new locat ion f or t he curved plat e’s product ion inf ormat ion.
ShipConst ruct or moves t he product ion inf ormat ion port ion of t he curved plat e part t o t he select ed new posit ion and
leaves t he curved surf ace port ion of t he curved plat e part where it is.
Pl anks
Planking (or automatic straking) aut omat ically divides predef ined areas, such as decks and bulkheads, int o planks based
on t he paramet ers of available st ock and t hen generat es a bill of mat erials (BOM) aut omat ically. Previously, st raking had
t o be done manually, so an aut omat ic met hod of st raking represent s a signif icant saving of t ime. Aut omat ic st raking also
works wit h pref abricat ed aluminum ext rusions and sandwich panels.
Model St ruct ure
185
Ext ruded panel s
Pl anks Creat i on
To creat e planks
Not e: Unlike ShipConst ruct or2005, you do not need t o def ine a closed t oolpat h and ext rude a solid bef ore def ining
pl ank part s.
1. Def ine t he boundaries of t he part using const ruct ion lines, or polylines. Use closed polylines t o def ine inner
boundaries (holes).
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Planks > New (page 407)
Select interior point:
3. Cl i ck wit hin t he part boundaries. ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically det ect s t he part boundaries. This point i s al so used
t o place t he piecemark.
Select a point on the outer toolpath indicating the edge of the first plank:
4. Select a point on t he out er t rim loop. This point will be t he st art ing point f or insert ing planking. It will be aligned wit h
t he (0, 0) point in t he planking prof ile drawing.
Select extrusion direction point:
5. Select a second point . The line f ormed bet ween t he f irst and t he second point indicat es t he direct ion along which t he
planks will be ext ruded.
Model St ruct ure
186
Typi cal pl anked deck
The Plank Propert ies window appears.
6. Set t he desired propert ies. See Plank Propert ies Window (page 408).
7. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or f ills in t he part boundaries wit h plank part s.
Planks are insert ed aut omat ically st art ing f rom t he insert ion point . If t he out er t oolpat h is larger t han t he maximum
lengt h of t he planks, addit ional planks are insert ed.
Pl anks Edi t
You change t he propert ies of a plank collect ion af t er it has been creat ed.
To edit planks
Choose SC St ruct ure > Planks > Edit Collect ion (page 409) or right -click on t he plank and choose Edit Collect ion
Propert i es.
Model St ruct ure
187
1. Select a plank in t he planked area t hat you want t o edit .
Not e: You cannot edit t he propert ies of individual planks. Any changes you make will be made t o all t he planks in
a planked area.
The Plank Propert ies window appears.
2. Set t he desired propert ies. See Plank Propert ies Window (page 408).
Not e: You cannot edit t he part side of t he plank collect ion.
Cl i ck OK.
4. If t he planking being edit ed has any mirrored part s, you are asked which of t hese part s you want t o updat e wit h t he
changes you made. See Updat ing Mirrored and Ident ical Part s (page 153).
ShipConst ruct or ref ills t he part boundaries wit h plank part s. Most changes are perf ormed on t he exist ing collect ion
however some changes, like updat es t o t he plank st ock, require t hat t he ent ire plank collect ion be rebuilt . A rebuild
is necessary when changing t o a plank st ock wit h a dif f erent widt h or a short er maximum lengt h t han t he exist ing
plank st ock. If t he maximum lengt h of t he new plank st ock is great er t han t hat of t he exist ing st ock, an addit ional
opt ion is present ed t o allow you t o reuse t he exist ing layout . Rebuilding a plank collect ion will aut omat ically
regenerat e any planks t hat were manually delet ed f rom t he collect ion.
Not e: Any changes t hat have been made t o t he posit ion of t he ends of t he individual plank part s will be lost when
t he plank part s are regenerat ed.
To modif y planks using t heir grip point s
ShipConst ruct or planking solids are int elligent object s t hat are logically connect ed t o each ot her. If one plank is moved
using t he grip point s, adjacent planks will st ret ch and compress. This allows f or individual planks t o be lined up t o exist ing
st ruct ural part s and t he st aggering of planks wit hin a deck.
1. Select t he plank part you want t o modif y.
2. Select t he grip point at t he connect ion bet ween t wo plank part s and move it t o t he desired locat ion.
Not e: Shi f t -click t o select mult iple grip point s at t he same t ime
While modif ying grip point s, planks are st ret ched and compressed as needed. If t here is not enough planking st ock,
new planks are insert ed as needed.
Addi ng and Removi ng Cut Li nes t o a Pl ank Col l ect i on
You can add and remove cut lines t o an exist ing plank collect ion by using t he Add Object s and Remove Object s
commands. More t han one plank collect ion can be select ed f or t his command and more t han one cut line can be added
t o each collect ion. Cut lines t hat do not int ersect any of t he select ed plank collect ions are ignored.
To add a cut line t o a plank collect ion
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Object s (page 383)
2. Sel ect al l plank collect ions t hat you want t o add cut s t o.
3. Select t he object s t o add t o all select ed plank collect ions.
The select ed cut s are added t o t he exist ing collect ion and t he af f ect ed plank part s are updat ed. Previously ident ical
plank part s wit hin a collect ion may be renamed if t heir out lines change.
Not e: Plank part s t hat are complet ely obscured by cut lines are removed f rom t he plank collect ion and will not be
rest ored if t he cut line is removed.
To remove an object f rom a plank collect ion
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Remove Object s (page 385)
2. Select t he cut line on t he plank collect ion t hat you want t o remove.
The select ed cut is removed f rom t he exist ing collect ion and t he af f ect ed plank part s are updat ed. Previously
di ssi mi l ar plank part s wit hin a collect ion may be renamed if t heir plank out lines change.
Model St ruct ure
188
Spl i t t i ng Pl ank Col l ect i ons
Spl i t t i ng is a way t o def ine a new plank collect ion f rom a subset of planks in an exist ing collect ion. The remaining plank
collect ion is reduced by t he set of planks used t o make t he new collect ion. Not e t hat bot h t he new plank collect ion and
remaining plank collect ion ret ain t he original area of t he plank collect ion prior t o t he split .
To split a plank collect ion
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Planks > Split Plank Collect ion (page 409)
2. Sel ect one or more planks wit hin a plank collect ion.
3. Press Ent er t o complet e t he operat ion.
Not e: Split t ing a plank collect ion will break any previously exist ing relat ionships bet ween planks in t he old and
new collect ions. Plank names in t he new collect ions may change as a result of t his operat ion.
Del et i ng Pl ank Col l ect i ons
To delet e plank collect ions
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Planks > Delet e Plank Collect ion (page 409)
2. Select a plank in each of t he planked areas t hat you want t o delet e. A conf irmat ion window appears.
3. Cl i ck Yes t o cont i nue or No t o cancel t he operat ion and ret urn back t o t he drawing.
St andard Part s
Def i ni ng st andard part s is an easy way t o creat e t ypical part s wit hout having t o creat e t he geomet ry f or t hem every t ime
you want t o use t he part . These will t ypically be bracket s, chocks, clips, and collars.
To insert a st andard part
1. Make sure t hat you are in t he UCS you want t he part locat ed in.
2. Choose SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part (page 423)
Specify insertion point or [XMirror/YMirror/Change throw]:
3. Select t he insert ion point . The part is insert ed wit h t he origin in t he st andard drawing at t he picked posit ion.
Specify direction point or [XMirror/YMirror/Change throw/SNap<on>]:
4. Use t he command line opt ions t o manipulat e t he part t o t he desired orient at ion.
5. Rot at e t he part t o it s f inal posit ion using t he cursor.
St andard Bracket s At t ached t o St i f f eners
To prepare f or insert ing t he st andard part s you will need t o show t he part s you want t o at t ach t he bracket t o in t he
current drawing. MLink t he drawings t hat cont ain part s you want t o select t hat are not in t he current model drawing. The
command can work in any st ruct ure drawing. You will need t o be in t he drawing where you want t he st andard part s t o be
saved.
Choose SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part at St if f ener (page 423)
Select primary stiffener:
2. Select primary st if f ener (st if f ener or t wist ed st if f ener)
Select secondary part [ENTER for none]:
3. Select secondary part (st if f ener, t wist ed st if f ener, or plat e). Pressing ENTER f or none will place t he bracket at
t he end of t he st if f ener nearest t o t he pick point of t he primary st if f ener.
4. Select t he St andard Part t o insert
Model St ruct ure
189
5. Select t he paramet ers t o det ermine where t o insert t he part
6. Show Part Edit Dialog or t he f irst part only. Subsequent part s will be assigned t he same product hierarchy and
have t he same at t ribut es.
Model St ruct ure
190
7. Throw direct ion does not need t o be changed.
8. Repeat t he select ion of part s f or insert ing more bracket s. Wit h t he same opt ions as t he f irst select ion.
Mi rror Part s
Mi rror Part s About t he Cent erl i ne
You can mirror one or more part s about t he cent erline. Each part aut omat ically receives a new part name. You can swap
t ext st rings in t he mirrored part s, as indicat ed in t he window below.
To mirror a part about t he cent erline
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Mirror about Cent erline (page 439)
2. Select all object s t hat you want t o mirror and t hen press Ent er.
The part s are mirrored t o t he desired side. All mirrored part s are assigned new names aut omat ically. The project
dat abase is al so updat ed wit h t he new part s. Using t he above window as an example, t he word PORT will be
repl aced wit h STBD in t he st arboard versions of t he part s.
Mi rror Cat amaran Hul l s
You can mirror part s f or cat amaran hulls saving hours of work when modeling t win-hulled vessels. The Aut oCAD mirror
command l et s you mirror about any line.
Pi ecemarks
Changi ng a Pi ecemark Si ze
You can change t he size of an individual part ’s piecemark or change t he size of all piecemarks of a t ype.
Model St ruct ure
191
Not e: Piecemark sizes t hat have been overridden are not af f ect ed by changing t he piecemark st andard size.
To change a piecemark size on one part
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edit Component (page 414)
2. Select t he piecemark. If t he select ed part has ident ical or mirrored part s t hen you will see t he Updat e Relat ed
Object s window. Select t he part s you want t o change.
3. The Edit Piecemark window appears.
4. Change t he Text Size and click OK. The piecemark size is updat ed f or t hat part . Now, changing t he st andard
piecemark size will not af f ect t his part .
To change all piecemark sizes
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose St ruct ure > Piecemark St yles (page 326) t o open t he Piecemark St yles window.
3. Doubl e-click t he Text Size f ield and ent er a new value.
4. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Pi ecemark St yl es window.
5. To see t he updat ed piecemark size in open drawings, run SC Ut ilit ies > Reload Drawing (page 440)
Change a Pi ecemark Posi t i on
You may f ind it necessary t o move a piecemark t o avoid overlapping marks or t o make t he part inf ormat ion easier t o
read.
To move a piecemark posit ion
1. Select t he part . The part ’s grip point s appear.
• -- Move grip point
• -- Rot at e grip point
2. Select t he move grip point . It will t urn t o t he select ed grip color (red).
3. Move t he part t o t he desired locat ion. Do not place t he piecemark out side t he boundary of t he part . This will cause
t he part t o be invalid (see Invalid Part s (page 202)). If you do move t he piecemark out side t he part or if t he part ’s
boundary changes so t hat t he piecemark is out side t he part , move t he piecemark inside t he part .
Not e: The piecemark point is used as t he locat ion of t he part in t he nest drawing. If a part is already nest ed, you
should open t he nest drawing and re-nest all part s t hat have changed. Make sure t o check all part s wit h changed
pi ecemarks, as the part posit ion will have shif t ed and it might int erf ere wit h part s next t o it .
Part User-Def i ned At t ri but es
User-def ined at t ribut es are values t hat can be associat ed wit h any part t ype. The list is def ined in Manager. Those
at t ribut es can be assigned t o each part t ype. And t hen t hat at t ribut e can be eit her be required or not required f or t he part
t ype. The required st at e has t hree levels t o it : required and deferrable, required and not deferrable, and required default
deferred. Def errable at t ribut e can be def erred f or lat er; t heref ore, it ’s not required t o provide a value during t he creat ion
(or edi t i ng). However, a value will need t o be provided lat er.
Model St ruct ure
192
Required at t ribut es are aut omat ically assigned t o a part during creat ion. The def erred st at e is set if t he at t ribut e is
required default deferred. The def ault value will also be set , if one was provided. At t ribut es set as required and not
deferrable must have a value bef ore t he propert ies window can be closed. This also applies t o any required and
deferrable or required default deferred at t ribut es wit hout t he “ def erred” st at e set and no val ue.
Providing a value allows t he user t o cont inue, or simply set t he “ def erred” st at e (f or t hose at t ribut es t hat can be def erred).
The “ def erred” st at e checkbox is gray f or required and not deferrable at t ri but es.
The lef t side of t he propert ies window list s all t he available at t ribut es. Only non-required at t ribut es can be in t he list .
Def ault values will be used, if set . Providing/ edit ing t he value f or a def erred at t ribut e will clear t he def erred st at e.
The right side list s all t he at t ribut es assigned t o t his part , along wit h t heir required and def erred st at es, and at t ribut e
value. Only non-required at t ribut es can be removed f rom t his list .
The f ollowing is an image of t he User At t ribut es page in t he Part Propert ies window:
All relat ed part s will have t he same user at t ribut es. Adding or removing an at t ribut e t o a part will also add or remove t hat
at t ribut e t o all relat ed part s. However, t he values do not have t o be same bet ween relat ed part s.
Check Int erf erences
Int erf erence checking is a vit al st ep in ShipConst ruct or t hat is used t o det ect part collision problems or t o add
penet rat i ons f or pipe and HVAC t hrough st ruct ure.
The int erf erence drawing can also be used as a virt ual realit y f ly-t hrough.
Model St ruct ure
193
Creat e an Int erf erence Drawi ng
To creat e an int erf erence drawing
1. In Navigat or, select t he Int erf erence page.
2. Cl i ck New.
The New Int erf erence Drawing window appears.
3. Click t he check box beside t he drawings you want t o include in t he int erf erence drawing.
4. Cl i ck OK.
Checki ng Int erf erences
Typically, you creat e an int erf erence drawing t hat includes several planar group drawings wit hin it and t hen check
int erf erences wit hin t he int erf erence drawing. (You can also check int erf erences f rom wit hin a planar group drawing.)
ShipConst ruct or t hen checks t he solids wit hin t he current drawing f or collisions. (ShipConst ruct or does not check Xref
solids.)
Running t he List command on t he int erf erence solid will list t he int erf ering part names, and t he volume and ext ent s of
t he int erf erence.
To check int erf erences
1. Creat e an int erf erence drawing t hat includes t he planar group drawings you want t o check (see Creat e an
Int erf erence Drawing (page 193)).
2. Open t he int erf erence drawing you want and select an isomet ric viewpoint .
3. Choose SC Int erf erence > Check Int erf erences (page 479) t o open t he Int erf erence List window.
Not e: You can cont inue using ShipConst ruct or wit h t he Int erf erence List window open. For example, you may
want t o change your viewpoint wit hout closing t he Int erf erence List window. You can also close t he Int erf erence
List window and re-open it by choosing SC Int erf erence > Check Int erf erences (page 479).
4. Cl i ck Run Check.
Model St ruct ure
194
The t wo Solid Object Types list s let you cont rol which t ypes of object s t o check f or int erf erences.
Below t he t wo list s is t he number of possible int erf erences t hat ShipConst ruct or will check.
The Mi nimum Int erf erence Volume let s you ignore very small int erf erences t hat might be due t o comput er rounding
errors or are so small t hat t hey would not be not iced during const ruct ion.
5. Cl i ck OK t o st art t he int erf erence check.
The check may t ake several minut es.
ShipConst ruct or list s int erf erences in t he Int erf erence List window.
6. To have a bet t er view of an int erf erence in t he drawing, t urn on Cent er, right -click on t he int erf erence, and choose
Vi ew. ShipConst ruct or hides all solids except f or t hose involved in t he int erf erence. (You may need t o move t he
Int erf erence List window t o see t hem.) Click t he and but t ons t o zoom in and out .
7. To display t he propert ies of an int erf erence, right -click on it and choose Solut ion.
The Sol ut i ons window displays t he Physical Propert ies of t he int erf erence and let s you ent er a suggest ed Solut ion.
For example: Shorten Stiffener.
Model St ruct ure
195
8. To generat e an int erf erence report , in t he Int erf erence List window select t he int erf erences t o include in t he report
and click Report t o open t he Int erf erence Report window.
9. Ent er a Name f or t he int erf erence report , select t he inf ormat ion t o include in t he report , and click OK.
ShipConst ruct or displays t he report in Not epad and saves t he t ext f ile in <project
f ol der>\ LogFiles\ <unit >\ Int erf erence\ <my int erf erence drawing> <t ime st amp>.t xt .
Check Local Int erf erences
You can also check f or int erf erences in a single planar group drawing wit hout creat ing an int erf erence drawing. This will
only check f or collisions bet ween object s in a single drawing, but it eliminat es t he addit ional overhead of creat ing a new
int erf erence drawing.
To Check Local Int erf erences
1. Open the planar group drawing that you want to check for interferences.
2. Choose SC Utilities > Check Local Interferences (page 444) to open the Int erf erence List window.
3. Follow the steps described above in the Check Int erf erences section, starting at step 4.
Model St ruct ure
196
Repl i cat e Obj ect s t o Ot her Planar Groups
You can replicat e geomet ry f rom t he current group drawing t o ot her group drawings t hat are parallel t o t he current one.
For example, you can replicat e f rom a f rame t o ot her f rames but not t o a deck group.
Typically, you would use duplicat e object s if signif icant geomet ry is ident ical bet ween several groups. For example, f or a
f rame, t he geomet ry port ion below a t ank t op could be ident ical f or many f rames. Only t he out side shell plat ing would
change slight ly f rom f rame t o f rame.
To replicat e object s t o anot her planar group
1. Choose SC St ruct ure > Replicat e Object s t o Ot her Group (page 427)
2. Select t he object s or part s t hat you want t o replicat e and t hen press Ent er.
Not e: You must save t he current drawing in order t o cont inue and you will not be able t o undo t he replicat ion
operat i on.
The Replicat e Geomet ry window appears.
3. From t he t ree, choose t he groups you want t o replicat e t o. Only groups parallel t o t he current group appear in t he
window.
4. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or copies t he object s you select ed and insert s t hem int o t he select ed planar group drawing. If t he
object s replicat ed support ident ical relat ionships and t he result ing copied object is geomet rically ident ical t o t he
original t hen an ident ical relat ionship is creat ed bet ween t he object s if t hey are wit hin t he same unit .
Transf er Obj ect s t o anot her Pl anar Group
You can t ransf er geomet ry f rom t he current group drawing t o a dif f erent planar group. You are given t he opt ion t o leave
t he select ed object s in t he current drawing which if chosen will make a copy of t he select ed object s and place t hem in
t he select ed planar group. None of t he t ransf erred object s are moved in relat ion t o t he World UCS during t he t ransf er.
To replicat e object s t o anot her planar group
5. Choose SC St ruct ure > Transf er Object s t o Group (page 427)
6. Select t he object s or part s t hat you want t o t ransf er and t hen press Ent er.
Model St ruct ure
197
Not e: You must save t he current drawing in order t o cont inue and you will not be able t o undo t he t ransf er
operat i on.
The Transf er Part s window appears.
7. From t he t ree, choose t he group you want t o t ransf er t o. You can f ilt er t he list ed planar groups by Current Unit and
Paral l el Pl anes.
8. Cl i ck OK.
The Transf er Part s window appears.
9. Select if you want t o remove t he select ed object s f rom t he current drawing. Choosing No will t ransf er a copy of t he
select ed object s t o t he chosen planar group.
ShipConst ruct or moves\ copies t he object s you select ed and insert s t hem int o t he select ed planar group drawing. If
t he object s are copied, t hey support ident ical relat ionships and t he result ing copied object is geomet rically ident ical
t o t he original t hen an ident ical relat ionship is creat ed bet ween t he object s if t hey are wit hin t he same unit .
Mi scel l aneous Geomet ry Tasks
Insert a Label or Di mensi on From a Poi nt t o a St ruct ural Group
You can insert a label or dimension indicat ing t he dist ance f rom any point t o specif ied st ruct ural groups.
To insert a label or dimension indicat ing t he dist ance from a point t o st ruct ural groups
1. Choose SC Assembly > Global Dimension t o Point (page 473)
2. Select t he point t o label or dimension.
Model St ruct ure
198
The Mark Dist ance From UCS window appears.
3. Select t he st ruct ural groups you want f rom t he t ree. By def ault , t he nearest groups are aut omat ically select ed.
4. Cl i ck OK.
Tool pat h
The Toolpat h command connect s object s such as lines, arcs, and polylines t o a closed t oolpat h. This was a required
f unct ion in ShipConst ruct or2005, but it is not required in ShipConst ruct or. The f unct ion eliminat es duplicat e object s and
correct s small gaps. If a gap is discovered t hat exceeds t he maximum snap t olerance (set in Manager > Set t ings >
Pref erences > Misc), an error window appears. An error window can look like t his:
Model St ruct ure
199
Click t he Creat e Circles but t on t o creat e end circles t hat make it easy t o f ind t he problem. For example:
Creat e a Closed Toolpat h
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Toolpat h (page 438)
2. Draw a window t o select all object s out side t he t oolpat h.
It does not mat t er if you select object s t hat are not part of t he t oolpat h. The command only connect s object s wit h no
gaps or a gap less t han t he t olerance specif ied in Manager. Small gaps are closed if t hey do not exceed t he Snap
t olerance specif ied in Manager.
3. Press Ent er.
4. The result of t he t oolpat h operat ion appears in an inf ormat ion window. Click OK.
Di hedral Angl e
Use t he Dihedral Angle command t o det ermine t he angle bet ween t wo non-parallel planar object s. The dihedral angle
bet ween t wo planes is t he angle bet ween t heir t wo normal unit vect ors .You can see t he dihedral angle of t wo planes by
looking at t he planes along t heir int ersect ion line.
Fi nd t he Di hedral Angl e bet ween Two Pl anar Obj ect s
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Dihedral Angle (page 439)
Not e: ShipConst ruct or creat es t he dimension.st yle SCON_DihedralAngle f or displaying dihedral angles in t he drawing.
2. Select t he t wo.object s you want t o det ermine t he dihedral angle f or.
3. Press .
4. ShipConst ruct or displays t he f our possible dihedral angles as arcs. Select t he dihedral angle t hat you want t o display
in t he drawing by clicking on it s arc.
Model St ruct ure
200
Convert a 3D Obj ect t o a 2D Obj ect
You can convert a 3D object t o a 2D object on t he XY plane of t he current UCS. When you do so, ShipConst ruct or removes
t he Z component of t he object . For example, a circle t hat is not parallel t o t he current UCS is convert ed t o an el l i pt i cal
pol yl i ne.
This may be usef ul if , f or example, a polyline is slight ly out of plane, or if you def ined object s on t he t hickness t hrow UCS
and now want t hem in t he const ruct ion UCS.
To convert a 3D object t o a 2D object
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > 3D t o 2D (page 435)
2. Select t he object s t o convert .
Proj ect Shapes
You can project a shape f rom an ort hogonal plane (f rame, deck, longit udinal bul khead) t o a skewed plane along t he X, Y,
or Z axis of t he world coordinat e syst em.
Not e: Project ed circles t hat produce ellipt ical shapes are convert ed t o line segment ed polylines.
To project shapes f rom an ort hogonal plane t o a skewed plane
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Ort hographic Project ion (page 436)
2. Select t he object s you want t o project .
3. Type t he project ion direct ion (in t he world coordinat e syst em): X, Y, or Z.
Reduce t he Number of Vert i ces on Pol yl i nes
Some polylines may cont ain a large number of vert ices. You can reduce t he number of vert ices on a polyline by removing
vert ices t hat are below a cert ain t olerance value. You may want t o do t his f or various reasons:
• Display speed – Polylines t hat cont ain a large number of vert ices t ake longer t o display. Reducing t he number of
vert ices on polylines can speed up your display. This is especially import ant when displaying solids. (If you creat e a
solid f rom polylines t hat cont ain a large number of vert ices, t hen t he solid will also cont ain a large number of
vert ices and will slow down your display.)
• Comput ing speed – Comput er calculat ions, such as int erf erence checking, t ake longer f or solids cont aining many
vert i ces.
• File size – ACIS solids cont aining many vert ices use enormous amount s of disk space.
• NC machine limit at ions – Many cut t ing machines will move errat ically or st art and st op at each polyline segment i f
t here are t oo many vert ices spaced closely t oget her.
Model St ruct ure
201
Two i dent i cal f rame sect i ons. The upper f rame sect i on has many vert i ces (t ol erance = 1 mm). The l ower f rame sect i on has f ewer vert i ces
(t ol erance = 3 mm).
To reduce t he number of vert ices on a polyline
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Remove Vert ices Below Tolerance (page 436)
2. Select t he polyline you want t o reduce.
3. Press Ent er.
[No fit arcs] Tolerance <0.05>:
4. To change t he f i t arcs opt i on, t ype N f or no f it arcs or F f or f i t arcs and press Ent er.
5. Ent er a t olerance value.
Tip: In general , a 0.1 mm (1/ 32” ) t olerance is a good compromise bet ween speed and accuracy.
6. Press Ent er.
Convert an El l i pse or Spl i ne t o a Pol yl i ne
NC machines do not underst and ellipses or splines. You must convert t hem t o polylines.
To convert an ellipse or spline t o a polyline
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Convert Ellipse/ Spline t o Polyline (page 437)
The def ault t olerance appears in t he command line.
2. To change t he t olerance, t ype T and press Ent er. Then t ype t he t olerance and press Ent er.
A good t olerance value is about 0.1 mm (1/ 32” ).
3. Select t he ellipse or spline you want t o convert .
4. Press Ent er.
Set Up Snappi ng
ShipConst ruct or includes several snap set t ings t hat make it easier t o work in t hree dimensions.
Model St ruct ure
202
To set up snapping
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Snap (page 445) t o open t he Draf t ing Set t ings window.
2. Set t he opt ions.
• Project int o UCS – Project s t he picked point int o t he current UCS. For example, when drawing a line t hat you
want in t he UCS, you can pick point s at elevat ion and t hey will be project ed down ont o t he UCS. You can choose
t o project perpendicular t o t he plane (Ort hogonal), along t he WCS X axis (Longit ude), along t he WCS Y axis
(Transverse), or along t he WCS Z axis (Vert i cal).
• Absolut e Ort ho – Let s you draw ort hogonal about t he world coordinat e syst em, independent of t he current UCS.
(The Aut oCAD ORTHO f eat ure only let s you draw ort hogonal t o t he current UCS.)
• Free End – See t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
• End Axis Int ersect ions – See t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
• Prof i l e Corners – See t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
• Prof ile Edges – See t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Inval i d Part s
If t here are any problems creat ing or drawing a part , t hat part may become invalid. Invalid part s are usually displayed
hat ched, as shown below:
Model St ruct ure
203
Invalid part s - if a valid boundary is not f ound t he part is displayed as an X.
A part can become invalid f or many reasons: t he boundary is not closed, problems wit h t he geomet ry or solid creat ion, or
corrupt dat a in t he dat abase, f or example. It is not always possible t o det ermine t he exact cause. The main purpose of
invalid part s is t o provide a mechanism t o delet e part s f rom t he dat abase t hat may ot herwise not show up in t he drawing.
Delet ing and re-creat ing t he part is usually t he best solut ion, but t here are some common problems t hat may be f ixed.
These solut ions may not be applicable t o all part t ypes:
• Check t hat t he piecemark is inside t he part 's boundary. If not , move it back inside wit h t he grip point s.
• Check t hat t he part 's boundary is closed. If not , adjust t he part ’s boundary object s or add boundary lines t o close
any gaps.
• If a curved plat e solid is creat ed f rom a Rhino f ile, it s product ion geomet ry will be shown as invalid. (See Curved
Plat e Creat ion (page 179)).
If t he part remains invalid t hen t he only ot her opt ion is t o delet e and re-creat e t he part . Also not e t hat any commands run
on t he invalid part may not f unct ion as expect ed.
Check St ruct ure
204
Check St ruct ure
Check Product Hi erarchy
Checking t he product hierarchy is not an aut omat ed command. You need t o check t he assignment of part s t o
assembl i es. There can be cases where a modeler has mis-assigned a part t o t he wrong assembly or t he assembly st ages
are not complet ely known at t he t ime of modeling.
To check an assembly
1. Creat e a product hierarchy drawing.
2. Check f or correct assi gnment of part s t o assemblies.
To check assemblies
1. Creat e assembly drawings f or t he unit .
2. Open each assembly drawing and verif y t hat all t he part s are t here.
Check a Uni t
When you check a uni t , Shi pConst ruct or checks t he complet e unit and it s st ruct ure model drawings f or errors. Bef ore t he
check is run, you may choose t o repair errors. If you select No, no modif icat ions will be done t o t he drawings and errors
will only be report ed in t he log f ile.
The unit check also updat es t he drawings t o ref lect any st andards changes (if t he opt ion t o repair errors was select ed).
When a change in t he st andards would change t he physical propert ies of a part , t he drawings need t o be opened and
saved t o updat e weight and cent er of gravit y dat a.
Checking a unit will also check t hat t emplat e drawings used by any of t hose unit ’s drawings are bot h regist ered t o t he
project and t he drawing f ile exist s. If t he opt ion t o repair errors is select ed, missing drawing f iles will be removed f rom the
project , and any drawings t hat are not regist ered will be. Current ly, t he t emplat e t ypes checked are Assembly,
Pipe/ HVAC/ Equipment Arrangement , and Pipe/ HVAC Spool.
To check a unit drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Check > Check Unit (page 364)
ShipConst ruct or checks t he unit drawing and displays t he f ollowing message when f inished; including a log f ile t hat
cont ains a summary of t he check.
Check St ruct ure
205
Not e: This log f ile can be rat her long. Any errors and warnings can be easily f ound by searching (using Not epad’s Edit
> Fi nd) f or eit her “ Error” or “ Warni ng” .
Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs
You can use t he Updat e Model and Syst em Drawings command t o recreat e drawings in your project , or updat e t hem if
t hey are out -of -dat e, using inf ormat ion f rom t he dat abase. This is especially usef ul if you do not have t he permissions
required t o edit or creat e drawings, since ot herwise t he drawing would have t o updat e it self every t ime it is opened.
To updat e model and/ or syst em drawings
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs (page 365).
2. The Select Drawings t o Updat e Window appears.
Select t he drawings you wish t o recreat e or updat e usi ng t he ShipConst ruct or dat abase. Opt ionally you may check
t he Ignore Up-To-Dat e box, which will improve t he speed of t he command by not updat ing f iles t hat do not require
updat ing f rom t he dat abase.
3. Click t he OK but t on. ShipConst ruct or will open and updat e each of t he select ed drawings.
4. When t he operat ion is complet e, a st at us message is displayed along wit h t he opt ion t o open a log f ile cont aining a
det ailed breakdown of t he st at us f or each select ed f ile.
Fl yThrough
206
Not e: You can also f ind t he log f ile in t he LogFiles f older cont ained in your project ’s main f older.
Fl yThrough
FlyThrough is a way t o int eract ively visualize your 3D model using virt ual realit y.
Fl yThrough
207
Not e: You must have NavisWorks inst alled and licensed t o use t his f eat ure.
St art Fl yThrough
To st art a FlyThrough
1. Open t he drawing you want t o FlyThrough.
2. Choose ShipConst ruct or > FlyThrough (page 369)
An NWD f ile is creat ed f rom t he current drawing in it s current st at e in t he same f older as t he original drawings.
NavisWorks Freedom is st art ed and loads t he NWD f ile.
3. To updat e a model in Freedom wit h changes choose ShipConst ruct or > FlyThrough (page 369) again. This will close
t he old Freedom and st art a new session wit h t he updat ed model. Freedom will close when ShipConst ruct or is
cl osed.
Approval Drawi ngs
209
Approval Drawi ngs
An approval drawing is a t wo-dimensional view of t he model. Approval drawings are used as general arrangement
drawings or classif icat ion drawings (f or example, f or init ial design and classif icat ion).
Not e: Do not use approval drawings f or product ion. Inst ead, use assembly drawings.
Approval drawi ng
Creat e an Approval Drawi ng Templ at e
Approval drawing t emplat es cont rol t he appearance of approval drawings. ShipConst ruct or includes a def ault approval
drawing t emplat e.
To creat e an approval drawing t emplat e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Templat es page.
3. Select t he Approval f older.
4. Cl i ck New Approval.
The New Drawing window appears.
5. Ent er a name f or t he drawing.
6. Cl i ck OK.
Approval Drawi ngs
210
Creat e an Approval Drawi ng
To creat e an approval drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Approval page.
3. Cl i ck New t o open t he New Drawing window.
4. Ent er a name f or t he drawing.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Insert a Pl anar Group i nt o an Approval Drawi ng
To insert a planar group int o an approval drawing
1. Choose SC Approval > Insert Group (page 463) t o open t he Insert Group window.
Approval Drawi ngs
211
2. Sel ect t he planar groups you want t o insert .
3. Cl i ck OK.
ShipConst ruct or insert s t he planar group drawing int o t he approval drawing and st art s t he move command.
Not e: If you are not using an approval drawing t emplat e, your view may be zoomed in t oo close t o see t he ent ire
pl anar group.
4. Move t he planar group t o t he locat ion you want .
Not e: Planar groups are insert ed int o approval drawings as Xref s. Whenever a planar group drawing changes,
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es t he approval drawing. If you want t o add dimensions t o an approval
drawing, it is usually easier t o add t he dimensions t o t he planar group drawing on a special layer and t hen show
t hat layer in t he approval drawing.
Save a Bound Approval Drawi ng
Planar groups and part s are insert ed int o approval drawings as Xref s. You can save an approval drawing as a bound
approval drawing t hat cont ains t he act ual planar groups and part s (t hat is, it does not cont ain Xref s t o ot her drawings). If
a planar group or part changes, ShipConst ruct or will not aut omat ically updat e a bound approval drawing.
To save a bound approval drawing
1. Choose SC Approval > Save As Bound Approval (page 464)
The Save As window appears.
2. Ent er a new File name. Once t he f ile name has been select ed t he Bound Approval Document Conf igurat ion window
will appear.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
212
For Det ails on conf igurat ion using t his int erf ace see Export To Dwg
3. Once you are done conf igurat ion select Ok and the Bound Approval Document will be creat ed.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
An assembly drawing shows all part s wit hin an assembly. Each part may be annot at ed, making it easy f or product ion t o
f abricat e t he assembly.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
213
Bef ore creat ing an assembly drawing, make sure you have done t he f ollowing:
• Creat ed a naming convent ion f or assembly drawings. See Naming Convent ions (page 37).
• At least one assembly drawing t emplat e.
Set Up Assembl y Drawi ngs
Bef ore creat ing assembly drawings, you must set up t he assembly drawing t emplat e.
Set Up an Assembl y Drawi ng Templ at e
You can cont rol t he layout of assembly drawings using assembly drawing t emplat es. ShipConst ruct or includes one
def aul t assembly drawing t emplat e t hat you can use or modif y. You can also updat e your exist ing ShipConst ruct or2005
assembly drawing t emplat es, or you can creat e new assembly drawing t emplat es.
Not e: There must be at least one assembly drawing t emplat e def ined bef ore you can creat e an assembly drawing.
Updat e a Previ ous Versi on of an Assembl y Drawi ng Templ at e
To updat e an exist ing ShipConst ruct or 2005 assembly drawing t emplat e
1. Make sure t he t emplat e you want t o updat e is in t he current project pat h.
2. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open t he Navigat or.
3. Select t he Templat es page.
4. Select t he assembly t emplat e drawing you want t o updat e.
5. Cl i ck Open.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
214
6. Cl i ck OK t o regist er this t emplat e wit h t he current project .
7. Choose SC Assembly Templat e > Updat e Templat e drawing.
Not e: Some keywords’ t ext may change as t hey are convert ed t o new ShipConst ruct or keyword ent it ies.
If t here was a <BOM> keyword in t he exist ing t emplat e, it will not be updat ed. You must insert an empt y BOM int o
t he t emplat e drawing manually.
Creat e an Assembly Drawing Templat e
To creat e an assembly drawing t emplat e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or t o open t he Navigat or.
2. Select t he Templat es page.
3. Select t he Assembly f ol der.
4. Cl i ck New Assembly t o open t he New Drawing window.
5. Ent er a name f or t he drawing and click OK.
6. Insert your company t it le block, or creat e one.
7. Set up as many viewport s as you need.
8. Move and size each viewport individually.
9. Doubl e-click on a viewport and choose View > Shade t o select a shading st yle f or t he assembly in t he view.
See Set Up Assembly Drawing Templat e Viewport s (page 214) and Insert Keywords int o an Assembly Drawing
Templ at e (page 215).
Set Up Assembly Drawing Templat e Viewport s
Each viewport in an assembly drawing t emplat e can eit her be a keymap viewport or a normal viewport . A keymap
viewport displays t he assembly part s and t he unit , let t ing you see t he locat ion of t he assembly wit hin t he unit . A normal
viewport displays only t he assembly.
Each viewport (keymap or normal) in an assembly drawing can also cont ain aut omat ic annot at ions. When you indicat e
t hat you want a viewport t o cont ain aut omat ic annot at ions, ShipConst ruct or insert s annot at ion bubbles t o aut omat ically
label t he part s t hat are visible in t he viewport .
To set up assembly drawing t emplat e viewport s
1. In t he assembly drawing t emplat e, act ivat e paper space.
2. Click in t he viewport s t hat you want t o set up.
3. Choose SC Assembly > Viewport Opt ions (page 468) t o open t he Viewport Opt ions window.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
215
4. To make t he viewport a keymap or normal viewport , choose Keymap or Non-Keymap (normal).
5. To make t he viewport cont ain aut omat ic annot at ions, choose Label it ems in viewport .
6. Cl i ck OK.
7. Repeat St eps 2 t hrough 6 f or every viewport you want t o set up.
Insert Keywords int o an Assembly Drawing Templat e
In ShipConst ruct or2005, keywords were t ext ent it ies. In ShipConst ruct or, keywords are ShipConst ruct or keyword object s.
You can insert various keywords int o an assembly drawing t emplat e. When you generat e an assembly drawing,
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically replaces t he keyword wit h t he appropriat e inf ormat ion.
To insert keywords int o an assembly drawing t emplat e
1. In t he assembly drawing t emplat e, act ivat e paper space.
2. Choose SC Assembly Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 475) t o open t he Insert Keyword window.
3. Select t he keywords t o insert .
4. Change t he t ext propert ies now in t his window or lat er using Aut oCAD. Keywords are based on Aut oCAD t ext object s
so all t he propert ies of t ext object s are available.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
216
5. Cl i ck OK.
6. Select t he locat ion f or t he keyword.
The keyword is creat ed as a new ShipConst ruct or keyword object .
Not e: To change t he pref ix or post f ix t ext of t he keyword, use Aut oCAD’s propert y window. When a keyword is
updat ed, t he pref ix and post f ix t ext will not change.
Insert a BOM Table int o an Assembly Drawing Templat e
You can now predef ine a BOM def init ion f or use wit hin an assembly drawing t emplat e. This enables you t o f ormat an
empt y BOM t able t o your specif icat ions (correct t ext st yle, size, and so on) bef ore creat ing an assembly drawing.
Not e: To insert t he BOM t able, t here must already be an assembly BOM def init ion def ined. See Set Up an Assembly
Drawi ng BOM St yl e (page 217).
To insert a BOM t able
1. In t he assembly drawing t emplat e, act ivat e paper space.
2. Choose Format > Table St yles t o cust omize t he t able st yle t o be used f or t he BOM t able. Be sure t hat t he name of
t he t able st yle mat ches t he Acad TableSt yle name in t he BOM Def init ion.
3. Choose SC Assembly Templat e > Insert BOM Table…(page 477)
4. Sel ect an Assembly BOM.
5. Cl i ck Next .
6. Ent er t he opt ions f or t he BOM t able.
7. Cl i ck Finish.
8. Select t he locat ion of t he empt y BOM.
Rel abel Al l
Thi s command re-labels all t he part s f rom t he BOM across all sheet s and places t he labels on t he _ANNOTATION layer.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
217
Labels are generat ed only once. Subsequent commands only updat e t he label t ext t o ref lect t he Bill of Mat erials.
Even t hough labels are placed in Paper Space, t hey now t rack t he object s in Model Space so t hat if t he user pans, zooms,
or orbit s in t he viewport , t he labels t rack accordingly and remain synchronized t o t he object s t hat t hey represent .
To re-label part s f rom BOMs
1. Choose SC Assembly > Label > Relabel All (page 470).
Rel abel f rom a sel ect ed BOM
This command only labels it ems f rom select t ables and viewport s. Labels are placed on t he _ANNOTATION layer.
Labels are generat ed only once. Subsequent commands only updat e t he label t ext t o ref lect t he Bill of Mat erials.
Even t hough labels are placed in Paper Space, t hey now t rack t he object s in Model Space so t hat if t he user pans, zooms,
or orbit s in t he viewport , t he labels t rack accordingly and remain synchronized t o t he object s t hat t hey represent .
To re-label part s f rom BOMs
Choose SC Assembly > Label > Relabel f rom BOM (page 471).
1. If t he drawing is in model space it will aut omat ically swit ch t o paper space.
2. Select t he BOM f or which t o generat e labels f rom.
Rel abel f rom Part s
This command will label all t he part s select ed by t he user f rom t he select ed t able.
Insert a Weld Symbol Table int o an Assembly Drawing Templat e
You can insert a t able object int o t he t emplat e drawing, which will cont ain all t he weld symbols and t heir corresponding
scenari os. The t able in t he t emplat e drawing is a simple 1x2 empt y t able t hat will aut omat ically be f illed in during t he
creat ion/ updat e of t he assembly drawing.
To insert a Weld Symbol Table
1. In t he assembly drawing t emplat e, act ivat e paper space.
2. Choose SC Assembly Templat e > Insert Weld Symbol Table (page 477)
3. Select a t able st yle, scale f or t he Weld Symbols, and an aligment f or t he t able’s cells.
4. Cl i ck OK.
5. Select a locat ion f or t he empt y t able.
Set Up an Assembl y Drawi ng BOM St yl e
You can set up any number of BOM st yles f or use in assembly drawings, nest drawings, arrangement drawings, and spool
drawi ngs.
To set up a BOM st yle
1. In Manager, choose General > Product ion Out put > Bill of Mat erials (page 320) t o open t he BOM Def init ions wi ndow.
2. To creat e a new assembly BOM st yle, click on Assembly in t he lef t list and t hen click New.
3. Cl i ck Add/ Remove t o add f ields t o t he BOM. See BOM Def init ions Manager (page 49) f or more det ails on BOM set up.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
218
4. Include any relevant collect ors. Make sure t he collect ors you want are list ed under t he Included list . See Collect or
Funct i onal i t y (page 322) f or more about col l ect ors.
5. Choose a label st yle f or each collect or. This is t he st yle used t o aut omat ically annot at e t he drawing if t his opt ion is
sel ect ed.
6. Cl i ck OK.
Sel ect Predef i ned Templ at es
When creat ing an assembly drawing, you can choose t o use predef ined t emplat es. When t his opt ion is select ed, each
assembly will use t he t emplate assigned here.
To set up predef ined t emplat es
1. In Manager, choose General > Product ion Out put > Predef ined Assembly Format (page 323) t o open t he Predef ined
Assembly Drawing Format window.
2. For each assembly level (Levels), select a t emplat e t o use f or assembly drawings (Templat e Drawing). (To set up an
assembly drawing t emplat e, see Creat e An Assembly Drawing Templat e (page 214).)
3. Cl i ck OK.
Generat e Assembl y Drawi ngs
Set Up t he Keymap Drawi ng
The keymap drawing is used in keymap (or keyplan) viewport s in assembly drawings. The keymap drawing usually
cont ains a wiref rame model of t he whole unit or vessel. When you creat e assembly drawings, ShipConst ruct or can
aut omat ically insert (xref ) t he keymap drawing int o t he keymap viewport s (see Set Up Assembly Drawing Templat e
Vi ewport s (page 214)). The assembly drawing’s object s are highlight ed wit hin t he keymap viewport using color, so you
know where t hat assembly is posit ioned wit hin t he unit .
The cont ent s of t he keymap drawing are complet ely up t o you. However, ShipConst ruct or does populat e t he keymap wit h
t he HullTrace const ruct ion lines of t he current unit (and t heir relat ed const ruct ion lines) when Updat e Keymap is clicked.
Place all t he object s in t he keymap drawing on t he Keymap layer.
The keymap viewport s wit hin each assembly drawing are linked t o t he keymap drawing. If you generat e assembly
drawings and lat er updat e or modif y t he keymap drawing, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es t he keymap wit hin all
assembly drawings.
To creat e or regenerat e t he keymap drawing
Not e: You cannot updat e t he keymap drawing if you have it open.
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open t he Navigat or.
2. Select t he Assembly page.
3. Cl i ck Updat e Keymap.
ShipConst ruct or updat es t he keymap drawing by:
• Delet ing any exist ing KEYMAP drawing.
• Creat ing a new KEYMAP drawing.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
219
• Copying all t he HullTrace const ruct ion lines f or t he whole unit and placing t hem on t he Keymap layer.
To modif y t he keymap drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open t he Navigat or.
2. Sel ect t he Assembly page.
3. Select t he KEYMAP drawing.
4. Cl i ck Open.
5. Make t he modif icat ions you want and save t he drawing.
All assembly drawings will show t he modif ied keymap drawing.
Generat i ng Assembl y Drawi ngs
It is usually easiest t o creat e all assembly drawings f or a unit or st age at once; however, you can creat e assembly
drawings f or individual assemblies if desired.
Once you have met t he requirement s out lined in Assembly Drawings (page 212), you can creat e your assembly drawing.
To creat e assembly drawings
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Assembly page.
3. Cl i ck Creat e.
The Creat e Assembly Drawi ng wizard appears.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
220
4. Select an assembly drawing t emplat e f or all your drawings t o use, or click t he check box t o use t he predef ined
assembly t emplat es f or each assembly level select ed.
Not e: The Use Predef ined Templat es check box can only be select ed if you have set up predef ined assembly
drawing f ormat s in Manager. See Select Predef ined Templat es
5. Choose assembly drawing opt ions.
• To include keymaps wit hin t he assembly drawings, check t he Creat e Keymap inf o in Assembly drawings check
box.
Not e: The Creat e Keymap inf o check box will only be select able if t here was a keymap generat ed.
• To aut omat ically annot at e t he drawing, check t he aut omat ically annot at e assembly it ems check box.
6. Cl i ck Next . St ep 2 of t he Creat e Assembly Drawing Wizard appears.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
221
7. Place a check in t he check box next t o each assembly t hat will become an assembly drawing.
Tip: By unchecking a level in t he Enable Level Select ion list , t he corresponding assemblies are grayed out and will
not be checked. This f eat ure can help speed up select ion of your assemblies.
8. Cl i ck Next . St ep 3 of t he Creat e Assembly Drawing Wizard appears.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
222
Drawing names are previewed f or each assembly select ed on t he previous page. Changing t he naming convent ion
will updat e t he preview name. If any of t he generat ed names are current ly in use by an exist ing assembly drawing,
t he st at us is changed t o Drawing already exist s.
If any of t he select ed assemblies will generat e t he same name, t hen t he st at us is shown as Name already in use.
Edit ing t he preview name of eit her conf lict ing assembly will clear t he conf lict .
Assembl y Drawi ngs
223
9. Cl i ck Finish.
ShipConst ruct or creat es one assembly drawing f or each assembly select ed.
If you are in SDI mode, ShipConst ruct or will open t he last assembly drawing it creat es. Ot herwise, all assembly
drawings creat ed will be open.
Edi t Assembl y Drawi ngs
The commands f or edit ing assembly drawings are locat ed in t he SC Assembly Menu (page 464). Some commands are
al so avai l abl e from t he Assembly Toolbar (page 453).
Updat e Part s i n an Assembl y Drawi ng
If changes are made t o part s in an assembly af t er you have creat ed assembly drawings, you must updat e your assembly
drawings (f or example, if someone adds a f inal pipe penet rat ion t o a part in t he st ruct ural model). When you updat e an
assembly drawing, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically updat es t he part s, keywords, and weld symbol t ables wit hin t he
drawi ng, leaving all of your manual edit s and annot at ions int act . Updat ing assembly drawings is much f ast er t han re-
creat ing t hem.
To see which assembly drawings need updat ing
1. Open Navigat or and go t o t he assembly page.
2. Cl i ck Show Out of Dat e.
3. In Navigat or, t he drawings wit h a warning icon beside t hem are t he drawings t hat are out of dat e and t hat may
need updat ing.
Warning: Show Out of Dat e may t ake some t ime depending on how many drawings and part s you have.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
224
Not e: If you swit ch t o anot her page in Navigat or and t hen go back t o t he assembly page, t he assembly page is
ref reshed and you will not be able t o see which drawings are out of dat e again unt il you click Show Out of Dat e.
To updat e an assembly drawing
1. Open t he assembly drawing t o updat e.
2. Choose SC Assembly > Updat e Drawing (page 465)
If t here are no part s t o updat e, a message appears.
If t here are part s t o updat e, a window appears list ing all t he modif ied part s.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
225
3. Cl ick OK t o updat e.
Insert Keywords i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng
Usually your assembly drawing t emplat e includes t he keywords t hat you want included in assembly drawings. However,
t here may be cert ain keywords t hat you want t o manually insert int o a f ew assembly drawings. Once insert ed, t he
keywords will remain as t heir def ault t ext unt il t he assembly drawing is updat ed.
Insert ing keywords int o an assembly drawing is similar t o insert ing keywords int o an assembly drawing t emplat e, except
you use SC Assembly > Insert Keywords (page 466).
To insert keywords int o an assembly drawing
1. In t he assembly drawing, act ivat e paper space.
2. Choose SC Assembly > Insert Keywords (page 466) t o open t he Insert Keyword window.
3. Select t he keywords t o insert .
4. You can change t he def ault t ext set t ings now in t his window or lat er using Aut oCAD.
5. Cl i ck OK.
6. Select t he locat ion f or each keyword select ed.
Not e: To change t he pref ix or post f ix t ext of t he keyword, use Aut oCAD’s propert y window. When a keyword is
updat ed, t he pref ix and post f ix t ext will not change.
Updat e Al l Keywords
To updat e keywords
1. Choose SC Assembly > Updat e Drawing (page 465).
2. The keywords in t he drawing updat e regardless of t he st at us of t he part s.
OR
1. Choose SC Assembly > Updat e All Keywords (page 467).
Assembl y Drawi ngs
226
2. The keywords in t he drawing updat e wit hout updat ing t he part s.
OR
1. Select keywords you wish t o updat e.
2. Choose Updat e on t he right -cl i ck menu.
BOM Tabl es
Insert a New Empt y Spool BOM Table
Not e: In order t o insert a BOM, t here needs t o be one def ined in Manager.
Bills of mat erials (BOM) in ShipConst ruct or are highly conf igurable. For t he f ull f unct ionalit y overview and f or inst ruct ions
on creat ing BOM def init ions, see Bill of Mat erials (page 47).
ShipConst ruct or uses Aut oCAD t ables t o present t he BOM dat a. Tables creat ed using t he Insert Empt y BOM Table
command have specif ic propert ies:
• They use t he column headings specif ied by t he BOM Def init ions window. Column headers are updat ed every
t ime t he t ables are updat ed.
• They are populat ed wit h dat a ext ract ed f rom t he dat abase.
• They use t he Aut oCAD t it le, dimension, and t able st yle specif ied by t he BOM Def init ions window.
• They are f illed af t er t he product ion drawings are updat ed and by running t he SCUPDATEBOMS command.
• They ref erence one dat a mast er list per BOM def init ion.
• They ref erence t he same it em numbers regardless of layout .
To insert an empt y BOM t able
Not e: You must be in paper space t o insert a spool t able.
1. Choose SC Assembly > Insert BOM Table. The BOM Def init ion Wi zard appears.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
227
2. Select t he appropriat e BOM def init ion and click Next . The set t ings part icular t o t he BOM def init ion are displayed f or
ref erence af t er BOM select ion.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
228
3. Various opt ions available f or BOM and labeling may be specif ied in st ep 2. See Insert Empt y BOM Wizard (page 105).
4. Cl i ck Finish.
5. Depending on t he Col l ect ors included in t he BOM def init ion, t here may be addit ional at t ribut es t hat can be select ed.
If t here are any such at t ribut es, a window appears. The St ruct ure Part Col l ect or t hat is normally included in a
assembly st ock BOM cont ains such opt ions.
6. Accept t he def ault opt ions t o ensure t hat everyt hing in t he spool is list ed and t hen click OK.
7. If t he drawing is in model space it will aut omat ically swit ch t o paper space t o place t he BOM.
8. A sample t able is creat ed using t he Aut oCAD t able st yle specif ied by t he BOM Def init ion. Select t he locat ion f or t he
t abl e.
9. You may choose t o prearrange more t han one t able if you ant icipat e t able wrapping (BOMs wit h more it ems t han
specif ied by t he Maximum number of rows propert y.
Updat e BOMs
To updat e all BOM t ables
1. Choose SC Assembly > Updat e BOMs (page 469).
2. All t he BOM t ables are updat ed f rom t he object s cont ained in t he drawing.
Edi t BOM Col l ect or Opt i ons
This command allows t he user t o alt er a Bill of Mat erials Collect or opt ions. For example, t he Pipe Collect or allows t he
user t o select which object t ypes t o include/ exclude. By using t his command you can quickly adjust t he object t ypes t o
suit your needs.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
229
To change t he BOM col l ect or opt ions
1. Choose SC Assembly > Edit Collect or Opt ions (page 469)
2. Select one represent at ive Bill of Mat erials f rom t he drawing.
3. Adjust t he Collect or opt ions as necessary.
Not e: you will be not if ied if t he BOM t hat you select ed has no conf igurable Collect or opt ions.
Vi ewport Di spl ay Opt i ons
Li st onl y Vi si bl e
There is smart f unct ionalit y in t he BOM which will eit her list only t hose part s which are visible t o t he user, or list all part s
regardless if t hey are visible or not .
To t oggle t he list only visible variable in t he BOM
1. Choose Toggle list only visible f rom t he product ion drawing menu.
2. Inf ormat ion on t he command line will inf orm you whet her t he variable is set or not .
Not e: You will want t o run Updat e BOMs t o see changes f rom t his command in t he BOM t able. If all part s are visible,
t here will be no dif f erence.
Insert a Wel d Symbol Tabl e i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng
Weld Symbol t ables are normally insert ed int o t he assembly drawing t emplat es. However, if you want t o insert a weld
symbol t able f or a cert ain drawing, t he insert ion met hod remains t he same as f or insert ing it int o an assembly drawing
t emplat e. The drawing’s weld symbol t ables will need t o be updat ed af t er insert ing in t he empt y one.
To insert a Weld Symbol Table
1. In t he assembly drawing t emplat e, act ivat e paper space.
2. Choose SC Assembly > Insert Weld Symbol Table
3. Select a t able st yle, scale f or t he Weld Symbols, and an aligment f or t he t able’s cells.
4. Cl i ck OK.
5. Sel ect a locat ion f or t he empt y t able.
Updat e Wel d Symbol Tabl es i n an Assembl y Drawi ng
Inst ead of having t o run a f ull updat e on t he ent ire drawing, you can updat e only t he weld symbol t ables.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
230
To updat e all Weld Symbol Tables
1. Choose SC Assembly > Updat e Weld Symbol Tables
Insert an Ori ent at i on Icon i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng
Orient at ion icons are usef ul in displaying t he direct ions when it is not clear how t he assembly is orient ed.
3D Ori ent at i on i con
To insert an orient at ion icon int o an assembly drawing
1. Choose SC Assembly > Orient at ion Icon (page 465)
The 3D/ 2D Orient at ion Icon window appears.
2. Select t he t ype of icon (3D or 2D), t he lengt h of t he direct ion lines (Scal e), and any ot her opt ions.
3. Cl i ck OK.
4. Select t he locat ion f or t he icon.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
231
Mark an Assembl y’s CG Posi t i on i n an Assembl y Drawi ng
You can insert a mark int o an assembly drawing indicat ing t he assembly’s cent er of gravit y (CG). This can be import ant
f or lif t ing document at ion and when you are planning t o move heavy assemblies. The CG posit ion is locat ed using a
SConCGPoi nt obj ect . This object cannot be moved and will be updat ed if t he drawing is updat ed.
If you need t o rot at e t he assembly in t he assembly drawing (see Rot at e an Assembly in an Assembly Drawing (page
231)), t hen you f irst need t o mark t he assembly’s CG posit ion and explode t he SConCGPoi nt .
To mark an assembly’s CG posit ion
1. In t he assembl y drawing, make sure you are in model space.
2. Choose SC Assembly > CG Point (page 466)
ShipConst ruct or insert s a SConCGPoint object at t he CG point .
Change t he Vi ew i n an Assembl y Drawi ng
When you change t he view of an assembly, all annot at ions will not move. This is because annot at ions are always in paper
space.
To change t he view in an assembly drawing
1. Doubl e-click on a view t o act ivat e model space.
2. Use t he view cont rols t o change t he view.
Rot at e an Assembl y i n an Assembl y Drawi ng
You may want t o rot at e t he assembly wit hin an assembly drawing t o view t he assembly f rom a dif f erent angle. For
example, you may want t o rot at e an assembly so it appears upside down if t hat is t he way it will be assembled. The
pref erred procedure is t o orbit around t o t he correct view posit ion inst ead of rot at ing part s.
When you creat e assembly drawings, only visible sub-assemblies are annot at ed. If you lat er rot at e t he assembly, you may
expose ot herwise hidden (and un-annot at ed) sub-assemblies. Af t er rot at ing an assembly, you must re-aut o-annot at e t he
drawing t o ensure t hat all component s are labeled.
Not e: The SConCGPoi nt object will not be rot at ed when t he part s are rot at ed. You can move t he CG point by exploding
it . However, updat ing t he drawing will not updat e t he exploded CG poi nt .
To rot at e an assembly in an assembly drawing
Not e: Bef ore rot at ing an assembly, make sure you mark it s CG posit ion (see Mark an Assembly’s CG Posit ion in an
Assembly Drawing (page 231).)
1. In t he assembly drawing, double-click wit hin t he viewport t o swit ch t o model space.
2. Choose Modif y > 3D Operat ion > Rot at e 3D.
3. Type al l and press Ent er t o select all object s.
4. Press Ent er t o f inish select ing object s.
5. Type t he axis t o rot at e t he assembly about and press Ent er.
6. Press Ent er t o accept t he def ault rot at ion point (0, 0, 0).
7. Type t he angle t o rot at e t he assembly and press Ent er.
Insert a Qual i t y Cont rol Mat ri x i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng
A qualit y cont rol mat rix is a t able of dimensions t hat you can insert int o an assembly drawing and t hat product ion can
use t o verif y t he accuracy of an assembly af t er it s f abricat ion.
Af t er f abricat ion, product ion can measure t he dist ances bet ween point s on t he physical assembly and ent er t he values
int o t he empt y f ields of t he qualit y cont rol mat rix.
Assembl y Drawi ngs
232
Not e: You can insert a qualit y cont rol mat rix int o any ShipConst ruct or drawing, but t hey are most usef ul f or assembly
drawi ngs.
To insert a qualit y cont rol mat rix int o an assembly drawing
1. In t he assembl y drawing, double-click wit hin t he main viewport t o swit ch t o model space.
2. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Creat e Qualit y Mat rix (page 440) t o open t he Qualit y Mat rix Opt ions window.
3. Set t he opt ions and click OK.
4. Click t he point s on t he assembly t hat you want t o include dimensions bet ween. For example, click point s on one
plat e part t o generat e a qualit y cont rol mat rix f or t hat panel.
Manual Label i ng f rom BOM



To manually label a part
1. Choose SC Assembly > Label > Manual Label f rom BOM (page 470)
2. If t here are mult iple BOM t ables in current layout , you will be prompt ed t o select a BOM t able f or labeling. If t here is
only one BOM in t he layout it will choose t hat . The f irst column t ext in t he BOM t able will be used as t he label t ext
and label st yle of t he BOM or in t he corresponding collect ors of t he BOM will be used if specif ied.
To f ind what label st yle it is using go t o Manager > General > Product ion Out put > Bill of Mat erials. Select t he BOM
def init ion used t o creat e t he t able. If t he collect or has a label st yle t hen it will be t hat st yle. If it is <none> t hen t he
label st yle will be t he BOMs label st yle.
Select a part to label:
3. Select a part t o label. The select ed point will be t he posit ion where t he arrow point s t o.
Specify label position (1 seg)[Multi-segment]:
4. Specif y label posit ion. (1 seg) indicat es t hat t he label st yle has t he Num Segment s value of 1. If your label st yle has
more t han one segment t hen you will be prompt ed t o pick t he remaining segment point s. If you t ype in an ‘M’, you
are permit t ed t o select more leader point s t han t he st yle has. Press Ent er will f inish t he Mult i-segment label mode.
Pl at e Nest i ng
233
Select a part to label [Copy]:
5. Af t er you creat e t he f irst label, you can swit ch t o Copy Label mode by t yping in ‘C’. In t his mode, you can cont inue t o
label part s wit h only having t o select t he part and not t he label posit ion. The label geomet ry will be t he same as t he
previous label.
Select part to copy label [lAbel]:
6. You can swit ch back t o manual label mode by t yping ‘A’.
7. Press Esc at anyt ime will end t he labeling.
To copy a label f or labeling anot her part
1. Choose SC Assembly > Label > Copy Label f rom BOM (page 470)
Select the source label:
2. Select t he source label. The syst em will f ind out t he relat ed BOM t able f or copying label t ext and st yles.
Select a part:
3. Select a part t o label. The select ed point will be t he posit ion where t he arrow point s t o and all ot her geomet ry
inf ormat ion will be copied f rom t he source label.
4. Press Esc at anyt ime will end t he labeling.
Pl ot Assembl y Drawi ngs
Pl ot an Assembl y Drawi ng
To plot an assembly drawing
1. In t he assembly drawing, make sure you are in paper space. (If you are in model space, only t he act ive viewport will
be plot t ed.)
2. At t he command line t ype MVIEW and Ent er.
[ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/Restore/2/3/4] <Fit>:
3. Ent er Shadepl ot and press Ent er.
Shade plot? [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Rendered] <As displayed>
4. Ent er Hidden and press Ent er.
Select Objects:
5. Pick t he viewport or viewport s f or which you want t o hide lines.
6. PLOT t he drawing.
Inspect a Pl ot t ed Assembl y Drawi ng
Af t er plot t ing an assembly drawing, visually inspect t he plot t ed drawing f or f ormat and cont ent . Make sure t hings like 3D
orient at ion icons and weld symbols are included and t hat every part is annot at ed.
Pl at e Nest i ng
Pl at e nest i ng is t he process of arranging plat e part s on st ock plat es or st ock plat e remnant s in preparat ion f or cut t ing.
A nest plate is a st ock plat e wit h various part s arranged on it . A nest consist s of a nest plat e, a BOM, and header f ields
wit h inf ormat ion like plat e size, mat erial, use, cut t ing t ime est imat es, and so on.
Pl at e Nest i ng
234
A nest drawing is a ShipConst ruct or drawing t hat cont ains one or more nest s of t he same stock (t hat is, t hickness and
mat eri al). Each nest can have a dif f erent plate size and can include remnant s.
A t ypi cal nest
Nest i ng Set up
Set Up Nest Opt i ons and Col ors
Cut , marking, and no-process object s were given specif ic colors duri ng t he modeling phase. To dist inguish if a part is
assigned t o a nest or not , unassigned part s are given dif f erent colors. When a part is placed inside t he st ock plat e it will
change back t o t he modeling colors.
To set up nest opt ions
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362) t o open Manager.
2. Choose General > Project Set t ings (page 309) t o open t he Project Set t ings window.
3. Open t he sect ion Project > St ruct ure > St ruct ure Colors > Nest Part Colors. This is where t he unassigned colors are
def ined. The sect ion Project > St ruct ure > St ruct ure Colors > NC-Pyros Col ors is where t he colors used during t he
export ing of nest s are set .
4. Set t he opt ions (see General > Project Set t ings (page 309)).
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Project Set t ing window.
Set Up a Nest Nami ng Convent i on
You can cont rol how ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically names nest s using naming convent ions. See Naming Convent ions
(page 37). Nest ing requires a naming convent ion.
To set up a nest naming convent ion
1. In Manager, choose General > Naming Convent ions (page 317).
2. In t he Nami ng Convent ions window, select St ruct ure > Nest s > Plat e and t hen click New. See Creat e a Naming
Convent ion (page 40) f or f urt her det ails.
Not e: If you want t he Unit name in t he nest name use t he Dat abase It em cal l ed File Pat h and creat e t he nest
drawings in a Nest subf older named af t er t he Unit .
3. Act ivat e t he desired plat e nest ing naming convent ion. See Act ivat e a Naming Convent ion (page 42).
Pl at e Nest i ng
235
Set Up NC Machi nes f or Nest i ng
NC machines cut plat es f rom plat e st ock. You must set up your NC machines bef ore plat e nest ing (see NC Machines
(page 90)).
Set Up St ocks f or Nest i ng
Each st ock has several propert ies t hat relat e t o nest ing and NC cut t ing (f or example, f eed rat e f or cut t ing, cut t ing
machine, nest part of f set , nest edge of f set , and st ock plat e sizes). See Creat e a St ock (page 53) and Pl at e St ock
Propert i es (page 54) f or det ails.
Set Up a Nest BOM Def i ni t i on
The nest BOM will be a component of t he nest t hat list s t he part s in t he nest .
To creat e or edit a BOM def init ion f or nest s
1. In Manager, choose General > Product Out put s > Bill Of Mat erials t o open t he BOM Manager.
2. Select t he St ruct ure > Nest node in t he BOM Def init ions list .
3. Cl i ck New. A new row under Nest is creat ed.
4. Give t he new BOM Def init ion a name.
5. Ent er t he Tit le of t he Table. This will appear as a header row in t he t able.
6. Ent er t he Aut oCAD Table st yle name t hat you want t o use. This name should mat ch wit h t able st yle name t hat you
will creat e in t he t emplat e drawing.
7. Select a label st yle. The label st yle is used f or labeling it ems in t he viewport wit h t he it em #.
8. Set BOM Field opt ions in t he BOM Def init ions Manager (page 49)
Set Up Nest Templ at es
A nest t emplat e cont rols t he layout and appearance of each nest wit hin a nest drawing. ShipConst ruct or includes a
def ault nest t emplat e t hat you can cust omize, or you can creat e your own nest t emplat es.
The t op of t he def ault t emplat e contains several f ields f or project name, nest name, and so on. To t he right of each f ield
is a keyword (f or example, <PROJECT NAME>). When you creat e nest s, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically replaces each
keyword wit h t he appropriat e inf ormat ion. You can move keywords, change t heir size or color, or delet e t hem if you do
not need t hem. You can also insert addit ional keywords int o t he t emplat e, and t hey will appear in all nest s (see Insert
Keywords i nt o a Nest (page 261)).
Each nest t emplat e must cont ain exact ly one t emplat e border, one BOM t able, and one <NEST STOCK PLATE LOCATION>
keyword t o be valid f or nest ing.
A t ypi cal nest t empl at e header wi t h i nf ormat i on areas
Area 1 – Cont ains general inf ormat ion about t he nest , such as t he names of t he project , t he drawing f ile and t he nest .
The cut t ype indicat es if t he plat e will be cut as Like or Like & Mirror. Below t his are t he operat or names and dat es f or
nest ing, NC processing (wit h NC-Pyros), and cut t ing. The process and cut inf ormat ion is not ent ered yet , as t hese
procedures have not yet been complet ed.
Area 2 – This area cont ains t he nest inf ormat ion, such as plat e size, t hickness, st ock, mat erial, area, and use.
Pl at e Nest i ng
236
Area 3 – This area cont ains t he NC processing inf ormat ion, such as t he lengt h of cut t ing, marking and rapid t ravel, t he
f eed rat es, and t he project ed cut t ing t ime. These values will only be available af t er t he plat e has been processed by NC-
Pyros.
Area 4 – This area shows t he weight of t he plat e, weight of t he part s, weight of t he remnant s if used, and t he weight of
t he scrap.
Area 5 – This area cont ains t he Bill of Mat erial. As shown bef ore, t he BOM is conf igured using Manager (see Set Up a
Nest BOM Def init ion (page 235)).
Open a Nest Templat e
To open t he def ault nest t emplat e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Templat es page.
3. In t he Nest f ol der, select t he Nest drawing.
4. Cl i ck Open.
Creat e a Nest Templat e
To creat e a nest t emplat e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Templat es page.
3. Select t he Nest f older.
Pl at e Nest i ng
237
4. Cl i ck New Nest .
The New Drawing window appears.
5. Ent er a name f or t he nest t emplat e.
6. Cl i ck OK t o close t he New Drawing window.
Def ine a Nest Templat e Border
A nest t emplat e must cont ain one border or f rame. The border consist s of a closed polyline, usually a rect angle.
ShipConst ruct or uses t his border t o det ermine which part s and ot her object s (such as t he BOM or keywords) are part of a
specif ic nest . Nest t emplat es f rom previous versions (ShipConst ruct or2005 and earlier) need t o be updat ed bef ore t hey
are used by ShipConst ruct or.
To def ine a nest t emplat e border
1. In the nest t emplat e, choose SC Pl at e Nest Templat e > Def ine Border (page 497).
2. Select a closed polyline t o use as t he border.
To updat e a nest t emplat e
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Updat e f rom a Previous Version (page 500).
2. Select t he exist ing t emplat e border closed polyline t hat you want t o updat e.
3. Conf irm t hat all object s are on t he st ock layer.
Not e: The BOM keyword f rom previous versions is no longer used, so it can be delet ed.
Pl at e Nest i ng
238
Insert Keywords int o a Nest Templat e
Nest t emplat es can cont ain any number of keywords. Each nest t emplat e must also cont ain t he keyword <NEST STOCK
PLATE LOCATION> t o indicat e t he locat ion of t he nest plat e. ShipConst ruct or places t he lower lef t corner of t he nest plat e
or remnant at t he insert ion point of t he keyword. Wit hout t his keyword, nest ing will f ail.
Keywords use t hree dif f erent t erms f or various propert ies: Plate Stock is t he original raw st ock f or t he nest . Nest Stock is
t he it em used t o creat e t he nest (eit her a remnant or raw st ock). Nest is t he current nest (t he nest st ock excluding all
remnant s on t he nest ).
To insert keywords int o a nest t emplat e
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 497) t o open t he Insert Keywords window.
2. Select t he keyword.
3. Set t he Text St yle, Text Si ze, and Text Rot at ion.
4. Cl i ck OK.
5. Select t he insert ion point f or t he keyword.
Check Drawi ng Val i di t y
Nest t emplat e drawings require object s t o exist in t he drawing bef ore t he drawing can be properly used in nest ing. These
object s are: a single t emplat e border, a single <NEST STOCK PLATE LOCATION> keyword, a single BOM t able. While it is
not necessary, it is suggest ed t hat t he border be t he largest object in t he drawing, encompassing everyt hing else.
To check a nest t emplat e
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Check Drawing (page 500).
2. A check will run, conf irming t hat t he crit erion is met .
3. A message window will appear list ing any errors, if any.
4. If t here are no errors, t hen a check is run, f inding all object s out side t he bounds of t he border. A message window
will appear list ed how many of t hese object s are f ound, and t he opt ion t o select t hem.
Set Up Nest Drawi ngs and Nest s
Creat e a Nest Fol der
You may want t o creat e f olders wit hin t he Nest f older in order t o organize your nest drawings.
To creat e a nest f older
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or and select t he Nest page.
2. Ri ght -click in t he Drawing list and choose New Folder.
Pl at e Nest i ng
239
3. Ent er a name f or t he f older.
Not e: The name of t he f older can be anyt hing, but f or bet t er organizat ion, it is usually a Unit name, and all nest
drawings f or t hat Unit are placed in t he f older.
Creat e a Nest Drawi ng
Each nest drawing can cont ain one or more nest s of t he same st ock but can have dif f erent plat e sizes, including
remnant s. Many companies decide t o use t he st ock name as t he drawing name. Of t en, t he unit , that most or all of t he
part s on t he nest belong t o, is also int egrat ed int o t he drawing name. For example, U12PL10.DWGcont ains part s f or U12
on PL10 st ock plat e. You can organize your nest s by unit by creat ing f olders f or each unit .
Somet imes nest ing cannot be carried out on a unit -by-unit basis. You might be building more t han one unit at a t ime.
Nest ing just one unit can also creat e t oo much unused plat e space. The unused space can be t reat ed as a remnant or
drop. A remnant is t he unused port ion of a st ock plat e t hat you can use t o creat e a new nest (see Set Up Remnant s (page
265)).
To creat e a nest drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or and select t he Nest page.
2. Select a f older in t he drawing list .
3. Cl i ck New.
The New Drawing window appears.
4. Ent er a name f or t he nest drawing.
5. Cl i ck OK t o close t he New Drawing window.
The Select Plat e St ock window appears.
6. Select a plat e st ock f or t he nest drawing.
7. Cl i ck OK t o close t he Select Plat e St ock window.
Re-creat e a Nest Drawi ng
Each nest drawing can be re-creat ed using t he dat a st ored in t he dat abase, similar t o model drawings. Older nest
drawings will be part ially re-creat ed. Their part s will be placed wit hin t he nest t hey are current ly assigned t o, but t he
original locat ion and orient at ion will have been lost .
Pl at e Nest i ng
240
Un-nest ed part s will be placed of f t o t he side.
To re-creat e a nest drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or and select t he Nest page.
2. Select a f older in t he drawing list
3. Select t he nest drawing in t he list . Click Open.
A message box will appear prompt ing t o re-creat e t he nest drawing f rom t he dat abase. Click Yes t o re-creat e t he
drawi ng.
4. If t here is more t han one nest t emplat e drawing def ined, t hen t he Select Nest Templat e window will appear. Select
t he nest t emplat e t o use f or re-creat ing t he nest s in t he drawing. Click OK t o cont inue.
Insert a Nest i nt o a Nest Drawi ng
Not e: If you have a license f or aut omat ic nest ing, you do not need t o manually insert a nest int o a nest drawing. You
can simply insert and arrange part s int o a nest drawing (see Aut omat ically Insert and Nest Several Part s (page 246)).
To insert a nest int o a nest drawing
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest > New (page 480) t o open t he New St ock Plat e window.
Pl at e Nest i ng
241
2. Set t he opt ions.
3. Cl i ck OK.
4. Cl i ck in t he drawing t o set t he locat ion f or t he new nest .
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically names t he nest . For more inf ormat ion see SC Plat e Nest > Nest > New (page 480).
Insert Part s i nt o a Nest
There are t hree ways you can insert part s int o a nest :
• Insert ing one part at a t ime
• Arraying several part s at once
• Aut omat ically insert and nest several part s (requires a license f or Aut omat icNest )
Keep in mind t he f ollowing when arranging part s on a plat e:
• Insert t he largest part f irst , t hen t he second largest , and so on.
• Use like and mirror cut s. A like and mirror plat e will only be processed once, but cut t wice, reducing processing t ime
by hal f .
Pl at e Nest i ng
242
• Arrange part s ont o nest s based on t he sequence of product ion. Keep part s t hat will be needed at t he same t ime on
t he same nest .
Insert Part s Int o a Nest One at a Ti me
To insert part s int o a nest one at a t ime
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Insert (page 484)
2. The Select Part s f or Nest ing window appears.
Pl at e Nest i ng
243
Pl at e Nest i ng
244
The lef t side of t he window displays t he assembly t ree wit h all part s t hat mat ch t he f ilt er set t ing. The assembly t ree
makes it easy t o nest by const ruct ion unit or any ot her assembly. If you click t he check box t hat is in f ront of an
assembl y, all sub-assemblies and part s are aut omat ically select ed. If you change t he val ue in t he Product Hierarchy
dropdownlist , t he assembly t ree updat es t o show t he assemblies f or t hat product hierarchy.
The bot t om of t he window conf irms t he number of part s select ed f or nest ing.
St ock Inf o displays t he st ock propert ies used in t his nest drawing.
Nest ing Type is t he opt ions f or t he t ype of nest ing t o perf orm: Manual or Aut omat ic.
On t he right side of t he window, Show list s various grouping opt ions t o display. Below it , Show only part s wit h list s
t he cont rols for f ilt ering t he part s. Only part s t hat mat ch t he select ed opt ions will be available f or nest ing. In t his
case t here are t he f ollowing set t ings:
• Current Unit Only – This opt ion minimizes t he amount of inf ormat ion in t he t ree, speeding up t he window, and is
especially usef ul f or large project s.
• St andard Assemblies – If checked, t he f ilt er will display assemblies f rom st andard assemblies, and t heir part s.
• Purchased – If checked, St andard Assemblies t agged as “ Purchased” will also be displayed.
• Dist . Sys. Support s – If checked, Dist ribut ed Syst ems Support s and t heir part s are displayed.
• Same St ock – Only part s using t he same st ock shoul d be nest ed in one nest drawing. Uncheck t his only if you
want t o f orce a part t o be nest ed on anot her st ock, f or example, 8 mm bracket s ont o 10 mm st ock or nest ing a
part made f rom corrugat ed st ock ont o plat e st ock.
• Not Nest ed – If checked, t he f ilt er will only display part s t hat have not already been placed in nest drawings.
• Mi rrors – Only mirrored part s are list ed.
• Creat e Like/ Mirror Nest – Only enabled when Mi rrors is select ed. Choose t his opt ion t o creat e like-and-mirror
nest s (using mirrored part s). A like-and-mirror nest will only be processed once, but cut t wice. Many cut t ing
machines can do t his at t he same t ime, reducing processing t ime by half
• Si de – You can f ilt er by t he side of t he vessel t he part s are on.
• Finishes – If checked, t his l et s you select a f inish opt ion. For example, you might have some primed plat e and
only want t o nest part s on t hese t hat are t o be cut f rom primed plat e. The MarkSide and FarSide opt ions allow
you t o f ilt er part s t hat only have t he select ed f inish on t he chosen side.
• Show Flat bars – If t his opt ion is select ed, t he f lat bars list ed in t he window below t his opt ion can be select ed t o
appear in t he nest ing t ree. Flat bars of more t han t he present st ock are shown in case you decide t hat ordering
more st ock of a cert ain t ype is not a good use of resources. So you can choose t o have some f lat bars made out
of a st ock t hat you want t o use up, inst ead of ordering more of anot her t ype t hat you may have run out of .
Not e: Flat bar part s will be unrolled or expanded when t hey appear in t he nest drawing.
3. Select t he part s t o nest . Click OK.
The Nest ing Part s Insert ion Opt ions window appears. This window gives you addit ional opt ions f or manual nest ing.
4. Select “ Insert Part s Individually” and Click OK.
5. Insert part s.
Not e: The largest part is insert ed f irst , t he smallest one last . The sort ing algorit hm select s t he part it considers
largest f irst . So, as you st art t o nest , you will be given t he largest part f irst .
Not e: Be sure t o set t he OSNAP OFF and ORTHO OFF. Ot herwise you might not see t he part at all.
The general procedure f or insert ing part s int o a nest drawing is as f ollows:
Part s are insert ed at the mouse position, aut omat ically rot at ed t o t he smallest horizont al rect angle, wit h t he move
command act i ve.
Move t he mouse t o move t he part .
You can change t he rot at ion using t he lef t and right arrow keys. Use t he plus (+) and mi nus (-) keys t o increase or
decrease t he rot at ion st ep-si ze.
6. The f irst part is displayed at t he mouse posit ion. ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically rot at es t he part t o t he best horizont al
posit ion. The command prompt reads:
Pl at e Nest i ng
245
Inserting 0301-P07-P02:
Rotate with arrow keys, Modify the step-size with +/- <15>
7. Place t he part s in an organized way in t he nest drawing f or lat er nest ing. The f igure shows an organized placing of
part s.
Array Several Part s at Once Int o a Nest
To array several part s at once int o a nest
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Insert (page 484)
2. The Select Part s f or Nest ing window appears.
3. Set t he opt ions. See Insert Part s Int o a Nest One at a Time (page 242).
4. Select t he part s t o nest and click OK.
5. The Nest ing Part s Insert ion Opt ions window appears wit h addit ional opt ions f or manual nest ing.
Pl at e Nest i ng
246
For t he Number of Part s in First Row, you need t o consider t he sizes of t he largest part s t hat will be insert ed. The
largest part s will be insert ed f irst . Since t he f irst part s are t he largest , it is usually good t o choose a small number of
part s f or t he f irst row.
• Gap Bet ween Part s -- The dist ance t hat should exist bet ween t he part s if you want t o add t he required spacing
f or t he cut t ing operat ion.
• Tiling Direct ion -- The direct ion, st art ing on t he lef t side, in which you want t he array of part s t o go.
Not e: The largest part is insert ed f irst , t he smallest one last . The sort ing algorit hm select s t he part it considers
t he largest part f irst . This somet imes produces unexpect ed result s wit h t he Array opt ion due t o some part s
having odd boundaries.
Not e: Be sure t o set t he OSNAP OFF and ORTHO OFF. Ot herwise you might not see t he part at all.
The general procedure f or insert ing part s int o a nest drawing is as f ollows:
If you have select ed t he Down opt ion f or t he Tiling Direct ion, t he part s are insert ed wit h t he mouse posit ion being t he
t op lef t of t he array of part s. If you have select ed t he Up opt ion f or t he Tiling Direct ion, t he f irst part is insert ed as t he
bot t om lef t of t he array of part s.
Move t he mouse t o move t he part int o t he posit ion where you want t o st art t he array.
• The rest of t he part s will be added according t o t he choices you have made and t he algorit hm’s decision of t he
descending size order of t he part s.
Not e: Some part s have unusual boundary propert ies and will not be insert ed wit h t he proper spacing. Most will
work as expect ed. This is just a helper f unct ion t o aid in nest ing t o get t he part s quickly ont o t he screen. For t rue
aut omat ed nest ing, you will need t he Aut omat icNest module.
6. The f irst part is displayed at t he mouse posit ion. ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically rot at es t he part t o t he best horizont al
posit ion. Assuming you have select ed t he Tiling Down opt ion, t he command prompt will read:
Insert the first part at the top left for the starting position of the array.
7. Once insert ed, t he rest of t he part s are added aut omat ically. You will probably need t o manually place t he part s int o
t heir f inal posit ions. Addit ional f unct ions f or aligning and moving part s are list ed f urt her on in t his chapt er.
Aut omat i cal l y Insert and Nest Several Part s
To aut omat ically insert and nest several part s
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Insert (page 484)
2. The Select Part s f or Nest ing window appears.
3. Select Aut omat ic f or Nest ing Type.
4. Set t he desired opt ions. See Insert Part s Int o a Nest One at a Time (page 242).
5. Select t he part s t o nest and click OK. ShipConst ruct or now insert s t he blocks f or all t he part s you select ed int o t he
drawing at t he origin.
6. The Aut omat ic Nest ing window appears.
Pl at e Nest i ng
247
• Nest Name – Aut omat ic nest ing creat es nest s. The nest s will be named wit h t he given name, and if t hat name
exi st s, aut omat ic nest ing will use t he next number.
• Mirror Name – The name of t he mirror nest (if creat ing Like and Mirror nest s).
• St ock Name – The name of t he st ock assigned t o t he current drawing.
• Thickness – The t hickness of t he st ock assigned t o t he current drawing.
• Mat erial – The mat erial of t he st ock assigned t o t he current drawing.
• Use Opt imizer – Enables t he Opt imizer f or t he nest ing operat ion.
• Use Remnant s – Toggles t he “ Use” count f or remnant s in t he Sheet s list .
• Exist ing Nest s – A list of t he exist ing nest names f or t he project .
• Sheet s – A list of t he available sheet s t o use. Remnant s are always list ed bef ore raw st ock, wit h t he smallest
remnant f irst . Sheet s at t he t op of t he list will be used bef ore t hose lower down on t he list . If part s cannot f it on
Pl at e Nest i ng
248
a given plat e size, t he next si ze down is t ried. You can reorder t he sheet s by select ing a size in t he list and
clicking t he Up or Dn but t ons. The order of t he list is init ially t aken f rom t he plat e sizes set up in Manager. See
Edit Sizes Window (page 324).
• Templ at es – A list of t emplat e drawings. Select t he t emplat e t hat you want t o use.
• Advanced – Shows t he advanced set t ings f or aut omat ic nest ing (Recommended).
7. Cl i ck Advanced t o see and set t he opt ions in t he Advanced Nest Set t ings window.
Part Fit Type – Aut omat ic nest ing cont ains dif f erent algorit hms f or how part s are nest ed:
• Qui ckest – This t ype of f it provides t he f ast est result but seldom provides t he best result s.
• Cent er of Gravit y – The cent er of gravit y of t he part is posit ioned depending on t he Pref erred Nest Direct ion.
• Gri d – This is a good choice of al gori t hm f or rect angular st yle part s.
• Advanced Cent er of Gravit y – Similar t o Cent er of Gravit y.
• Advanced Grid – Similar t o Gri d except hanging part groups are handled.
Pl at e Nest i ng
249
Part Rot at ion – The st ep angles t o rot at e t he part s when t rying t o place it . The part s st art at an angle t hat creat es t he
minimum height . The smaller t he angle, t he longer it t akes t o complet e t he nest ing.
Rot at ion Angle – Angle st ep size f or part s.
Use a dif f erent angle f or rect angular part s – The opt ion enables anot her angle t o be used by rect angular part s,
inst ead of t he smaller angle (such as 15°) used previously. Finding t he best f it of a rect angular part is f ast er if a
larger angle is used, such as 90°.
Rot at ion Angle – Angle st ep size f or rect angular part s.
Tip: When you are aut omat ic nest ing, you may f ind t hat t he result s are not accept able. Test ing dif f erent t ypes of
f it is a good way t o ensure opt imal nest ing. A smaller rot at ion angle does not guarant ee bet t er use. A good
st art ing angle t o t est wit h is 45°.
Sheet Corner – The corner of t he st ock plat e t hat t he part s are nest ed closest t o.
Sheet Direct ion
• Horizont al (X) – Part s are placed beside each ot her f irst rat her t han on t op of each ot her.
• Vert ical (Y) – Part s are placed on t op of each ot her f irst rat her t han beside each ot her.
Cl i ck Advanced t o expand t he window t o show more advanced opt ions, relat ed t o t he Opt imizer. These values do not
need t o be changed f or most users, but if you f eel t he need t o slight ly adjust some set t ings, t hen t hey can be
modi f i ed here.
Pl at e Nest i ng
250
Opt i mi zers – The Opt imizer works by generat ing t he def ault nest out put , using t he aut omat ic nest set t ings. This gives
it a base case t o improve by using various t rials. Each t rial is a dif f erent algorit hm t o use in achieving a bet t er
ut ilizat ion over t he def ault nest layout . Trials are grouped int o t rial set s, and each Opt imizer cont ains dif f erent t rial
set s t o add t o t he list .
• Base Opt imizer – The Base Opt imizer cont ains 11 t rial set s, t ot aling 44 t rials. Each t rial set can be enabled or
disabled in t he grid.
• Backt rack Opt imizer – The Backt rack Opt imizer cont ains 30 t rials in a single t rial set . It uses a dif f erent group of
algorit hms over t he Base Opt imizer.
• Backt rack Height – The sheet height f rom where t he backt racking st art s.
• Grid Opt imizer – The Grid Opt imizer is designed t o f ix grids wit h hanging part s, t o improve t he layout . It cont ains
19 t rials in a single t rial set .
Pl at e Nest i ng
251
St op Opt imizer when – The Opt imizer t o at t empt each t rial, and af t er all select ed have been used, t he best layout is
used. However, t he user can specif y various paramet ers t o st op Opt imizer bef ore all t rials have been run. Using 0 f or
any of t hese paramet ers will ignore it .
• Minimum Ut ilizat ion Improvement – The def ault nest has t he basic ut ilizat ion. If any of t he t rials have a
ut ilizat ion t hat is t his percent above t hat basic ut ilizat ion, t hen st op t he Opt imizer and use t hat t rial’s layout .
• Maximum Time – The longest t ime t hat t he Opt imizer should run. Once t his t ime has been reached, t he
Opt imizer will st op, but only af t er t he current t rial has f inished. This means, t he Opt imizer will run longer t han
t his t ime, but only so t hat it can complet e t he current t rial. The best layout f ound t o dat e will be used.
• Max Trials – The set s t he upper limit of how many t rials t o use. By def ault , t he Opt imizer will st op when t here
are no more t rials t o t est . The user can set a smaller value here, and t he best layout in t he t rials t est ed will be
used.
Cl i ck Reset t o Def ault s t o rest ore all values t o t heir values bef ore t his window was opened.
Af t er set t ing up t he advanced set t i ngs, cl i ck OK t o ret urn t o t he Aut omat i c Nest ing window.
The Nest Layout window appears. This window let s you det ermine how t he new nest s will be placed in t he drawing.
• Insert Manually – If t his is checked, you will choose t he posit ion of all t he nest plat es one at a t ime.
• Tile Horizont ally – If t his is checked, you will pick t he locat ion of t he f irst nest and all subsequent nest s will be
t iled horizont ally.
• Tile Vert ically – If t his is checked, you will pick t he locat ion of t he f irst nest and all subsequent nest s will be t iled
vert i cal l y.
• New row (or col umn) wit h each plat e size – Whet her or not t o st art a new row or column f or each plat e size.
• Limit of nest s per row (or column) – If t his is checked, t he number in t he box will be t he maximum number of
nest s used in a row or column bef ore st art ing a new row or column.
• Spaci ng – How much t o separat e t he nest s by when aut omat ically t iling t hem.
Pl at e Nest i ng
252
8. If you are t iling, choose t he posit ion of t he f irst nest . If you are insert ing manually, you will be prompt ed t o pick t he
insert point f or each nest .
Remove Part s f rom a Nest
To remove part s f rom a nest
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Remove (page 485)
2. Select t he part s t o remove.
Not e: You can also use t he Aut oCAD erase command t o un-nest a part .
Re-nest a Nest
You can apply a dif f erent nest ing algorit hm t o a set of nest ed part s and aut omat ically re-nest t hem (f or example, if you
are not sat isf ied wit h t he original nest ing).
To re-nest part s
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Re-Nest (page 482)
2. Select t he part s you want t o re-nest .
Pl at e Nest i ng
253
3. The Aut omat ic Nest Set t ings window appears, let t ing you make changes as needed.
For more inf ormat ion on t he Aut omat ic Nest Set t ings window, see Aut omat ically Insert and Nest Several Part s (page
246).
Updat i ng Part s i n a Nest
Af t er insert ing and assigned part s t o a nest , t hey may be modif ied in t heir original drawings. To updat e t he part s in t he
nest t o use t he lat est dat a, choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Re-insert (page 484). The part will remain in t he same locat ion,
unless t he out er t oolpat h has changed, in which case, t he part will shif t slight ly. You may need t o re-organize t he nest
af t er an updat e, if part geomet ry has changed.
If t he part s have been changed while t he nest drawing is open (f or example, if anot her user is modif ying t he original
drawing), a log f ile will be creat ed during t he updat e. You will need t o save and re-open t he nest drawing t o get t he most
up-t o-dat e inf ormat ion f rom t he dat abase.
When opening a nest drawing, it will check t he drawing f or any out -of -dat e part s. The Changed Part List window is
displayed list ing t hose part s, and you may choose which part s t o updat e. Any part s t hat are not updat ed are f lagged using
t he Out dat ed color and moved t o t he REV layer. Those part s will need t o be manually updat ed lat er bef ore being
assigned t o nest s.
Pl at e Nest i ng
254
Assi gn or Unassi gn Part s t o a Nest
Part s placed ont o pl at es are aut omat ically assigned t o t he nest of t hat plat e. Moving a part of f a plat e unassigns t he part .
Part s change colors based on t heir assigned st at e. If t he part cannot be assigned t o t he nest , t he Assign Part s window
will appear inf orming t he user of t he problem. Expanding Det ails will list t he reasons and all t he part s t hat cannot be
assigned f or t hose reasons.
The most common reasons are: part is on the REV layer, t rying t o assign a non-mirrored part t o a like/ mirror nest (and
vice versa), part geomet ry is invalid (it self -int erest s, prevent ing t he NC-Machine f rom get t ing a complet e pat h), and part
is split t o anot her project .
A similar window will also appear when at t empt ing t o assign part s of a dif f erent st ock t o t he nest .
Pl at e Nest i ng
255
Sl i de a Part Al ong a Pl at e Edge or Part Edge
To slide a part along a plat e edge or part edge
You should be at a st age where you have a nest and part s in t he nest drawing.
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Slide Along (page 485)
2. Select t he part t hat you want t o move.
Select part:
3. Select t he point on t he part t hat you want t o f ollow t he cursor.
Select slide point on part:
4. Select a point on t he part t hat will be used in conjunct ion wit h t he slide point t o be t he t angent .
Select tangent point on part:
5. Select t he object s t hat t he part will slide along t he edge of . This will t ypically be t he plat e and nearby part s.
Please select stock plate and/or part(s):
6. You will see an out line of t he part you are moving. This indicat es t he current posit ion of t he part .
7. Move t he mouse. The part will f ollow t he mouse point er. The part will rot at e so t hat it will be t angent ial t o t he part
t hat it is sliding along. The part aut omat ically keeps t he Nest Part Of f set dist ance set in t he plat e st ock library in
Pl at e Nest i ng
256
Manager f rom t he nearest part . Make sure t hat t he ghost out line does not int ersect wit h part s or t he plat e border
bef ore f inal placement of t he part .
1. The prompt displays:
T - toggle orient mode; R - Rotate 180°:
<Tangent mode>
2. If t he part is on t he wrong side of t he part t o slide along (sliding inside t he ot her part inst ead of along t he out side),
press key R. This t oggles t he side t he part is on.
The slide f unct ion support s t hree slide modes. Press t he key T t o act ivat e t hese modes:
• Tangent mode – In t his mode t he sliding part will be aligned t angent ially on t he part it is sliding along.
• Two-point mode – The t wo select ed point s on t he sliding part will be on t he out side or inside t oolpat h of t he part
it is sliding along. This mode is valuable when placing smaller part s inside holes.
• No rot at e mode – The rot at ion of t he part does not change t he direct ion as it slides along.
Pract ice all t hree modes. Press t he T key t o t oggle t he mode. Move t he mouse t o see t he ef f ect of t he t hree dif f erent
modes.
3. Make sure you are in t he t angent mode. If you are not , press T unt il t he command line displays t angent mode.
Pl at e Nest i ng
257
Move or Rot at e Part s wi t hi n a Nest
There are t hree ways you can rot at e a part :
• Move or rot at e a part
• Rot at e a part so it f it s wit hin t he smallest horizont al or vert ical rect angle
• Rot at e a part so one side is horizont al or vert ical
To move or rot at e a part
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Move/ Rot at e (page 485)
2. Select t he part you are going t o rot at e or move.
Select part:
3. Select t he point which will be t he base point f or movement and t he cent er of rot at ion.
Specify base point:
4. The part moves wit h t he mouse.
You can use t he lef t and right arrow keys keys t o rot at e t he part . Each press of t he f unct ion key rot at es t he part by
t he angle indicat ed in bracket s on t he command line (<5> in our example). Use t he pl us (+) and mi nus (-) keys t o
i ncrease or decrease t he increment s.
Rotate with arrow keys, Modify the step-size with +/- < 5>
To rot at e a part so it f it s wit hin t he smallest horizont al or vert ical rect angle
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Rot at e Short est Dimension (page 486)
2. Sel ect t he part t hat you want t o rot at e.
3. Press H t o align t he part horizont ally or V t o align t he part vert ically.
To rot at e a part so one side is horizont al or vert ical
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Align wit h H or V (page 487)
2. Select t he part t o align.
Select part(s):
3. Select t he alignment point by clicking on an edge of t he part .
Select alignment point:
For example, if you want t o align t he upper edge of t he part so it lies horizont al, click t he upper edge.
OSNAP NEAREST and END are aut omat ically t urned on.
4. Select t he align direct ion point by clicking any ot her point on t he same edge of t he part .
The t wo point s indicat e t he direct ion t o align wit h t he vert ical or horizont al axi s.
ORTHO is now on.
Select alignment direction point:
5. Move t he mouse unt il t he part is rot at ed (f or example, horizont ally).
Fi ndi ng Part s i n a Nest Drawi ng
To f ind a part in a nest drawing
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > List (page 487) t o open t he Part s window.
Pl at e Nest i ng
258
2. Find t he part in t he list and double click on it . The drawing zooms t o t he select ed part . The cont ext menu provides the
opt ion t o zoom t o t he part in it s planar group drawing.
Label l i ng Part s
To label part s in a nest using t he BOM index
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Aut o Label f rom BOM Index (page 489) t o open t he Label Propert ies window.
2. Select t he opt ions t o use f or t he labels.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Labels will be creat ed on each part using t he numbering f rom t he BOM index.
To edit t he propert ies of a label
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Label Propert ies (page 490) t o open t he Label Propert ies window.
2. Modif y t he set t ings
3. Cl i ck OK.
Li st Un-nest ed Part s i n an Assembl y
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > List Un-nest ed Part s (page 488) t o open t he Un-nest ed Part s window.
Pl at e Nest i ng
259
2. Select t he assembly t o list un-nest ed part s f or. If you change t he value in t he Product Hierarchy dropdownlist , t he
assembly t ree updat es t o show t he assemblies f or t hat product hierarchy.
Un-nest ed part s are list ed on t he right , grouped by st ock t ype.
Current Unit Only – This opt ion minimizes t he amount of inf ormat ion in t he t ree, speeding up t he window, and is
especially usef ul f or large project s.
St andard Assemblies – If checked, t he f ilt er will display assemblies f rom st andard assemblies, and t heir part s.
Purchased – If checked, St andard Assemblies t agged as “ Purchased” will also be displayed.
Dist . Sys. Support s – If checked, Dist ribut ed Syst ems Support s are displayed.
Show Part s – Toggle t his opt ion t o eit her display or hide t he part s assigned t o t he assemblies.
Posi t i on Part s Next t o each ot her
To posit ion part s next t o each ot her
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Snap (page 487)
2. Sel ect t he part s t o move. Press Ent er t o f inish select ing t he part . You can also use t his f unct ion t o SNAP several part s
at once.
Select part(s):
3. At t his point , ShipConst ruct or act ivat es OSNAP CENTER, INTERSECTION, and END. Select a point on t he part you are
moving. This point will be base point f or t he move. Typically you want t o select t he corner of a part .
Pl at e Nest i ng
260
Snap point:
4. Sel ect t he point on t he part .
Snap to:
5. The f unct ion expect s you t o pick t he approximat e direct ion t hat you want t o of f set t he part f rom t he snap point to.
The f unct ion will snap t he closest 45 degrees direct ion t hat you pick.
Specify direction:
6. The part moves by t he value of Nest Part Of f set or Nest Edge Of f set depending on what you select ed. This keeps t he
part t he correct dist ance f rom t he plat e edge or ot her part s.
Hi de or Show Nest ed Part s, Revi sed Part s, or NC Cut t i ng Pat hs
A nest drawing consist s of vari ous layers:
• The st ock layer cont ains t he st ock plat e, t emplat e border, keywords, and ot her ent it ies f rom t he t emplat e.
• The t ext layer cont ains t he BOMs.
• The part layer cont ians part s, eit her nest ed or unnest ed.
• The bridge layer cont ains all bridges bet ween part s.
• The revision layer cont ains part s t hat have been modif ied since being nest ed. (When you use SC Plat e Nest > Updat e
Nest s and BOM (page 493), ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically moves modif ied part s t o t he revision layer.)
• The NC-Pyros layer cont ains t he NC cut t ing pat h t hat you have import ed (see Import Cut t ing Pat hs int o Nest s (page
272)).
You can cont rol t he display wit hin a nest drawing by hiding or showing each of t hese layers.
To cont rol t he display of nest drawing layers
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Visibilit y (page 488) t o open t he Choose Layers t o Display window.
2. Select t he layers you want t o display.
Nest Layers ref ers t o bot h t he st ock and part layers.
3. Cl i ck OK.
To display all layers in a nest drawing
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Act ivat e All (page 489)
Pl at e Nest i ng
261
To f lip bet ween t he nest layer and t he NC-Pyros layer
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Flip NC-Pyros (page 489)
Insert Keywords i nt o a Nest
You can insert keywords int o a specif ic nest (f or example, if a specif ic nest requires a keyword t hat ot her nest s do not
require). If all nest s require t he same keyword, t hen insert t he keyword int o t he nest t emplat e (see Set Up Nest
Templ at es (page 235)).
To insert keywords int o a nest
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Insert Keywords (page 489) t o open t he Insert Keyword window.
2. Select t he keyword t o insert and set t he Text St yle, Text Size, and Text Rot at ion.
3. Cl i ck OK.
4. Select t he locat ion t o insert t he keyword.
Not e: Make sure you insert t he keyword wit hin t he nest ’s out side border. ShipConst ruct or det ermines which nest
t he keyword belongs t o based on it being inside t hose borders.
Edi t t he St ock Pl at e of a Nest
To edit t he st ock plat e of a nest
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Edit St ock Plat e (page 482)
2. Click t he nest you want t o change.
The Edit St ock Plat e window appears.
3. Choose a st ock size or change bet ween using a f ull st ock plat e or a remnant .
You cannot change t he st ock t hickness or t emplat e drawing.
4. Ent er a new name in t he Nest Name box.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Del et e a Nest
To delet e a nest f rom a nest drawing
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Delet e (page 482)
2. Click t he nest (eit her t he nest border or t he st ock plat e) t o delet e.
3. A conf irmat ion dialog will appear because any NC f ile associat ed wit h t he nest is also delet ed.
Fi nd a Nest
To f i nd a nest
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Find (page 482) t o open t he Nest List window.
Pl at e Nest i ng
262
2. Select t he nest t o zoom in t o.
3. Cl i ck Zoom.
Set Up Bri dges
A bridge is a way of connect ing t wo part s t oget her t o make cut t ing, f abri cat i on, and t ransport at ion easier. Bridges can be
creat ed only bet ween t wo part s: not bet ween a part and t he st ock plat e, nor bet ween a part and it self (example: across a
light ening hole).
You may want t o connect t wo part s wit h a bridge f or any of t he f ollowing reasons:
• Reduce piercing – For each part , t he cut t ing machine must pierce a hole t hrough t he plat e at t he st art of cut t ing.
This t akes t ime, especially f or t hick plat es, and can wear out t he cut t ing t ool. By connect ing part s wit h a bridge, you
can reduce t he number of holes t he cut t ing machines must pierce t hrough t he plat e.
• Lost part s – Small part s can f all t hrough t he grid t hat t he plat e rest s on during cut t ing and are easily lost .
• Minimize warping – Small, slender part s can warp during cut t ing. Bridges help t hem maint ain t heir shape.
• Keep part s t oget her – You can use bridges t o keep all part s t oget her t o make t ransport at ion easier.
When you insert bridges int o a nest , ShipConst ruct or keeps t rack of t he bridges separat ely f rom t he nest and part s. That
is, ShipConst ruct or does not modif y t he nest or t he part s. This allows you t o updat e part s in a nest (f or example, if a
piping penet rat ion has been added t o a part ) even af t er you have insert ed bridges, wit hout having t o re-insert t he bridges.
Pl at e Nest i ng
263
However, if you updat e t he out side of a part , ShipConst ruct or may not be able t o maint ain t he exist ing bridge. In t his
case, you have t o re-i nsert any bridge t hat is not maint ained.
When you export a nest t o NC-Pyros, ShipConst ruct or int egrat es t he part out lines and bridges int o a single out line.
Part s wi t h bri dges as t hey appear wi t hi n t he nest i n Shi pConst ruct or
A bri dge as i t appears when t he nest i s export ed t o NC-Pyros
Usually you connect t wo part s wit h only one bridge. However, t here may be cases where you need t o insert t wo or more
bridges bet ween t wo part s. This result s in t oolpat hs on t he out side of a part t hat ShipConst ruct or t reat s as if t hey were
holes. In t he f ollowing example, t hree part s are connect ed by t hree bridges. ShipConst ruct or colors t he result ing hole
green.
Pl at e Nest i ng
264
Assi gn t o NC-Machi ne
You must f irst assign an NC machine t o a nest bef ore insert ing bridges. The widt h of each bridge is def ined when
assigning t he NC machine t o plat e st ock.
To assi gn a nest t o an NC-Machine
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Assign t o NC-Machine (page 483)
2. Click t he nest you want t o assign.
The NC-Machine Select ion window appears.
3. Select t he NC-Machi ne.
4. Cl i ck OK.
Insert a Bri dge
To insert a bridge
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > New (page 496)
ShipConst ruct or set s t he OSNAP t o NEAREST.
2. Select a posit ion on a part f or t he st art of t he bridge.
ShipConst ruct or set s t he OSNAP t o PERPENDICULAR.
3. Select a posit ion on t he ot her part f or t he end of t he bridge.
Pl at e Nest i ng
265
ShipConst ruct or insert s t he bridge.
Under cert ain condit ions, t he f ollowing error message may appear.
Sel ect ZoomIn and t ry again.
If a message appears t elling you t hat t he bridge cannot be accept ed, t he proposed bridge violat es a set condit ion (f or
example, one end of t he bridge may be t oo close t o a sharp corner of one of t he part s).
Del et e Bri dges
To delet e bridges
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > Delet e (page 496)
2. Select t he bridges t hat you want t o delet e, or t ype Al l t o delet e all bridges in t he nest drawing.
3. Press Ent er.
Set Up Remnant s
Remnant s are unused port ions of a nest plat e. In most cases you can use remnant s lat er in your project f or a new nest .
Creat e a Remnant
To creat e a remnant
1. Draw a closed polyline represent ing t he remnant out line and close t he last leg of t he polyline.
Pl at e Nest i ng
266
2. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > New (page 483)
3. Click on t he remnant out line (polyline).
Select Polyline:
Next , you need t o t ell ShipConst ruct or which port ion of t he remnant will be used t o cut of f t he remnant f rom t he nest
pl at e. You do t his by def ining a cut line.
4. The New Remnant window appears.
Ent er a Remnant name.
When t he plat e is a like and mirror cut , you must ent er t wo names: one f or t he remnant and one f or t he mirrored
remnant . You can lat er use t he t wo remnant s individually f or like nest s only.
5. Cl i ck OK.
The Remnant Annot at ion window appears.
6. Select t he keywords t o use f or t he remnant marking and set t he Text Size (in model space unit s).
7. Cl i ck OK.
The remnant becomes hat ched.
Pl at e Nest i ng
267
You can now use t he remnant f or a new nest .
Edi t a Remnant
Af t er a remnant is def ined, it s shape and label can be modif ied, even if t he remnant is being used by a nest , but as long
as t hat nest has not been issued or cut .
To edit a remnant ’s shape
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Edit Remnant (page 484)
2. Sel ect t he remnant t o modif y.
3. Click on t he new remnant out line (polyline).
Select Polyline:
The nest using t his remnant will be aut omat ically updat ed wit h it s new shape.
To edit a remnant ’s label
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Edit Remnant Label (page 484)
2. Select t he remnant t o modif y.
3. The Remnant Annot at ion window appears.
4. Modif y t he keywords used by t he remnant ’s label.
Pl at e Nest i ng
268
5. Cl i ck OK.
Del et e a Remnant
Not e: You can also use t he Aut oCAD erase command t o delet e a remnant .
To delet e a remnant
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Delet e (page 483)
2. Select t he remnant t o delet e.
Not e: You cannot delet e a remnant t hat is already used as a nest .
Check and Fi x Nest s
Bef ore you issue any nest s f or processing, you must check t hem. It is vit al t o check your nest s t o det ect and repair any
possible probl ems.
Check Nest Drawi ngs f or Errors and Un-nest ed Part s
The checks perf ormed are run on each nest in t he drawing. A complet e list is as f ollows: all part s are correct ly assigned t o
t he nest , all remnant s creat ed f rom t he nest use t he correct geomet ry, all bridges in t he nest are properly connect ed t o
part s, all assigned part s are up-t o-dat e, and t he part geomet ry is valid. When t he checks are expanded t o t he ent ire
drawing, addit ional checks are run on all unassigned part s t o conf irm t hey are in t he correct drawing.
To check nest drawings f or errors
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Check Nest s and BOM (page 493)
ShipConst ruct or checks all nest s, report s any errors, updat es all BOMs, and list s all un-nest ed part s.
To check nest drawings f or un-nest ed part s
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > List Un-nest ed Part s (page 488)
Shi pConstruct or list s all un-nest ed part s.
Pl at e Nest i ng
269
Updat e Nest Keywords and BOMs
To updat e nest keywords and BOMs
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Updat e Nest s and BOM (page 493)
Check Nest s f or Col l i si ons
If you manually nest or re-insert part s int o a nest , you should check t he nest f or collisions. ShipConst ruct or can t ell you if
any part s, remnant s, or nest s are t oo close t oget her or overlapping.
To check nest s f or collisions
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest Collision Check (page 493)
It may t ake about one minut e t o check t he nest s.
The Part Collisions window appears.
Pl at e Nest i ng
270
Each pair of problem part s is list ed wit h t he t ype of problem under St at us:
• Hard – The boundaries of t he t wo part s int ersect .
• Sof t – The t wo part s do not int ersect , but t hey are closer t oget her t han t he Plat e Gap set f or t his plat e st ock in
Manager. See Plat e St ock Propert ies (page 54)
• Insi de – One of t hese part s is complet ely inside t he ot her part .
• Fi xed – The det ect ed problem has been f ixed.
• Ignored – You specif y t hat you want t o ignore t his problem.
When you select a collision in t he list , ShipConst ruct or will highlight t he t wo part s in t he drawing and draw circles
around t he int ersect ion point s of t he collision.
2. Ri ght -click an it em in t he list t o do t he f ollowi ng:
• Zoom t o Part – Zooms t o t he part .
• Zoom t o Collision – Zooms t o t he collision of t he t wo part s.
• Check Collision – Checks t he current ly select ed collision t o see if t he problems have been f ixed. (If you have
moved t hese part s around, ShipConst ruct or will det ect new problems wit h ot her part s and add t hem t o t he
bot t om of t he list .)
• Ignore – Tells ShipConst ruct or t o ignore t his problem.
3. Correct t he col l i si ons and re-run t he nest check.
Re-i nsert Part s Int o a Nest
Af t er you check your nest drawings (see Check Nest Drawings f or Errors and Un-nest ed Part s (page 268)), ShipConst ruct or
isolat es all part s t hat require re-nest ing.
Af t er re-insert ing part s, make sure you check t he nest s f or collisions (see Check Nest s f or Collisions (page 269)).
To re-insert part s int o a nest
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Re-i nsert (page 484)
2. Select t he part s t o re-insert . The part s are updat ed t o t heir current version t hat is in t he dat abase. If any part s being
re-insert ed have been changed since t he nest drawing was last opened, a log f ile will be displayed list ing which part s
are out -of -dat e. The nest drawing will need t o be saved and re-opened t o get t he lat est part inf ormat ion.
Generat e NC Code f or Nest s
Export Nest s t o NC-Pyros
You can export nest s t o a DXF f ile t hat you can t hen read int o NC-Pyros or ot her NC code generat ion programs f or creat ing
cut t ing pat hs. A check is run on t he nest s being export ed t o conf irm t heir part s are up-t o-dat e.
If any of t he plat e part s export ed have bevels, t hen t here will be “ 0” bevel t ext object s on segment s adjacent t o t he bevels
added t o t he DXF f ile. NC-Pyros uses t hese “ 0” t ext s f or calculat ing bevel locat ions.
Pl at e Nest i ng
271
To export nest s t o NC-Pyros
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > NC-Pyros > Export To (page 494) t o open t he Export To NC-Pyros window.
2. Select t he nest s t o export .
3. Cl i ck Opt ions and set t he opt ions.
4. Cl i ck OK.
5. Cl i ck OK.
A log f ile displays t he result s of t he export .
Pl at e Nest i ng
272
Generat e NC Code f or Nest s
You can use NC-Pyros t o generat e NC code f or your nest s. Af t er generat ing cut t ing pat hs, you should export t he cut t ing
pat hs as a DXO f ile so you can import t hem int o ShipConst ruct or (see Import Cut t ing Pat hs Int o Nest s (page 272)). See
t he NC-Pyros manual f or det ails.
Export Part s t o Indi vi dual Drawi ngs
Some user may use nest ing sof t ware ot her t han NC-Pyros. The Export Nest Part s commands allow t he user t o creat e a
new drawing f ile, in eit her DWG or DXF f ormat , f or each of t he part s in t he current nest drawing, using t he part ’s name as
t he f ilename. Duplicat e part names will be appended wit h a “ _1” , “ _2” , et c. Like/ Mirror part s use t he Like part ’s name.
The export will also use t he Nest Export opt ions as set in t he Opt ions window in St ep 3 f rom Export Nest s t o NC-Pyros
(page 270)
To export part s t o individual drawings
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DWG (page 488) or SC Plat e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o
DXF (page 488). Select t he part s t o select (or all).
2. Select t he f older locat ion t o creat e t he part drawings in.
3. A log f ile displays t he result s of t he export .
Import Cut t i ng Pat hs Int o Nest s
Af t er generat ing cut t ing pat hs f or your nest s in NC-Pyros, you should import t he cut t ing pat hs back int o ShipConst ruct or
so you can overlay t he nest ed part s wit h t he act ual cut t ing pat h (see Hide or Show Nest ed Part s, Revised Part s, or NC
Cut t i ng Pat hs (page 260)). When you print t he nest s, you can also print t he cut t ing pat hs so t hat you know t he pat h t he
machine will t ake.
When you import cut t ing pat hs int o nest s, a t ime est imat e is also import ed. Af t er import ing cut t ing pat hs int o nest s, and
bef ore print ing nest s, you should updat e your nest s and BOMs so t hat t his t ime est imat e is included in t he nest s. See
Updat e Nest Keywords and BOMs (page 269).
To import cut t ing pat hs i nt o nest s
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > NC-Pyros > Import From (page 496) t o open t he Choose NC-Pyros DXO File t o Insert window.
Pl at e Nest i ng
273
Not e: When export ing t he DXO f ile f rom NC-Pyros, you must save t he f ile t o t he appropriat e f older of t he
ShipConst ruct or project . Ot herwise, an error message appears when you t ry t o import cut t ing pat hs int o
Shi pConst ruct or.
2. Select t he DXO f ile (export ed f rom NC-Pyros) f or t he nest .
3. Cl i ck OK.
It may t ake some t ime t o import t he cut t ing pat hs.
ShipConst ruct or overlays t he cut t ing pat hs over t he nest s.
Updat e Nest BOMs
Af t er i mport ing cut t ing pat hs int o nest s and bef ore print ing nest s, you should updat e your nest s and BOMs so t hat NC-
Pyros dat a is included in t he header. See Updat e Nest Keywords and BOMs (page 269).
Pl ot Nest s
You usually plot each nest on a small sheet of paper (f or example, 11” x 17” or A3 paper) and t hen combine t he print ed
sheet s wit h ot her drawings in a work package.
Bef ore plot t ing mult iple nest s, set your def ault print er t o t he print er you want t o plot your nest s t o and set t he def ault
paper size and orient at ion f or t his print er. You should also plot a single nest using Aut oCAD’s plot command (File > Plot )
t o check all set t ings.
When plot t ing mult iple nest s, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically set s t he plot t ed area t o t he out side border of t he nest and
plot s each nest on a separat e plot .
To pl ot nest s
1. Choose SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Plot (page 483) t o open t he Plot Nest s wi ndow.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
274
2. Select t he nest s t o plot by doing eit her of t he f ollowing:
• Click t he nest s in t he list .
• Cl i ck Pick Nest s, click t he nest s in t he drawing, and press Ent er.
3. Cl i ck OK.
Generat e Nest Report s
See t he Project Management manual f or inf ormat ion on generat ing report s.
Prepare Work Package
A work package is a way of assembling all of t he inf ormat ion t hat product ion needs int o a single package. For example,
you can assemble a package cont aining nest report s, plot s, and NC t apes.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
A prof ile plot (also known as a st if f ener plot ) is a det ailed drawing of a st if f ener and cont ains t he inf ormat ion t hat
product ion needs t o f abricat e t hat st i f f ener. A prof ile plot consist s of t hree views of t he st if f ener: f lange, web, and prof ile.
ShipConst ruct or groups st if f eners wit h t he same st ock and endcut s int o one plot .
A prof ile plot can cont ain inverse bending inf ormat ion f or curved st if f eners.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
275
When you creat e a prof ile plot drawing, ShipConst ruct or creat es a copy of t he drawing t emplat e. When you insert prof ile
plot s int o a prof ile plot drawing, ShipConst ruct or uses t he plot t emplat e f or t he layout .
Prof i l e Pl ot s
276
Set Up Prof ile Plot Templ at es
Prof ile plot t emplat es cont rol t he layout of prof ile plot s. Prof ile plot s use t hree t ypes of prof ile plot t emplat es.
Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng Templ at e
The prof ile plot drawing t emplat e should cont ain st andards f or t ext , dimensions, layers and line t ypes. There should be no
graphical ent it ies in t his t emplat e.
Prof i l e Sheet Templ at e
The prof ile sheet t emplat e represent s a piece of paper. It cont ains t he t it le block, border, and an area where individual
plot s are placed inside.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
277
An exampl e pl ot sheet t empl at e
Creat e a Prof i l e Sheet Templat e
To creat e a prof ile sheet t emplat e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Templat es page.
3. Select t he Prof ilePlot Sheet f older.
4. Cl i ck New Prof ilePlot Sheet .
Def ine t he Drawing Border of a Prof i l e Plot Sheet Templat e
A plot t emplat e must cont ain a border and an area. The border def ines t he out er ext ent s of t he sheet , and is used t o
calculat e t he t iling of mult iple sheet s in a prof ile plot drawing. The area def ines t he rect angular area in which prof ile plot s
will be placed. If large enough, mult iple prof ile plot s can be t iled wit hin t his area.
To draw a border f or t he prof ile sheet
1. In a prof ile sheet t emplat e drawing, choose SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Draw Border (page 514)
2. Select t wo point s t o def ine t he diagonal corners of t he rect angular border.
To draw an area f or t he prof ile sheet
1. In a prof ile sheet t emplat e drawing, choose SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Draw Area (page 514)
2. Select t wo point s t o def ine t he diagonal corners of t he rect angular area. The select ed point s should be inside t he
border.
Prof i l e Pl ot Templ at e
The prof ile plot t emplat e cont ains t he t emplat e layout of how individual st if f eners will be det ailed. This is where you add
keywords f or t he dif f erent views, t he cut out inf ormat ion t able and any ot her plot specif ic inf ormat ion. This is also t ypically
where a BOM would be placed.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
278
An exampl e pl ot t empl at e
Creat e a Prof i l e Pl ot Templat e
To creat e a prof ile plot t emplat e
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Templat es page.
3. Select t he Prof ilePlot f older.
4. Cl i ck New Prof ilePlot .
Def ine t he Drawing Border of a Plot Templ at e
A plot t emplat e must cont ain a border. The border def ines t he out er boundary of a plot and must f it wit hin t he area
def ined in any prof ile sheet t emplat es t his t emplat e will be used wit h.
To def ine t he drawing border of a plot t emplat e
1. In a prof ile plot t emplat e drawing, choose SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Draw Border (page 510)
2. Select t wo point s t o def ine t he diagonal corners of t he rect angular border.
Def i ne t he Web Vi ew Area of a Plot Templat e
A plot t emplat e must cont ain a web view area. The web view area def ines t he area where t he view of t he st if f ener web
will be placed. The horizont al width and vert ical height of t he web view area are used t o scale t he st if f ener in t his and
subsequent views wit hin t his prof ile plot .
To def ine t he web view area of a plot t emplat e
1. Draw a rect angle (wit hin t he plot t emplat e drawing border) def ining t he area f or prof ile plot s.
2. Choose SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Draw Web View Area (page 511)
3. Select t he rect angle t hat you drew in St ep 1.
Insert Keywords int o a Prof ile Plot Templat e
You can insert keywords int o plot sheet t emplat es and plot t emplat es.
To insert keywords int o a prof ile plot t emplat e
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 511) t o open t he Insert Keyword window.
Not e: The list of keywords is dif f erent f or plot sheet t emplat e and plot t emplat es.
2. Select t he keyword you want t o insert .
3. Set t he Text Size and Text Rot at ion.
4. Cl i ck OK.
5. Select t he insert ion point f or t he keyword.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
279
Insert a BOM Table int o a Prof ile Plot Templat e
You can now predef ine a BOM def init ion f or use wit hin a prof ile plot t emplat e. This enables you t o f ormat an empt y BOM
t able t o your specif icat ions (correct t ext st yle, size, and so on).
Not e: To insert t he BOM t able, t here must already be a prof ile plot BOM def init ion def ined. See BOM Def init ions
Manager (page 49).
To insert a BOM t able int o t he prof ile plot t emplat e
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Insert BOM Table (page 513) t o open t he BOM Def init ion Wizard window
2. Select a Prof ile Plot BOM.
3. Cl i ck Next .
4. Modif y and desired Table and label opt ions.
5. Cl i ck Finish.
6. Select t he locat ion t o place t he empt y BOM.
Updat i ng Shi pConst ruct or2005 Keywords
To help updat e ShipConst ruct or2005 t emplat es so t hey can be used in ShipConst ruct or t here is a command t o replace
any known ShipConst ruct or2005 keywords in a t emplat e wit h t he corresponding ShipConst ruct or keywords.
To replace legacy keywords in a prof ile plot t emplat e
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Replace Legacy Keywords (page 514)
Any legacy keywords in t he t emplat e drawing have been replaced wit h t he corresponding ShipConst ruct or keywords.
Creat e a Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng
When you creat e a prof ile plot drawing, it is based on t he prof ile plot drawing t emplat e (if t here is one). If t here is no
prof ile plot drawing t emplat e, t hen creat ing a prof ile plot drawing creat es a blank drawing.
To creat e a prof ile plot drawing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Navi gat or (page 348) t o open Navigat or.
2. Select t he Prof ile Plot page.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
280
3. Cl i ck New.
4. Ent er a File name.
5. Cl i ck OK.
Set Up Prof ile Pl ot s
To set up prof ile plot s
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot s > Opt ions (page 503) t o open t he Prof ile Pl ot Opt i ons window.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
281
2. Set t he desired propert i es. See Prof ile Plot Opt ions Window (page 504).
3. Cl i ck OK.
Insert Prof i l e Pl ot s Int o a Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng
To insert a prof ile plot int o a prof ile plot drawing
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot s > Insert Prof ile Plot s (page 500) t o open t he Select St if f eners window.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
282
2. If you change t he value in t he Product Hierarchy dropdownlist , t he assembly t ree updat es t o show t he assemblies f or
t hat product hierarchy.
3. Click t he Filt ers but t on t o open t he St if f ener Filt ering Window (page 502). Set any desired part f ilt ers and click OK
4. Click t he Opt ions but t on t o open t he Prof ile Plot Opt ions Window (page 504). Set t he desired plot opt ions and click
OK.
5. Click t o place a check box beside t he it ems you want t o creat e prof ile plot s f or.
6. Cl i ck OK t o creat e t he prof ile plot s.
When mult iple prof ile part s are insert ed int o a prof ile plot drawing during t he same insert ion operat ion t hey may be
grouped int o t he same plot based on t heir st ock, endcut s, bend inf ormat ion, t rims and cut out s. Ident ical part s are always
grouped in t he same plot . Part s will not be grouped t oget her in f ollowing cases:
1. Cut out s creat e geomet ry dif f erences on t he st if f eners (cut out s have dif f erent shapes, orient ed dif f erent ly).
2. Mat ching cut out s are dif f erent dist ances f rom t he st art of t he st if f ener.
3. Trims are at dif f erent angles.
4. There are int ersect ions bet ween t rims and cut out s.
Prof i l e Pl ot s
283
In current version, green is not considered in part s grouping. This means part s will be grouped if one has green and one
does not . It is random t o which one it will show in t he plot .
Updat i ng Prof i l e Pl ot s
When you open a prof ile plot drawing t hat cont ains prof ile part s t hat have been changed in any way t he Prof ile Plot
Updat e Wi ndow will appear inf orming t he user which prof ile plot s need t o be updat ed. If you choose t o updat e a prof ile
plot t he plot and t he plot ’s BOM will be updat ed aut omat ically and any major changes made t o t he plot be ent ered in a
log f ile. If you choose not t o updat e a prof ile part you will be prompt ed again t he next t ime you open t he drawing. See
Prof i l e Pl ot Updat e Wi ndow (page 503).
Prof i l e Pl ot s
284
Zoom Int o a Prof i l e Pl ot wi t hi n a Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng
To zoom in t o a prof ile plot wit hin a prof ile plot drawing
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot s > Zoom (page 507) t o open t he Prof ile Plot List window.
2. Double click on t he drawing, sheet , plot or t he part t o zoom t he view t o.
Print Prof i l e Pl ot s
You can print all or individually select ed plot s on a print er.
To print prof ile plot s
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot s > Print Plot s (page 508) to open t he Pri nt Pl ot s window.
2. Set t he desired propert ies. See Pri nt Pl ot s Wi ndow (page 509).
3. Select t he prof ile plot s you want t o print .
4. Cl i ck OK.
Check Prof il e Pl ot s
You should periodically check your prof ile plot s t o make sure t he project dat abase and t he prof ile plot drawings are
synchronized. For example, if someone manually delet es a prof ile plot drawing (wit hout using ShipConst ruct or), t hen t he
project dat abase and t he prof ile plot drawings no longer correlat e t o each ot her exact ly. When you check your prof ile
plot s, ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically creat es any missing prof ile plot s.
To check prof ile plot s
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot s > Check Prof ile Drawings (page 509) t o open t he Updat e Opt ions window.
2. Set t he desired opt ions. See Updat e Opt ions Window (page 510).
3. Cl i ck OK.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
285
Updat e Prof i l e Pl ot BOMs
When a prof ile plot cont ains a st if f ener t hat has been edit ed or changed in some way t he BOM of t he af f ect ed prof ile
plot s will need t o be updat ed so t hat t hey ref lect t he updat ed inf ormat ion f rom t he plot t ed part s.
To updat e all t he BOMs in a prof ile plot drawing
1. Choose SC Prof ile Plot s > Updat e All BOMs (page 510)
All BOMs wit hin t he current prof ile plot drawing will be updat ed wit h t he lat est inf ormat ion f rom t he plot t ed part s.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
Prof ile nest ing is t he process of ef f icient ly arranging prof ile part s ont o raw prof ile st ock.
There are t hree st at es t hat a nest can have:
• Creat ed – When you creat e a nest , you can add and remove part s t o and f rom t he nest . You can also make changes
t o part s wit hin t he nest .
• Issued – When a nest is f inalized and you do not int end t o make changes t o t he part s wit hin it , you issue t he nest .
You cannot modif y t he part s wit hin an issued nest . Issuing a nest means you make it available f or product ion t o cut .
• Cut – Af t er product ion has cut t he nest on prof ile st ock, you change t he nest ’s st at us t o cut . This indicat es t hat t he
part s have been cut and cannot be modif ied.
Set Up Prof ile St ocks
You must ent er t he lengt hs and quant it ies of each st ock t o be able t o nest st if f eners and f aceplat es on st ock lengt hs.
You will also need t o set up a naming convent ion f or t he prof ile nest s. See Naming Convent ions (page 37).
Sel ect an Assembl y and St ock f or Prof i l e Nest ing
To select an assembly and st ock f or prof ile nest ing
1. Choose ShipConst ruct or > Prof ile Nest ing (page 365) t o open t he Prof ile Nest – Sel ect Asssembl i es window.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
286
2. Cl i ck t he check box f or t he assemblies you want t o include in prof ile nest ing. If you change t he value in t he Product
Hierarchy dropdownlist , t he assembly t ree updat es t o show t he assemblies f or t hat product hierarchy.
Current Unit Only – This opt ion minimizes t he amount of inf ormat ion in t he t ree, speeding up t he window, and is
especially usef ul f or large project s.
3. Cl i ck OK.
The Prof ile Nest Manager window appears.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
287
4. In t he Show Part s/ Nest s of Type list , select t he st ock you want t o nest .
The Unnest ed Part s window list s all unnest ed part s.
The Nest s window list s all nest s f or t he select ed st ock. Init ially, t here will be no nest s list ed here.
Not e: In t his example, t he f lat bar st ock is select ed. Flat bar part s t hat have been nest ed on plat e st ock are not
list ed.
Creat e or Del et e Prof i l e Nest s or Remnant s
There are t wo ways you can creat e prof ile nest s or remnant s:
• Creat e empt y prof ile nest s or remnant s (see Creat e Empt y Prof ile Nest s or Remnant s (page 287)) and t hen lat er add
part s t o t hem (see Add and Remove Part s t o and f rom Prof ile Nest s (page 289)).
• Creat e prof ile nest s or remnant s f or select ed part s (see Aut omat ically Creat e Prof ile Nest s f or Select ed Part s (page
290)).
Creat e Empt y Prof il e Nest s or Remnant s
To creat e empt y prof ile nest s or remnant s
1. See Select an Assembly and St ock f or Prof ile Nest ing (page 285) t o reach t he Prof ile Nest Manager. In t his window,
click t he (plus) but t on t o open t he Prof i l e Nest window.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
288
Each st ock lengt h is list ed in t he t able (Lengt h) wit h t he available quant it y (Prof iles Lef t ) and t ot al quant it y (Tot al
Prof i l es).
Not e: If t here are any issued nest s, t hey are list ed under Creat e remnant s f rom exist ing nest s. To creat e a
remnant , select t he check box beside t he issued nest .
2. For each st ock lengt h, ent er t he number of it ems t o use (Number t o Use) f or t he new nest .
Lengt h Sel ect ed is t he t ot al lengt h of nest s t o creat e.
3. Cl i ck Creat e Nest s.
The new nest s appear under Nest s in t he Prof ile Nest Manager.
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically generat es prof ile nest names based on t he st ock name. For example, if t he st ock
name is FB100x12, t he prof ile nest names will be FB100x12-0001, FB100x12-0002, and so on.
Remnant nest names are based on t he name of t he nest t hat t he remnant originat ed f rom. This let s you t rack t he
st ock t hat a remnant is creat ed f rom. For example, remnant s creat ed f rom t he nest name FB100x12-0001 will be
named FB100x12-0001-R1, FB100x12-0001-R2, and so on.
Del et e a Prof i l e Nest or Remnant
You can delet e a prof ile nest or remnant t hat you no longer need as long as t he f ollowing condit ions are met :
• The nest must be un-cut .
• The nest must be un-issued.
• The nest must have no remnant s.
• The nest must be f ree of nest part s.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
289
To delet e a prof ile nest
1. See Select an Assembly and St ock f or Prof i l e Nest i ng (page 285) t o reach t he Prof ile Nest Manager. In t his window,
under Nest s, select t he nest s you want t o delet e.
2. To delet e t he nest s, do eit her of t he f ollowing:
• Cl i ck (mi nus).
• Ri ght -click one of t he select ed nest s and choose Del et e Nest .
If t he nest has remnant s, t he Prof ile Nest – Unissuing Remnant s window appears, list ing t he nest , remnant s, and
part s, and let t ing you delet e t he nest and it s remnant s at once.
Add and Remove Part s t o and f rom Prof i l e Nest s
You can eit her manually add part s t o exist ing prof ile nest s, or you can aut omat ically creat e prof ile nest s f or select ed
part s.
Manual l y Add Part s t o Prof i l e Nest s
You can add individual part s t o individual prof ile nest s, or you can add mult iple part s t o mult iple nest s. If you are adding
mult iple part s t o mult iple nest s, ShipConst ruct or det ermines t he opt imal nest ing conf igurat ion f or t he part s.
ShipConst ruct or can nest t housands of part s in a f ew seconds. Nest ing perf ormance improves when large numbers of
part s are nest ed simult aneously.
To add part s t o prof ile nest s
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Unnest ed Part s, click t he check box f or each part t o add t o nest s.
Not e: You can f ilt er t he list of Unnest ed Part s by endcut t ype (Endcut Filt er), bend t ype (Bend Filt er), or t rimmed
and non-t rimmed part s (Trim Filt er).
Checking t he check box f or an assembly will select all of t he part s wit hin t he assembly.
The bot t om of t he Unnest ed Part s list displays t hree t hings:
• The select ed part s and t heir combined lengt h
• The t ot al number of part s of t he select ed st ock and t heir combined lengt h
• The number of un-nest ed part s of t he select ed st ock and t heir combined lengt h
2. In t he Nest s list , click t he check box f or t he nest s t o add part s t o.
Not e: You can f ilt er t he list of Nest s by UnIssued, Issued, or Cut .
3. Cl i ck (Add) t o add t he select ed part s t o t he select ed nest s.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
290
Not e: If t here is not enough lengt h wit hin t he select ed nest s f or t he select ed part s, ShipConst ruct or nest s as
many part s as possible and t hen opens t he Prof ile Nest – More St ock Needed window f or t he remaining part s.
Aut omat i cal l y Creat e Prof i l e Nest s f or Sel ect ed Part s
To aut omat ically creat e prof ile nest s f or select ed part s
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager under Unnest ed Part s, click t he check box f or each part you want t o nest .
2. Make sure t here are no nest s select ed under Nest s.
3. Cl i ck (Add) t o open t he Prof i l e Nest window.
Lengt h Needed is t he lengt h of t he select ed part s, including t he linear part gap.
Each stock lengt h and remnant is list ed in t he t able (Lengt h) wit h t he available quant it y (Prof i l es Lef t ) and t ot al
quant it y (Tot al Prof iles).
Not e: If t here are any issued nest s, t hey are list ed under Creat e remnant s f rom exist ing nest s. To creat e a
remnant , select t he check box beside t he issued nest .
4. For each st ock lengt h or remnant , ent er t he number of it ems t o use (Number t o Use) f or t he new nest .
Lengt h Sel ect ed is t he t ot al lengt h of nest s you want t o creat e.
Not e: Even if Lengt h Select ed is larger t han Lengt h Needed, t he select ed part s st ill may not f it ont o t he select ed
st ock.
5. Cl i ck Creat e Nest s t o creat e t he nest s and add t he select ed part s t o t hem.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
291
Not e: If more nest s are select ed t han are needed t o nest t he select ed part s, ShipConst ruct or will not creat e t he
empt y nest s. If you have not allocat ed enough st ock f or t he select ed part s, t he Prof i l e Nest window re-appears,
let t ing you increase t he amount of st ock t o use.
The new nest s appear under Nest s in t he Prof ile Nest Manager.
Remove Part s From Prof i l e Nest s
You can remove part s f rom prof ile nest s t hat have not been issued or cut . When you remove part s f rom prof ile nest s, t he
part s are ret urned t o t he list of part s available f or nest ing and will appear in t he un-nest ed part s list .
To remove part s f rom prof ile nest s
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, click t he check box f or each part you want t o remove.
Checking t he check box f or a nest will select all part s wit hin t he nest .
Not e: You can f ilt er t he list of Nest s by UnIssued, Issued, or Cut .
2. Cl i ck (Remove) t o remove t he select ed part s f rom nest s.
ShipConst ruct or updat es t he lengt hs f or t he nest s and creat es a record f or un-nest ing each part .
Changi ng Part s and St ocks and Checki ng Prof i l e Nest s
When anyone edit s a part , ShipConst ruct or perf orms a check t o see if t he part has been nest ed. If so, changes t o t he part
may af f ect t he nest .
For example, af t er you nest a part , it is possible t hat someone else may change t he part bef ore you issue t he nest .
Pot ent ially problemat ic changes include changing part lengt h, endcut s, or st ock t ype. If any part propert ies are changed
af t er t he part is nest ed, t he part ’s nest is list ed wit h a warning icon. For uncut nest s, t he warning icon is an exclamat ion
mark wit hin a yellow t riangle.
For cut nest s, t he warning icon is a pair of scissors wit hin a yellow square.
If an error message appears, run a nest check on t he nest .
Similarly, if someone changes t he prof ile st ock set t ings f or t he Smallest Remnant or t he Kerf , you must run a nest check
f or t he nest s of t his st ock. For example, if t he nest ing gap is increased, t he amount of space required on the nest
increases, and part s may no longer f it ont o t he nest .
If someone t ries t o delet e a nest ed part , ShipConst ruct or checks if t he nest has been issued or cut . If t he nest has been
issued or cut , t he part cannot be delet ed. To delet e t he part , f irst un-cut and un-issue t he nest , t hen un-nest t he part , and
f inally delet e t he part in t he drawing.
To check nest s
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, do eit her of t he f ollowing:
• To check one nest , right -click on t he nest , and choose Check Nest .
• To check all nest s list ed, click (Check All Visible Nest s).
ShipConst ruct or checks if any part s have been changed, ensures t hat t he part s st ill f it on t he nest s and t heir
remnant s, and checks if t he st ock of any of t he part s has been changed. If any part propert ies have changed,
ShipConst ruct or displays a t ext f ile cont aining a list of t he changes.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
292
If t he part s have been f ixed, t he nest icon will change and appear as f ixed.
Issue and Un-i ssue Prof i l e Nest s
Once you are sat isf ied wit h t he arrangement of part s in a prof ile nest , you can issue t he nest . Issuing a nest means you
make it available f or product ion t o cut . You cannot change any part s in an issued nest (unless you un-issue t he nest ).
You can issue any number of nest s simult aneously. To issue a nest , t he nest must cont ain at least one part .
You can al so un-i ssue a nest .
Issue Prof i l e Nest s
To issue prof ile nest s
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, click t he check box f or each nest you want t o issue.
Not e: You can f ilt er t he list of Nest s by UnIssued, Issued, or Cut .
2. Cl i ck (Issue Select ed Nest s).
The Prof ile Heat – Set Heat Number window appears, list ing t he nest s t hat you chose t o issue.
3. You can set a Heat Number f or each nest f or t racking and qualit y assurance purposes. To give all nest s being issued
t he same heat number, click Set Heat Number f or All Nest s Shown.
4. To aut omat ically creat e a remnant f rom t he remaining mat erial (if it is longer t han t he Smal l est Remnant f or t hat
st ock), select Aut o Remnant Creat ion if remaining lengt h > #. If you do not select t his opt ion, t he remaining mat erial
becomes scrap t hat you can manually creat e a remnant f rom lat er.
5. Cl i ck OK t o issue t he nest s.
Issued nest s appear wit h a gray check box in t he Prof ile Nest Manager.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
293
You cannot add or remove part s t o or f rom issued nest s.
Once you have issued a nest , you can creat e remnant s f rom it (see Creat e or Delet e Prof ile Nest s or Remnant s (page
287)).
To issue prof ile nest s and creat e remnant s
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, select t he nest you want t o issue.
2. Ri ght -click one of t he select ed nest s and choose Creat e Remnant .
To change t he heat number of a prof ile nest
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, select t he nest s you want t o change. To select mult iple nest s, hold t he
Shi f t or Ct rl key while clicking.
2. Ri ght -click one of t he select ed nest s and choose Change Heat Number.
Un-i ssue Prof i l e Nest s
You may need t o un-issue a prof ile nest if you want t o make changes t o t he part s wit hin it . (You cannot modif y part s
wit hin an issued nest .)
To un-issue prof ile nest s
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, click t he check box f or each nest you want t o un-issue.
Not e: You can f ilt er t he list of Nest s by UnIssued, Issued, or Cut .
2. Cl i ck (Un-issue Select ed Nest s).
Generat e Prof i l e Nest Report s
You can creat e prof ile nest report s t o provide f or product ion. There are t hree kinds of prof ile nest report s:
Summary report – Includes all nest inf ormat ion but does not include a list ing of part s wit hin t he nest s.
Det ailed report – Includes all nest inf ormat ion and all part inf ormat ion.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
294
Prof i l e st ock usage report – Shows how many lengt hs of a cert ain st ock have been assigned t o t he project (Tot al St ock)
and how many nest s have been creat ed f or a part icular lengt h of st ock (Tot al Used).
Generat e a Summary Report or Det ai l ed Report
To generat e a summary report or det ailed report
In Report , choose eit her Prof ile Nest – Prof ile Nest Det ail or Prof ile Nest – Prof ile Nest Summary f rom t he report t ype
droplist , t hen click Generat e Report t o generat e a report f or t he select ed Product Hierarchy. If t his report t ype is not
available, you can import it f rom t he Imperial/ Met ric Project t emplat es provided wit h ShipConst ruct or.
If you would like t o modif y t he layout or columns shown in t he Prof ile Nest report s, t his can be done using t he Report
Def init ion Edit or. Please see t he Report s document at ion f or more det ails on edit ing report def init ions.
Generat e a St ock Usage Report
To generat e a st ock usage report
This report is not yet available in ShipConstructor, however you may view the usage for a particular type of stock in
manager.
Prof i l e Nest i ng
295
To view st ock usage f or a part icular st ock
1. In Manager, choose St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog t o open t he St ock Cat alog Edit or.
2. Select t he st ock t o include in t he report .
3. Cl i ck Edi t Si zes, and you will see t he current project invent ory and number in use.
Set Prof i l e Nest s t o Cut or Un-cut
Once product ion has physically cut a nest , you should set t he nest t o cut in ShipConst ruct or.
Set Prof i l e Nest s t o Cut
To set prof ile nest s t o cut
Not e: You cannot set a remnant t o cut unt il t he nest it came f rom has been set t o cut .
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, click t he check box f or each nest you want t o set t o cut .
Not e: You can f ilt er t he list of Nest s by UnIssued, Issued, or Cut .
2. Cl i ck (Cut Select ed Nest s).
The Prof ile Heat – Set Heat Number window appears, list ing t he nest s you chose t o issue.
Part Propert y Label s
296
See Issue Prof ile Nest s (page 292) f or det ails on t he Prof ile Nest – Set Heat Number window. When you are f inished
wit h t he list of nest s, click OK.
The nest s are now list ed wit h a cut icon.
Set Prof i l e Nest s t o Un-cut
To set prof ile nest s t o un-cut
1. In t he Prof ile Nest Manager, under Nest s, click t he check box f or each nest you want t o set t o un-cut .
Not e: You can f ilt er t he list of Nest s by UnIssued, Issued, or Cut .
2. Cl i ck (Un-cut Sel ect ed Nest s).
Part Propert y Label s
ShipConst ruct or support s ext ract ion of part propert ies f or display in product ion drawings. Inf ormat ion normally displayed
in t he Aut oCAD propert ies window can be displayed in label f orm. ShipConst ruct or provides t he means t o select Aut oCAD
f ields f or insert ion int o a user edit able MText block, t hat is t hen opt ionally at t ached t o an Aut oCAD label.
The MText block uses Aut oCAD f ields t o ext ract inf ormat ion f rom ShipConst ruct or object s. For a t horough underst anding
of t he Aut oCAD f ields and how t o opt ionally specif y f ormat t ing, see t he Aut oCAD help document s.
Part Propert y Label s
297
Access t he Part Propert y Label f unct ion t hrough SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Label.
Propert i es
Lists the properties for the selected object. Values are shown for reference only and will be evaluated when the
fields are updated.
Di mensi on St yl e
Selects the dimension style for the AutoCAD leader object.
Field Text
Double click the field or click the right arrow button to insert the field into Field text box. Insertion occurs at the
current cursor position. You can add or edit the text inside the Field text box as needed.
The behavior of insertion is dependent on the cursor position with the field text. If the position is within a field, then
the field will be replaced by the new one. If the cursor is not within a field then the field is inserted at the cursor
position.
Select Object
Allows selection of other objects for field selection. This does not replace the object references currently inserted
within the fields; rather it updates the field list. This allows for the creation of mtext blocks that reference multiple
objects.
Pl aci ng Fi el d Label s
To Place a Part Propert y Label
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Propert y Label
2. Select t he propert y that you wish t o insert f rom t he propert y list . Double click or use t he right arrow but t on t o
insert t he propert y int o t he f ield t ext box. The f ield is shown in raw f ield f orm, allowing t he experienced user t o
edit t he det ails direct ly.
3. Add any addit ional t ext as required t o t he label t ext and t hen click t he OK but t on once complet e
4. Select t he leader origin.
5. Select t he leader t ail posit ion. The MText will be at t ached once command is complet ed
Not e: St ep 4 can be skipped if t he ShipConst ruct or variable SCSetSingleClickFieldLabel is set t o <1> .
When t he opt ion is t oggled on, t hen t he f irst leader point is t he it em select ion point . When labeling in Model
Space t he behavior may not be as desired t he UCS project ed select ion point when labels are placed in Model
Space.
Copyi ng Fi el d Label s
Field labels can be copied using st andard Aut oCAD t echniques or by using t he ShipConst ruct or’s f ield copy commands.
Copying by Aut oCAD t echinques does not replace t he object ref erences wit hin t he f ields. Anot her command must be run
af t erward if object ref erences are t o be changed. The ShipConst ruct or copy met hods replace t he object ref erences during
t he copying procedure.
Leader Di st ri but i on Li nes
298
The SCFieldLabelCopy command copies t he mt ext block and t hen prompt s t he user t o select a new object ref erence
place and place a new leader sect ion.
To Copy a Field Label / MText
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Copy Propert y Label
2. Select the leader or mtext. ShipConstructor automatically determines the association between the label and
mtext (if any)
3. Select the new part to replace the object reference within the field.
4. If the mtext is associated with a leader select the new leader origin.
5. Select the mtext or leader tail position.
The SCFieldLabelCopyQuick command copies t he mt ext block and t hen prompt s t he user t o select a new object ref erence
and posit ion. The exist ing leader geomet ry is ret ained.
To Quick Copy a Field Label / MText
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Quick Copy Propert y Label
2. Select the leader or mtext. ShipConstructor automatically determines the association between the label and
mtext (if any).
3. Select the new part to replace the object reference within the field.
4. Select the leader or mtext position.
If Aut oCAD met hods are used t o copy t he label/ mt ext t o a new posit ion and you wish t o replace t he object ref erence
wit hin t he f ield, use t he SCReplaceObRef InField command t o select a new object t o use as ref erence. Not e t hat all object
ref erences wit hin t he f ield will be replaced using t his command and as a result , ill f ormed f ields may resul t .
To Replace Object Ref erences wit hin MText
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Replace Object Ref erence
2. Select the mtext containing the fields.
3. Select the new object to ‘point’ the fields to.
The Aut oCAD ef f ect of improperly evaluat ed f ields is t o display ‘####’ in place of t he f ield. You can display t he f ield in it s
raw f orm and edit t he f ield by using t he SCEdit Field command.
To Edit Fields in MText
1. Choose SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Edi t Fi el ds
2. Select the mtext containing the fields.
3. Edit the text within the Field text box.
Leader Di st ri but i on Li nes
Leader distribution lines allow ShipConstructor labels to be automatically aligned and spaced. Leaders when
attached to a distribution line, adjust as necessary when the line is moved, resized, or rotated. Leader distribution
lines behave exactly like AutoCAD lines and therefore can be modified in the same manner as AutoCAD lines.
Leader Di st ri but i on Li nes
299
Di st ri but i on Li nes – The l eader di st ri but i on l i nes are vi si bl e as l i ght gray l i nes i n t he above i mage. Di st ri but i on l i nes do not pl ot .
Leaders can be manipulated in several ways with respect to distribution lines:
1. Dragged off a leader distribution line. The leader will be detached from the distribution line such that any
further manipulation of the line will not affect the leader.
2. Repositioned along the distribution line. The leader’s new position along the line is maintained even if the
line subsequently manipulated.
3. Dragged onto another distribution line. The leader is detached from the first line and attached to the new
line.
4. Bulk transfer to another distribution line. Using the SCTRANSFERLEADERS command, the selected
labels are transferred to another distribution line.
5. Distribution line manipulation. Transform the line using any if the standard AutoCAD method. The labels
will remain attached,
Not e: In order f or individual leader manipulat ion t o be ef f ect ive when posit ioning on dist ribut ion lines, enable t he
Nearest Osnap.
Line dependent variables:
1. Bubble spacing - Bubble spacing can be set on a per-line basis. This forms the minimum spacing between
the labels. Use the
2. Leader attachment position – To ensure consistent label positioning, distribution lines enforce leader
consistent insertion modes among all the leaders on the line.
3. Line stretch mode – Can be:
a. STRETCH – Label positioning is based on the parameterized position along the line.
Leader Di st ri but i on Li nes
300
Before
After
b. STATIONARY – label position remains stationary with respect to the opposite end of the
translated grip.
Leader Di st ri but i on Li nes
301
Before
After
Export To Dwg
302
Set Leader Insert i on Mode
Thi s command is used t o modif y t he insert ion mode of all t he labels connect ed t o select ed dist ribut ion lines.
To set t he leader insert ion mode
1. Choose SC Assembly > Set Leader Insert ion Mode.
Sel ect di st ri but i on l i nes:
2. Select t he dist ribut ion lines.
Enter an insertion mode [Left/Right/Center/closest Horizontal] <H>:
3. Ent er t he new insert ion mode.
Export To Dwg
Export t o Dwg generat es a drawing t hat can be opened by Aut oCAD wit hout ShipConst ruct or being present on t he
comput er.
The export process allows t he user t o conf igure t he viewport display opt ions t hat are used when generat ing t he out put
ent i t i es. The def ault set t ings are read f rom t he ShipConst ruct or source drawing's model space conf igurat ion. These
opt i ons can be changed t hrough t he UI or t he command line when perf orming an export .
There are a number of st eps t o export a ShipConst ruct or drawing t o a regular .dwg t hat can be read by Aut oCAD. First the
ori gi nal drawing is copied t o a t emporary locat ion t o avoid making changes t o t he source document . Then all of t he xref s
will be removed and a local copy of t he dat a will be creat ed in a block wit h t he same name as t he xref block. Once t hat is
done all ShipConst ruct or ent it ies will be replaced wit h nat ive Aut oCAD ent it ies, which will be generat ed according t o t he
display opt ions provided. When all ShipConst ruct or ent it ies have been successf ully removed t he drawing will be copied t o
t he f inal locat ion. The def ault name f or t he new f ile is t he ori gi nal f ile's name wit h ' _Export ' and, if necessary, a unique
number appended t o t he end.
Layer Templ at es
Layer t emplat es are used t o give f ine grained cont rol of where out put ent it ies are placed in t he new drawing. The
t emplat es consist of st at ic t ext t hat will be included as is in t he layer name as well as any inst ance of t he t ext ' <Source
Layer>' which will be replaced wit h t he name of t he layer t he source ent it y is on. The line '<Source Layer>' can be
included anywhere in t he layer t emplat e and can be included mult iple t imes.
If t he new layer does not exist it will be creat ed and t he new ent it y or ent it ies will be placed on it .
Source Layer Layer Templat e Final Layer
_Part s Export edPart s Export edPart s
_Part s <Source Layer> _Part s
_Part s Export Layer<Source Layer> Export Layer_Part s
_Part s <SourceLayer>A<Source Layer>B _Part sA_Part sB
Export i ng usi ng t he Graphi c User Int erf ace
1) Choose SC Utilities > Export > Export to DWG (page 444)
Export To Dwg
303
2) If t he current drawing has not been saved ShipConst ruct or will bring up a dialog box request ing permission
t o save. If t he drawing cont ains changes and is not saved t he export process will st op.
3) The Save As menu will appear allowing t he user t o select t he name and locat ion of t he export ed drawing.
The dialog will present a aut omat ically generat ed f ile name but any name may be used.
Export To Dwg
304
4) Once t he conf igurat ion opt ions have been properly set t hrough t he UI, or by loading a previous conf igurat ion
click ' Ok' and t he export will proceed.
Command Li ne Export
Command: -SCExport Dwg
Export To Dwg
305
Command Prompt
When st art ed -SCExport Dwg will present t he user wit h a command prompt . There are a number of opt ions t he user may
select , t hese may be select ed in any order. When t he conf igurat ion is correct pressing ent er, wit h an empt y line, will begin
t he export process.
To Cancel t he process during conf igurat ion press Escape. Once t he export has begun it cannot be canceled.
There are a number of opt ions t hat may be select ed.
ShowVal ues
Each of t he set t ings t hat can be st ored in t he syst em has a unique name, such as SUPPORTS_USE_RELATIVE_RADIUS,
which has a value associat ed wit h it . The ShowValues command will print t o t he command line t he current opt ions and
t he value it is current ly set t o. The export command has a lot of opt ions and t he out put of t his command will t ake many
l i nes.
Export To Dwg
306
St oreVal ues
The current values f or each opt ion will be writ t en out t o a f ile, al ongsi de t he name of t he opt ion. Each opt ion will be on it s
own line in t he f ormat : [Opt ion Name] [Value]. The f irst line of t he f ile will be t he silent command's name. This f ile can be
used as a Aut oCAD script t o perf orm a export using t he opt ions st ored t o t he f ile or t o conf igure t he export GUI.
The command t akes t he f ull pat h t o where t he f ile is t o be st ored.
If t he command is run wit hout t he pat h t he f ile will be st ored t o a def ault locat ion.
Export To Dwg
30 7
ReadDi spl ayOpt i ons
Conf igures t he current opt ions using t he current drawing' s model space set t ings.
Hel p
Pri nt s a short descript ion of t he available commands.
Changi ng t he Val ues
The value f or any opt ion can be set by ent ering t he opt ion's name and t he new value.
If an incorrect value is ent ered t he syst em will print a warning and leave t he opt ion wit h t he original value.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
309
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
Manager Menus
File > Import St ocks >
Let s you import Manager set t ings f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat was export ed f rom anot her project , eit her
f or All Modules or f or an individual menu in Manager (General, St ruct ure, Pipe, HVAC, Equipment ). See t he Project
Management manual f or det ails.
Fi l e > Export St ocks >
Export s Manager set t ings t o an XML f ile, eit her f or All Modules or f or an individual menu in Manager (General, St ruct ure,
Pipe, HVAC, Equipment ). See t he Project Management manual f or det ails.
Fi l e > Exi t
Cl oses Manager. You are prompt ed t o save any unsaved dat a.
General > Proj ect Set t i ngs
Menu ............... General > Proj ect Set t i ngs
Tool bar ............
Navi gat or ........ Set t i ngs (wi t h t he proj ect sel ect ed)
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Proj ect Set t i ngs (page 2 9)
Opens t he Project Set t ings window, let t ing you set various project -wide set t ings.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
310
Project
Common Part s Cat alog – Let s you make t he project a CPC project and connect it t o a CPC dat abase. See Common
Part s Cat alog (CPC) (page 100).
CPC Dat abase – The name of t he CPC dat abase.
CPC GUID – The ID number f or t he CPC dat abase.
CPC Server – The server of t he CPC dat abase.
General
Administ rat or > Aut omat ic Save – Specif ies ShipConst ruct or’s behavior when Aut oCAD t riggers an aut omat ic save
(aut o-save).
Of f – Aut oCAD’s aut o-save has no ef f ect on t he ShipConst ruct or drawing or dat abase.
OnUserCont rol – The ShipConst ruct or drawing and dat abase are saved when t he aut o-save t riggers.
OnReset OnSt art – The ShipConst ruct or drawing and dat abase are saved when t he aut o-save t riggers.
Addit ionally, each t ime you connect t o a project , t he Aut oCAD aut o-save set t ings are aut omat ically set t o be
enabled (using a def ault t ime of 10 minut es bet ween saves). Af t er you have connect ed t o a project you
may t urn of f t he aut o-save in t he Aut oCAD opt ions, but next t ime you connect it will be re-enabled.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
311
Not e: You may enable or disable Aut oCAD’s aut omat ic save, and specif y a t ime af t er which an aut o-save will be
t riggered in t he Open and Save t ab of t he Aut oCAD Opt ions window (Tools > Opt ions menu).
Bill Of Mat erials > ‘N/ A’ Text – When a f ield in t he BOM t able is not applicable f or a part , t he f ield cont ains t he
speci f i ed t ext .
Bill Of Mat erials > ‘Varies’ Text – When a row in t he BOM t able is a grouping of it ems and t he dat a f or t he it ems is
di f f erent f or a f ield, t he f ield cont ains t he specif ied t ext .
Display Lengt h Decimal Places – Indicat es t he precision of lengt h values displayed in t he user int erf ace.
Display Lengt h in f t in 1/ 16 f ormat – Lengt h measurement s displayed in t he user int erf ace are displayed in a
st andard f eet , inches, and inch-f ract ions f ormat or in decimal f ormat .
Display Lengt h Unit s – Indicat es t he unit s of lengt h values displayed in t he user int erf ace.
Display Weight Decimal Places – Indicat es t he precision of weight values displayed in t he user int erf ace.
Display Weight Unit s – Indicat es t he unit s of weight values displayed in t he user int erf ace.
Minimum Int erf erence Volume – The minimum volume t hat will result in an int erf erence. This let s you f ilt er out very
small int erf erences during int erf erence checking t hat may be t he result of part s just t ouching, int erpolat ion errors by
t he comput er, or int erf erences so small t hat product ion will not not ice t hem.
Project ID – The unique project ident if ier.
Project Lengt h Unit s – The lengt h unit s used t hroughout t he project (f or example, t he unit s t hat Aut oCAD geomet ry
will be draf t ed in). Do not change t his set t ing af t er you have begun working on a project .
View From Af t – This set t ing indicat es which direct ion modeling in Frame Planar Group Model Drawings will t ake
place. This set t ing should be on if you pref er looking at f rames f rom af t t o f orward. This set t ing is det ermined when
t he project is creat e and is not changeable.
Report s
Company Name – A text f ield t hat can be insert ed int o product ion drawings as a keyword. This is included in t he
header of report s.
Hull Number – A t ext f ield t hat can be insert ed int o product ion drawings as a keyword.
Job Number – A t ext f ield t hat can be insert ed int o product ion drawings as a keyword.
Project Descript ion – A t ext f ield t hat can be insert ed int o product ion drawings as a keyword.
Project Name – The descript ive name of t he project t hat will appear in report headers and t it le pages.
St ruct ure
Allow Remot e Prof ile Cut out s – Include cut out s f rom Prof iles in dif f erent unit s when adding cut out s t o a plat e.
Aut oOrient Text – When looking at t ext in st ruct ure part s, t he t ext can be viewed as being always readable no mat t er
your viewpoint . This is not t he def ault Aut oCAD behavior. You may be more used t o t he Aut oCAD behavior t o verif y
you are looking f rom t he back side.
The di f f erence on t he t ext when vi ewi ng f rom t he back si de
Aut oOrient Text
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
312
3D PDM – This set t ing af f ect s t he t ext while in any product model drawing.
Arrangement Drawings – This set t ing af f ect s t he t ext while in pipe, HVAC or equipment arrangement drawings.
Assembly Drawings – This set t ing af f ect s t he t ext while in assembly drawings.
Nest Drawi ngs – This is always on because marked t ext should always be readable.
Spool Drawi ngs – This set t ing af f ect s t he t ext while in pipe or HVAC spool drawings.
Bend Tolerance (deg) – The minimum angle (in degrees) at which a curved f aceplat e is considered t o have a bend. A
curved f aceplat e f ollowing t he hull is usually represent ed by a polyline wit h small st raight -line segment s. The
direct ional change f rom segment t o segment is usually very small (in t he order of 1/ 10 of a degree). Bends t his
small are not producible in a shipyard environment . However, over t he lengt h of t he f aceplat e, t he t ot al direct ional
change is quit e likely very large. The Bend Tolerance let s you set a t hreshold above which t he bend will be list ed in
t he bend report . When t he accumulat ed values of direct ional change of t he polyline segment s exceed t he Bend
Tol erance value, t he direct ional change is list ed. Changing t his value af t er f aceplat es have been made does not
af f ect t heir bend dat a.
NC-Pyros Export – See Export To NC-Pyros Wi ndow (page 494).
Planar Group Tolerance – The maximum dist ance t hat planes def ined by addit ional geomet ry select ed when creat ing
a planar group can be of f set f rom t he plane t hat is used t o def ine t he planar group. Somet imes geomet ry import ed
int o Aut oCAD f rom ot her sof t ware is not exact ly in one plane.
Plat e Flange Def ault Text – The def ault t ext t o use on t he label of a plat e f lange.
Plat e Nest ing
Display FS Marking as Dashed – Yes – Far side marks (t he bot t om side as it is shown in the nest drawing) is
shown using t he SConDashed Linet ype st yle: No – Far side marks are shown as t hey will be act ually marked.
Nest Corner – See Aut onest ing Opt ions
Nest Fit Met hod – See Aut onest ing Opt ions
Nest Rot at ion Angle – See Aut onest ing Opt ions
Nest Vert ically – See Aut onest ing Opt ions
Solid Creat ion Tolerance – Det ermines how accurat e ShipConst ruct or solids are. Solids are used f or visual
represent at ion, int erf erence checking, and t he calculat ion of weight and cent er of gravit y. Solids are not used f or
product ion. Set Solid Creat ion Tolerance t o 0 t o ensure solids exact ly mat ch t he product ion geomet ry or increase t he
value t o decrease t he accuracy of solids and reduce f ile size.
St if f ener Marking Type –Cont rols how ShipConst ruct or marks st if f eners on plat es. A set t ing of Ext ent s marks t he f ull
lengt h of t he st if f ener while a set t ing of Cont act marks only t he lengt h of t he st if f ener which cont act s t he plat e.
The di f f erence bet ween Cont act set t i ng and Ext ent s set t i ng.
St ruct ure Colors
Const ruct ion Line Colors
Of f set Const ruct ion Line Color – The color of all Of f set const ruct ion lines.
Planar Group Hull Trace Color – The color of all HullTrace const ruct ion lines.
Planar Group Plane Color – The color of all PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines.
User Col or – The color of all User const ruct ion lines.
Draf t Col ors
Draf t Cut Color – The color assigned t o t he _Draf t _Cut layer in st ruct ure model drawings.
Draf t Mark Color – The color assigned t o t he _Draf t _Mark layer in st ruct ure model drawings.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
313
Draf t NoProcess Color – The color assigned t o t he _Draf t _NoProcess layer in st ruct ure model drawings.
NC-Pyros Colors – The colors of part s when displayed in a nest drawing or af t er t hey have been assigned t o a nest .
This makes it easy t o dif f erent iat e bet ween part s that have been assigned t o a nest and part s t hat are in a nest
drawing but have not yet been nest ed.
Inset Color – Out side cut t hat is in a hole of anot her part .
Insi de Col or – Inside cut s.
Mark Color – Marking on t he plat e.
NoProcess Color – Text and lines t hat are t here f or ref erence but not marked on t he plat e.
Out side Color – Out side cut s.
Plat e St ock Color – St ock plat e border.
Nest Part Colors
Out dat ed Part Color – Part t hat has been modif ied af t er it has been nest ed.
Unassigned Part Cut Color – A t emporary color t o signif y t hat t he part is not assigned t o a nest .
Unassigned Part Mark Color – Temporary color t o signif y t hat t he part is not assigned t o a nest .
Unassigned Part NoProcess Color – Temporary color t o signif y t hat t he part is not assigned t o a nest .
Part Invalid Color – When a plat e part cannot generat e a boundary, t he part will change t o t his color. It is good t o
make t his a dist inct ive color t hat will st and out clearly.
Pl at e Part Col ors
Part Bevel Color – Color of bevel code t ext .
Part Cut Color – Color of lines t hat will be cut by t he NC machine.
Part Mark Color – Color of lines t hat will be marked by t he NC machine.
Part NoProcess Color – Color of lines t hat will not be processed by t he NC machine.
Prof i l e Part Col ors
Part Green Color – When adding Green t o a st if f ener or f aceplat e, t he green is represent ed by a solid using t he
Part Green Color.
Toolpat h Gap Tolerance – The t oolpat h command will connect lines t hat are not connect ed by a dist ance. The largest
gap t hat t he t oolpat h command will connect is t his gap t olerance.
Twist ed St if f ener Import Unit s – The unit s of STR st ringer f iles f rom ShipCAM or Maxsurf when creat ing new t wist ed
st i f f eners.
Use Surf ace Name f or Part Name – Creat ing curved plat e part s can be named f rom t he surf ace name in t he Hull
drawing or t he DXF f ilename if using Curved Plat es > New…. If t his is set t o No, a new aut onumbered name is
generat ed.
Weld Shrinkage Icon Size – The def ault size of t he weld shrinkage icon.
General > User Permi ssi ons
Menu ............... General > User Permi ssi ons
Tool bar ............
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t User Permi ssi ons
Procedure ....... User Permi ssi ons (page 3 0)
Opens t he User Permi ssi ons window, let t ing you set up user permissions and permission groups. See User Permissions in
t he Project Management manual f or det ails.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
314
General > Mat eri al s
Menu ............... General > Mat eri al s
Tool bar ............
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Mat eri al s
Procedure ....... Mat eri al s (page 3 1)
Opens t he Mat erials window, let t ing you creat e and edit mat erials.
Export – Checked mat erials and grades are export ed when you click Export XML.
Mat eri al – List s mat erials and grades. Right -click on a mat erial or grade t o Rename it , Del et e it , or creat e a New Mat erial
or New Grade.
Densit y – The densit y of t he mat erial, measured in t he Densi t y Uni t s. Bef ore ent ering a Densit y value, set t he Densit y
Uni t s t o t he unit s f or t he value you want t o ent er.
In Use – Indicat es wit h a checkmark which mat erials and grades are current ly in use in t he project .
Densi t y Uni t s – The Densit y of mat erials and grades are measured in t he Densit y Unit s. Bef ore ent ering a Densit y value,
set t he Densit y Unit s t o t he unit s f or t he value you want t o ent er. To display mat erial densit ies in anot her unit , change t he
Densi t y Uni t s.
New Mat erial – Creat es a new mat erial.
New Grade – Creat es a new mat erial grade f or t he select ed mat erial.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed mat erial or grade.
Import – Let s you import mat erials and grades f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat was export ed f rom anot her
proj ect .
Export XML – Export s t he checked Export mat erials and grades t o an XML f i l e.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
315
General > Manuf act urers
Menu ............... General > Manuf act urers
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Manuf act urers
Procedure ....... Manuf act urers (page 34)
Opens t he Manuf act urers window, let t ing you creat e and edit manuf act urers.
In Use – Indicat es wit h a checkmark which manuf act urers are current ly in use in t he project .
Manuf act urer Name – List s manufact urers.
New – Creat es a new manuf act urer.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed manuf act urer.
General > Fi ni shes
Menu ............... General > Fi ni shes
Tool bar ............
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Fi ni shes
Procedure ....... Fi ni shes (page 35)
Opens t he Finishes window, let t ing you creat e and edit f inishes.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
316
Export – Checked f inishes and f inish t ypes will be export ed when you click Export XML.
Finish Name – List s f inishes and f inish t ypes. Right -click on a f inish or f inish t ype t o Rename it , Del et e it , or creat e a New
Fi ni sh or New Finish Type.
In Use – Indicat es wit h a checkmark which f inishes and f inish t ypes are current ly in use in t he project .
New Type – Creat es a new f inish t ype.
New Finish – Creat es a new f inish f or t he select ed f inish t ype.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed f inish or f inish t ype.
Import – Let s you import f inishes and f inish t ypes f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat was export ed from
anot her project .
Export XML – Export s t he checked Export f inishes and f inish t ypes t o an XML f ile.
Import CPC – Let s you import st ocks f rom t he Common Part s Cat alog. This but t on is only available if t he project is a CPC
project . See Common Part s Cat alog (CPC) (page 100).
General > Insul at i on
Menu ............... General > Insul at i on
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Insul at i on
Procedure ....... See t he HVACmanual
Opens t he Insulat ion window, let t ing you creat e and edit insulat ion. See Insulation in t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
General > Text St yl es
Menu ............... General > Text St yl es
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Text St yl es
Procedure ....... Text St yl es (page 3 6)
Opens t he Text St yl es window, let t ing you creat e and edit t ext st yles.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
317
General > Accessory Packages
Menu ............... General > Accessory Packages
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Accessory Packages
Procedure ....... See Pipe manual
Opens t he Accessory Packages window, let t ing you creat e and edit accessory packages. See Accessory Packages in t he
Pipe manual f or det ails.
General > Nami ng Convent i ons
Menu ............... General > Nami ng Convent i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Nami ng Convent i ons
Permi ssi ons ... Pi pe > Manager > Edi t Nami ng Convent i ons
Permi ssi ons ... HVAC > Manager > Edi t Nam i ng Convent i ons
Permi ssi ons ... Penet rat i ons > Manager > Edi t Nami ng Convent i ons
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Assembl y Drawi ng Nami ng Convent i ons
Procedure ....... Nami ng Convent i ons (page 37)
Opens t he Nami ng Convent i ons window, let t ing you creat e and edit naming convent ions.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
318
Nami ng Convent i ons Window
Name Convent ions – List s all naming convent ions, grouped by t ype. Act ive naming convent ions are indicat ed by a
checkmark. Select a naming convent ion t o display it s Element s.
New – Creat es a new naming convent ion wit hin t he select ed group.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed naming convent ion.
Set Act i ve – Makes t he select ed naming convent ion t he act ive naming convent ion f or it s group.
Manager Al i ases – Opens t he Alias Manager, let t ing you change t he t he names of sub-cat egories t hat are used t o
organize naming convent ions.
El ement s – List s t he element s (t he component s t hat make up a naming convent ion) of t he select ed naming convent ion
in order. Select an element t o display it s propert ies below.
Up/ Down Arrows – Moves t he select ed element up or down in t he list of element s, let t ing you re-order t hem.
New – Opens t he Select Type window, let t ing you add an element t o t he select ed naming convent ion.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed element f rom t he select ed naming convent ion.
Propert y, Val ue – Displays t he propert ies and values of t he select ed element and let s you edit t he values.
Underst anding Seeding
Seeding gives you more cont rol over how your names are generat ed. This is best illust rat ed by an example. Suppose you
have a naming convent ion def ined wit h t hree element s: Mat erial-Syst em-Aut o-number wit h t he aut o-number st art ing at 1
and t he increment being 1. The f irst part you creat e may have a name like t his:
M1-FreshWat er-001
In t his example, t he part is made f rom a mat erial named M1 and is in t he Fresh Wat er syst em. For t his example we will
assume t hat bot h t he Mat erial element and t he Syst em element are seeds. If you creat e a new part t hat was also made
f rom mat erial M1 and in syst em Fresh Wat er, t he name will be as f ollows:
M1-FreshWat er-002
If you creat e a t hird part t hat was made of mat erial M1 but was in t he Salt Wat er syst em, ShipConst ruct or will generat e a
part name as f ollows:
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
319
M1-Sal t Wat er-001
Not ice how t he number has rest art ed at 1. This is because one of your seed element s has changed, in t his case t he
Syst em. If you creat e a f ourt h part , t his t ime back in t he Fresh Wat er syst em but wit h mat erial M2, ShipConst ruct or would
generat e a name as f ollows:
M2-FreshWat er-001
Again t he numbering scheme has changed because t he combinat ion of your t wo seed element s does not mat ch anyt hing
we have seen previously. If you now creat e a f if t h and sixt h part made f rom mat erial M2 and in syst em Fresh Wat er,
ShipConst ruct or will generat e t he names as f ollows:
M2-FreshWat er-002
M2-FreshWat er-003
To f urt her illust rat e t he nat ure of seeding, consider t he f ollowing example. To make t hings simple, pret end t hat you are
again working wit h a f resh project and have not generat ed t he names above. You def ine a name convent ion ident ical t o
t he one in t he example above (Mat erial-Syst em-Aut o-number) except t hat inst ead of bot h t he Mat erial and Syst em
element s being seeds, only t he Mat erial is a seed element . Following t he same procedure as above your part names will
be as f ol l ows:
M1-FreshWat er-001
M1-FreshWat er-002
M1-Sal t Wat er-003
Not ice how even t hough t he syst em changed f rom Fresh Wat er t o Salt Wat er, t he numbering scheme did not change; it
cont inued count ing up. This is because t he syst em is not a seed element . If you creat e t wo more part s, t he names will be
as f ollows:
M2-FreshWat er-001
M2-Sal t Wat er-002
Not ice how t he numbering scheme changed t he f irst t ime because t he mat erial element changed but cont inued count ing
up t he second t ime.
Dat abase El ement s
The power in naming convent ions lies in t he abilit y t o generat e names based on ent it y at t ribut es st ored in t he dat abase.
The f ollowing are descript ions of all t he dat abase element s current ly support ed by ShipConst ruct or.
Assembly ret urns t he primary product hierarchy assembly name of an ancest or assembly of your ent it y. Which level’s
assembly name is ret urned depends on which Assembly Tree Level you select f rom t he Tree Level drop-down list . The list
of assembly levels depends on how you st ruct ure your Product Hierarchy t ree.
Not e: If t he part is in an assembly wit h a level higher t han t he select ed assembly t ree level, not hing is ret urned f or
t hat element .
Ext rusion Prof ile St andard Type applies t o st if f eners. Examples of ext rusion prof ile st andard t ypes are angle, bulb f lat ,
st ruct ural pipe, cust om, and t ee. Ext rusion prof ile st andard t ypes can be aliased using t he Naming Convent ion Alias
Manager.
File Pat h applies t o Plat e Nest s. It ret urns t he pat h t o t he plat e nest drawing st art ing f rom t he Nest f older. The purpose of
t he f ile pat h element is t o let you put t he product hierarchy locat ion in t he plat e nest name.
This is done by creat ing a direct ory st ruct ure in t he Nest s f older t hat mat ches t he product hierarchy and t hen put t ing
plat e nest drawings at t he appropriat e locat ion in t he f older st ruct ure.
Major St ock Type applies t o all St ruct ure part s. Examples of major st ock t ypes are plat e, ext rusion, corrugat ed and plank.
Major st ock t ypes can be aliased using t he Naming Convent ion Alias Manager.
Mat eri al ret urns t he mat erial name of t he st ock.
Mat erial Grade ret urns t he mat erial grade of t he st ock.
Nest Drawi ng ret urns t he nest drawing name of plat e nest s.
Nominal Size ret urns t he nominal size of t he pipe st ock.
Part Si de ret urns t he side of t he ship on which t he st ruct ure part lies.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
320
Part Type applies t o St ruct ure part s. Examples of part t ypes are plat e, st if f ener, corrugat ion, f aceplat e, and plank. Part
t ypes can be aliases using t he Naming Convent ion Alias Manager.
Planar Group Model Drawing ret urns t he planar group model drawing t hat t he st ruct ure part is modeled in.
Plat e St ock Lengt h ret urns t he lengt h of t he plat e st ock it em t hat t he st ruct ure part is made f rom.
Plat e St ock Widt h ret urns t he widt h of t he plat e st ock it em t hat t he st ruct ure part is made f rom.
Pressure Rat ing ret urns t he pressure rat ing of t he pipe st ock.
Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng ret urns t he prof ile plot drawing name of prof i l e nest s.
Proj ect ret urns t he name of t he ShipConst ruct or project .
Remnant ret urns t he name of t he remnant t hat t he plat e nest was cut f rom.
Sheet St ock ret urns t he name of t he sheet st ock t hat t he HVAC st ock is made f rom.
St ock ret urns t he name of t he st ock t hat t he part is made f rom.
Syst em ret urns t he spec level, syst em level, or branch level syst em name of t he syst em of your ent it y. Which level is
ret urned depends on your select ion in t he Tree Level drop-down list .
Not e: If t he ent it y is in a syst em wit h a level higher t han t he select ed syst em t ree level, not hing is ret urned f or t he
Syst em of t hat element .
Thi ckness ret urns t he t hickness of t he plat e st ock t hat t he plat e part is made f rom.
General > Product i on Out put > Label St yl es
Menu ............... General > Product i on Out put > Label St yl es
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Label St yl es
Procedure ....... Label St yl es (page 46)
Label st yles are used t o def ine annot at ions in product ion drawings.
General > Product i on Out put > Di mensi on St yl es
Menu ............... General > Product i on Out put > Di mensi on St yl es
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Di mensi on St yl es
Procedure ....... Di mensi on St yl es (page 47)
General > Product i on Out put > Bi l l Of Mat eri al s
Menu ............... General > Product i on Out put > Bi l l Of Mat eri al s
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Bi l l Of Mat eri al s
Procedure ....... Bi l l Of Mat eri al s (page 4 7)
ShipConst ruct or int egrat es all Bill of Mat erials management t hrough t he BOM Def init ions manager. The BOM Def init ions
manager let s you creat e and edit exist ing BOMs f or all product ion drawing t ypes.
Access t he BOM Def init ions manager t hrough Manager > General > Product ion Out put > Bill of Mat erials.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
321
BOM Def i ni t i ons display
Broken down int o product ion drawing cat egories, t he BOM Def init ions area let s you creat e and delet e def init ions and
edit ing charact erist ics specif ic t o a BOM.
• St yle Name – Name of t he BOM def init ion.
• Tit le – Tit le t o display on Aut oCAD t ables.
Not e: Only t ables using t able st yles t hat cont ain t he Tit le sect ion will display t he Tit le t ext .
• Acad TableSt yle – Aut oCAD t ablest yle t o use f or BOM inst ances. If t he specif ied t ablest yle is not f ound at t he t ime of
insert ion, t hen t he STANDARD st yle is used.
• Label St yle – ShipConst ruct or label st yle t o use f or t he BOM. This st yle can be overridden by t he Collect or Label St yle.
• Row # pref ix t ext – Precedes it em number wit h t ext in bot h t able and label.
New
Creat es new BOM def init ions.
Def ault Collect ors – If select ed, t he BOM def init ion includes reasonable collect ors f or t he current product ion drawing t ype.
You can modif y t he collect ors and t heir order af t er creat ion.
Del et e
Delet es t he select ed BOM def init ion. If t he BOM def init ion is in use, it cannot be delet ed.
Moves select ed f ields up in t he list ing order
Moves select ed f ields down in t he list ing order.
Fi el ds
Let s you cust omize aspect s of t he f ields t hat appear in your BOM:
• Choose which f ields t o include in t he BOM.
• Alias t he f ield names t o somet hing appropriat e f or your company.
• List t he order t he f ields will be displayed in.
• Specif y sort ing, grouping, and visibilit y of t he included f ields.
• Specif y propert ies specif ic t o t he t ype of f ield included, be it a decimal, lengt h, weight , or ot her t ype of value.
Fields wit h manageable propert ies are indicat ed by a whit e background in t he Field Props col umn.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
322
• Add/ Remove – Adds or removes product ion f ields or user at t ribut e f ields. Product ion f ields are t hose provided by
ShipConst ruct or and t hat exist in every project . At t ribut e f ields are special f ields t hat are def ined by t he user f or t he
project . All at t ribut e f ields are list ed, regardless of whet her t hey logically make sense f or t he BOM def init ion.
Col l ect ors
Collect ors are responsible f or gat hering object s in a drawing t o be included in a BOM and t hen processing t he object dat a
f or display in t he BOM.
Not e: Collect or order is import ant because each collect or ret urns inf ormat ion specif ic t o t he object s it collect s.
Result ant inf ormat ion f or each collect or is t hen compiled in t he order specif ied by t he BOM def init ion.
Collect ors are specif ic f or each product ion drawing t ype. The f ollowing t able list s t he collect ors available per drawing t ype.
Modul e Product i on Drawi ng Type Col l ect ors
General Assembly Assembly, St ruct ure Part , Equipment Part , Pipe Spool, Pipe Part ,
Pipe Connect ion Accessories, HVAC Spool, HVAC Part , HVAC
Connect ion Accessories, Penet rat ion Part , General Part
St ruct ure Approval To be det ermined
Nest Pl at e Nest
Prof i l e Pl ot Prof i l e Pl ot
Pipe Pi pe Spool Pipe Part , Pipe Connect ion Accessories, Pipe Cut list
Pi pe Arrangement Assembly, St ruct ure Part , Equipment Part , Pipe Spool, Pipe Part ,
Pipe Connect ion Accessories, HVAC Spool, HVAC Part , HVAC
Connect ion Accessories, Penet rat ion Part , General Part
HVAC HVAC Spool HVAC Part , HVAC Connect ion Accessories, HVAC Cut list
HVAC Arrangement Assembly, St ruct ure Part , Equipment Part , Pipe Spool, Pipe Part ,
Pipe Connect ion Accessories, HVAC Spool, HVAC Part , HVAC
Connect ion Accessories, Penet rat ion Part , General Part
Equi pment Equipment Arrangement Assembly, St ruct ure Part , Equipment Part , Pipe Spool, Pipe Part ,
Pipe Connect ion Accessories, HVAC Spool, HVAC Part , HVAC
Connect ion Accessories, Penet rat ion Part , General Part
Col l ect or Funct i onal i t y
The f ollowing t able list s t he collect ors and t heir f unct ions
Col l ect or Descri pt i on Addi t i onal Funct i onal i t y
Assembly Organizes object s int o primary product ion
st rat egy assemblies.
Ret urns inf ormat ion f or each of t he f irst level
subassemblies. Main assembly and children of
t he subassemblies are not report ed.
St ruct ure Part Finds and ret urns inf ormat ion f or all st ruct ure
part s.
Equipment Part Finds and ret urns inf ormat ion f or all equipment
part s.
Pi pe Part Finds and ret urns inf ormat ion f or all pipe part s. Let s you specif y t he t ype and spool st at us
of t he object s list ed in t he BOM.
Pipe Connect ion
Accessories
Queries all pipe-pipe connect ions and ret rieves
accessory package inf ormat ion f rom t hem.
Pi pe Spool Gat hers all Pipe object s and organizes t hem int o
t heir spools. Ret urns inf ormat ion f or each spool.
HVAC Part Finds and ret urns inf ormat ion f or all HVAC part s. Let s you specif y t he t ype and spool st at us
of t he object s list ed in t he BOM.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
323
HVAC Connect ion
Accessories
Queries all HVAC- HVAC connect ions and
ret rieves accessory package inf ormat ion f rom
t hem.
HVAC Spool Gat hers all HVAC object s and organizes t hem int o
t heir spools. Ret urns inf ormat ion f or each spool.
Penet rat i on Part Gat hers all Penet rat ion part s and report s
inf ormat ion f or t he it ems cont ained in each.
General Part Col l ect s all part s and ret urns part level
inf ormat ion f or each.
Warni ng: The general part collect or can t ake
a signif icant amount of t ime t o process dat a
on larger project s.
Nest Finds and ret urns all object s in a Nest drawing
specif ic t o a part icular nest .
Prof i l e Pl ot Collect s all object s in a Prof ile Plot drawing
specif ic t o a part icular nest .
General > Product ion Out put > Predef ined Assembly Format
Menu ............... General > Product i on Out put > Predef i ned Assembl y Format
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... General > Manager > Edi t Predef i ned Assembl y Format
Procedure ....... Predef i ned Assembl y Format (page 5 1)
General > CPC Associat ed Project s
Menu ............... General > CPC Associ at ed Proj ect s
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Associ at e a CPC Proj ect wi t h anot her CPC Proj ect (page 101)
Let s you associat e t he project wit h ot her CPC project s so t hat whenever you import a st ock f rom t he CPC dat abase,
ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically searches associat ed project s f or addit ional st ock inf ormat ion.
St ruct ure Menu
St ruct ure > St ock Cat alog
Menu ............... St ruct ure > St ock Cat al og
Tool bar ............
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t St ruct ural St ocks
Procedure ....... St ock Cat al og (page 5 3)
Opens t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog window and l et s you creat e and edit st ruct ure st ocks.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
324
St ruct ure St ock Cat al og
St ruct ure St ock List – List s all st ruct ure st ocks by t ype. Select a st ock t ype t o list st ocks of t hat t ype under
St ock Propert ies – List s st ock propert ies f or t he st ock or st ock t ype select ed in t he st ruct ure st ock list . See t hese sect ions
f or f urt her inf ormat ion on individual propert ies:
• Plat e St ock Propert ies (page 54)
• Prof ile St ock Propert ies (page 55)
• Corrugat ed Plat e St ock Propert ies (page 54)
New – Creat es a new st ock of t he t ype select ed in t he St ruct ure St ock List .
Del et e – Delet es t he st ock select ed under St ock Propert ies.
Usage Log – Generat es a list of all part s using t he st ock select ed under St ock Propert i es.
CPC Import – Let s you import st ocks f rom t he Common Part s Cat alog (CPC). This but t on is only available if t he project is
a CPC project . See Common Part s Cat alog (CPC) (page 100).
Import – Let s you import st ocks f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat was export ed f rom anot her project .
Export XML – Export s t he checked st ocks t o an XML f ile.
Edit Shapes – Opens t he Prof ile Shapes window, let t ing you creat e and edit prof ile st ock shapes.
Cut out Shap... – Opens t he Cut out s window, let t ing you creat e and edit cut out s. Cut out s can be insert ed int o plat e or
st if f ener part s.
Edi t Si zes – Opens t he St ruct ure St ock Available Sizes window, let t ing you specif y t he available sizes of a st ock. See Edit
Si zes Window (page 324).
Edit Manuf…– Opens t he Manuf act urers window. See General > Manuf act urers (page 315).
Edit Mat eri al s – Opens t he Mat erials window. See General > Mat erials (page 314).
Edit Sizes Window
St ocks can come in various st ock sizes. The edit sizes window is where you ent er t his inf ormat ion. You also t rack how
many you have in invent ory.
Avai l abl e Si zes f or a Pl at e St ock
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
325
Avai l abl e Si zes f or a St i f f ener St ock
• Nest Pri ori t y – When mult iple size st ock sheet s are def ined aut omat ic nest ing must choose one t o nest on. Nest
Priorit y det ermines which size t o t ry f irst .
• # In Use – The number of plat es t hat are in nest drawings.
• Invent ory – The t ot al number of plat es of t he specif ied size in t he project .
• Lengt h – Lengt h of t he st ock plat e (prof ile st ock)
• Wi dt h – Widt h of t he st ock plat e (plat es only)
• New – Creat e a new st ock size.
• Del et e – Delet e t he select ed st ock size. You cannot delet e a st ock size t hat is current ly in use.
• Invent ory – Shows t he Invent ory window. See Invent ory Window (page 325).
Invent ory Wi ndow
Invent ory – The list of pieces f or t he select ed size as indicat ed.
Ident i f i er – The user-def ined ident if ier f or t hat piece of st ock. Each piece can opt ionally have a dif f erent ident if ier.
Heat Number – The heat number t agged on t he piece. Typically t he heat number is ent ered in t he Nest Manager af t er t he
nest is cut , but you can also ent er it here.
In Use – Indicat es if t he st ock it em is in use in a nest .
St ruct ure > St ruct ure St ock Cat alog > Import
Allows you t o import st ocks f rom an XML f ile.
St ruct ure > St ruct ure St ock Cat al og > Export XML
Export s t he checked st ocks t o an XML f ile.
St ruct ure > St ruct ure St ock Cat al og > Edi t Shapes
Edit s t he st if f ener cross sect ions.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
326
St ruct ure > St ruct ure St ock Cat al og > Cut out Shap…
Edit s t he cut out t ypes and cut out shapes.
St ruct ure > St ruct ure St ock Cat al og > Edi t Si zes
Edit s t he available sizes and quant it ies of t he select ed st ock.
St ruct ure > St ruct ure St ock Cat al og > Edi t Manuf …
Allow you t o edit and add manuf act urers wit hout closing t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog window. See General >
Manuf act urers (page 315).
St ruct ure > St ock St ock Cat al og > Edi t Mat eri al s
Allow you t o edit and add mat erials wit hout closing t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog window. See General > Mat erials (page
314).
St ruct ure > Pi ecemark St yl es
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pi ecemark St yl es
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pi ecemark St yl es
Procedure ....... Pi ecemark St yl es (page 7 0)
Opens t he Piecemark St yles window, let t ing you creat e and edit piecemark st yles.
Pi ecemark St yl es – List s all piecemark st yles and t heir propert ies.
New – Creat es a new piecemark st yle.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed piecemark st yle.
Assi gn St yl es – Let s you select a Pi ecemark St yl e f or each Piecemark Type.
St ruct ure > User-Def i ned At t ri but es
Menu ............... St ruct ure > User-Def i ned At t ri but es
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t St ruct ural St ocks
Procedure ....... User-Def i ned At t ri but es (page 5 1)
Opens t he User-Def ined At t ribut es window, let t ing you creat e user-def ined at t ribut es and apply t hem t o st ruct ural part s
and st ocks. User-def ined at t ribut es allow you t o add cust om f ields t o ShipConst ruct or.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
327
St ruct ure > Pl at es > Ori ent at i on Icon
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > Ori ent at i on Icon
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e Ori ent at i on Icons
Procedure ....... Ori ent at i on Icon (page 72)
Opens t he Orient at ion Icon window, let t ing you creat e and edit t he orient at ion icon st andard. Any changes t o t he st andard
will af f ect all inst ances of t he orient at ion icon in t he model. ShipConst ruct or aut omat ically places t he orient at ion icon in
t he lower lef t corner of a part .
Insert Orient at ion Icons in Plat e Part s – If t his is checked, t he orient at ion icon will appear on part s when you creat e new
plat e part s. You can override t his in t he Plat e Part Propert ies window.
Icon
St yl e – The set of direct ion keywords t o include in t he orient at ion icon: St arboard/ Port Only, Inboard/ Out board Only,
or Bot h. The placement of t he keywords is f ixed.
Si ze – The size (lengt h of each side) of t he orient at ion icon.
NC Process – The NC process of t he icons lines when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Text
St yl e – The t ext st yle used f or t he direct ion keywords (see Text St yl es (page 36)).
Si ze – The size of t he t ext used f or t he direct ion keywords.
NC Process – The NC process of t he t ext when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Arrow
St yl e – The st yle of t he arrow: None, Line, or Triangle.
Transverse Direct ion – The direct ion of t he orient at ion icon: Port , St arboard, Inboard or Out board.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
328
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
329
To specif y t he t ext used f or direct ion keywords (in any language), set t he Direct ion Aliases:
Forward
Port
St arboard
Up
Inboard
Out board
Previ ew – A preview of how t he orient at ion icon will look.
St ruct ure > Pl at es > Markl i ne St yl es
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > Markl i ne St yl es
Tool bar ............
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e Markl i ne St yl es
Procedure ....... Markl i ne St yl es (page 73)
Opens t he Markline St yles window, let t ing you creat e, edit , and delet e markline st yles.
Markl i ne St yles Window
Markline St yles – List s available markline st yles.
New – Creat es a new markline st yle.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
330
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed markline st yle. You cannot delet e Markline St yles t hat are in use.
St yle Propert ies – Displays t he propert ies f or t he select ed markline st yle.
Propert i es
NC Process – The NC process of t he icons lines when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Edge Cl earance – The dist ance f rom t he edge of t he plat e t o t he line. This includes holes.
Break f or Text – If Yes, t he line is broken apart where t he line name is placed.
Text
Si ze – The size of t he t ext label associat ed wit h t his markline.
NC Process – The NC process of t he t ext when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Pl acement – The dist ance above t he line t o place t he t ext . If t he Break For Text is Yes t hen t he dist ance is
measured f rom t he cent er of t he t ext t o t he line. If No, t he dist ance is measured f rom t he bot t om of t he
t ext t o t he line. The markline t ext can be moved anywhere along t he markline by dragging it s grip point , but
it will always be placed t his dist ance away f rom t he line.
Part ial Marking
Is Part ial Marked – If Yes, t he line is broken int o segment s using t he part ial marking paramet ers. If No, t he line
will be cont inuous.
End Lengt h – The lengt h of line t o leave on t he end.
Dash Lengt h – The lengt h of t he dash.
Space Lengt h – The lengt h of t he spaces bet ween dashes.
St art Mark Symbol
Symbol – The mark symbol t o use f or t he st art of t he markline. Use None t o not show a symbol.
Si ze – The scale of t he st art mark symbol.
NC Process – The NC process of t he st art symbol when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Middle Mark Symbol
Symbol – The mark symbol t o use f or t he middle of t he markline. Use None t o not show a symbol.
Si ze – The scale of t he middle mark symbol.
NC Process – The NC process of t he middle symbols when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Spacing – The maximum dist ance bet ween symbols. If t his dist ance is 0, or great er t han t he lengt h of t he
markline, t hen middle mark symbols will not be placed at regular int ervals along t he markline. Inst ead t hey
will be placed in def ault locat ions, as det ermined by Dist ance f rom an End.
Dist ance f rom an End – The dist ance f rom t he st art and f rom t he end t o begin placing middle symbols. Middle
symbols will be placed inward f rom t hese point s t oward t he cent er of t he line using spacing. If t his is 0,
middle symbols will be placed f irst in t he cent er of t he line and t hen use t he spacing out ward. If Spacing is
0, or great er t han t he markline lengt h, t hen set t ing t his t o 0 will place a single middle mark symbol on t he
cent er of t he markline. If Spacing is 0, or great er t han t he markline lengt h, t hen set t ing t his t o a val ue
great er t han 0 will place one middle mark symbol on eit her end of t he markline at t he specif ied dist ance
f rom t he ends.
End Mark Symbol
Symbol – The mark symbol t o use f or t he end of t he markline. Use None t o not show a symbol.
Si ze – The scale of t he end mark symbol.
NC Process – The NC process of t he end symbol when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Far Side Mark Symbol - This symbol is drawn when t he markline is t o be act ually marked on t he f ar side of t he plat e
(t he underside when t he plat e is lying on t he NC t able). Alt ernat ively, t his f ar side indicat ion can be done using t he
Far Side Text opt ion.
Symbol – The mark symbol t o use f or t he f ar side symbol on t he markline. Use None t o not show a symbol.
Si ze – The scale of t he f ar side mark symbol.
NC Process – The NC process of t he f ar side mark symbol when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
331
Spacing – The maximum dist ance bet ween symbols.
Use Part ial Marking – Yes – f or product ion t he line will be dashed using t he part ial marking set t ings. You cannot
have part ial marking and f ar side part ial marking. ShipConst ruct or will ensure t hat only one is set t o Yes.
Near Side Text – This label helps indicat e which side of t he plat e t o mark t he line. The label appears af t er t he t ext
label on t he line.
Indi cat or – Text t o place on t he markline t o indicat e t hat t he markline is marked on t he correct side of t he plat e.
If you do not want t o use t his as an indicat or leave t he f ield blank.
Si ze – Height of t he near side t ext . The st yle of t he t ext is t he same as t he Text > St yle.
NC Process – The NC process of t he near side t ext when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Far Side Text - This label helps indicat e which side of t he plat e t o mark t he line. The label appears af t er t he t ext label
on t he line.
Indi cat or – Text t o place on t he markline t o indicat e t hat t he markline is marked on t he ot her side of t he plat e.
If you do not want t o use t his as an indicat or leave t he f ield blank.
Si ze – Height of t he f ar side t ext . The st yle of t he t ext is t he same as t he Text > St yle.
NC Process – The NC process of t he f ar side t ext when NC cut t ing t he part : Mark or NoProcess.
Edit Symbols – Opens t he Mark Symbols Window (page 331), let t ing you creat e and edit markline symbols.
Assi gn St yl es – Opens t he Assign Markline St yles Window (page 332), let t ing you cont rol which marklines st yles can be
used f or st if f eners, f lange f oldlines, corrugat ed plat e f oldlines, and dat um lines.
Mark Symbols Window
Cl i ck Edit Symbols in t he Markl i ne St yl es window t o open t his window. Mark symbols are complet ely cust omizable. They
are lines, arcs, polylines, circles placed along a markline.
Mark Symbol s
In Use – A check indicat es t hat a markline st yle is using t his symbol.
Symbol Name – The name of t he markline symbol. Names must be uni que.
Break Markline – Yes indicat es t hat t he markline is broken where t he symbol is locat ed.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
332
New – Creat es a new mark symbol.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed markline symbol. You cannot delet e symbols t hat are in use.
Edit Symbol – Opens t he select ed symbol in an Aut oCAD drawing enabling you t o edit t he symbol.
When edit ing t he symbol, it is import ant t o know t he orient at ion of t he markline.
When t he symbol is used at t he end of t he markline t hen t he symbol is mirrored.
Assi gn Markl i ne St yles Window
Cl i ck Assi gn St yl es in t he Markl i ne St yl es window t o open t his window. Marklines can be used in many places. The Assign
Markline St yles window let s you select markline st yles when creat ing each of t he dif f erent markline t ypes. You must
assign markline st yles t o t he markline t ypes t o be able t o use markline st yles.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
333
Current St yles – List s all t he markline st yles.
Assi gned St yl es – List s t he t ypes of marklines and t he st yles associat ed wit h t hose t ypes.
In Use – Indicat es wit h a checkmark t hat a markline st yle is used in a part .
Markline Type – The f ixed list of markline t ypes ShipConst ruct or support s. Under each markline t ype is t he markline
st yle t hat can be select ed on each inst ance of t he markline.
Add St yle – Adds t he select ed Current St yles t o t he select ed Markline Types.
Remove St yl e – Removes t he select ed st yles f rom t he markline t ypes. You cannot remove a st yle t hat is in use.
St ruct ure > Pl at es > Fl ange Cat al og
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > Fl ange Cat al og
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e Fl ange St andards
Procedure ....... Fl ange Cat al og (page 7 9)
Opens t he Flange Library window, let t ing you creat e, edit , import , and export plat e f langes.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
334
Fl ange Li brary Wi ndow
Fl anges – List s all available f langes.
Export – Checked f langes will be export ed when you click Export XML.
In Use – Indicat es wit h a checkmark which f langes are current ly in use in t he project .
Name – The name of t he f lange.
Si ze – The dist ance f rom t he bend t o t he end of t he f lange.
Type – The t ype of f lange.
Type A Fl ange
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
335
Type B Fl ange
St art / End – When you add a f lange t o a plat e part and t he f lange def init ion has dif f erent set t ings f or t he st art and
end, ShipConst ruct or asks you t o select t he st art by picking a point on t he part .
St art Sni pe Angl e – t he angle t o snipe t he f lange at t he st art of t he f lange.
End Snipe Angle – t he angle t o snipe t he f lange at t he end of t he f lange.
St art Relief Rad – t he radius of t he relief arc insert ed int o t he expanded product ion geomet ry at t he st art .
End Relief Rad – t he radius of t he relief arc insert ed int o t he expanded product ion geomet ry at t he end.
Snipe Ext ension – The amount of st ock t o add t o t he f lange bet ween t he R-end (where t he radius of curvat ure ends)
and t he beginning of t he snipe. This can provide ext ra grip f or t he f lange bending machine, especially when t he
f lange has snipe ends. If Snipe Ext ension is 0, no st ock is added t o t he f lange.
A f l ange wi t h zero (l ef t ) and non-zero (ri ght ) Sni pe Ext ensi on
Flange Correct ion – The amount t o move t he edge of t he expanded f lange. This is a mult iple of t he plat e t hickness.
Foldline Correct ion – The amount t o move t he edge of t he plat e t o represent t he expanded f lange. This is a mult iple of
t he plat e t hickness.
Use Rend – Creat es t he f lange so it s radius of curvat ure begins at t he end of t he original plat e. This is usef ul when a
f lange is at t ached t o a st if f ener and you want t he web of t he f lange t o be t he same height as t he f lange (f or example, so
t he f lange can be welded along t he ent ire lengt h of t he st if f ener). If Use Rend is of f , t he f lange is creat ed so t he t op of t he
f lange is aligned wit h t he end of t he original plat e.
Not e: When Use Rend is of f , t he uncorrect ed f oldline will appear along t he edge of t he original plat e. When Use Rend
is on, t he uncorrect ed f oldline will be of f set by t wice t he f lange radius f rom t he original plat e edge.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
336
A f l ange wi t h Use Rend of f (l ef t ) and on (ri ght )
Previ ew – Displays an image of t he f lange Type wit h all values indicat ed. When you select or edit a f ield in t he t able, t he
corresponding value becomes highlight ed in t he Previ ew.
New – Creat es a new f lange.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed f lange.
Import – Let s you import f langes f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat was export ed f rom anot her project .
Export XML – Export s t he checked Export f langes t o an XML f ile.
St ruct ure > Pl at es > Corner Treat ment s
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > Corner Treat ment s
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e Corner Treat ment s
Procedure ....... Corner Treat ment s (page 8 1)
Opens t he Corner Treat ment s window, let t ing you creat e and edit corner t reat ment s.
St ruct ure > Pl at es > Green St andards
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > Green St andards
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e Green St andards
Procedure ....... Pl at e Green St andards (page 8 3)
Opens t he Plat e Green St andards window, let t ing you creat e and edit plat e green st andards. Plat e green is t he addit ion of
ext ra mat erial t o a plat e t o handle f it up problems. Plat e green also allows you t o specif y a markline t o indicat e t he
original edge.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
337
Pl at e Green added f or a uni t break
Pl at e Green St andards Wi ndow
Pl at Green St andards -- The list of available plat e green st andards t hat can be applied t o plat e part s.
In Use – The check indicat es t hat t he green st andard is used in a plat e part . In Use st andards cannot be delet ed.
Green St andard Name – The name of t he green st andard. This t ext will be placed on t he part on t he green port i on.
Wi dt h – The widt h of t he green port ion.
Markline St yle – The st yle of markline t o mark on t he original edge of t he plat e. The available markline st yles is
det ermined in t he Pl at e > Plat e Green - Markline Type in t he Assign Markline St yles Window (page 332).
St ruct ure > Pl at es > NC Machi nes
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > NC Machi nes
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e NC Machi nes
Procedure ....... NC Machi nes (page 9 0)
Opens t he NC Machines window, let t ing you creat e and edit NC machines.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
338
NC Machi nes Window
Export – Checked NC machines will be export ed when you click Export XML.
NC Machine – The name of each NC machine.
Fast Feed – The NC machine’s f ast t ravel f eed rat e.
Bevel Capabilit y – The NC Machine’s capabilit y t o cut bevel angles. None, ThreeTorch (or single pass), or Mult ipass.
Mult ipass requires mult iple passes t o cut a K t ype bevel.
In Use – Indi cat es wit h a checkmark which NC machines are current ly assigned t o nest s.
New – Creat es a new NC machine.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed NC machine.
Import – Let s you import NC machines f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat was export ed f rom anot her project .
Export XML – Export s t he checked Export NC machines t o an XML f ile. That can be import ed int o anot her project .
St ruct ure > Pl at es > Bevel St andards
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > Bevel St andards
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e Bevel St andards
Procedure ....... Bevel St andards (page 8 5)
Opens the Bevel St andards window, let t ing you creat e and edit bevel st andards.
St ruct ure > Pl at es > Bevel Set t i ngs
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Pl at es > Bevel Set t i ngs
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Pl at e Bevel St andards
Procedure ....... Aut omat i c Bevel s (page 8 8)
Opens t he Bevel Set t i ngs window, let t ing you conf igure aut omat ic beveling.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
339
St ruct ure > Prof i l es > Endcut Cat al og
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Prof i l es > Endcut Cat al og
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Prof i l e Endcut Def i ni t i ons
Procedure ....... Endcut s (page 9 2)
Opens t he Endcut Def i ni t i ons window, let t ing you creat e and edit prof ile st ock endcut s.
Endcut s are made f rom mult iple cut s. A cut is made f rom a st andard shape t hat is ext ruded and t hen subt ract ed f rom t he
end of t he st if f ener. A cut can be direct ed t hrough t he web or t hrough t he f lange. Endcut s cannot be made f rom drawings
anymore, so you will need t o det ermine t he t ype of cut s needed t o reproduce t he f rom-drawing cut .
The Endcut Cat alog now includes a dynamic preview t hat shows t he current endcut on one of t he st if f ener st ocks t hat it
has been assigned t o. If t he preview shows not hing, right -click in t he preview window and click Zoom Ext ent s.
Cut values can be decimal values or a f ormula. Clicking shows t he Formula window.
Endcut Formulas
Endcut f ormulas allow you t o creat e a single endcut f or mult iple size st ocks. You can simply t ype t he endcut f ormula in
t he value f ield or use t he calculat or. The calculat or shows you all t he possible operat ions and keywords.
Not e: Current ly, negat ive values must be ent ered inside parent hesis as (-37.5)
Cut Propert ies
Applied To
Web – If t his is checked, t he cut is ext ruded across t he web of t he st if f ener.
Fl ange – If t his is checked, t he cut is ext ruded across t he f lange of t he st if f ener.
Si ze -- Vari es depending on t he cut .
Ori gi n
Locat ion X – Dist ance f rom t he end of t he st if f ener t o place t he origin of t he cut . In most cases t his will be 0.
Locat ion Y – Dist ance f rom t he base (moldline point ) t o place t he origin of t he cut .
Rot at i on – Clockwise rot at ion angle of t he cut
Dept h -- The cut dept h allows you t o apply a cut t o only a port ion of t he st if f ener like only one f lange of an I-beam.
Cut Dept h St art – The st art lengt h of t he cut . If t he cut is a web cut , t hen t he Dept h St art is across t he web wit h 0
being t he moldline posit ion.
MIN – Lef t most ext ent of t he cross sect ion. (For Applied t o: Flange it is t he bot t ommost ext ent .)
MAX – Right most ext ent of t he cross sect ion. (For Applied t o: Flange it is t he t opmost ext ent .)
Cut Dept h End – The end lengt h of t he cut .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
340
To open t he endcut cat alog window
1. In Manager, choose St ruct ure > Prof iles > Endcut Cat alog (page 339), or click on t he but t on on t he Manager
t ool bar.
To add a cut t o an endcut
1. Sel ect an endcut f rom t he Endcut s list .
2. Cl i ck t he Add Cut but t on.
To assign a st ock t o an endcut
Endcut s need t o be assigned t o t he specif ic prof ile st ocks t hat t hey can be applied t o. This cont rols t he st ruct ural modeler
f rom making mist akes and select ing a wrong endcut f or a st if f ener.
1. Sel ect Endcut s f rom t he Endcut s list .
2. Cl i ck Assi gn St ock. Exist ing assignment s will be checked already.
3. Check t he st ocks you want t o allow t he select ed endcut s t o be applied t o.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
341
Endcut Def i ni t i ons Window
Endcut s – List s available endcut s and let s you creat e and edit endcut s.
In Use – Indicat es wit h a checkmark which endcut s are current ly in use in t he project .
Export – Checked endcut s will be export ed when you click Export XML.
Endcut Name – The name of t he endcut . Cut s are indicat ed as sub element s of t he Endcut Name.
New Endcut – Creat es a new endcut .
Delet e Endcut – Delet es t he select ed endcut . You cannot delet e an endcut t hat is in use by a part .
Add Cut – Adds a cut t o t he select ed endcut .
Remove Cut – Removes t he select ed cut f rom it s endcut .
Assi gn St ock – Opens t he Endcut Assignment window f or t he select ed endcut , let t ing you select t he prof ile st ocks t o
which t he endcut can be applied.
Import – Let s you import f langes f rom anot her project or f rom an XML f ile t hat was export ed f rom anot her project .
Export XML – Export s t he checked Export f langes t o an XML f ile.
Cut Propert ies – List s and let s you edit t he propert ies of t he select ed cut .
Applied t o – Def ines whet her t he cut is applied t o t he Web or Flange of t he prof ile st ock part .
Size, Origin, Dept h – Let s you specif y t he size, origin, and dept h of t he cut .
The Size values are dif f erent f or each cut t ype.
When you select or edit a value, t he image below t he Propert ies i ndi cat es it s ef f ect . The image is dif f erent when select ing
or edit ing Si ze values, Origin values, or Dept h values.
To specif y a const ant value, ent er t he value. To specif y a variable value (based on t he web or f lange dimensions of t he
prof ile st ock), click t o open t he Endcut Formula window and ent er a f ormula.
Endcut Previ ew – A preview image of t he select ed endcut applied t o t he select ed St ock. Only st ocks assigned t o t he end
cut are available t o preview f or t he select ed endcut .
Right Click Menu – There is a right click menu f or t he Preview. This menu let s you change t he view of t he preview.
St ock – The prof ile st ock used in t he Endcut Preview.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
342
St ruct ure > Prof i l es > Green St andards
Menu ............... St ruct ure > Prof i l es > Green St andards
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t Prof i l e Green St andards
Procedure ....... Prof i l e Green St andards (page 95)
Green is def ined as added st ock on a part t hat allows f or some correct ion during f it up. Typically t his happens at erect ion
joint s or unit breaks. Adding green keeps any endcut or t rims and ext ends t he lengt h of t he st if f ener f rom it s longest
point . Changing a green st andard will af f ect all part s using t hat st andard.
Prof i l e Green St andards
In Use – Indicat es wit h a checkmark if t he green st andard is used in part s.
Green St andard Name – The name of t he green st andard. This name is not displayed in product ion drawings but can
be seen in report s. Names must be unique.
Lengt h – The amount of green t o add t o st if f eners t hat have t his green applied.
New – Creat es a new green st andard.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed green st andard. You cannot delet e green st andards t hat are used in part s.
St ruct ure > St andard Part s
Menu ............... St ruct ure > St andard Part s
Tool bar ............ None
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Manager > Edi t St ruct ural St andards
Procedure ....... St andard Part s Def i ni t i on (page 97)
Opens t he St andard Part s window, let t ing you creat e and edit st andard (st ruct ural) part s.
Piping > St ock Cat alog
Opens t he Pipe St ock Cat alog, let t ing you creat e and edit pipe library it ems. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
343
Piping > Pipe Benders
Opens t he Pipe Bending Machines window, let t ing you creat e and edit pipe bending machines. See Pipe Bending
Machines in t he Pipe manual f or det ails.
Pi pi ng > User-Def ined At t ribut es
Opens t he User-Def ined At t ribut es window, let t ing you creat e and edit user-def ined at t ribut es f or pipe part s and st ocks.
See User-Def ined At t ribut es (page 51).
HVAC > St ock Cat alog
Opens t he HVAC Cat alog St ock Edit or, let t ing you creat e and edit end t reat ment s, HVAC st ocks, cat alogs, specs, and
connect ions. See t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
HVAC > Sheet St ocks
Opens t he Sheet St ocks window, let t ing you creat e and edit sheet st ocks. See Sheet Stocks in t he HVACmanual f or
det ai l s.
HVAC > User-Def i ned At t ri but es
Opens t he User-Def ined At t ribut es window, let t ing you creat e and edit user-def ined at t ribut es f or HVAC part s and st ocks.
See User-Def ined At t ribut es (page 51).
Equi pment > Equi pment Cl ass Edi t or
Opens t he Equipment Class Edit or, let t ing you creat e and edit equipment it ems. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails.
Penet rat i ons > St andards
Opens t he Penet rat ion St andard Edit or, let t ing you creat e and edit penet rat ion st andards. See t he Pipe manual f or
det ai l s.
Dat abase Ut ilit ies > Raw Dat a
Opens t he Dat abase Raw Dat a window, let t ing you display and edit t he raw dat a cont ained in t he project dat abase. See
t he Project Management manual f or det ails.
Window >
Let s you swit ch t o open windows in Manager.
Not e: If no windows are open, t he Window menu is empt y.
Toolbars
Equi pment Tool bar
Insert Equipment Part
See t he Pipe manual f or det ails.
Hul l Tool bar
See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Hul l Curve Tool bar
See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Hul l Expand Tool bar
See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
344
Hul l Pi n Ji g Tool bar
See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Hul l Porcupi ne Tool bar
See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Hul l St ri nger Tool bar
See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Hul l Surf ace Tool bar
See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Label s Tool bar
Label Propert i es
Penet rat i ons Tool bar
Creat e Penet rat ion
See t he Equipment and Penetrations manual f or det ails.
Shi pConst ruct or Tool bar
Navigat or
See ShipConst ruct or > Navigat or (page 348)
Model Li nk
See ShipConst ruct or > Model Link (page 362)
Manager
See ShipConst ruct or > Manager (page 362)
Report
See t he Project Management manual f or det ails.
St ruct ural Tool s Tool bar
Mirror about Cent erline
See SC Ut ilit ies > Mirror about Cent erline (page 439)
3D t o 2D
See SC Ut ilit ies > 3D t o 2D (page 435)
St ruct ure Tool bar
New Planar Group
See St ruct ure Page (page 351)
Move Planar Group
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
345
See SC St ruct ure > Move Planar Group (page 427)
Mark Group Int ersect ions
See SC St ruct ure > Mark Group Int ersect ions (page 372)
Swap Const ruct ion Line
See SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Swap Const ruct ion Line (page 420)
Replace Hull Trace
See SC St ruct ure > Const ruct ion Line > Replace Hull Trace (page 421)
St ruct ure Pl at e Fl yout
Creat e Plat e
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > New
Edit Plat e
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit
Creat e Corrugat ed Plat e
See SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > New
Edit Corrugat ed Pl at e
See SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > Edit
St ruct ure Fl ange Pl at e Fl yout
Flange Plat e
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Flange
Edit Flange
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Flange
St ruct ure Green Fl yout
Add Green
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Green
Open Green Manager
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Green
St ruct ure Part Obj ect s Fl yout
Add Object s t o Part
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Object s (page 383)
Remove Object s f rom Part
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Remove Object s (page 385).
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
346
Manage Cut out s
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Cut out s (page 385)
Edit Component
See SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edit Component (page 414)
Add Manual Cut out
See SC St ruct ure > Part s > Add Manual Cut out s (page 417)
St ruct ure Corner Treat ment Fl yout
Insert Corner Treat ment
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Corner Treat ment > Insert
Remove Corner Treat ment
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Corner Treat ment > Remove
Display Corner Treat ment s
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Corner Treat ment > Display (page 387)
Manage Dat um Lines
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Dat um Lines (page 389)
Manage Weld Shrinkage Icon
See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage Weld Shrinkage Icon (page 389)
St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout
Creat e St if f ener
See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New (page 391)
Creat e St if f ener f rom Point s
See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New f rom Point s
Edit St if f ener
See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Edit
Insert Cut out
See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Insert
Edit Cut out s
See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Edit (page 396)
Trim St if f ener
See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Trim
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
347
St ruct ure Facepl at e Fl yout
Creat e Faceplat e
See SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > New
Edit Faceplat e
See SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Edit
Part List
See SC St ruct ure > Part s > List (page 410)
Insert St andard Part
See SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part (page 423)
St ruct ure Di spl ay Tool bar
St ruct ure Di spl ay
See SC St ruct ure > Show / Hide Opt ions
Toggle Show Product ion
See SC St ruct ure > Show / Hide Opt ions
Toggle Show Solid
See SC St ruct ure > Show / Hide Opt ions
Toggl e Show Draf t
See SC St ruct ure > Show / Hide Opt ions
Ut i l i t i es Tool bar
3D View
See SC Ut ilit ies > 3D Viewpoint
Act ivat e UCS
See SC Ut ilit ies > Act ivat e UCS
Hide Object s
See SC Ut ilit ies > Hide Object s (page 432)
Unhide Object s
See SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide Object s
Snap
See SC Ut ilit ies > Snap
Layers Fl yout
Move Geomet ry t o Layer
See SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Move Geomet ry t o
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
34 8
Copy Object s t o Layer
See SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Copy Geomet ry t o
Act ivat e Layer
See SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Act ivat e
Deact ivat e Layer
See SC Ut ilit ies > Layer > Deact ivat e (page 437)
FlyThrough
See FlyThrough (page 206)
Tool Pat h
See SC Ut ilit ies > Toolpat h (page 438)
Dihedral Angle
See SC Ut ilit ies > Dihedral Angle (page 439)
Reload Drawing
See SC Ut ilit ies > Reload Drawing (page 440)
Shi pConst ruct or Menu
Shi pConst ruct or > Navi gat or
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Shi pConst ruct or t ab > Navi gat i on panel > Navi gat or
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Navi gat or
Tool bar ............
Command ...... SCNAVIGATE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he Navi gat or, let t ing you creat e and open drawings and perf orm ot her drawing-relat ed f unct ions.
Not e: You must use Navigat or t o creat e, open, or move drawings so t hat ShipConst ruct or can keep t rack of t hem. Do
not use Windows Explorer, or ShipConst ruct or will not be able t o properly associat e t he drawings wit h t he project .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
349
Navi gat or
Component List – Each project is divided int o several component s or f olders. The component s of t he current project are
list ed in t he Component List . The f irst component is t he project name. Wit hin t he project are one or more unit s and
several project -wide component s (Hull, Space Allocat ion, Nest , Prof ile Plot , Templat es). Wit hin each unit are several unit -
relat ed component s (St ruct ure, Pipe, HVAC, Support m, Spools, Support Const ruct ion, Equipment , Product Hierarchy,
Int erf erence, Weld Management , Assembly, Composit e, Approval, Export ). When you select an it em in t he Component
List , t he associat ed drawings are list ed in t he Drawing List and t he associat ed but t ons are displayed on t he Page.
To cust omize t he Component List , right -click wit hin it and choose Cust omize t o open t he Cust omize t he Navigat or
window. Select t he it ems you want t o appear in t he Component List and click OK.
Drawi ng Li st – The Drawing List list s t he drawings associat ed wit h t he select ed it em in t he Component List .
Each drawing in t he Drawing List is displayed wit h t he f ollowing:
• A lock icon, (locked) or (unlocked) – Clicking t he lock icon locks (or unlocks) t he drawing so it cannot (or can) be
modif ied. (If clicking t he lock icon does not seem t o work, you may not have permissions t o lock and unlock t he
appropriat e drawing f iles.)
• Drawi ng name – Right -click on t he drawing name t o display a menu of commands.
• User – The name of t he user who current ly has t he drawing open (as read/ writ e).
• Last Dat e Modif ied – The dat e t hat t he drawing was last modif ied. (You may need t o scroll across or resize Navigat or
t o see t his inf ormat ion.)
Previ ew – The Preview is a preview image of t he drawing select ed in t he Drawing List .
Somet imes a preview image does not appear. If ShipConst ruct or has aut omat ically modif ied a drawing (f or example, if
you make a change in one drawing, ShipConstruct or may aut omat ically updat e ot her drawings), a preview image does
not appear unt il t he next t ime you open and save t he drawing.
Page – The Page but t ons let you perf orm f unct ions relat ed t o t he select ed it em in t he Drawing List . The f ollowing it ems
are f ound on all pages:
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
350
• Read Only – If t his is t urned on when you open a drawing, you cannot modif y and save t he drawing. If Read Only is
t urned of f when you open a drawing, you can modif y and save t he drawing.
• Cl ose Current – If t his is t urned on when you open a drawing, ShipConst ruct or will aut omat ically close t he current
drawing. This opt ion is only available when you are working in mult iple document int erf ace (MDI) mode.
ShipConst ruct or has been opt imized f or single drawing compat ibilit y mode (SDI), so we recommend using SDI mode.
To swt ich bet ween MDI mode and SDI mode, t ype “ SDI” at t he Aut oCAD command line. Use “ 1” f or SDI.
Ot her it ems are dif f erent f or each page (see below).
Proj ect Page
The Proj ect page let s you creat e, open, and modif y unit drawings and perf orm project -relat ed f unct i ons.
Change Project – Opens t he Regist er Project window, let t ing you swit ch t o anot her project .
User Permi ssi ons – Opens t he User Permissions window (See General > User Permissions (page 313)).
Set t i ngs – Opens t he Project Set t ings window (See General > Project Set t ings (page 309)).
Open – Opens t he select ed unit drawing.
New Uni t – Adds a unit t o t he current project . See Creat e Unit s (page 107) f or det ails.
Rel oad DB – Reloads t he set t ings f rom t he project dat abase int o ShipConst ruct or. Use Reload DB whenever you make
changes t o t he project set t ings in Manager.
Revi si ons – Displays changes made t o t he current project . See ShipConst ruct or > Revisions f or det ails.
Uni t Page
The Uni t page let s you open a unit drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
351
St ruct ure Page
The St ruct ure page let s you creat e, open, and modif y st ruct ural drawings (planar group drawings and curved plat e
drawings) belonging t o t he regist ered unit . See St ruct ure Modeling Concept s (page 125).
Open
Opens t he select ed st ruct ural drawing. If you t urn on Read Only, you will not be able t o modif y and save changes t o t he
drawi ng.
New
See ShipConst ruct or > Planar Group > New.
Propert i es
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Creat e/ Del et e Drawi ngs
Procedure ....... Edi t Pl anar Group Propert i es (page 132)
Opens t he Edit Group Propert ies window, let t ing you edit t he propert ies of t he select ed planar group drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Creat e/ Del et e Drawi ngs
Procedure ....... Del et e a Pl anar Group (page 132)
Delet es t he select ed planar group drawing and all t he part s in it .
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, delet e, or modif y t he propert ies of t he select ed st ruct ural drawing or creat e a new
st ruct ural drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
352
Pi pe Page
The Pipe page let s you creat e, open, and modif y pipe drawings. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails.
HVAC Page
The HVAC page let s you creat e, open, and modif y HVAC drawings. See t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
Support Page
The Support page let s you creat e, open, and modif y Support and Hanger drawings. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails.
Pi pe Spool Page
The Pipe Spool page let s you creat e, open, and modif y pipe spool drawings. See t he Pipe manual f or det ails.
HVAC Spool Page
The HVAC Spool page let s you creat e, open, and modif y HVAC spool drawings. See t he HVACmanual f or det ails.
Support Const ruct i on Page
The Support Const ruct ion page let s you creat e, open, and modif y support const ruct ion drawings. See t he Pipe manual f or
det ai l s.
Equi pment Page
The Equipment page let s you creat e, open, and modif y equipment drawings. See t he Equipment manual f or det ails.
Product Hierarchy Page
The Product Hierarchy page let s you creat e, open, rename, or delet e product hierarchy drawings. See Product Hierarchies
(page 108).
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, rename, or delet e t he select ed product hierarchy drawing or creat e a new product
hi erarchy drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
353
Open
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he select ed product hierarchy drawing.
New
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Product Hi erarchy
Procedure ....... Creat e a Product Hi erarchy Drawi ng (page 111)
Creat es a new product hierarchy drawing. A product hierarchy drawing is used t o visualize t he part s in t he unit when
developing t he product hierarchy t ree of part s. This drawing will cont ain read-only copies of t he part s t hat can be select ed
i ndi vi dual l y.
Rename
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Product Hi erarchy
Procedure ....... Rename a Product Hi erarchy Drawi ng (page 114)
Let s you rename t he select ed product hierarchy drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Product Hi erarchy
Procedure ....... Del et e a Product Hi erarchy Drawi ng (page 114)
Delet es t he select ed product hierarchy drawing.
Int erf erence Page
The Int erf erence page let s you creat e, open, rename, or delet e int erf erence drawings.
Open
Permi ssi ons ... General > None
Opens t he select ed int erf erence drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
354
New
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Int erf erence
Creat es a new int erf erence drawing.
Updat e
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Int erf erence
Updat es t he select ed int erf erence drawing based on t he lat est drawings. This only updat es solids f rom drawings t hat you
originally checked when you creat ed t he int erf erence drawing.
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, rename, updat e, or delet e t he select ed int erf erence drawing or creat e a new
int erf erence drawing.
New, Rename, Updat e, and Del et e require General > Edit Int erf erence permissions.
Wel d Management Page
The Weld Management page let s you creat e, open, and modif y weld management drawings. See t he Weld Management
manual f or det ails.
Assembl y Page
The Assembly page let s you open or creat e assembly drawings. See Assembly Drawings (page 212).
Open – Opens t he select ed assembly drawing.
Creat e – Creat es a new assembly drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
355
Updat e Keymap – Creat es or updat es t he drawing KEYMAP t hat cont ains t he HullTrace const ruct ion lines f or t he current
unit . The Keymap drawing is ref erenced in assembly drawings as an overlay of t he current assembly. It gives ref erence t o
where t he assembly is locat ed in t he unit or vessel. The keymap drawing can cont ain any object s. It is recommended t hat
you prepare t he keymap drawing af t er it creat ed.
Show Out of Dat e – Shows a next t o each drawing t hat has part s in it t hat have changed, part s t hat have been added
or removed.
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, rename, or delet e t he selected product hierarchy drawing or creat e a new product
hi erarchy drawing.
Reat t ach Drawing
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs – Edi t
Reat t aches an exist ing drawing t o a regist ered assembly drawing t hat has it s drawing f ile missing. The select ed drawing
is checked t o ensure it is an assembly drawing. The assembly drawing needs t o show as an assembly drawing icon in
t he Navigat or t o be elligable f or reat t aching.
Composi t e Page
The Composit e Page let s you creat e and open composit e drawings (drawings t hat you can use t o MLink in ot her drawings
in order t o see mult iple modules t oget her). See Set Up Composit e Drawings (page 17).
Open
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he select ed composit e drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
356
New
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Composi t e Drawi ngs
Creat es a new composit e drawing.
Ri ght -Click Menu
Let s you open, rename, or delet e t he select ed composit e drawing or creat e a new composit e drawing.
Rename
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Composi t e Drawi ngs
Let s you rename t he select ed composit e drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Composi t e Drawi ngs
Delet es t he select ed composit e drawing.
Approval Page
The Approval page let s you creat e and open approval drawings.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
357
Open
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he select ed approval drawing.
New
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Approval Drawi ngs
Creat es a new approval drawing.
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, rename, or delet e t he select ed approval drawing or creat e a new approval drawing.
Rename
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Approval Drawi ngs
Let s you rename t he select ed approval drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Approval Drawi ngs
Delet es t he select ed approval drawing.
Export Page
The Export page let s you export any number of ShipConst ruct or drawings t o a st andard Aut oCAD drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
358
Open
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he select ed export drawing.
New
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Export Drawi ngs
Creat es a new export drawing.
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, rename, or delet e t he select ed export drawing or creat e a new export drawing.
Rename
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Export Drawi ngs
Let s you rename t he select ed export drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Export Drawi ngs
Delet es t he select ed export drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
359
Hul l Page
The Hul l page let s you creat e, open, and modif y hull drawings. See t he Hull manual f or det ails.
Space Al l ocat i on Page
The Space Allocat i on page let s you creat e, open, and modif y space allocat ion drawings. See t he Space Allocation manual
f or det ails.
Nest Page
The Nest page let s you creat e, open, and delet e nest drawings. See Plat e Nest ing (page 233).
Open
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he select ed nest drawing.
New
Permi ssi ons ... Pl at e Nest > Edi t Pl at e Nest s
Creat es a new nest drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... Pl at e Nest > Edi t Pl at e Nest s
Delet es t he select ed nest drawing or f older.
Unnest ed Part s
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > List Un-nest ed Part s (page 488).
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
360
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open or delet e t he select ed nest drawing, creat e a new f older wit hin t he nest drawing lit s, or
creat e a new nest drawing.
New Folder
Permi ssi ons ... None
Creat es a new f older wit hin t he select ed f older in t he nest drawing list .
Prof i l e Pl ot Page
The Prof ile Plot page let s you creat e and open prof ile plot drawings. See Prof ile Plot s (page 274).
Open
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he select ed prof ile plot drawing.
New
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Edi t Prof i l e Pl ot s
Creat es a new prof ile plot drawing.
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, rename, or delet e t he select ed prof ile plot drawing or creat e a new prof ile plot
drawi ng.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
361
Rename
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Edi t Prof i l e Pl ot s
Let s you rename t he select ed prof ile plot drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Edi t Prof i l e Pl ot s
Delet es t he select ed prof ile plot drawing.
Templ at es Page
The Templat es page let s you creat e and open various t ypes of t emplat e drawings.
Open
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he select ed t emplat e drawing.
New [Templat e Name]
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Creat es a new t emplat e drawing. The name of t he but t on and t he t ype of t emplat e drawing creat ed is based on t he
select ed f older in t he Drawing List .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
362
Ri ght -Click Menu – Let s you open, rename, or delet e t he select ed t emplat e drawing or creat e a new t emplat e drawing.
Rename
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Let s you rename t he select ed t emplat e drawing.
Del et e
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Delet es t he select ed t emplat e drawing.
Shi pConst ruct or > Manager
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Shi pConst ruct or t ab > Appl i cat i ons panel > Manager
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Manager
Tool bar ............
Command ...... SCMANAGER
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he Manager window, let t ing you set up project set t ings, project libraries, and user permissions.
Shi pConst ruct or > Proj ect > New Proj ect
See t he Project Management manual.
Shi pConst ruct or > Proj ect > Copy Proj ect
See t he Project Management manual.
Shi pConst ruct or > Model Li nk
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Shi pConst ruct or t ab > Navi gat i on panel > Model Li nk
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Model Li nk
Tool bar ............
Command ...... SCMLINK
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Insert (Li nk) a Drawi ng i nt o Anot her Drawi ng (page 1 8)
Let s you insert (link) drawings int o t he current drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
363
MLi nk Manager
The MLink Manager list s all of t he drawings in t he project . You can mlink a drawing int o t he current drawing by clicking it s
check box so a checkmark appears. You can remove an mlinked drawing f rom t he current drawing by clicking it s check
box so it is empt y.
Uncheck All – Unchecks all drawings in t he list .
Rel oad – Reloads all mlinked drawings (based on t he lat est saved version) int o t he current drawing. For example, if
changes have been made t o mlinked drawings, you may want t o Reload t hem int o t he current drawing.
Lock – Locks t he layer t hat t he MLink is placed on. Each MLink is placed on it s own layer.
New MLinks – Only newly added MLinks will be placed on locked layers
All MLinks – All MLinks are placed on locked layers.
Shi pConst ruct or > Pl anar Group > Transf er Obj ect s t o Group
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es > Transf er Obj ect s t o Group
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Pl anar Group > Transf er Obj ect s t o Group
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCTRANSFER
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Transf er Obj ect s f rom One Pl anar Group Drawi ng t o Anot her (page 132)
......................... Transf er Obj ect s f rom a Uni t Drawi ng t o a Pl anar Group Drawi ng (page 13 3)
Let s you t ransf er object s f rom a unit drawing or a hull drawing t o a planar group drawing.
Shi pConst ruct or > Penet rat i on Manager
See t he Pipe manual.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
364
Shi pConst ruct or > Check > Check Proj ect
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Check > Check Proj ect
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCHECKPROJECT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Check a Uni t (page 204)
Runs t he Check Unit command on all unit s in t he project . The opt ion t o repair errors or just log errors is displayed bef ore
t he check is run. (See Procedure: Check a Unit ).
Check Project will also check all t emplat e drawings. Repair Errors will conf irm t hat t he regist ered f iles exist and t hat all
f iles f ound of t hose t ypes are regist ered.
Shi pConst ruct or > Check > Check Uni t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Check > Check Uni t
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCHECKUNIT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Check a Uni t (page 204)
Checks t he 3D Unit drawing and all planar group model drawings wit hin t he unit . An opt ion t o repair errors or log errors is
displayed bef ore t he check is run. If Repair Errors is not select ed, any modif icat ions list ed below will not be perf ormed.
Check Unit will perf orm t he f ollowing checks:
• Makes sure t he 3D Unit drawing f ile exist s. If t he 3D Unit drawing does not exist , t hen an empt y 3D Unit drawing
will be creat ed.
• Checks t o see if ShipConst ruct or specif ic drawing inf ormat ion exist s in drawing. If t he unit drawing does not
have t his drawing inf ormat ion or it is corrupt , ShipConst ruct or will creat e or f ix t he drawing inf ormat ion.
• Calls t he Planar Group Check f or all planar group model drawings in t he unit
• Checks t hat all markings lie wit hin t he boundaries of t he part t hat t hey are associat ed wit h. If any part of a mark
symbol or t ext lies out side t he part boundary, it will be not ed in t he generat ed log f ile.
• Checks t hat t he t emplat e drawings f or Assembly, Pipe/ HVAC/ Equipment Arrangement , and Pipe/ HVAC Spool
drawings exist and are regist ered t o t he project . Repair Errors will regist er any f iles not already regist ered and
missing drawing f iles will be removed.
Not e: Unlike ShipConst ruct or 2005, checking a unit does not xref all t he planar group model drawings int o t he 3D Unit
drawi ng.
Shi pConst ruct or > Check > Check Templ at es
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Check > Check Templ at es
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCHECKTEMPLATES
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Checks t hat all regist ered drawings exist , and t hat all f iles in t he Templat e f olders are regist ered. Repair Errors will creat e
missing drawings, or regist er un-regist ered drawi ngs.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
365
Shi pConst ruct or > Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es > Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUPDATEMODELANDSYSTEMDRAWINGSQUICK
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Updat e Model and Syst em Drawi ngs (page 205)
Recreat es or updat es select ed model and syst em drawings f rom t he dat abase.
Shi pConst ruct or > Product Hi erarchy
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Shi pConst ruct or t ab > Navi gat i on panel > Product Hi erarchy
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Product Hi erarchy
Tool bar ............ Assembl y >
Command ...... SCPRODUCTHIERARCHY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Product Hi erarchi es (page 108)
See SC Product Hierarchy > Develop Product Hierarchy (page 478)
Shi pConst ruct or > Prof i l e Nest ing
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Nest > Prof i l e Nest i ng
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Prof i l e Nest i ng
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCPROFILENEST
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Prof i l e Nest > Prof i l e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Prof i l e Nest i ng (page 2 8 5)
Opens t he Prof ile Nest window and Prof ile Nest Manager window, let t ing you nest part s on prof ile st ocks.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
366
Prof i l e Nest Manager
Show Part s/ Nest s of Type – List s t he prof ile st ocks used in t he unit . Select a prof ile st ock t o display a list of part s (under
Unnest ed Part s) and a list of nest s (under Nest s) f or t hat st ock.
Endcut Filt er – Filt ers t he Unnest ed Part s list based on endcut t ype. Only part s having t he select ed endcut t ypes (at eit her
end of t he part ) are displayed. You can also select No Endcut s t o display part s wit hout endcut s.
Bend Filt er – Filt ers t he Unnest ed Part s list t o display St raight Part s, Bent Part s, and Curved Part s.
Trim Filt er – Filt ers t he Unnest ed Part s list t o display Trimmed Part s and Non-Trimmed Part s.
St andard Assemblies – If checked, t he f ilt er will display assemblies f rom st andard assemblies, and t heir part s.
Purchased – If checked, St andard Assemblies t agged as “ Purchased” will also be displayed.
Dist . Sys. Support s – If checked, Dist ribut ed Syst ems Support s are displayed.
Nest ed Part s – Includes nest ed part s in t he Unnest ed Part s list .
Unnest ed Part s – List s unnest ed part s t hat use t he select ed prof ile st ock (under Show Part s/ Nest s of Type) and let s you
add part s t o nest s.
Add – Adds t he part s select ed under Unnest ed Part s t o t he nest s select ed under Nest s. If no nest is select ed,
ShipConst ruct or t ries t o creat e nest s f or t he select ed part s.
Remove – Unnest s t he part s select ed under Nest s or unnest s all part s f rom nest select ed under Nest s.
Nest s – List s t he nest s f or t he select ed prof ile st ock (under Show Part s/ Nest s of Type), and t he part s wit hin each nest .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
367
Creat e Nest s – Creat es an empt y prof ile nest .
Delet e Select ed Nest s – Delet es t he select ed prof ile nest s and unnest s any part s wit hin t hem.
Issue Select ed Nest s – Marks t he select ed prof ile nest s as issued, indicat ing t hat it is available f or product ion t o cut .
Un-issue Select ed Nest s – Removes t he select ed prof ile nest s’ issued st at us.
Cut Select ed Nest s – Marks t he select ed prof ile nest s as cut, indicat ing t hat t he physical plat es have been cut .
Un-cut Select ed Nest s – Removes t he select ed prof ile nest s’ cut st at us.
Check All Visible Nest s – Checks all nest s (list ed under Nest s) t o see if any part s have been changed, t hat t he part s st ill
f it on t he nest s and t heir remnant s, and if t he st ock of any of t he part s has been changed. If any part propert ies have
changed, ShipConst ruct or displays a t ext f ile cont aining a list of t he changes
Show Nest s – Filt ers t he Nest s list t o display UnIssued nest s, Issued nest s, and Cut nest s.
Shi pConst ruct or > Revi si ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Revi si ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCREVISIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... See bel ow
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
368
This window queries revi si ons in t he current project . Each revision has t he f ollowing value:
By def ault , select ing t he Search but t on wit hout changing any opt ions shows all revisions t o t he project , but t he number of
revisions can be quit e large. Various opt ions are given f or rest rict ing t he number of ret rieved revi si ons:
• Cat egory – The cat egory of revisions (Cat egory column) f rom dif f erent areas of ShipConst ruct or. At least one
cat egory needs t o be select ed.
• Revision Type – The t ype of revision (Type column). At least one t ype needs t o be select ed. Right -click opt ions allow
you t o select all or select none.
• From and To – Opt ional – Provides a st art ing and ending dat e f or revision dat e (Dat e column). To provide a dat e,
sel ect t he check box and select t he dat e area.
• Dat e Sort Order – Det ermines t he dat e sort direct ion
Descending (present t o past ) order.
Ascending (past t o present ) order.
• Object – Opt ional – The object t he revision pert ains t o.
• User Name – Opt i onal – The username of t he person making t he change.
• Rows Per Page – Det ermines how many revisions t o ret rieve per page. Revisions are ret urned in pages since t he
number of revisions can be quit e large. If t he number of revisions exceeds t he rows per page, t he remaining
revisions will be available in successive pages.
• Search – Runs t he query t o f et ch rows of revisions.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
369
Ot her opt ions:
• Fi l t er Row – Af t er rows are f et ched, f urt her f ilt ering is perf ormed in t he f ilt er row.
• Export Page – A page can be export ed t o a f ile in t hese f ormat s: Text , Microsof t Excel™, or HTML.
• Clear Filt ers – Clears t he f ilt er row.
• Row right -click – Allows you t o select search values using values in t he current ly select ed row.
Shi pConst ruct or > Fl yThrough
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Shi pConst ruct or t ab > Appl i cat i ons > Fl yThrough
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Fl yThrough
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCFLY
Permi ssi ons ... Fl yThrough
Procedure ....... St art Fl yThrough (page 207)
Shi pConst ruct or > Li censi ng
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Shi pConst ruct or t ab > Appl i cat i ons > Li censi ng
Menu ............... Shi pConst ruct or > Li censi ng
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCLICENSE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Get Li censes (page 1 3)
Let s you obt ain and change licenses f or individual ShipConst ruct or modules.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
370
Li censi ng Window
Net work – Opens t he Net work License Set t ings window, let t ing you set up a list of comput ers ShipConst ruct or searches
f or licenses. ShipConst ruct or searches f or licenses f rom t he servers in t he order t hey are list ed in t he Net work License
Set t i ngs window.
• LicenseServer – The list of comput ers t hat have net work locks at t ached t o t hem. Any comput er wit h ShipConst ruct or
inst alled can be a license server. You can specif y comput ers using TCP/ IP address, comput er name, or
\ \ DOMAIN\ comput er. The <Local Comput er> address is equivalent t o IP: 127.0.0.1. Only net work locks will allow
licenses t o be used across a net work.
• New – Adds a new license server t o t he list .
• Delet e – Delet es t he select ed license server f rom t he list . The list must have at least one comput er in it . If you t ry t o
delet e all license servers, t he <Local Comput er> it em is added aut omat ically.
• Move Up – Moves t he select ed server up in t he list .
• Move Down – Moves t he select ed server down in t he list .
• Port – The def ault port is 3960. You should not need t o change t his value unless t here is a port conf lict wit h anot her
program. If you change t he port number, you must also change t he port number on all license servers.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
371
• OK – Saves t he list and ref reshes t he modules list in t he Licensing window.
Ref resh List – Ref reshes t he module list . This opt ion is usef ul when locks are moved or license servers are added. If new
locks are at t ached t hey will be recongnised and loaded.
Modul e – Shows which modules are available (based on available locks). The grayed out modules are not available. Use
t he check boxes t o obt ain a license f or cert ain modules.
Part s – The number of part s used in t he current project f or each module.
Level (Max Part s) – The license level and t he maximum number of part s you can have in a project f or each module. If you
have more t han one level available or dif f erent opt ions t hen you will see t he ellipsis but t on . Clicking t his but t on will
show a t able of t he available levels.
If a row is disabled t hen t hat license level is not select able and t he reason is displayed in t he st at us column.
• For St ruct ure, ManualNest , Aut omat icNest , and Prof i l eNest , t he number of st ruct ure part s per level is 750. For
example, Level 3 allows you t o work on project s wit h a maximum of 2,250 st ruct ural part s.
• For Product Hierarchy, t he number of part s per level is 1,850. For example, Level 3 allows you t o work on project s
wit h a maximum of 5,550 t ot al part s.
• For Pipe, and Dist Syst emSupport t he number of pipe part s per level is 400. For example, Level 3 allows you t o work
on project s wit h a maximum of 1,200 pipe part s.
• For Equipment , t he number of part s per level is 150. For example, Level 3 allows you t o work on project s wit h a
maximum of 450 equipment part s.
• For HVAC, t he number of part s per level is 400. For example, Level 3 allows you t o work on project s wit h a maximum
of 1,200 HVAC part s.
• For Penet rat ions, t he number of penet rat ions per level is 150. For example, Level 3 allows you t o work on project s
wit h a maximum of 450 penet rat ions.
Li c Avai l – The number of licenses available (t hat is, t he t ot al number of licenses minus t he number of licenses current ly
i n use).
Li c Tot al – The t ot al number of licenses.
St at us – Shows inf ormat ion about a license. The f ollowing is a list of st at uses and what t hey mean.
St at us Act i on
In Use All t he licenses f or t his module are used up by ot her users. You cannot get a license unt il
anot her user gives up t heir license or you f orce release t hat license using
Li censeMoni t or.
Old version The version in t he lock is lower t han t he sof t ware needs. If your maint enance and
support (UM&S) is up-t o-dat e, cont act your dealer.
License is not PS&M The license is not a Project Split & Merge (PS&M) license when t he project is a PS&M.
The project is PS&M if it is a split or t he mast er t hat has a split .
UM&S Expired! The Upgrades, Maint enance and Support (UM&S) expiry dat e is older t han t he release
dat e of t his version of t he sof t ware. Cont act your dealer in order t o renew your UM&S.
Part Count Exceeded! The License has a part count limit t hat is exceeded by t he part count in t he project .
Cont act your dealer t o upgrade t he level of t he license.
Release Dat e – The dat e t hat t he sof t ware was released.
Project Split and Merge – Indicat es if t he project is a split project or a mast er project .
Server – The name of t he license server comput er
Lock Name – The name of t he lock. This usually cont ains t he serial number as well.
Expiry Dat e – The dat e when t he lock expires.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
372
Days Lef t – The number of days unt il t he lock expires.
UM&S Dat e – The Upgrade, Maint enance & Support dat e st ored in t he lock. You are permit t ed t o inst all sof t ware t hat has
release dat es prior t o t his dat e.
Type – Indicat es if t he lock is an ordinary ShipConst ruct or lock or a PS&M (Project Split and Merge) lock.
Show t his window during Project Regist er – Displays t he Licensing window whenever you regist er a project . Turn t his
opt ion of f if you always get t he same licenses or only use a local lock. (You can open t he Licensing window using
ShipConst ruct or > Licensing).
OK – Get s t he select ed licenses f rom t he license servers.
Shi pConst ruct or > Shi pConst ruct or Hel p >
Let s you access t he ShipConst ruct or online help and individual manuals (in PDF f ormat ).
Shi pConst ruct or > About Shi pConst ruct or
Displays t he ShipConst ruct or version numbers.
Versi on – The version of t he ShipConst ruct or program.
SC St ruct ure Menu
The SC St ruct ure menu is available wit hin planar group and curved plat e drawings.
SC St ruct ure > Mark Group Int ersect i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es panel > Mark Group Int ersect i ons
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Mark Group Int ersect i ons
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCMARK
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Mark Group Int ersect i ons (page 153)
Marks t he int ersect ions bet ween a specif ied planar group plane and a plane in t he current drawing. This command will
generat e PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion lines. They cannot be moved, only ext ended. This prevent s mist akes of where
planes are locat ed. You can explode or copy t he drawing t o creat e lines t hat can be modif ied.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
373
Mark Group Int ersect i ons Wi ndow
The current drawing is indicat ed by t he icon.
The act ive UCS is aut omat ically select ed under Current Dwg UCS.
Not e: Some of t he list ed planes may not int ersect wit h planes in t he current drawing (f or example, if t heir XY planes
are parallel). Af t er you click OK, ShipConst ruct or will let you view a log f ile list ing planes t hat do not int ersect each
ot her.
Show Moldplane – Displays only t he moldplanes f rom t he project .
Show Parallel+Mold – Displays only t he moldplanes and planes parallel t o t he moldplanes f or each planar group drawing.
Show All Planes – Displays all planes f or t he whole project .
Use Solids – Fills t he t ree wit h planar groups and int ersect s t he part s in t he checked planar groups wit h t he Planes in
Current DWG.
Prof i l es – Int ersect s st if f eners and f aceplat es in t he checked planar groups wit h t he Planes in Current DWG.
Pl at es – Int ersect s plat es in t he checked planar groups wit h t he Planes in Current DWG.
Planes in Current DWG – List s t he UCS in t he current planar group drawing. By def ault , t he act ive plane is pre-select ed in
t he list .
Label – Labels t he line wit h t he name of t he group. The Size f ield let s you set t he size of t he t ext label.
Layer – Allows you t o select t he layer t he PlanarGroupPlane const ruct ion line will be placed on.
SC St ruct ure > Show / Hi de Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure Di spl ay >
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Opens t he St ruct ural Display Opt ions window.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
374
General
Pi ecemarks – Cont rols whet her t o display part ’s piecemarks in t he current drawing.
Solids – Cont rols whet her t o display part solids in t he current drawing.
Bevel Solid – Cont rols whet her t o display bevel solids if displaying part solids in t he current drawing.
St i f f ener Green – Cont rols whet her t o display st if f ener green if displaying part solids in t he current drawing.
Pl at e Part
Product ion – Cont rols whet her t o display plat e product ion object s in t he current drawing.
Bevel Text – Cont rols whet her t o display bevel t ext if displaying product ion in t he current drawing.
Cut s – Cont rols whet her t o display plat e cut object s if displaying product ion in t he current drawing.
Marks – Cont rols whet her t o display plat e mark object s if displaying product ion in t he current drawing.
Markline Text – Cont rols whet her t o display markline t ext if displaying marks in t he current drawing.
St i f f ener
St art and End Label s – Cont rols whet her t o display st art and end labels f or st if f eners in t he current drawing.
The f ollowing t oolbar but t ons provide quick access t o specif ic opt ions above.
Toggle Show Product ion
Toggle Show Solid
Toggl e Show Draf t
The f ollowing commands t oggle display opt ions f or t he current drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
375
Product i on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > Toggl e Show Pr oduct i on
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure Di spl ay >
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLEPROD
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggles t he display of product ion object s in t he current drawing.
Sol i ds
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > Toggl e Show Sol i d
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure Di spl ay >
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLESLD
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggles t he display of part solids in t he current drawing.
Draf t Layers
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > Toggl e Show Draf t
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure Di spl ay >
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLEDRFT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggles t he display of draf t object s in t he current drawing.
Pi ecemarks
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLEPMAR
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggl es t he display of piecemarks in t he current drawing.
Part Cut s
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLECUT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggl es t he display of part cut s in t he current drawing.
Part Marki ngs
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLEMARK
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggl es t he display of part markings in t he current drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
376
Part Bevel s
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLEBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggl es t he display of part bevels in t he current drawing.
Ext rusi on Greens
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLEGREEN
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggl es t he display of ext rusion greens in t he current drawing.
Ext rusi on Label s
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAYTOGGLELABEL
Permi ssi ons ... None
Toggl es t he display of ext rusion st art and end labels in t he current drawing.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > New Pl at e
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > New
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCCREATEPLATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Pl at e Part Creat i on (page 154)
Creat es a new plat e part .
Plat e part s are creat ed by picking a point inside a bounded area of cut lines. Cut lines are lines, arcs, polylines, circles,
and const ruct ion lines on t he _Draf t _Cut layer. The creat e new plat e command aut omat ically swit ches all ot her layers of f
so t hat you can verif ying t he object s t hat will be considered f or creat ing a plat e. You can alt ernat ively pre-select object s t o
def ine a plat e. This is usef ul when your cut line overlaps t he int ended edge of t he part you want t o def ine.
Part s are not added t o t he dat abase unt il t he drawing is saved.
The Plat e Propert ies window cont ains t he f ollowing t abs:
• Pl at e– Let s you select a plat e st ock and set ot her part propert ies.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
377
Name – The name t hat t he new pl at e wi l l use. Names can eit her f ollow t he naming convent ion or override t he naming
convent ion. If you manually ent er a name, t he name is not f ollowing t he naming convent ion and will not be updat ed when
propert ies of t he name change. A drop window let s you select a generat ed name f rom a list in case you do not def ine t he
part s in t he order you want t hem named.
Generat e – Generat es a new name f or t his part using t he current naming convent ion.
Override – Let s you manually creat e a name f or t his part , overriding t he current naming convent ion. This prevent s t he
name f rom changing when a part propert y t hat is part of t he name convent ion is changed.
Pl at e St ocks – The st ock t hat will be used t o creat e t he new plat e.
Throw Direct ion – The t hrow direct ion of t he plat e det ermines which way t he t hickness of t he plat e is relat ive t o t he mold
side of t he plat e. The product ion inf ormat ion is shown on t he mold side of t he plat e.
Mark Side – The mark side det ermines which side of t he plat e will f ace up when t he part is in t he nest drawing. The
displayed direct ions are det ermined by t he orient at ion of t he plat e in t he model.
Part Si de – The side of t he vessel t hat t he part is locat ed. ShipConst ruct or calculat es t his aut omat ically based on CG
posit ion.
Insert Orient at ion Icon – An orient at ion icon is aut omat ically insert ed int o t he part when t his is checked. The orient at ion
icon uses t he set t ings f rom St ruct ure > Plat es > Orient at ion Icon t o det ermine t he appearance of t he icon. The orient at ion
icon is placed in t he lower lef t area of t he part by def ault . You can move t he orient at ion by select ing t he grip point on it .
This set t ing is remembered when creat ing subsequent plat e part s in t hat drawing.
Keep Last Finishes – Adds t he f inishes select ed when creat ing t he last part t o t his new part .
Keep Last User At t ribut es – Adds t he user at t ribut es select ed when creat ing t he last part t o t his new part .
• Product Hierarchy – Let s you assign t he part t o an assembly. (By def ault t he part is assigned t o t he def ault assembly
f or t he planar group.)
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
378
• Fi ni shes – Let s you apply dif f erent f inishes t o each side of t he plat e.
• User At t ri but es – Let s you set arbit rary at t ribut es f or t he part (f or example, model number). User at t ribut es are
displayed wit h part propert ies.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
379
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Edi t
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Edi t
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCEDITPLATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Edi t Pl at e
Edit s an exist ing plat e part . This allows modif icat ion of t he plat es propert ies.
If a plat e has relat ed part s (ident ical or mirrored part s) t hen you will see t he Updat e Linked Object s window. If you
uncheck part s f rom t he list t hen t he checked it ems will become unrelat ed t o t he unchecked ones. Only checked it ems
will be updat ed. If t here is any unchecked it em t hen t he part names of t he checked it ems will change.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
380
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Add Fl ange
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Fl ange Pl at e drop-down > Add Fl ange
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Add Fl ange
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Fl ange Pl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCPLATEFLANGE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Pl at e Fl anges (page 159)
Adds a f lange t o a plat e part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
381
Flange St andards – The list of f lange st andards. The select ed f lange st andard is used t o creat e t he f lange. See Creat e a
Flange St andard (page 79) f or how t o set up f lange st andards.
Plat e Thickness – The t hickness of t he select ed plat e.
Flange Angle – The angle t o bend t he f lange relat ive t o t he plane of t he f lat plat e.
Di rect i on – The direct ion t o f lange t he plat e. The direct ions are det ermined by t he orient at ion of t he plat e. If t he f lange
direct ion is in t he opposit e direct ion of t he mark side of t he plat e, you will see t he f ollowing warning.
Cl i cki ng Yes will change t he plat e’s mark side so t hat t his f lange f oldline is mark on t he t op side of t he plat e if it is laying
f l at .
Fl ange Text - The t ext t hat t he f unct ion places at t he cent er of t he f lange line. The def ault value used f or t his is st ored in
Plat e Flange Def ault Text in General > Project Set t i ngs
Text Si ze - Size of t he t ext .
St yl e - The markline st yle of t he f oldline of t he f lange. The available markline st yles list ed are set up in t he Assign
Markline St yles window.
Inside Radius on Solid
The f lange is added t o t he plat e as a solid in t he f inal bent condit ion and as an expanded f lange in product ion. The f lange
solid is at t ached t o t he plat e using a radius corner t o simulat e act ual bending. The bending inside radii st andards are set
up in Flg Inner Rad (X Thick) in t he St ruct ure St ock Cat alog.
Override St ock Set t ing – You can override t he st andard inside radius by checking t his box and set t ing a new inside radius.
Overriden Inside Radius – The cust om radius can be ent ered as a value in t he project unit s or as a mult iple of t he plat e
t hi ckness.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Edi t Fl ange
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Fl ange Pl at e drop-down > Edi t Fl ange
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Edi t Fl ange
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Fl ange Pl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCPLATEEDITFLANGE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Pl at e Fl anges (page 159)
Let s you edi t any of a plat e’s f langes. Af t er you select t his command and t hen click on a plat e wit h a previously def ined
f lange, t he Flange List window appears.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
382
From t he list , double click t he f lange you want t o edit .
Alt ernat ively, you can also right -click t he select ed f lange. The f ollowing menu appears:
Propert i es – Opens t he Select Flange window t hat you can use t o edit t he det ails of t he f lange.
Swap Ends - Reverses t he f irst and second relief radius and snipe angle f or t he f lange. This will only af f ect t he select ed
f l ange.
Del et e - Delet es t he select ed f lange.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Add Green
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > St ruct ure Green drop-down > Add Green
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Add Green
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Green Fl yout >
Command ...... SCADDPPGREEN
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Pl at e Green (or St ock) (page 160)
This command adds ext ra st ock t o t he edge of a plat e part . This ext ra st ock piece on t he part can be changed or
removed. The ext ra st ock is not added t o t he solid and does not af f ect t he weight or cent er of gravit y of t he part . The
plat e green can only be added t o a port ion of t he out side t oolpat h of a plat e part . When t he edge of a plat e is moved, t he
st art and end point s f or t he green are recalculat ed t o be t he closest point s t o where t hey were.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Edi t Green
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > St ruct ure Green drop-down > Edi t Green
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Edi t Green
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Green Fl yout >
Command ...... SCEDITPPGREEN
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Pl at e Green (or St ock) (page 160)
Let s you change t he st andard or remove any of t he green added t o a plat e part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
383
The select ed cut s are added t o t he exist ing collect ion and t he af f ect ed plank part s are updat ed. Previously ident ical
plank part s wit hin a collect ion may be renamed if t he plank out lines changes.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Add Obj ect s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s panel > Add Obj ect s t o Part
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Add Obj ect s
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl at e Obj ect s Fl yout >
Command ...... SCADDOBJECTSTOSTRUCTPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Add, Remove, and Edi t Obj ect s on an Exi st i ng Pl at e Part (page 156)
......................... Addi ng and Removi ng Cut Li nes t o a Pl ank Col l ect i on (page 187)
Adds object s t o a st ruct ure part . The layer of t he object being added det ermines how it is added t o t he part . Object s on
t he _Draf t _Cut layer are added t o t he t oolpat h. Object s on t he _Draf t _NoProcess or _Draf t _Mark layer become marklines
on t he plat e.
Addi ng Mark Obj ect s
Adding lines, arcs, polylines, circles, const ruct ion lines, or ellipses as marks shows t he f ollowing window.
Markline St yle – The list of available st yles t o use. This list is made f rom t he assigned marklines t o General cat egory.
Text – Opt ional t ext st ring t o label t he markline.
Mark Side – The side of t he plat e t hat t his markline will be marked.
Throw Direct ion – The posit ive side of t he markline. This cont rols t he marksymbol’s orient at ion.
NC Process – The NC process of t he markline. This overrides t he markline st yle set t ing f or t his markline.
Remove Line – Removes t he current markline f rom t he plat e. Disabled during Add Object s.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
384
Addi ng Mark Text
Cont ent s – Text st ring place on t he part . The TEXT object ’s cont ent s are shown but can be changed.
Text St yl e – The t ext st yle t o use. This list will cont ain t he list of ShipConst ruct or t ext st yles (see General > Text St yles
(page 316)) and not t he Aut oCAD t ext st yles in t he drawing.
Text Si ze – t he height of t he t ext . The TEXT’s height is t he init ial value.
NC Process – Indicat es whet her you want t o mark t he t ext on t he plat e or not .
Adding Cut Object s


Choosing Yes will add t he object t o t he plat e part but t he plat e part will not include it in t he t oolpat h.
Cut object s t hat are not complet ely inside t he part are added aut omat ically even if t hey do not become part of t he
t ool pat h.
You may want t o add cut object s t o plat e part s because ot her boundaries of t he part may move enough t o lat er include
t he cut obj ect .
By addi ng t he hol e pol yl i ne t o t he l ower pl at e, movi ng t he seams (because you deci ded t o use wi der pl at es) aut omat i cal l y t ri ms t he
bot t om pl at e t o t he openi ng.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
385
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Remove Object s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s panel > Remove Obj ect s f rom Part
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Remove Obj ect s
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl at e Obj ect s Fl yout >
Command ...... SCREMOVEOBJECTSFROMSTRUCTPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Add, Remove, and Edi t Obj ect s on an Exi st i ng Pl at e Part (page 156)
......................... Addi ng and Removi ng Cut Li nes t o a Pl ank Col l ect i on (page 187)
Removes marklines f rom a st ruct ure part . Current ly only marklines and mark t ext can be removed.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Manage Cut out s…
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Manage Cut out s
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Manage Cut out s…
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCPLATECUTOUT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Pl at e Cut out s (page 158)
Adds cut out s caused by st if f eners crossing a plat e. All t he st if f eners, f aceplat es, and t wist ed st if f eners in t he whole
project are considered but t hose not in t he current unit may not be added (t hey will show up as delet ed), depending on
t he project set t ings (St ruct ure > Allow Remot e Prof ile Cut out s in t he sect ion General > Project Set t ings (page 309)). If t he
st if f ener crosses t he plat e at an angle t hen t he cut out is aut omat ically st ret ched.
The cut out s are t emporarily labeled t o make it easier t o det ermine t he associat ed one on t he part . These labels are color
coded t o f urt her help:
Green – New Cut out
Red – Delet ed Cut out
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
386
Yel l ow – Modif ied Cut out
Cyan – Select ed Cut out
Doubl e-clicking on t he cut out in t he list will zoom t o t hat cut out in t he model.
St i f f ener Part – The part name of t he st if f ener t hat int ersect s t his plat e part .
St i f f ener St ock – The st ock of t he st if f ener part
Cut out Type – A drop-down list cont aining t he list of cut out t ypes. See St ruct ure > St ruct ure St ock Cat alog > Cut out
Shap…(page 326) on how t o set up cut out t ypes.
St if f ener Drawing – The drawing t hat cont ains t he st if f ener part .
Posit ion L – Longit udinal locat ion of where t he moldline point of t he st if f ener int ersect s t he plat e.
Posit ion T – Transverse locat ion of where t he moldline point of t he st if f ener int ersect s t he plat e.
Posit ion V – Vert i cal locat ion of where t he moldline point of t he st if f ener int ersect s t he plat e.
Set Cut out Type – Changes all t he select ed cut out s t o t he select ed t ype. This is a f ast way t o change all t he cut out s
wit hout having t o change t hem individually.
Zoom t o Part – Zooms t o t he plat e part ext ent s.
Zoom + and - – Zooms in and out
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed cut out s f rom t he part . If Manage Cut out s.. is run lat er, t he delet ed cut out will reappear. This
but t on is also used t o un-delet e delet ed cut out s.
SC Struct ure > Pl at e > Corner Treat ment > Insert
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > St ruct ure Corner Treat ment drop-down > Insert Corner Treat ment
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Corner Treat ment > Insert
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Corner Treat ment Fl yout >
Command ...... SCADDCORNERTREATMENT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Corner Treat ment s (page 8 1)
Insert s a corner t reat ment in a plat e part . A corner t reat ment is a cut det ail insert ed int o t he cut t oolpat h of a plat e part .
Typically t hese are rat holes or weld seam relief s. The corner t reat ment ref erences t he int ersect ion bet ween t wo
const ruct ion lines. If t he const ruct ion lines move, t hen t he corner t reat ment moves.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
387
Corner t reat ment st andards are set up in St ruct ure > Plat es > Corner Treat ment s.
Zoom t o part – Zooms t o t he ext ent s of t he select ed part . This is convenient if you select mult iple part s.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Corner Treat ment > Remove
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > St ruct ure Corner Treat ment drop-down > Remove Corner Treat ment
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Corner Treat ment > Remove
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Corner Treat ment Fl yout >
Command ...... SCREMOVECORNERTREATMENT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Corner Treat ment s (page 8 1)
Removes a corner t reat ment f rom a plat e part . The closest corner t reat ment t o t he select ed point is removed.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Corner Treat ment > Di spl ay
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > St ruct ure Corner Treat ment drop-down > Di spl ay Corner Treat ment s
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Corner Treat ment > Di spl ay
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Corner Treat ment Fl yout >
Command ...... SCDISPLAYCORNERTREATMENT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Corner Treat ment s (page 8 1)
Adds display markings t o t he drawing t o make corner t reat ment s more visible.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
388
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Bevel > Creat e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Bevel drop-down > Creat e Bevel
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Bevel > Creat e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedures ..... Bevel Inf ormat i on (page 162)
Adds a bevel code t o t he edge of a part .
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Bevel > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Bevel drop-down > Edi t Bevel
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Bevel > Edi t
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEDITBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Edit s an exist ing bevel on an edge of a plat e. This only allows you t o change t he t ype of bevel and not t he st art or end of
t he bevel .
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Bevel > Remove
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Bevel drop-down > Remove Bevel
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Bevel > Remove
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCREMOVEBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Removes a bevel f rom a plat e part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
389
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Manage Dat um Li nes
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Manage Dat um Li nes
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Manage Dat um Li nes
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCDATUM
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Insert s dat um lines ont o or removes dat um lines f rom plat e part s. Dat um lines are lines marked f or locat ing and aligning
st ruct ure during assembl y.
Dat um line locat ions and locat ion groups are creat ed or edit ed in t he Hull module or f rom t he Planar Group Drawing
Propert i es.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Manage Wel d Shri nkage Icon
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Manage Wel d Shri nkage Icon
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Manage Wel d Shri nkage Icon
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCWELDICON
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Wel d Shri nkage Icon (page 161)
Let s you i nsert a weld shrinkage icon.
Wel d Shri nkage Icon Wi ndow
Val ues as
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
390
Percent age – The X Shrinkage and Y Shrinkage values are t aken as a percent age of t he lengt h in t he X and Y
di rect i on.
Absol ut e – The X Shri nkage and Y Shri nkage values are t aken as an absolut e value in t he Aut oCAD unit s in t he X and
Y di rect ion.
The X and Y direct ion are det ermined by t he axes of t he icon it self .
Icon Si ze – Size of t he weld shrinkage icon in t he drawing.
SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Inval i d Boundary Di agnost i c
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl at es panel > Inval i d Boundary Di agnost i c
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl at e > Inval i d Boundary Di agnost i c
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCPLATEPARTDIAG
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Helps f ind gaps in t he boundary in invalid part s. Lines are creat ed as ext ensions t o every polyline.
Bl ue l i nes are added t o bri dge gaps. Onl y used ones are l ef t behi nd
Set t ings are shown t hat allow you t o specif y how t he command behaves.
Ext end Lengt h – Lengt h of ext ending lines t o creat e
Ext end Line Color – Color of t he SConToolpat hDiagnost icLine object lef t around if it would become part of t he t oolpat h.
Ci rcl e Si ze – Size of t he circle in t he SConToolpat hDiagnost icLine object . Makes it easier t o locat e t he object visually.
If t he new lines make t he part valid t hen t hey are lef t around as cust om object s or you can convert t hem t o const ruct ion
lines t hat can be added t o t he part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
391
If you do not convert t hem t hen SConToolpat hDiagnost icLine object s are creat ed. You can lat er explode t hem and add
t hem t o t he part .
This command does not change any exist ing const ruct ion line or part .
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > St ruct ure St i f f ener drop-down > New St i f f ener
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > New
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout >
Command ...... SCSTIFF
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St i f f eners (page 163)
Opens t he St if f ener Propert ies window.
St i f f ener Propert ies Window
Name – The name t hat t he new st if f ener will use.
Generat e – Generat es a new name f or t his part using t he current naming convent ion.
Override – Let s you manually creat e a name f or t his part , overriding t he current naming convent ion.
St ock – The st ock t hat will be used t o creat e t he new st if f ener.
Web Direct ion – The direct ion of t he web at t he st art of t he st if f ener. If you are at t aching t he st if f ener t o a plat e, you will
be able t o choose t he side of t he plat e t hat t he st if f ener will reside on.
Fl ange Direct ion – The direct ion of t he f lange at t he st art of t he st if f ener.
Thi ckness – The t hickness of t he plat e part you are at t aching t he st if f eners t o. This is only visible when you are at t aching
t he st if f eners t o a plat e part .
Throw – The t hrows of t he plat e part you are at t aching t he st if f eners t o. This is only visible when you are at t aching t he
st if f eners t o a plat e part .
Endcut s – The endcut t hat will be applied t o t he specif ied end of t he st if f ener.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
392
Lengt hen(+)/ Short en(-) - Al l ows you t o lengt hen or short en t he st if f ener wit hout having t o modif y t he original st if f ener
mol dl i ne. Ent ering a posit ive value will lengt hen t he specif ied end by t he ent ered amount and a negat ive value will
short en t he specif ied end by t he ent ered amount . Consider t he f ollowing image. The cross sect ions of t he longit udinal
prof iles have been connect ed wit h st raight lines. The f lat bars t o be ext ruded along t hese lines have t o overlap t he
longit udinal prof iles by 50 mm. Inst ead of ext ending t he lines manually, you can set t he lengt hen opt ion t o 50 f or St art
and End.
In ot her cases you might st ay away f rom t he end of t he ext rusion line. Just insert a negat ive value t o creat e a st if f ener
t hat is short er by t he given amount .
Not e: If only a port ion of t he original ext rude curve was used t o creat e t he st if f ener, t he st if f ener will be lengt hened
along t he original ext rude curve. Once t he end of t he original ext rude curve is reached, t he st if f ener will be ext ended
in t he direct ion of t he specif ic end of t he original ext rude curve.
Green – The green st andard t hat specif ies t he amount of st ock t o be added t o t he st if f ener when nest ed. Green is applied
af t er all t rims and endcut s are applied t o t he specif ic end of t he st if f ener. To def ine green st andards see St ruct ure >
Prof iles > Green St andards (page 342).
Swap Ends – Swaps st art and end values current ly f or Endcut s, Lengt hen(+)/ Short en(-), and Green.
Part Si de – The side of t he ship t hat t he part will report t hat it is on.
Markline St yle – The markline st yle t hat will be used f or t he st if f ener markline when at t aching t he new st if f eners t o plat e
part s. The markline st yle is set in Manager. See Markline St yles (page 73).
Show St art and End Symbols – Specif ies whet her t he S and E symbols will be shown at t he st art and ends of all st if f eners
and f aceplat es in t he current drawing.
Vi ew – A preview of t he st if f ener st ock and endcut s t hat will be used t o creat e t he new st if f ener. The but t ons below t he
preview set pre-set views f or t he Prof ile, Top and Si de of t he preview st if f ener. Right -clicking on t he Previ ew will bring up a
menu allowing t he select ion of Prof ile, St art , End and Zoom t o Ext ent s views.
Product Hierarchy Tab – See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > New.
Finishes Tab – See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > New.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
393
Keep Last Finishes – See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > New.
Keep Last User At t ribut es – See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > New.
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > New f rom Poi nt s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > St ruct ure St i f f ener drop-down > New f rom Poi nt s
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > New f rom Poi nt s...
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout >
Command ...... SCSTIFFPOINTS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St i f f eners (page 163)
Creat es a new st raight st if f ener wit hout having t o draw a line f irst .
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > Edi t St i f f ener
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Edi t
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout >
Command ...... SCEDITSTIFF
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St i f f eners (page 163)
This f unct ion let s you change t he propert ies of one or more st if f eners. The window is t he same as f or creat ing new
st i f f eners.
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > At t ach t o Pl at e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > At t ach St i f f ener t o Pl at e
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > At t ach t o Pl at e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCATTACHSTIFF
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
This f unct ion let s you at t ach a st if f ener t o a plat e. This will creat e a new markline on t he plat e.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
394
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > New Twi st ed
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > New Twi st ed
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > New Twi st ed
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCTWIST
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Twi st ed St i f f eners (page 170)
Thi s f unct ion let s you insert a new t wist ed st if f ener int o t he current group drawing. You can add t he t wist ed st if f eners t o
an exist ing f rame, deck, or girder drawing, but we recommend t hat you creat e a new drawing specif ically f or t he t wist ed
st if f eners. The most convenient way is t o creat e a fake Curved Model drawing.
Twi st ed St i f f ener Propert ies Window
Name – The name t hat t he new t wist ed st if f ener will use.
Generat e – Generat es a new name f or t his part using t he current naming convent ion.
Override – Let s you manually creat e a name f or t his part , overriding t he current naming convent ion.
St ock – The st ock t hat will be used t o creat e t he t wist ed st if f ener.
Flange Direct ion – The direct ion of t he f lange at t he st art of t he t wist ed st if f ener.
Endcut s – The endcut t hat will be applied t o t he specif ied end of t he t wist ed st if f ener.
Lengt hen(+)/ Short en(-) – Allows you t o lengt hen or short en t he t wist ed st if f ener wit hout having t o modif y t he original
geomet ry. Ent ering a posit ive value will lengt hen t he specif ied end by t he ent ered amount and a negat ive value will
short en t he specif ied end by t he ent ered amount .
Green – The green st andard t hat specif ies t he amount of st ock t o be added t o t he t wist ed st if f ener when nest ed. Green is
applied af t er all t rims and endcut s are applied t o t he specif ic end of t he t wist ed st if f ener. The green st andards are
def ined in Manager. See Plat e Green St andards (page 83).
Swap Ends – Swaps st art and end values current ly f or Endcut s, Lengt hen\ Short en, and Green.
Part Si de – The side of t he ship t hat t he part will report t hat it is on
Show St art and End Symbols – Specif ies whet her t he S and E symbols will be shown at t he st art and ends of all st if f eners
and f aceplat es in t he current drawing.
Vi ew – A preview of t he st if f ener st ock and endcut s t hat will be used t o creat e t he new st if f ener. The but t ons below t he
preview set pre-set views f or t he Prof ile, Top, and Si de of t he preview st if f ener. Right -clicking on t he Previ ew brings up a
menu where you select Prof ile, St art , End, and Zoom t o Ext ent s vi ews.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
395
Product Hierarchy Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Fi ni shes Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Keep Last Finishes – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Keep Last User At t ribut es – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Edi t Twi st ed
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > Edi t Twi st ed
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Edi t Twi st ed
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEDITTWIST
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Twi st ed St i f f eners (page 170)
Edit s t he propert ies of a t wist ed st if f ener. See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > New Twist ed (page 394) f or det ails on t he
propert ies of t he t wist ed st if f ener.
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Cl ean Geomet ry of Twi st ed
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > Cl ean Twi st ed Geomet ry
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Remove Vert i ces Bel ow Tol erance
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLEANTWISTEDSTIFFENER
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Twi st ed St i f f eners (page 170)
The purpose of t his operat ion is t o allow users t o correct issues t hat can arise f rom t he complexit y of t he t wist ed st if f ener
geomet ry. This operat ion may remove point s f rom t he part s underlying geomet ry so users should only use it if t hey need
t o. Under normal circumst ances t here should be no need t o use t his operat ion. Possible uses f or t his operat ion are:
• To reduce t he densit y of point s in t he t wist ed st if f ener model t o improve perf ormance and reduce complexit y.
• To eliminat e abnormalit ies in t he geomet ry which are causing t he part t o model or plat e nest incorrect ly.
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Cut out > Insert
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > St ruct ure St i f f ener drop-down > Insert Prof i l e Cut out
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Cut out > Insert
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout >
Command ...... SCEXTRADDCUTOUT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St i f f eners (page 163)
Let s you add a cut out t o a st if f ener.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
396
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Cut out > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > St ruct ure St i f f ener drop-down > Edi t Prof i l e Cut out
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Cut out > Edi t
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout >
Command ...... SCEXTREDITCUTOUT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St i f f eners (page 163)
Let s you edit cut out s t hat exist on st if f eners using t he Edit Cut out s window.
Edit Cut out s Window
Cut out – The name of t he cut out prof ile being used t o make t his cut out .
Angl e – Angle in degrees f rom parallel t o t he st if f ener.
Ri ght and Lef t -- The handedness of t he cut out . This set t ing allows you t o mirror t he cut out about t he Y axis in t he cut out
drawi ng.
Not e: The preview always shows t he right -handed view.
Di st ance – The dist ance f rom t he st art of t he st if f ener.
Of f set – The dist ance f rom t he mold line of t he st if f ener along t he web direct ion.
Del et e – Removes t his cut out f rom t he st if f ener.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
397
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Trim
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > Tri m Prof i l e
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Tri m
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout >
Command ...... SCTRIMEXTR
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St i f f eners (page 163)
A t rim on a st if f ener is a planar cut t hat slices of f a piece of t he st if f ener. When t rimming a st if f ener, planes are def ined
by picking an ort hogonal plane or a t hree point plane. The plane is not relat ed t o any ot her object , so moving t he st if f ener
af t er will not recalculat e t he t rim. The t rim will maint ain it s relat ive posit ion t o t he st if f ener. Trim angles are calculat ed
and st ored in t he dat abase f or each t rim applied. Please see our online knowledgebase f or det ails on t rim angles.
St i f f ener Tri m Window
Name – The name t o ident if y t he t rim by. If t here is more t han one t rim applied t o t he same end of a part , t he names f or
each of t hose t rims have t o be unique.
End – The end of t he st if f ener t o apply t he t rim t o.
Type – The t ype of plane being used as t he t rim plane. The f ollowing opt ions are available:
• Frame – YZ plane
• Deck – XY plane
• LngBhd – XZ plane
• Cust om – Arbit rary Plane
Locat i on – The posit ion of t he t rim plane in t he world coordinat e syst em. This f ield is not used f or t rims wit h t he t ype set
t o Cust om and will be set t o display N/ A. The Locat ion can eit her be ent ered manually or t he Pick but t on can be used t o
select t he t rim plane in t he drawing.
Component – The component of t he st if f ener (f or example, f lange or web). Only component s t hat are valid f or t he specif ic
st ock of t he part being t rimmed will be shown in t his list .
• Al l – Bot h t he f lange and t he web will be t rimmed.
• Fl ange – The t rim will be applied t o t he ent ire f lange and not t he web.
• Top Flange – The t rim will only be applied t o t he t op f lange.
• Bot t om Flange – The t rim will only be applied t o t he bot t om f lange.
• Web – The t rim will only be applied t o t he web.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
398
St if f ener-t o-st if f ener connect ion showing component t rims
New – This but t on adds a new t rim t o t he list . The posit ion of t he t rim needs t o be set bef ore t his t rim is valid and can be
saved.
Del et e – This but t on will delet e t he t rim t hat is current ly select ed in t he list .
Pi ck – This but t on brings you back t o t he current drawing so you can select t he posit ion of t he current ly select ed t rim in
t he list . For t rims wit h a t ype of Cust om, t hree point s are needed t o def ine t he desired t rim plane. Pressing Ent er inst ead
of picking t he t hird poi nt will aut omat ically use a point along t he Z axis of t he current UCS f or t he t hird point describing
t he t rim plane. For t rims wit h any ot her t ype of t rim, only a single point is needed t o def ine t he t rim plane.
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Insert Wel d Seam Rel i ef s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > Tri m Prof i l e
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Insert Wel d Seam Rel i ef s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTWELDSEAMRELIEFS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St i f f eners (page 163)
Insert s cut out s int o st if f eners t hat would be f or weld seam relief s along a st raight edge.
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Ext ract Neut ral Axi s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > Ext ract Neut ral Axi s
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Ext ract Neut ral Axi s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXTRNAXIS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Twi st ed St i f f eners (page 170)
Creat es a new polyline f rom t he neut ral axis of t he st if f ener. The neut ral axis is creat ed f rom a polyline f ollowing t he
cent roid of t he cross sect ions.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
399
SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Ext ract Mol d Li ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > St i f f eners panel > Ext ract Mol d Li ne
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > St i f f ener > Ext ract Mol d Li ne
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXTRMOLDLINE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Twi st ed St i f f eners (page 170)
Ext ract s t he moldline polyline used t o creat e t he st if f ener.
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > New Facepl at e
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > New
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Facepl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCFACEPLATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
Creat es a new f aceplat e part .
Facepl at e Propert ies Window
Name – The name t hat t he new f aceplat e will use.
Generat e – Generat es a new name f or t his part using t he current naming convent ion.
Override – Let s you manually creat e a name f or t his part , overriding t he current naming convent ion.
St ock – The f lat bar st ock t hat t he new f aceplat e will be creat ed f rom.
Plat e Dat a – Displays t he Thi ckness and Throw of one of t he plat e part s t he f aceplat e is going t o be at t ached t o.
Pat h – Specif ies whet her t he f aceplat e will be closed or open. If Cl osed is select ed, t he f aceplat e will run along t he
complet e closed loop of t he select ed f aceplat e pat h. If Open is select ed, t he f aceplat e will only use a port ion of t he
select ed f aceplat e pat h.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
400
Endcut s – The endcut t hat will be applied t o t he specif ied end of t he f aceplat e.
Lengt hen(+)/ Short en(-) – Allows you t o lengt hen or short en t he f aceplat e wit hout having t o modif y t he original ext rusion
curve. Ent ering a posit ive value will lengt hen t he specif ied end by t he ent ered amount and a negat ive value will short en
t he specif ied end by t he ent ered amount .
Not e: If only a port ion of t he original ext rude curve was used t o creat e t he f aceplat e, t he f aceplat e will be lengt hened
along t he original ext rude curve. Once t he end of t he original ext rude curve is reached t he f aceplat e will be ext ended
in t he direct ion of t he specif ied end of t he original ext rude curve.
Green – The amount of st ock t o be added t o t he f aceplat e when nest ed. Green is applied af t er all t rims and endcut s are
applied t o t he specif ied end of t he f aceplat e.
Swap Ends – Swaps st art and end values current ly f or Endcut s, Lengt hen\ Short en, and Green.
Markline St yle – The markline st yle t hat will be used f or t he f aceplat e markline when at t aching t he new f aceplat e t o
pl at e part s.
Part Si de – The side of t he ship t hat t he part will report t hat it is on
Show St art and End Symbols – specif ies whet her t he S and E symbols will be shown at t he st art and ends of all st if f eners
and f aceplat es in t he current drawing.
Previ ew – A preview of t he f aceplat e st ock and endcut s t hat will be used t o creat e t he new f aceplat e. The but t ons below
t he preview set pre-set views f or t he Prof ile, Top, and Si de of t he preview f aceplat e. Right clicking on t he Preview will
bring up a menu allowing t he select ion of Prof ile, St art , End and Zoom t o Ext ent s views.
Posi t i on – Specif ies t he posit ion of t he f aceplat e relat ive t o t he posit ion of t he plat e part it is at t ached t o.
• Cent ered – The cent er of t he f aceplat e will be aligned wit h t he cent er of t he plat e part t hat it is at t ached t o.
• Edge Cent ered – The cent er of t he f aceplat e will be aligned wit h t he specif ied edge of t he plat e part .
• Flush wit h Side – The edge of t he f aceplat e will be aligned wit h t he specif ied edge of t he plat e part . The edge of bot h
t he f aceplat e and t he plat e part will always mat ch. For example, if Flush wit h Up Side is chosen, t he t op side of t he
f aceplat e is aligned t o be f lush wit h t he t op side of t he plat e part .
• User Def i ned – Allows t he user t o def ine t he alignment of t he f aceplat e manually.
• Shif t Direct ion – Specif ies t he direct ion of t he user-def ined alignment . This is only used when t he User Def ined opt ion
is select ed.
• Shif t Cent er by – Specif ies t he of f set amount of t he user def ined alignment . The f aceplat e’s posit ion will be shif t ed
by t he amount specif ied in t his f ield in t he direct ion select ed in t he Shif t Direct ion f ield. This is only used when t he
User Def i ned opt ion is select ed.
Product Hierarchy Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Finishes Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Keep Last Finishes – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Keep Last User At t ribut es – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > Edi t
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Edi t
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Facepl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCFACEPLATEEDIT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
This command will edit t he part propert ies of f aceplat e part s.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
401
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Copy and Rot at e 180
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > Copy and Rot at e 180
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Copy and Rot at e 180
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure St i f f ener Fl yout >
Command ...... SCCOPYFACEPLATE180
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
This command creat es a polar array of t wo. This will allow you t o creat e t wo f aceplat es t hat surround a circular hole. The
array command will achieve t he same result .
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Cut out > Insert
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model l i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > St ruct ure Facepl at e drop-down > Insert Prof i l e Cut out
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Cut out > Insert
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Facepl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCEXTRADDCUTOUT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
Insert s a cut out int o a f aceplat e. See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Insert (page 395).
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Cut out > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model l i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > St ruct ure Facepl at e drop-down > Edi t Prof i l e Cut out
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Cut out > Edi t
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Facepl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCEXTREDITCUTOUT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
Allows you t o edit t he cut out s in a f aceplat e. See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Cut out > Edit (page 396).
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Tri m
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model l i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > Tri m Prof i l e
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Tri m
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Facepl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCTRIMEXTR
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
Trims an end of a f aceplat e. See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Trim (page 397).
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
402
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Ext ract Neut ral Axi s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > Ext ract Neut ral Axi s
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Ext ract Neut ral Axi s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXTRNAXIS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
Ext ract s t he neut ral axis polyline f rom t he f aceplat e. During normal use t his command is not necessary.
SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Ext ract Mol d Li ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Facepl at e panel > Ext ract Mol d Li ne
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Facepl at e > Ext ract Mol d Li ne
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXTRMOLDLINE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Facepl at es (page 173)
Ext ract s t he moldline of a f aceplat e as a polyline. During normal use t his command is not necessary.
SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Pl at e > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Corrugat ed Pl at e panel > New Corrugat ed
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Pl at e > New
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCCORRUGATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Corrugat ed Pl at es (page 175)
Creat es a new corrugat ed plat e part .
The product ion t oolpat hs are simplif ied wit h arcs when possible using t he Product ion Tolerance. This uses t he same
algorit hm t o convert line segment s t o arcs as t he Remove Vert ices Below Tolerance command.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
403
Corrugat ed Pl at e Propert ies Wi ndow
Name – The name t hat t he new corrugat ed plat e will use.
Generat e – Generat es a new name f or t his part using t he current naming convent ion.
Override – Let s you manually creat e a name f or t his part , overriding t he current naming convent ion.
From Corrugat ed St ock – Enables you t o select t he pre-def ined corrugat ed plat e st ocks f rom t he list provided t o use in
t he creat ion of t he corrugat ed plat e part . The pre-def ined corrugat ed plat e st ocks can be def ined using Manager. The
Previ ew displays t he prof ile of t he current ly select ed corrugat ed plat e st ock when t his opt ion is enabled.
From Flat Plat e St ock – Enables you t o select t he plat e st ock f rom t he list t o use t o creat e t he corrugat ed plat e part . You
will need t o have a polyline out lining t he ent ire lengt h of t he corrugat ed prof ile you want t o use f or t he corrugat ed plat e
part already present in your drawing. The corrugat ed prof ile polyline should be drawn and placed so t hat ext ruding it
woul d int ersect t he ent ire out er t oolpat h (t he solid is creat ed f rom t he int ersect ion of t he ext rusions of t he prof ile and t he
out er t oolpat h). The Previ ew will be blank when t his opt ion is enabled.
Ref resh List – Get s t he lat est list of st ocks f rom t he dat abase.
Throw Direct ion – The direct ion t he amplit ude (posit ive direct ion in t he prof ile drawing) will f ace. This opt ion is only
applicable when t he From Corrugat ed St ock opt ion is used.
Marksi de – The side of t he corrugat ed plat e part t hat markings will be applied t o.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
404
Part Si de – The side of t he ship t hat t he part will report t hat it is on
Corrugat ion Direct ion – The direct ion t he plat e will be corrugat ed.
Show Expanded Geomet ry – This opt ion allows you t o hide t he expanded geomet ry in t he model drawing. Expanded
t oolpat hs including out er t rim pat h, inner t rim pat h, and bend lines (bend lines are st raight lines used t o mark t he plat e at
t he posit ions required t o shape t he corrugat ion f rom f lat plat e st ock) are always generat ed when you creat e\ edit t he
part . Bend line posit ion is def ined by point object s in t he corrugat ion prof ile st andard drawings when From Corrugat ed
St ock opt ion is used. When t he From Flat Plat e St ock opt ion is used, bend line posit ion can be def ined by select ing point s
eit her wit h or af t er t he corrugat ion curve is select ed (you will be prompt ed), or by select ing t he Generat e Aut omat ically
opt ion when prompt ed.
Insert Part Ori ent at i on Icon – Specif ies whet her or not a part orient at ion icon will be added t o t he corrugat ed plat e part .
Previ ew – A preview of t he st ock select ed in t he corrugat ed st ock list . This is only enabled when t he From Corrugat ed
St ock opt ion has been select ed.
Product Hierarchy Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Finishes Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
User At t ri but es Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Pl at e > Edit
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Corrugat ed Pl at e panel > Edi t
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Pl at e > Edi t
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl at e Fl yout >
Command ...... SCCORRUGATEEDIT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Corrugat ed Pl at es (page 175)
Edit s t he propert ies of an exist ing corrugat ed plat e part . See SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Plat e > New (page 402) for
det ails on t he edit opt ions.
SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Pl at e > Ext ract Cross-sect i on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Corrugat ed Pl at e panel > Ext ract Cross-sect i on
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Corrugat ed Pl at e > Ext ract Cross-sect i on
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCORRUGATEEXTRACT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Corrugat ed Pl at es (page 175)
Ext ract s t he cross-sect ion of t he solid and places t he result ing polyline below t he corrugat ed plat e. This is meant t o be
used as marking on t he plat e t hat t he corrugat ed plat e is on.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
405
Cross-sect i on of corrugat ed pl at e
SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Curved Pl at e panel > New Curved
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > New
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCIMPORTCURVEDPLATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Curved Pl at es (page 179)
Creat es a new curved plat e f rom an expanded plat e DXF generat ed by ShipCAM or Maxsurf .
The product ion t oolpat hs are simplif ied wit h arcs when possible using t he Product ion Tolerance. This uses t he same
algorit hm t o convert line segment s t o arcs as t he Remove Vert ices Below Tolerance command.
Curved Pl at e Propert ies Wi ndow
Name – The name t hat t he new curved plat e will use.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
406
Generat e – Generat es a new name f or t his part using t he current naming convent ion.
Override – Let s you manually creat e a name f or t his part , overriding t he current naming convent ion.
Pl at e St ocks – The curved plat e part will use t he select ed plat e st ock f rom t his list .
Throw Direct ion – Set s t he direct ion t hat t he solid will t hrow.
Marksi de – The side of t he curved plat e part t hat markings will be applied t o.
Part Si de – The side of t he ship t hat t he part will report t hat it is on
Product Hierarchy Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Finishes Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
User At t ri but es Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Curved Pl at e panel > Edi t
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Edi t
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEDITCURVEDPLATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Curved Pl at es (page 179)
Edit s t he propert ies of t he curved plat e. See SC St ruct ure > Curved Plat e > New (page 405) f or det ails on t he edit opt ions.
Warni ng: Changing t he st ock or t hrow direct ion will not re-expand t he plat e if t he plat e is expanded about t he neut ral
axis. To change t he st ock in t his case would require you t o change t he st ock t o t he plat e in t he Hull module and re-
expanding t he plat e.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
407
SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Def i ne New Out er Tool pat h
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Curved Pl at e panel > Def i ne New Out er Tool pat h
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Def i ne New Out er Tool pat h
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCURVEDPLATETOOLPATH
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Curved Pl at es (page 179)
Let s you change t he polyline t hat is t he out er t oolpat h f or t he curved plat e part . It is possible t hat you will need t o correct
some unwant ed ef f ect in t he expanded plat e. There may be some det ail t hat you need t o add t hat you could not add
bef ore t he plat e was expanded. Curved plat e boundaries are not like f lat plat e boundaries t hat consist of component
const ruct ion lines. The curve plat e boundary must be a single closed polyline.
Warni ng: Changing the out er t oolpat h does not change t he solid or t he weight and CG.
SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Ext ract Product i on Inf o
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Curved Pl at e panel > Ext ract Product i on Inf o
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Ext ract Product i on Inf o
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXTRACTCURVEDPLATEPROD
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Curved Pl at es (page 179)
Ext ract s a copy of t he geomet ry t hat is inside t he expanded curved plat e. This allows you t o gain access t o t he geomet ry.
SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Import Curved Pl at e From Rhi no
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Curved Pl at e panel > Import Curved Pl at e From Rhi no
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Curved Pl at e > Import Curved Pl at e From Rhi no
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSTRUCTUREIMPORTRHINO
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Curved Pl at es (page 179)
Import s a surf ace f rom Rhino.
SC St ruct ure > Pl anks > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl anks panel > New Pl ank
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl ank s > New
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl ank Fl yout >
Navi gat or ........ None
Command ...... SCPLANK
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure
Procedure ....... Pl anks Creat i on (page 1 8 5)
Creat es planks in an area wit h t he select ed planking st ock.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
408
The product ion t oolpat hs are simplif ied wit h arcs when possible using t he Product ion Tolerance. This uses t he same
algorit hm t o convert line segment s t o arcs as t he Remove Vert ices Below Tolerance command.
Pl ank Propert ies Window
Example Name – An example of t he naming t o be used f or t he newly creat ed plank part s. Because mult iple plank part s
are creat ed and all will not be ident ical, mult iple names are creat ed.
Generat e – Not used at t his t ime.
Pl ank St ocks – The plank part will be creat ed using t he select ed plank st ock f rom t his list .
Previ ew – A preview of t he st ock select ed in t he plank st ock list .
Throw Direct ion - The direct ion t he amplit ude (posit ive direct ion in t he prof ile drawing) will f ace.
Part Si de – The side of t he ship t hat t he part will report t hat it is on
Creat e Product ion Lines – Specif ies whet her or not product ion inf ormat ion out lining t he boundaries of each plank part
will be generat ed.
Product Hierarchy Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Finishes Tab – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Keep Last Finishes – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Keep Last User At t ribut es – See Plat e Part Creat ion (page 154).
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
409
SC St ruct ure > Pl anks > Edi t Collect ion
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl anks panel > Edi t Pl ank Col l ect i on
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl ank s > Edi t Col l ect i on
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl ank Fl yout >
Navi gat or ........ None
Command ...... SCPLANKCOLLECTIONEDIT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure
Procedure ....... Pl anks Edi t (page 186)
Edit s t he propert ies of t he plank collect ion. A plank collect ion is creat ed when you creat e planks. Since all t he planks
must maint ain t he same st ock. Many operat ions are applied t o t he plank collect ion.
SC St ruct ure > Pl anks > Spl i t Pl ank Col l ect i on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl anks panel > Spl i t Pl ank Col l ect i on
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl ank s > Spl i t Pl ank Col l ect i on
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl ank Fl yout >
Navi gat or ........ None
Command ...... SCPLANKCOLLECTIONSPLIT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure
Procedure ....... Spl i t t i ng Pl ank Col l ect i ons (page 1 8 8)
Split s t he select ed planks f rom a collect ion t o creat e 2 new collect ions.
SC St ruct ure > Pl anks > Del et e Pl ank Col l ect i on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Pl anks panel > Del et e Pl ank Col l ect i on
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Pl ank s > Del et e Pl ank Col l ect i on
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure > St ruct ure Pl ank Fl yout >
Navi gat or ........ None
Command ...... SCPLANKCOLLECTIONDELETE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure
Procedure ....... Del et i ng Pl ank Col l ect i ons (page 188)
Delet es t he select ed plank collect ion. Links t o any mirrored or ident ical plank collect ions are broken.
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edi t
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Edi t Part
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edi t …
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCPARTPROP
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Displays t he propert ies window f or t he part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
410
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Li st
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Li st
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > List
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCPARTLIST
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
List s t he st ruct ure part s in t he current drawing. This is usef ul f or checking some of t he key propert ies of t he part s in t he
drawing or f inding a part in t he drawing. This command works in st ruct ure model drawings and nest drawings.
This window can st ay visible while you work in ShipConst ruct or. Select ing part s in t he drawing will select t he part in t he
Part s window.
Name – The name of t he part .
Type – The t ype of part .
Gen Name – Yes means t hat the part name f ollows t he naming convent ion. No means t hat t he part name overrides t he
naming convent ion.
St ock – The st ock of t he part .
Throw – The t hrow direct ion of t he part .
Si de – The part side of t he part .
MarkSide – The side of t he plat e part t o mark. This is handy t o verif y t hat t he marksides are correct .
Fi ni shes – The f inishes t hat are applied t o t he part .
Assembly – t he short assembly name of t he build st rat egy assembly t hat t he part is assigned t o.
Ri ght -Click Menu
Zoom To – Zooms t o t he selected object s.
View in Nest – If t he part is nest ed, t his command opens t he nest drawing and zooms t o t he part . This command applies
t o only plat e part s and f lat bar st if f eners t hat are plat e nest ed.
Add Object s – See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Object s (page 383) (Plat e part s only).
Del et e – Erases t he select ed part s.
Propert i es – Shows t he Edit Propert ies window f or t he select ed part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
411
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Fi nd
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Fi nd
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Fi nd
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCFINDPARTDWG
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Displays t he Find Part window t hat allows f or searching a part name f or t he corresponding drawing. Ent er all or some of a
part name, and click Search. A list of all t he part s t hat mat ch t hat name (and t ype) is displayed, along wit h t he drawing
name, part t ype, and unique dat abase ident if iers of t he part and drawing. The lat t er t wo are not import ant f or most users.
Doubl e-clicking on a part in t he result s list will prompt t o open t he model drawing t hat part is in.
SC Struct ure > Part s > Rel at i onshi ps
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Rel at i onshi ps
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Rel at i onshi ps
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCDISPLAYRELATIONSHIPS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Shows t he Relat ionships window t hat shows all t he relat ed object s.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
412
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Inf ormat i on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Inf ormat i on
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Inf ormat i on
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCPARTINFO
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Removi ng Li nks Bet ween Part s (page 152)
Shows t he Part Inf ormat ion window t hat shows all t he associat ed object s.
Relat ionships – Launches t he Relat ionships window f or t he select ed object .
Clear – Removes t he select ed part f rom t he t ree.
Ref resh – Updat es t he inf ormat ion in t he t ree. This is usef ul t o show t he up-t o-dat e inf ormat ion when you modif y t he part
or it s relat ionships in ShipConst ruct or.
Component s of t he Part Inf ormat ion Tree
The cont ent s of t he t ree dif f er depending on t he part t ype select ed. In t his case t he f ollowing describes t he case when t he
inf ormat ion about a plat e part is shown.
Plat e Part Name – t he name of t he plat e part
Right Click Menu > Zoom t o Part – Zooms t o t he ext ent s of t he select ed part .
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit t he propert ies of t he select ed part .
Right Click Menu > Add Object s – Runs t he command SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Add Object s (page 383)
Right Click Menu > At t ach St if f ener t o Plat e – Runs t he command SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > At t ach t o Plat e.
Ident i cal s – The part s t hat are linked as being ident ical part s.
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he select ed part .
Mi rrors – The part s t hat are linked as mirror part s.
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he select ed part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
413
Pi ecemark
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he piecemark.
Orient at ion Icon
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he orient at ion icon.
Weld Shrinkage
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he weld shrinkage. See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage
Weld Shrinkage Icon (page 389).
Fl anges
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he Flange. See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit Flange (page
381).
Pl at es
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he plat e t hat is at t ached t o t he select ed st if f ener. See
SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit (page 379).
St i f f eners
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he st if f ener t hat is at t ached t o t he select ed plat e. See
SC St ruct ure > St if f ener > Edit (page 393).
Facepl at es
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he f aceplat e t hat is at t ached t o t he select ed plat e. See
SC St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Edit (page 400).
Markl i nes
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he markline. See SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edit Component
(page 414).
Right Click Menu > Const ruct ion Line Inf o – Shows t he Const ruct i on Li ne Inf o window.
Dat um Lines
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he select ed dat um line markline.
Const ruct ion Lines
Right Click Menu > Zoom t o Const ruct ion Line – Zooms t o t he select ed const ruct ion line
Right Click Menu > Const ruct ion Line Inf o – Shows t he Const ruct i on Li ne Inf o window.
Right Click Menu > Remove f rom Plat e – Removes t he select ed const ruct ion line f rom t he t oolpat h of t he plat e. This
could make t he part invalid if no boundary can be det ermined.
Right Click Menu > Edit Of f set – Of f set const ruct ion lines only – Change t he of f set value of t he of f set const ruct ion
l i ne.
Cut out s
Right Click Menu > Zoom t o Plat e – Zooms t o t he ext ent s of t he select ed plat e part .
Right Click Menu > Zoom t o St if f ener – Zooms t o t he select ed st if f ener, which has a cut out on t he current plat e part
Right Click Menu > Edit Plat e Propert ies – Opens t he plat e propert ies dialog. See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Edit (page
379).
Right Click Menu > Edit St if f ener Propert ies – Opens t he st if f ener propert ies dialog. See SC St ruct ure > St if f ener >
Edit (page 393).
Right Click Menu > Cut out Manager – Opens t he Cut out Manager dialog, See SC St ruct ure > Plat e > Manage
Cut out s…(page 385)
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
414
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edi t Component
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Edi t Component
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Edi t Component
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCEDITCOMPONENT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Add, Remove, and Edi t Obj ect s on an Exi st i ng Pl at e Part (page 156)
Allows you t o edit component s of part s.
Pi ecemark component opt i ons
Text Si ze – The size of t he t ext displayed on t he piecemark.
Ori ent at i on i con component opt i ons
Si ze – The new size of t he orient at ion icon. If t he size is changed on one part , t hen changing t he st ardard size will not
af f ect t his part . Changing t he size back t o t he st andard size will re-enable t he part t o use t he st andard size.
Markl i ne component opt i ons
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
415
Markline St yle – The list of available st yles t o use. This list is made f rom t he assigned marklines t o General cat egory.
Text – Opt ional t ext st ring t o label t he markline.
Mark Side – The side of t he plat e t hat t his markline will be marked.
Throw Direct ion – The posit ive side of t he markline. This cont rols t he marksymbol’s orient at ion.
NC Process – The NC process of t he markline. This overrides t he markline st yle set t ing f or t his markline.
Remove Line – Removes t he current markline f rom t he plat e. The associat ed const ruct ion line will remain.
St i f f ener Markl i ne component opt i ons
Text Si ze – The size of t he t ext t hat accompanies t he st if f ener markline. If t his value dif f ers f rom t he t ext size specif ied in
t he markline st yle, t hen bot h t he t ext size and t he nearside/ f arside indicat or t ext size will be overridden wit h t his value.
Text Gap t o Line – The dist ance bet ween t he markline and it s associat ed t ext .
Plat e Edge Clearance – The maximum allowable dist ance bet ween t he plat e edge and t he markline ends.
Markline St yle – The list of available st yles t o use. This list is made f rom t he assigned marklines t o t he St if f ener cat egory.
Break For Text – If Yes, t he line is broken apart where t he line t ext is placed.
NC Process – The NC process of t he markline when NC cut t ing t he part .
Text NC Process – The NC process of t he markline t ext when NC cut t ing t he part .
Facepl at e Markl i ne component opt i ons
Text Gap t o Line – The dist ance bet ween t he markline and it s associat ed t ext .
Markl i ne St yle – The list of available st yles t o use. This list is made f rom t he assigned marklines t o t he Faceplat e
cat egory.
NC Process – The NC process of t he markline when NC cut t ing t he part .
Text NC Process – The NC process of t he markline t ext when NC cut t ing t he part .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
416
Dat um Markl i ne component opt i ons
Text Si ze – The size of t he t ext t hat accompanies t he dat um line. If t his value dif f ers f rom t he t ext size specif ied in t he
markline st yle, t hen bot h t he t ext size and t he nearside/ f arside indicat or t ext size will be overridden wit h t his value.
Text Gap t o Line – The dist ance bet ween t he markline and it s associat ed t ext .
Plat e Edge Clearance – The maximum allowable dist ance bet ween t he plat e edge and t he markline ends.
Text NC Process – The NC process of t he markline t ext when NC cut t ing t he part .
Markline St yle – The list of available st yles t o use. This list is made f rom t he assigned marklines t o t he Dat um cat egory.
Line NC Process – The NC process of t he markline when NC cut t ing t he part .
Fl ange f ol dl i ne Markl i ne component opt i ons
Text – Opt ional t ext st ring t o label t he f lange f oldline.
Text Si ze – The size of t he t ext t hat accompanies t he f lange f oldline. If t his value dif f ers f rom t he t ext size specif ied in t he
markline st yle, t hen bot h t he t ext size and t he nearside/ f arside indicat or t ext size will be overridden wit h t his value.
Text Gap t o Line – The dist ance bet ween t he markline and it s associat ed t ext .
Plat e Edge Clearance – The maximum allowable dist ance bet ween t he plat e edge and t he markline ends.
Markline St yle – The list of available st yles t o use. This list is made f rom t he assigned marklines t o t he Flange Foldline
cat egory.
Wel d Shri nkage component opt i ons
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
417
Appl y Wel d Shri nkage – If lef t unchecked, t he weld shrinkage icon will not be displayed on t he plat e.
Val ues as – The f ormat t hat t he weld shrinkage values will t ake when displayed, eit her as percent ages or as lengt hs
using t he unit s specif ied in Project Set t ings.
X Shri nkage – The shrinkage value displayed on t he x-axis.
Y Shri nkage – The shrinkage value displayed on t he y-axis.
Icon Si ze – The new size of t he weld shrinkage icon. If t he size is changed on one part , t hen changing t he st ardard size
will not af f ect t his part . Changing t he size back t o t he st andard size will re-enable t he part t o use t he st andard size.
Not e: If t he X Shrinkage and Y Shrinkage values are bot h zero, t hen t he weld shrinkage icon will not be displayed.
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Ext ract Component s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Ext ract Component s
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Ext ract Component s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXTRACTCOMPONENTS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Explodes t he part wit hout delet ing t he original object and moves t he exploded ent it ies t o a new layer.
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Add Manual Cut out s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Add Manual Cut out
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Add Manual Cut out s
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCADDMANUALCUTOUT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Manually add cut out s t o part s.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
418
SC St ruct ure > Part s > Boundary Di agnost i c
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Boundary Di agnost i c
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Part s > Boundary Di agnost i c
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCBOUNDARYDIAGNOSTIC
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Inf ormat i on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Inf ormat i on
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Inf ormat i on
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCLINEINFO
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... General Use Ti ps (page 147)
.......................Const ruct i on Li ne Management (page 146)
Shows t he inf ormat ion about a const ruct ion line and which const ruct ion lines and part s are relat ed t o it . The Const ruct ion
Li ne Inf ormat ion window can be lef t open while working in ShipConst ruct or. Since const ruct ion lines do not have names,
t hey are ident if ied by t heir handle. This handle ref ers t o t he handle of t he Aut oCAD object and can be seen by list ing t he
obj ect .
Relat ionships – Opens relat ionship window f or select ed it em.
Clear – Removes t he select ed const ruct ion line f rom t he t ree.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
419
Ref resh – Updat es t he inf ormat ion in t he t ree. This is usef ul t o show t he up-t o-dat e inf ormat ion when you modif y t he
const ruct ion line or it s relat ionships in ShipConst ruct or.
Component s of t he Const ruct ion Line Inf ormat ion Tree
Hull Traces – t he list of SConSt ruct HullTraceConst ruct ionLine object s.
Const ruct ion Lines – t he list of SConSt ruct UserConst ruct ionLine object s.
Planar Group Const ruct ion Lines – t he list of SConSt ruct GroupPlaneConst ruct ionLine object s.
Of f set Const ruct ion Lines – t he list of SConSt ruct Of f set Const ruct ionLine object s.
Pl at es – The list of plat es t hat use t his const ruct ion line.
Right Click Menu > Zoom t o Part – Zooms t o t he select ed plat e.
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he pl at e t hat is at t ached t o t he plat e. See SC St ruct ure >
Plat e > Edit (page 379)
Right Click Menu > Part Inf o – Shows t he Part Inf ormat ion window.
St i f f eners - The list of st if f eners t hat use t his const ruct ion line.
Ri ght Click Menu > Zoom t o Part – Zooms t o t he select ed st if f ener.
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he st if f ener t hat is at t ached t o t he plat e. See SC
St ruct ure > St if f ener > Edit (page 393)
Right Click Menu > Part Inf o – Shows t he Part Inf ormat ion window.
Facepl at es - The list of f aceplat es t hat use t his const ruct ion line.
Right Click Menu > Zoom t o Part – Zooms t o t he select ed f aceplat e.
Right Click Menu > Edit Propert ies – Edit s t he propert ies of t he f acepl at e t hat is at t ached t o t he plat e. See SC
St ruct ure > Faceplat e > Edit (page 400)
Right Click Menu > Part Inf o – Shows t he Part Inf ormat ion window.
Ident i cal s – t he list of const ruct ion lines t hat are ident ical. Mirrored const ruct ion lines are considered t o be ident ical
so t here is no separat e Mirrors it em in t he t ree. Of f set const ruct ion lines wit h t he same or ident ical sources are also
considered ident ical.
Of f set s – list s any of f set const ruct ion lines of t his const ruct ion line. Displays all of f set of t his line and all of f set s of any
ident ical const ruct ion lines.
Sources – f or an of f set const ruct ion line, t his list s t he source const ruct ion line and any ident icals t o t he source
const ruct ion line.
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Rel at i onshi ps
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Rel at i onshi ps
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Cont ruct i on Li ne > Rel at i onshi ps
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCDISPLAYRELATIONSHIPS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Shows t he Relat ionships window t hat shows all t he relat ed object s.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
420
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Convert t o User Const ruct i on Li ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Convert Obj ect t o Const ruct i on Li ne
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Convert t o User Const ruct i on Li ne
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCONVERTTOCL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Convert s a line, circle, arc, polyline, or ellipse t o a user const ruct ion line. This means t hat geomet ry will be saved in t he
dat abase. Also used t o convert a hull t race, planar group plane, or of f set const ruct ion line t o a user const ruct ion line.
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Edi t Of f set
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Edi t Of f set
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Edi t Of f set
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEDITOFFSET
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Change t he of f set value of an of f set const ruct ion line.
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Swap Const ruct i on Li ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Swap Const ruct i on Li ne
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Swap Const ruct i on Line
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCSWAPCL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Const ruct i on Li ne Rel at i onshi ps (page 150)
Exchanges t he use of one const ruct ion line in part s f or anot her curve or const ruct ion line. It will show a list of all part s
using t he original const ruct ion line. All part s t hat are checked when t he OK but t on is pressed will use t he new
const ruct ion line.
A l i st of part s t o change
If t he new curve is not a const ruct ion line t hen it will be convert ed t o a user const ruct ion line. The original const ruct ion
line is lef t unchanged.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
421
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Repl ace Hul l Trace
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Repl ace Hul l Trace
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Repl ace Hul l Trace
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCREPLACEHULLTRACE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Hul l Trace Const ruct i on Li ne (page 1 4 9)
Replaces HullTrace const ruct ion lines, t he only recommended modif icat ion f or t his t ype of const ruct ion line.
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Add Bevel Angl es
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Bevel Angl es drop-down > Add Bevel Angl es
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Add Bevel Angl es
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLADDBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Creat es a beveled const ruct ion line f rom t wo construct ion lines or curves. A user opt ions exist s t o updat e or break
ident ical const ruct ion lines. Part s t hat use t hese const ruct ion lines are updat ed.
These const ruct ion line / bevel angle commands are designed t o be used when aut omat ic bevels are enabled. These
commands can be used t o manual change bevel angle inf ormat ion on a const ruct ionline when necessary. In general
t hough, bevel angles are calculat ed aut omat ically f rom t he hull drawing.
If t he t hickness side line does not ext end t o t he ends of t he moldline const ruct ion line t hen new point s are added t o t he
moldline const ruct ion line where t he bevel st art s and ends.
If t he t hi ckness l i ne cont ai ns poi nt s t hat have di f f erent resul t i ng bevel angl es t hen t hose poi nt s are added.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
422
Poi nt 2 i s not added si nce i t s bevel angl e i s t he same as i f i t were cal cul at ed.
An opt ion exist s t o ret ain exist ing angles. This is usef ul when updat ing t he angles f or only a port ion of a const ruct ion line.
In t his case angles t hat are f or point s out side t he range of t he t hickness line are lef t alone.
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Show Bevel Angl es
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Bevel Angl es drop-down > Show Bevel Angl es
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Show Bevel Angl es
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLSHOWBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Shows t he raw bevel angles f or select ed const ruct ion lines using t he bevel annot at ion t ext size. The raw bevel angles are
t he angles of t he surf ace.
Raw Angl e Def i ni t i on
The angles are displayed at each point on t he line. Const ruct ion lines t hat are rest ored f rom t he dat abase have t heir
bevel angles display of f . This command is usef ul as a diagnost ic command t o det ermine if t he const ruct ion line has bevel
angl es.
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Hi de Bevel Angl es
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Bevel Angl es drop-down > Hi de Bevel Angl es
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Hi de Bevel Angl es
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLHIDEBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Hides t he raw bevel angles f or select ed const ruct ion lines.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
423
SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Cl ear Bevel Angl es…
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Const ruct i on Li nes > Bevel Angl es drop-down > Cl ear Bevel Angl es
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Const ruct i on Li ne > Cl ear Bevel Angl es
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLCLEARBEVEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Set s all t he raw bevel angles f or select ed const ruct ion lines t o zero (a square cut ). A user opt ion exist s t o updat e or break
ident ical const ruct ion lines. Part s t hat use t hese const ruct ion lines are updat ed.
SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part …
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Insert St andard Part
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCINSERTSTD
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St andard Part s (page 188)
Insert s a previously-def ined st andard part int o t he drawing.
SC St ruct ure > Convert To St ruct ure Part
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Convert t o St ruct ure Part
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Convert t o St ruct ure Part
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCONVERTTOSTRUCTPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St andard Part s (page 188)
Convert s a st andard part t o a regular part .
SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part at St i f f ener…
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Part s > Insert St andard Part drop-down > Insert St andard Part at St i f f ener
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Insert St andard Part at St i f f ener
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTSTDATSTIFF
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... St andard Bracket s At t ached t o St i f f eners (page 188)
Insert s a previously-def ined st andard part at t ached t o a select ed st if f ener. St andard bracket insert ion can be t edious
when t here are many longit udinal st if f eners t hat int ersect a f rame and t he web of t he st if f eners is at dif f erent angles.
This command accelerat es t hat process by calculat ing t he posit ion and orient at ion of t he st andard part based on
select ing a st if f ener and plat e or st if f ener. This command will not creat e logical relat ionships bet ween part s and only
st andard part s can be used.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
424
Exampl e case of i nsert ed bracket
Bracket Locat i on
Flange Direct ion
Set t ings pert aining t o t he locat ion of t he origin of t he st andard part only in t he direct ion of t he f lange of t he primary
st if f ener. This command will permit you t o insert dif f erent inst ances of t he same st andard part and end up wit h t wo
physically dif f erent part s. Or inst ance an asymmet rical part wit h a f lange can have insert ed inst ances where t he f lange
would be up in one case and down in anot her.
Shif t ing in t he f lange direct ion is correct ed so t hat if t he bracket is not perpendicular t o t he f ace it is meant t o t ouch
(plat e, t op of st if f ener), t hen t he bracket is moved so t hat t he t hickness side point at t he origin of t he bracket isn’t inside
t he plat e or st if f ener. See t he f ollowing example where t wo bracket s are shown and t he one on t he lef t is shif t ed down t o
t ouch t he t op of t he st ringer and t he one on t he right is shif t ed up.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
425
Int ersect i on wi t h pl ane of st i f f ener f l ange
This does not prevent t he case of an int erf erence.

Case where bracket i s i nt erf eri ng wi t h t he st i f f ener because t he angl e bet ween st i f f eners i s acut e.
Bracket Alignment
Align t o mold side of st if f ener – The mold plane of t he st andard part is aligned wit h t he mold side of the web of t he
primary st if f ener
Align t o cent ers – The cent er of t he st andard part in t he t hickness direct ion is aligned wit h t he cent er of t he web of t he
primary st if f ener
Align t o t hickness side of st if f ener - The mold plane of t he st andard part is aligned wit h t he mold side of t he web of t he
primary st if f ener
Bracket Throw Direct ion
The t hrow direct ion of t he st andard part .
Wit h f lange of st if f ener – t he t hrow of t he st andard part f ollows t he t hrow of t he primary st if f ener
Opposit e t o t he f lange of t he st if f ener – t he t hrow of t he st andard part f ollows t he t hrow of t he primary st if f ener
Changing Bracket Throw Direct ion and Bracket Alignment changes t he f lange view image.
Flange of f set – t he dist ance t o shif t t he st andard part relat ive t o t he Bracket Alignment .
Web Direct ion
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
426
Set t ings pert aining t o t he locat ion of t he origin rest rict ed t o t he plane of t he web or t he event ual plane of t he st andard
part .
Bracket Axis Alignment
Align t he bracket parallel t o t he primary st if f ener or t o t he secondary part . X Axis ref ers t o t he X Axis in t he world
coordinat e syst em when edit ing t he st andard.
Bracket Origin
Top of st if f ener int ersect ion – t he origin will be locat ed using t he f ollowing rules:
Second part select ed Ori gi n
None Top of t he web at t he end nearest t o t he pick point
St if f ener The int ersect ion of t he t op of t he web of t he primary st if f ener wit h t he plane of t he f lange of
t he secondary st if f ener
Pl at e The int ersect ion of t he t op of t he web of t he primary st if f ener wit h t he plane plat e
Moldline int ersect ion – t he origin will be locat ed using t he f ollowing rules:
Second part select ed Ori gi n
None End of t he moldline of t he st if f ener at t he end nearest t o t he pick point
St if f ener The int ersect ion of t he moldline of t he primary st if f ener wit h t he plane of t he f lange of t he
secondary st if f ener
Pl at e The int ersect ion of t he moldline of t he primary st if f ener wit h t he plane plat e
Mirroring
Permit s t he mirroring of t he st andard part about it s local axis’s (t he ones you see when edit ing t he st andard) f or more
f l exible opt ions. The st andard convent ion is t o model t he bracket in t he upper right quadrant in plan view.
Bracket i nsert ed at t he t op of t he st i f f ener wi t hout mi rrori ng
Bracket i nsert ed at t he t op of t he st i f f ener wi t h Mi rror X axi s checked
Of f set Origin Relat ive t o Primary St if f ener
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
427
Along st if f ener– shif t s t he bracket in t he direct ion of t he axis of t he primary st if f ener. A posit ive value will shif t it away
f rom t he second part or t oward t he middle of t he primary st if f ener if no second part select ed.
In Web Direct ion – shif t s t he bracket in t he direct ion of t he web of t he primary st if f ener. This value would lap t he primary
st if f ener when a negat ive value is ent ered.
Si de of Pl at e t o Insert Bracket (s)
The Plat e Sides checkboxes indicat e what sides of t he plat e t o insert t he bracket (s). If bot h checkboxes are checked t hen
t wo st andard part s are insert ed. By def ault t he checkboxes are checked wit h t he sides of t he plat e t he st if f ener is on. This
opt ion will be disabled when no plat e is select ed.
SC St ruct ure > Transf er Obj ect s To Group
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es > Transf er Obj ect s t o Group
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Transf er Obj ect s t o Group
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCTRANSFER
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Transf er Obj ect s t o anot her Pl anar Group (page 196)
Transf ers object s f rom t he current planar group model drawings t o anot her planar group drawing.
SC St ruct ure > Move Pl anar Group
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es > Move Pl anar Group
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Move Pl anar Group
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure >
Command ...... SCMOVEPLANARGROUP
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Pl anarGroupPl ane Const ruct i on Li ne (page 149)
Moves t he planar group drawing by a dist ance. This will move all object s in t he drawing and updat e any relat ed part s in
ot her drawings.
SC St ruct ure > Repl i cat e Obj ect s t o Ot her Group
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es > Repl i cat e Obj ect s t o Ot her Groups
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Repl i cat e Obj ect s t o Ot her Groups
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCREPLICATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... Repl i cat e Obj ect s t o Ot her Pl anar Groups (page 196)
Repl i cat es object s f rom t he current planar group drawing t o ot her parallel planar groups.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
428
This window displays all eligible groups. Select t he groups and ShipConst ruct or will repl i cat e t he object s. If t he replicat ed
part s are similar t o t he original part s and wit hin t he same unit , an ident ical relat ionship is creat ed bet ween t he part s.
SC St ruct ure > Check Group DWG
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es > Check Group DWG
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Check Group DWG
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCHECKPGMD
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Checks, repairs, and logs any errors in t he current planar group model drawing. An opt ion t o repair errors or log errors is
present ed bef ore t he check is run. If Repair Errors is not select ed, any modif icat ions list ed below will not be perf ormed.
The pl anar group model drawing check perf orms t he f ollowing operat i ons:
• Check t o see t hat all t he planar group model drawings in t he dat abase exist in t he appropriat e direct ory in your
project f older. If a planar group model drawing exist s in t he dat abase but not in t he project direct ory,
ShipConst ruct or will creat e an empt y drawing.
• Checks t o see all t he planar group model drawings in your project f older exist in t he dat abase. If a drawing is
f ound t o be in t he project f older but not in t he dat abase, ShipConst ruct or will log it .
• Checks t o see t hat all ShipConst ruct or layers are creat ed and up-t o-dat e wit h t he dat abase. If a layer does not
exist or values are not t he same as set in t he dat abase, ShipConst ruct or will creat e t he layer and synchronize
t he layer wit h t he dat abase.
• Checks t hat all planar group planes in t he dat abase have a valid UCS associat ed wit h t hem. If t here is no UCS
t hat i s associ ated wit h a planar group plane, ShipConst ruct or will creat e a UCS t hat is associat ed wit h t he planar
group plane. If an associat ed UCS does not have t he same values as t he planar group plane t hen t he UCS is set
t o have t he same value as t he planar group plane st ored in t he dat abase.
• Checks all st ruct ure part s:
• Updat es all st ruct ure part s f rom t he values st ored in t he dat abase (St ock, t rims, piecemark, and so on).
• Updat es calculat ed values t o t he dat abase (Weight , volume, and so on).
• Checks and f ixes st ruct ure part s int egrit y.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
429
• Checks t hat all markings lie wit hin t he boundaries of t he part t hat t hey are associat ed wit h. If any part of a
mark symbol or t ext lies out side t he part boundary, it will be not ed in t he generat ed log f ile.
SC St ruct ure > Show Unused Object s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es > Show Unused Obj ect s
Menu ............... SC St ruct ure > Show Unused Obj ect s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSHOWUNUSED
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Displays a list of object s in t he current drawing t hat are not used by any part s. This t ool is handy f or det ermining ext ra
unused lines.
SC Ut i l i t i es Menu
SC Ut i l i t i es > 3D Vi ewpoi nt
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Navi gat i on panel > 3D Vi ewpoi nt
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > 3D Vi ewpoi nt
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCVPOINT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedures ..... Sel ect a UCS Vi ewpoi nt (page 138)
Let s you select a 3D or 2D view f rom several pre-def ined, st andard views.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Act i vat e UCS
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Navi gat i on panel > Act i vat e UCS
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Act i vat e UCS
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCUCSLIST
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Act i vat e a UCS (page 137)
......................... Creat e a UCS Out of Pl ane wi t h t he Current UCS (page 135)
......................... Creat e a UCS Paral l el t o t he Current UCS (page 136)
When t his command is used in t he st ruct ure module, it enables t he use of PlanarGroup Planes, act i vat es a UCS (or
PlanarGroup Pl ane), or creat es a new UCS (or PlanarGroup Plane). Every PlanarGroup Plane has a UCS. However, you can
make new UCSs t hat will not creat e PlanarGroup Pl anes.
- UCS has an associat ed PlanarGroup Plane
- UCS only
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
430
New Out of Plane – Creat es a new UCS out of plane wit h t he current UCS. You def ine t he new plane by picking t wo or
t hree point s.
New Paral l el – Creat es a new UCS parallel wit h t he current UCS.
Act ivat e f rom Object – Set s a named UCS t o be t he current UCS or creat es a UCS f rom a select ed object . For most object s
t here is only one possible UCS.
Select ing a plat e part brings up t he f ollowing select ion window. If t he t hrow of t he plat e is cent ered, t hen t here are
t hree opt i ons.
Select ing a st if f ener part will bring up t he f ollowing select ion window.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
431
Add Currrent UCS – Adds t he current ly select ed UCS t o t he dat abase.
Rename – Allows you t o rename t he select ed UCS in t he list . For Planar Group Planes, you cannot rename t he pref ix.
Del et e – Delet es t he select ed UCS in t he list .
Act i vat e – Act ivat es t he select ed UCS in t he list .
SC Ut i l i t i es > UCS > Fl i p UCS X
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Fl i p UCS X > Fl i p UCS X
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > UCS > Fl i p UCS X
Tool bar ............ Assembl y >
Command ...... SCFLIPUCS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None

SC Ut i l i t i es > UCS > Fl i p UCS Y
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Fl i p UCS X > Fl i p UCS Y
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > UCS > Fl i p UCS Y
Tool bar ............ Assembl y >
Command ...... SCFLIPUCSY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None

Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
432
SC Ut i l i t i es > UCS > Swap UCS XY Axi s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Fl i p UCS X > Swap UCS XY Axi s
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > UCS > Swap UCS XY Axi s
Tool bar ............ Assembl y >
Command ...... SCSWAPUCSXY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None


SC Ut i l i t i es > Hi de Obj ect s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Navi gat i on panel > Hi de Obj ect s
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Hi de Obj ect s
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCHIDE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Hi de or Show Obj ect s (page 140)
Hides t he object s select ed. Hidden object s are remembered in t he order you hid t hem while you are in t he current
drawi ng.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Unhi de Obj ect s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Navi gat i on panel > Unhi de Obj ect s > Unhi de Obj ect s
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Unhi de Obj ect s
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCUNHIDE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Hi de or Show Obj ect s (page 140)
Shows hidden object s (SC Ut ilit ies > Hide Object s (page 432)) in t he reverse order t hat you hid t hem.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Unhi de Al l Obj ect s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Navi gat i on panel > Unhi de Obj ect s > Unhi de Al l Obj ect s
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Unhi de Al l Obj ect s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUNHIDEALL
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Hi de or Show Obj ect s (page 140)
Shows all hidden object s (SC Ut ilit ies > Hide Object s (page 432)).
Not e: When det ermining if an object is not visible in t he drawing, run t his command and t urn on and t haw all layers.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
433
SC Ut i l i t i es > Cl i p Current Vi ew
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Cl i p Current Vi ew
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Cl i p Current Vi ew
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLIPVIEW
Permi ssi ons ... None
Clip Current View is a ut ilit y f unct ion t hat provides a convenient met hod f or set t ing up Aut oCAD clipping planes inside a
vi ewport .
Not e: Bef ore running t he command, you need t o swit ch t o t he viewport in which t he clipping plane is t o be applied.
1. The command line prompt s you t o:
Enter Point on Plane 1:
2. Choose a point on one of t he clipping planes t o be used (whet her it is t he f ront or back clipping plane will be
det ermined by ShipConst ruct or).
3. The command line prompt s you t o ent er a second point :
Enter Point on plane 2:
4. Choose a point on t he second clipping plane (whet her it is t he f ront or back clipping plane will be det ermined by
ShipConst ruct or).
Not e: If t he clipping planes are not t o your liking you can remove t hem wit h t he command SC Ut ilit ies > Remove
Clip (see below).
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
434
Bef ore cl i ppi ng.
Af t er cl i ppi ng.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Remove Cl i p
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Remove Cl i p
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Remove Cl i p
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLEARCLIP
Permi ssi ons ... None
This command removes t he Aut oCAD clipping planes (SC Ut ilit ies > Clip Current View (page 433)) f rom t he current ly
select ed viewport .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
435
SC Ut i l i t i es > 3D t o 2D
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > 3D t o 2D
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > 3D t o 2D
Tool bar ............ St ruct ural Tool s >
Command ...... SCCONV
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Convert a 3D Obj ect t o a 2D Obj ect (page 200)
Convert s a 3D object t o a 2D object on t he XY plane of t he current UCS.
The di r ect i on of proj ect i on f or t he 3D t o 2D command
This command works on t he f ollowing object t ypes:
• Li nes
• Arcs
• Ci rcl es
• Pol yl i nes
• 3D Pol yl i nes
• Text , MText
• Poi nt s
• Solids (not 3D solids)
• User Const ruct ion Lines
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
436
SC Ut i l i t i es > Ort hographi c Proj ect i on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Ort hographi c Proj ect i on
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Ort hographi c Proj ect i on
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCPROJECTONTOUCS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Proj ect Shapes (page 200)
Project s a shape ont o t he current UCS. You choose t he direct ion t o project f rom one of t he t hree ort hogonal world
direct ions (X, Y, or Z).
The di rect i on of proj ect i on f or t he ort hographi c proj ect i on command
This command only works on lines.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Remove Vert i ces Bel ow Tol erance
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Remove Vert i ces Bel ow Tol erance
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Remove Vert i ces Bel ow Tol erance
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCBELOWTOL
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Reduce t he Number of Vert i ces on Pol yl i nes (page 200)
Reduces t he number of vert ices on a polyline by removing vert ices wit hin a given t olerance and convert ing t he segment
t o a st raight line. If line segment s f orm an arc and are wit hin t he t olerance, an arc is insert ed int o t he polyline.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
437
This command is helpf ul in reducing t he complexit y of some curves or sect ions t hat will be used in t he model. Since t he
NC machine cannot usually cut any more accurat e t han 0.01, t here is no need t o have a model more accurat e.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Convert El l i pse/ Spl i ne t o Pol yl i ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Convert El l i pse/ Spl i ne t o Pol yl i ne
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Convert El l i pse/ Spl i ne t o Pol yl i ne
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCONVELLIPSE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Convert an El l i pse or Spl i ne t o a Pol yl i ne (page 201)
Convert s an ellipse, arc, circle, or spline t o a polyline wit h only st raight line segment s. The maximum deviat ion f rom t he
original curve is 0.01 Aut oCAD unit s. To use a lower resolut ion run SC Ut ilit ies > Remove Vert ices Below Tolerance.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Act i vat e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Act i vat e > Act i vat e
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Act i vat e
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es > Layers Fl yout >
Command ...... SCACTLAYER
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Act i vat e a Layer (page 139)
Turns t he select ed layer on and t haws it if it is f rozen.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Deact i vat e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Act i vat e > Deact i vat e
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Deact i vat e
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es > Layers Fl yout >
Command ...... SCDELAYER
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Deact i vat e a Layer (page 140)
Turns t he select ed layer of f and f reezes it .
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
438
SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Copy Geomet ry t o
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Act i vat e > Copy Geomet ry t o
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Copy Geomet ry t o
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es > Layers Fl yout >
Command ...... SCCOPYGEO
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Copy Obj ect s f rom One Layer t o Anot her (page 140)
Copies object s t o t he select ed layer. Object s inside blocks are also moved t o t he dest inat ion layer.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Move Geomet ry t o
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Act i vat e > Move Geomet ry t o
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Layer > Move Geomet ry t o
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es > Layers Fl yout >
Command ...... SCMOVEGEO
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Move Obj ect s f rom One Layer t o Anot her (page 140)
Moves object s f rom one layer t o anot her. If you move a block, t he object s inside t he block are also moved t o t he
dest inat ion layer.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Tool pat h
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Tool pat h
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Tool pat h
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCTOOLPATH
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Creat e a Cl osed Tool pat h (page 199)
Creat es a closed polyline (when possible) f rom lines t hat have no gaps. If t he connect ed pat h is not closed, you will see
t he f ollowing warning. Duplicat e lines will generat e warnings t hat allow you t o remove t hem.
This command uses t he Project Set t ings > St ruct ure > Toolpat h Gap Tolerance t o close small gaps. The gap is closed by
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
439
SC Ut i l i t i es > Fillet
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Fi l l et
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Fi l l et
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCTOOLPATH
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Creat es a f illet bet ween t wo curves. Aut oCAD’s f illet command can f ail t o generat e a result when t wo complex polylines
are f i l l et ed.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Mirror about Cent erline
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Mirror about Cent erline
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Mi rror about Cent erl i ne
Tool bar ............
Command ...... SCMIRRORCL
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Makes a copy of t he select ed object s and mirrors t hem about t he vessel’s cent erline.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Dihedral Angle
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Ut i l i t i es panel > Di hedral Angl e
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Di hedral Angl e
Tool bar ............
Command ...... SCDHANGLE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Fi nd t he Di hedral Angl e bet ween Two Pl anar Obj ect s (page 199)
Det ermines t he dihedral angle bet ween t wo planar object s
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
440
This command works on t he f ollowing object t ypes:
• Pl at es
• St if f eners wit h a st raight const ruct ion line
• Faceplat es wit h a st raight const ruct ion line
• Any object t hat is planar
SC Ut i l i t i es > Reload Drawi ng
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Rel oad Drawi ng
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Rel oad Drawi ng
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... SCRELOAD
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Updat es all part s and const ruct ion lines in t he drawing t o ref lect what is st ored in t he dat abase. This command simulat es
t he closing and opening of t he current drawing. You cannot undo t his command. Any object s t hat were erased will be
removed f rom t he dat abase.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Creat e Qual i t y Mat ri x
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es t ab > Creat e Qual i t y Mat ri x
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Creat e Qual i t y Mat ri x
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCQUALMTX
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Insert a Qual i t y Cont rol Mat ri x i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 231)
Insert s a qualit y cont rol mat rix int o a drawing. A qualit y cont rol mat rix is used f or dimensional checking. It shows t he
st rai ght -line dist ances bet ween select ed point s.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
441
Af t er i nsert ing t he mat rix, any of t he dimension point s or labels can be moved. The lengt h values will be updat ed when a
View > Regen is run. The f ormat of t he lengt hs in t he mat rix is cont rolled by t he Format > Unit s set t ings.
Qual i t y Mat ri x Opt i ons
Label
Bubble st yle – The st yle of t he bubble surrounding t he let t er label.
Bubbl e Si ze/ Bubble Margin/ Diamet er – The size of t he bubble. For t he Bubble and Rect angle st yles t his is a margin
bet ween t he t ext and t he bubble. If Scale dimensions t o layout is checked t hen t his value is in paperspace unit s;
ot herwise it is in model space unit s.
Leader Lengt h – The lengt h of t he leader line bet ween t he picked dimension point and t he label.
Text st yle – The st yle of t he t ext wit hin t he label.
Text size – The size of t he t ext wit hin t he label. If Scale dimensions t o layout is checked t hen t his value is in
paperspace unit s; ot herwise it is in model space unit s.
Arrow size – The size of t he arrow. Set t ing t his value t o zero will suppress t he displaying of an arrow. If Scale
dimensions t o layout is checked t hen t his value is in paperspace unit s; ot herwise it is in model space unit s.
Orient To View – Orient s t he label t o be f acing you when you are looking f rom any viewpoint .
Scale dimensions t o layout (Paper space) – If enabled, t he labels will be scaled t o paperspace; ot herwise model
space uni t s are used.
Label Layer – Layer t o place all t he labels on.
Mat ri x
Text st yle – The t ext st yle of t he t ext in t he mat rix of dimensions. This list s all t he t ext st yles in t he current drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
442
Text size – The size of t he t ext f or t he mat rix of dimensions. This also det ermines t he size of t he mat rix. If you st art ed
t he command while in a layout t hen t his value will be in paperspace unit s.
Text Layer – Layer t o place t he dimensions on.
Mat rix Layer – Layer t o place t he mat rix and column headers on
Di mensi on Poi nt s
Picked Point s – When picking point s, ShipConst ruct or uses t hat point as t he dimension point .
Point s Project ed t o Current UCS – When picking point s, ShipConst ruct or creat es a dashed line f rom t hat point t o a
point on t he current UCS and dimensions f rom t hat point . This makes it easier t o pick point s, since you do not have
t o zoom in close and make sure you are picking point s on t he f ront of t he plat e.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
443
SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Propert y Label
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Propert y Label panel > Propert y Label
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Propert y Label
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCOBJFIELDLABEL
Permi ssi ons ... Edi t product i on drawi ng i f i n a product i on drawi ng or edi t model drawi ng i f i n model drawi ng
Procedure ....... Insert s a Shi pConst ruct or f i el d l abel i nt o a drawi ng
SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Copy Fi el d Label
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Propert y Label panel > Copy Fi el d Label
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Copy Fi el d Label
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCFIELDLABELCOPY
Permi ssi ons ... Edi t product i on drawi ng i f i n a product i on drawi ng or edi t model drawi ng i f i n model drawi ng
Procedure ....... Copi es mt ext bl ock and creat es new l eader. Al so al l ows user t o sel ect new i t em t o change t he obj ect ref erences wi t hi n
t he f i el ds.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Copy Fi el d Label Qui ck
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Propert y Label panel > Copy Fi el d Label Qui ck
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Copy Fi el d Label Qui ck
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCFIELDLABELCOPYQUICK
Permi ssi ons ... Edi t product i on drawi ng i f i n a product i on drawi ng or edi t model drawi ng i f i n model drawi ng
Procedure ....... Copi es mt ext bl ock and creat es new l eader usi ng ori gi nal l eader geomet ry. Al so al l ows user t o sel ect new i t em t o
change t he obj ect ref erences wi t hi n t he f i el ds.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Edi t Fi el d Label
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Propert y Label panel > Edi t Fi el d Label
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Edi t Fi el d Label
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEDITFIELD
Permi ssi ons ... Edi t product i on drawi ng i f i n a product i on drawi ng or edi t model drawi ng i f i n model drawi ng
Procedure ....... Sel ect mt ext and edi t t he t ext and f i el ds.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Repl ace Obj ect Ref erences
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Propert y Label panel > Repl ace Obj ect Ref erences
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Repl ace Obj ect Ref erences
Tool bar ............ None
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
444
Command ...... SCREPLACEOBJREFINFIELD
Permi ssi ons ... Edi t product i on drawi ng i f i n a product i on drawi ng or edi t model drawi ng i f i n model drawi ng
Procedure ....... Sel ect mt ext and t hen sel ect new obj ect t o poi nt t he f i el ds t o.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Set Si ngl e Cl i ck Fi el d Label
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Propert y Label panel > Set Si ngl e Cl i ck Fi el d Label
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Propert y Label s > Set Si ngl e Cl i ck Fi el d Label
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSETSINGLECLICKFIELDLABEL
Permi ssi ons ... Edi t product i on drawi ng i f i n a product i on drawi ng or edi t model drawi ng i f i n model drawi ng
Procedure ....... Toggl es t he Shi pConst ruct or vari abl e t hat det ermi nes whet her f i rst l eader pi ck poi nt i s acqui red by when t he obj ect i s
sel ect ed, or whet her i t i s det ermi ned by separat e poi nt sel ect i on.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Li st It em wi t hi n Bl ock/ Xref
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Li st i t em wi t hi n Bl ock/ Xref
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Li st i t em wi t hi n Bl ock/ Xref
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCLISTSUBENT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Di spl ay Inf ormat i on f or an Obj ect wi t hi n an MLi nked Drawi ng (page 141 )
Displays LIST inf ormat ion f or an object wit hin an mlinked or ot her XREFed drawing.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Check Local Int erf erences
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Check Local Int erf erences
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Check Local Int erf erences
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINTERCHECK
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Check Local Int erf erences (page 195)
Checks f or collisions bet ween object s in a single drawing wit hout having t o creat e an Int erf erence drawing.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Export > Export t o DWG…
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Export t o DWG...
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Export t o DWG...
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXPORTDWG
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Export a Shi pConst ruct or Drawi ng t o an Aut oCAD onl y Drawi ng (page 141)
Export s t he current drawing as an Aut oCAD only drawing. The ent ire drawing will be duplicat ed wit h only nat ive Aut oCAD
ent it ies, including any hidden object s or layers.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
445
Not e: The export does not t ake t he St ruct ural Display Opt ions int o account ; t he solids, piecemarks and product ion inf o
of t he part s will all be visible in t he export ed drawing regardless of t he St ruct ural Display Opt ions, (similar t o how t he
Aut oCAD explode command works f or part s). See SC St ruct ure > Show / Hide Opt ions (page 373) f or more
inf ormat ion on t he St ruct ural Display Opt ions.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Export > Export t o NWD
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Export t o NWD
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Export > Export t o DWG...
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNWDOUT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Export s select ed drawings as separat e Navisworks NWD f iles. The result ing f iles are placed beside t he original drawing
wit h t he same f ilename wit h ext ension NWD. The export set t ings are used f rom t he NWOPT set t ings.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Export > Export t o NWC
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Export t o NWC
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Export > Export t o DWG...
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNWCOUT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Export s select ed drawings as separat e Navisworks NWC f iles. The result ing f iles are placed beside t he original drawing
wit h t he same f ilename wit h ext ension NWC. The export set t ings are used f rom t he NWOPT set t ings.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Snap
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Snap
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Snap
Tool bar ............ Ut i l i t i es >
Command ...... None
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Opens t he Aut oCAD Draf t ing Set t i ngs window wit h t he Shi pCon Snap t ab select ed, let t ing you set t he ShipConst ruct or
snap opt ions.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Random Col or
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Model i ng t ab > Model i ng Ut i l i t i es panel > Random Col or
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Random Col or
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCRANDCOLOR
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Assigns a random color t o each of t he select ed ent it ies in t he current drawing.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
446
SC Ut i l i t i es > Shi pCAM > Import Fi l es
But t on ............. None
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Shi pCAM > Import Fi l es
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCIN
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Import a Hul l Model f rom Shi pCAM (page 125)
Let s you import a 3D wiref rame model f rom ShipCAM int o t he current drawing. This ut ilit y f unct ion can be run in plain
Aut oCAD.
SC Ut i l i t i es > Shi pCAM > Convert IGES t o Mesh
But t on ............. None
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Shi pCAM > Convert IGES t o Mesh
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... IGES2MSH
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Convert s an IGES f ile t o a ShipCAM MSH f ile. This f unct ion is made available because of issues wit h ShipCAM import of
IGES f iles. This ut ilit y f unct ion can be run in plain Aut oCAD.
Command Li ne Commands
Pl at e Part Ext ract Pol yl i ne
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEXTRACTOUTSIDE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Ext ract s a copy of t he out side t oolpat h of a plat e part and creat es a polyline on t he current layer.
Creat e Boundary Pol yl i ne
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCBO
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Creat es a closed polyline using t he same algorit hm as creat ing a plat e part . This command has a similar ef f ect as
Aut oCAD’s boundary command.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
447
Creat e Boundary Pol yl i ne Debug
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCBO
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
A diagnost ic version of t he boundary command t hat places t ext object s at t he int ersect ions it visit s. The t ext object is
labeled by increasing numbers (1, 2, 3). ShipConst ruct or goes vert ically up unt il it int ersect s a curve and t hen t ries t o
f ollow t he lef t most pat h unt il it comes back t o t he st art .
Creat e Boundary Pol yl i ne f rom Out si de Pi ckpoi nt
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCBP
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Creat es a polyline f rom a point picked below t he event ual closed polyline. ShipConst ruct or goes vert ically up unt il it
int ersect s a curve and t hen t ries t o f ollow t he right most pat h unt il it comes back t o t he st art . This command can
somet imes be usef ul t o creat e closed polylines f or openings in plat e part s.
Show Pl at e Part Const ruct i on Li nes
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSHOWPPCLS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Shows (unhides) t he const ruct ion lines associat ed wit h t he select ed plat e part s. If t he const ruct ion lines are already
visible t hen no dif f erence is shown.
Hi de Pl at e Part Const ruct i on Li nes
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCHIDEPPCLS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Hides t he const ruct ion lines associat ed wit h t he select ed plat e part s. If t he const ruct ion lines are already invisible t hen no
dif f erence is shown. SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide All Object s will show t hese hidden lines again.
Show Pl at e Part Const ruct i on Li nes Onl y
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSHOWONLYPPCLS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Shows (unhides) t he const ruct ion lines associat ed wit h t he select ed plat e part s and hides all ot her object s. SC Ut ilit ies >
Unhide All Object s (page 432) will show t he hidden object s again.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
448
Show Pl at e Part and It s Const ruct i on Li nes Onl y
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSHOWONLYPPANDCLS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Model i ng
Procedure ....... None
Shows (unhides) t he const ruct ion lines associat ed wit h t he select ed plat e part s and t he select ed plat e part s and hides all
ot her object s. SC Ut ilit ies > Unhide All Object s (page 432) will show t he hidden object s again.
Show Ext ended Dat a
Menu ............... SC Ut i l i t i es > Show Ext ended Dat a
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCXDATA
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Shows t he hidden ShipConst ruct or inf ormat ion t hat is t agged t o non-ShipConst ruct or object s. Only a f ew object s have
ext ended dat a at t ached t o t hem.
Fi x Ident i cal Part Names
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCFIXIDENTPARTNAMES
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
This will use t he part name of t he select ed part s (generat ed or non-generat ed) as t he basis f or t he part names of all part s
wit h ident ical relat ionships t o t he select ed part s.
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCGENERATEIDENTPARTNAMES
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
This will f ind t he generat ed part name wit h t he lowest aut o-number f or each select ed part and t heir ident icals and use
t hi s aut o-number t o regenerat e t he part names f or all part s ident ical t o t he part s select ed. Part s t hat have non-generat ed
names will be changed t o have generat ed names.
Cl ean Geomet ry of al l Twi st ed St i f f eners
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCLEANAl l TWISTEDSTIFFENERS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
This command will run a cleaning procedure on all t he t wist ed st if f ener part s in t he current project . The purpose of t his
operat ion is t o allow users t o correct issues t hat can arise f rom t he complexit y of t he t wist ed st if f ener geomet ry. This
operat ion may remove point s f rom t he part s underlying geomet ry so users should only use it if t hey need t o. Under
normal circumst ances t here should be no need t o use t his operat ion. Possible uses f or t his operat ion are:
• To reduce t he densit y of point s in t he t wist ed st if f ener model t o improve perf ormance and reduce complexit y.
• To eliminat e abnormalit ies in t he geomet ry which are causing t he part t o model or plat e nest incorrect ly.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
449
Di agnost i c Commands
Command Trace - Enabl e
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCENABLECMDT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Records al l the commands t hat are run and saves t hem t o a log f ile. This is somet imes usef ul in recording a long process
of commands t hat help support st af f reproduce a problem a user is encount ering.
The log f iles are saved t o t he <project >\ TraceLogs f older. These log f iles are ASCII t ext f iles t hat can be viewed wit h any
t ext f ile viewer.
Command Trace - Di sabl e
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCDISABLECMDT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Turns of f t he recording of commands. Recording is ot herwise st opped when ShipConst ruct or is closed.
Debug Trace - Enabl e
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCENABLEDT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Turns on t he showing of int ernal warnings or errors t o t he Aut oCAD command line. You should not need t o use t his
command unless inst ruct ed t o do so.
Debug Trace - Log
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCENABLEDTLOG
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Generat es a log f ile of t he int ernal warnings or errors. The warnings are also displayed on t he Aut oCAD command line.
The log f iles are saved t o t he <project >\ TraceLogs f older. These log f iles are ASCII t ext f iles t hat can be viewed wit h any
t ext f ile viewer.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
450
Debug Trace - Di sabl e
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCENABLEDT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
St ops t he debugging mode. See Debug Trace - Enable (page 449).
Perf ormance Moni t or - St art
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSPM
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
St art s t he perf ormance monit oring diagnost ic t ool. Perf ormance monit oring is an int ernal command t hat aids in
det ermining t he bot t lenecks. You should not need t o use t his command unless inst ruct ed t o do so.
Perf ormance Moni t or - End
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCEPM
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
St ops t he perf ormance monit oring. See Perf ormance Monit or - St art (page 450).
Perf ormance Moni t or - Di spl ay
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCDPM
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Out put s t he perf ormance monit or dat a t o an Excel spreadsheet and opens Excel.
Save St ruct ure Drawi ng St at e
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSAVEIMAGE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
This command is helpf ul f or our support st af f t o see t he exact st at e t hat you are in a drawing when you encount er an
issue. This command saves a drawing called Dat aManagerImage.dwg t hat you can t ransmit t o our support st af f t o
diagnose a problem.
Appendi x A: Menus, Tool s & Commands
451
Load St ruct ure Drawi ng St at e f rom Fi l e
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCLOADIMAGE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
This command is used in conjunct ion wit h Save St ruct ure Drawing St at e (page 450). You should not need t o use t his
command.
Dat aManager Dump
Menu ............... None
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCDUMPDM
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
This is an int ernal command t hat out put s cached (in memory) dat a t o an XML f ile. You should not need t o use t his
command.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
453
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command
Ref erence
Toolbars
Assembl y Tool bar
Product Hierarchy
See SC Product Hierarchy > Develop Product Hierarchy (page 478)
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS X (page 431)
Flip UCS Y
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS Y (page 431)
Swap UCS XY Axi s
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Swap UCS XY Axi s (page 432)
Orient at ion Icon
See SC Assembly > Orient at ion Icon (page 465)
Manual Label f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Manual Label f rom BOM (page 470)
Copy Label f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Copy Label f rom BOM (page 470)
Leader Ut i l s Tool bar (page Error! Bookmark not def i ned.)
Creat e Leader Dist ribut ion Line
See SC Assembly > Creat e Leader Dist ribut ion Line (page 472)
At t ach t o Viewport Tracking
See SC Assembly > At t ach t o Viewport Tracking (page 471)
Toggle Dist ribut ion Line St ret ch Mode
See SC Assembly > Toggle Dist ribut ion Line St ret ch Mode (page 472)
Set Leader Insert ion Mode
See SC Assembly > Set Leader Insert ion Mode (page 472)
Adjust Leader Spacing
See SC Assembly > Adjust Leader Spacing (page 471)
Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Line
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
454
See SC Assembly > Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Line (page 472)
Nest Tool bar
Insert Part s
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Insert (page 484)
Snap
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Snap (page 487)
Slide
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Slide Along (page 485)
Align
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Align (page 485)
Move & Rot at e
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Move/ Rot at e (page 485)
Nest Layers
See SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Visibilit y (page 488)
Creat e Bridge
See SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > New (page 496)
Prof ile Nest ing
See ShipConst ruct or > Prof ile Nest ing (page 365)
Ri bbon Tabs (page Error! Bookmark not def i ned.)
Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s Tab
Pl at e Nest Panel
Insert Part
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Insert (page 484)
Re-Insert Part
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Re-Insert (page 484)
Remove
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Remove (page 485)
Slide Along
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Slide Along (page 485)
Move/ Rot at e
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Move/ Rot at e (page 485)
Align
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
455
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Align (page 485)
Rot at e Short est Dimension
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Rot at e Short est Dimension (page 486)
List
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > List (page 487)
Snap
See SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Snap (page 487)
Align wit h H or V
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Align wit h H or V (page 487)
Pl ot
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Plot (page 483)
Nest Manager
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest Manager (page 490)
New
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest > New (page 480)
Delet e
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Delet e (page 482)
Fi nd
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Find (page 482)
Re-Nest
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Re-Nest (page 482)
Edit St ock Plat e
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Edit St ock Plat e (page 482)
Check Nest s and BOM
See SC Plat e Nest > Check Nest s and BOM (page 493)
Updat e Nest s and BOM
See SC Plat e Nest > Updat e Nest s and BOM (page 493)
Nest Collision Check
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest Collision Check (page 493)
List Un-nest ed Part s
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > List Un-nest ed Part s (page 488)
New
See SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > New (page 483)
Delet e
See SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Delet e (page 483)
Edit
See SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Edit Remnant (page 484)
Edit Label
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
456
See SC Plat e Nest > Remnant > Edit Remnant Label (page 484)
Insert Keywords
See SC Plat e Nest > Insert Keywords (page 489)
Aut o Label f rom BOM Index
See SC Plat e Nest > Aut o Label f rom BOM Index (page 489)
(page Error! Bookmark not def ined.) Label Propert ies
See SC Plat e Nest > Label Propert i es (page 490)
Visibilit y
See SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Visibilit y (page 488)
Act ivat e All
See SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Act ivat e All (page 489)
Flip NC-Pyros
See SC Plat e Nest > Layers > Flip NC-Pyros (page 489)
Assign t o NC-Machine
See SC Plat e Nest > Nest > Assign t o NC-Machine (page 483)
New
See SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > New (page 496)
Updat e
See SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > Updat e (page 496)
Delet e
See SC Plat e Nest > Bridge > Delet e (page 496)
Import From
See SC Plat e Nest > NC-Pyros > Import From (page 496)
Export To
See SC Plat e Nest > NC-Pyros > Export To (page 494)
Export Nest Part s t o DWG
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DWG (page 488)
Export Nest Part s t o DXF
See SC Plat e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DXF (page 488)
Prof i l e Nest Panel
Prof ile Nest ing
See ShipConst ruct or > Prof ile Nest ing (page 365)
Prof i l e Plot s Panel
Insert Prof ile Plot s
See SC Prof ile Plot s > Insert Prof ile Plot s (page 500)
Opt ions
See SC Prof ile Plot s > Opt ions (page 503)
Zoom
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
457
See SC Prof ile Plot s > Zoom (page 507)
Check Prof ile Drawings
See SC Prof ile Plot s > Check Prof ile Drawings (page 509)
Updat e All BOMs
See SC Prof ile Plot s > Updat e All BOMs (page 510)
Print Plot s
See SC Prof ile Plot s > Print Plot s (page 508)
Pl at e Nest Templ at e Panel
Insert Keywords
See SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 497)
Def ine Border
See SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Def ine Border (page 497)
Check Nest Templat e Drawing
See SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Check Drawing (page 500)
Updat e f rom a Previous Version
See SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Updat e f rom a Previous Version (page 500)
Prof ile Plot Templat e Panel
Insert Keywords
See SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 511)
Replace Legacy Keywords
See SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Replace Legacy Keywords (page 514)
Draw Border
See SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Draw Border (page 510)
Draw Web Area View
See SC Prof ile Plot Templat e > Draw Web View Area (page 511)
Prof ile Sheet Templat e Panel
Insert Keywords
See SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 515)
Replace Legacy Keywords
See SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Replace Legacy Keywords (page 515)
Draw Border
See SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Draw Border (page 514)
Draw Area
See SC Prof ile Sheet Templat e > Draw Area (page 514)
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
458
St ruct ure Product i on Tab
Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es Panel
Global Dimension t o Point
See SC Assembly > Global Dimension t o Point (page 473)
Check Local Int erf erences
See SC Ut ilit ies > Check Local Int erf erences (page 444)
Clip Current View
See SC Ut ilit ies > Clip Current View (page 433)
Remove Clip
See SC Ut ilit ies > Remove Clip (page 434)
List It em wit hin Block/ Xref
See SC Ut ilit ies > List It em wit hin Block/ Xref (page 444)
Dihedral Angle
See SC Ut ilit ies > Dihedral Angle (page 439)
Creat e Qualit y Mat rix
See SC Ut ilit ies > Creat e Qualit y Mat rix (page 440)
Flip UCS X
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS X (page 431)
Flip UCS Y
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS Y (page 431)
Swap UCS XY Axi s
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Swap UCS XY Axi s (page 432)
Export t o DWG
See SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o DWG (page 444)
Export t o NWC
See SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o NWC (page 445)
Export t o NWD
See SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o NWD (page 445)
Label i ng Panel
Relabel All
See SC Assembly > Label > Relabel All (page 470)
Relabel f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Relabel f rom BOM (page 471)
Relabel f rom Part s
See SC Assembly > Label > Relabel f rom Part s (page 471)
Manual Label f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Manual Label f rom BOM (page 470)
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
459
Copy Label f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Copy Label f rom BOM (page 470)
BOM Panel
(page Error! Bookmark not def ined.) Updat e BOMs
See SC Assembly > Updat e BOMs (page 469)
Edit Collect or Opt ions
See SC Assembly > Edit Collect or Opt ions (page 469)
Assembl y Drawi ng Panel
Updat e Drawing
See SC Assembly > Updat e Drawing (page 465)
Updat e All Keywords
See SC Assembly > Updat e All Keywords (page 467)
CG Point
See SC Assembly > CG Point (page 466)
Approval Drawing Panel
Insert Group
See SC Approval > Insert Group (page 463)
Save As Bound Approval
See SC Approval > Save As Bound Approval (page 464)
Product i on Panel
Insert BOM Table
See SC Assembly > Insert BOM Table (page 469)
Edit Collect or Opt ions
See SC Assembly > Edit Collect or Opt ions (page 469)
Toggle List Only Visible
See SC Assembly > Toggle List Only Visible (page 469)
Insert Keywords
See SC Assembly > Insert Keywords (page 466)
Orient at ion Icon
See SC Assembly > Orient at ion Icon (page 465)
Updat e f rom a Previous Version
See SC Assembly Templat e > Updat e f rom a Previous Version (page 478)
Di st ri but i on Li ne Panel
Creat e Leader Dist ribut ion Line
See SC Assembly > Creat e Leader Dist ribut ion Line (page 472)
At t ach t o Viewport Tracking
See SC Assembly > At t ach t o Viewport Tracking (page 471)
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
460
Toggle Dist ribut ion Line St ret ch Mode
See SC Assembly > Toggle Dist ribut ion Line St ret ch Mode (page 472)
Set Leader Insert ion Mode
See SC Assembly > Set Leader Insert ion Mode (page 472)
Adjust Leader Spacing
See SC Assembly > Adjust Leader Spacing (page 471)
Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Line
See SC Assembly > Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Line (page 472)
Propert y Label Panel
Propert y Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Propert y Label (page 443)
Copy Field Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Copy Field Label (page 443)
Copy Field Label Quick
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Copy Field Label Quick (page 443)
Edit Field Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Edit Field Label (page 443)
Replace Object Ref erences
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Replace Object Ref erences (page 443)
Set Single Click Field Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Set Single Click Field Label (page 444)
Di st ri but ed Syst ems Product i on Tab
Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es Panel
Global Dimension t o Point
See SC Assembly > Global Dimension t o Point (page 473)
Check Local Int erf erences
See SC Ut ilit ies > Check Local Int erf erences (page 444)
Clip Current View
See SC Ut ilit ies > Clip Current View (page 433)
Remove Clip
See SC Ut ilit ies > Remove Clip (page 434)
List It em wit hin Block/ Xref
See SC Ut ilit ies > List It em wit hin Block/ Xref (page 444)
Dihedral Angle
See SC Ut ilit ies > Dihedral Angle (page 439)
Creat e Qualit y Mat rix
See SC Ut ilit ies > Creat e Qualit y Mat rix (page 440)
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
461
Flip UCS X
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS X (page 431)
Flip UCS Y
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Flip UCS Y (page 431)
Swap UCS XY Axi s
See SC Ut ilit ies > UCS > Swap UCS XY Axi s (page 432)
Export t o DWG
See SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o DWG (page 444)
Export t o NWC
See SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o NWC (page 445)
Export t o NWD
See SC Ut ilit ies > Export > Export t o NWD (page 445)
Label i ng Panel
Relabel All
See SC Assembly > Label > Relabel All (page 470)
Relabel f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Relabel f rom BOM (page 471)
Relabel f rom Part s
See SC Assembly > Label > Relabel f rom Part s (page 471)
Manual Label f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Manual Label f rom BOM (page 470)
Copy Label f rom BOM
See SC Assembly > Label > Copy Label f rom BOM (page 470)
BOM Panel
Updat e BOMs
See SC Assembly > Updat e BOMs (page 469)
Edit Collect or Opt ions
See SC Assembly > Edit Collect or Opt ions (page 469)
Spool Drawi ng Panel
Updat e Drawing
See SC Spool Drawing > Updat e Drawing (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Rot ate Dimension
See SC Spool Drawing > Rot at e Dimension (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Align Dimension Text t o Current View
See SC Spool Drawing > Align Dimension Text t o Current View (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Re- Dimension
See SC Spool Drawing > Re-Dimension (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
462
Updat e All Keywords
See SC Spool Drawing > Updat e All Keywords (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Label Connect ing Spool/ Assembly
See SC Spool Drawing > Label Connect ing Spool/ Assembly (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
CG Point
See SC Spool Drawing > CG Point (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Arrangement Drawi ng Panel
Updat e Drawing
See SC Arrangement > Updat e Drawing (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Updat e All Keywords
See SC Arrangement > Updat e All Keywords (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Spool Templ at e Panel
Drawing Opt ions
See SC Spool Templat e > Drawing Opt ions (in Pipe of HVAC Manual)
Product i on Panel
Insert BOM Table
See SC Assembly > Insert BOM Table (page 469)
Edit Collect or Opt ions
See SC Assembly > Edit Collect or Opt ions (page 469)
Toggle List Only Visible
See SC Assembly > Toggle List Only Visible (page 469)
Insert Keywords
See SC Assembly > Insert Keywords (page 466)
Orient at ion Icon
See SC Assembly > Orient at ion Icon (page 465)
Updat e f rom a Previous Version
See SC Assembly Templat e > Updat e f rom a Previous Version (page 478)
Di st ri but i on Li ne Panel
Creat e Leader Dist ribut ion Line
See SC Assembly > Creat e Leader Dist ribut ion Line (page 472)
At t ach t o Viewport Tracking
See SC Assembly > At t ach t o Viewport Tracking (page 471)
Toggle Dist ribut ion Line St ret ch Mode
See SC Assembly > Toggle Dist ribut ion Line St ret ch Mode (page 472)
Set Leader Insert ion Mode
See SC Assembly > Set Leader Insert ion Mode (page 472)
Adjust Leader Spacing
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
463
See SC Assembly > Adjust Leader Spacing (page 471)
Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Line
See SC Assembly > Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Line (page 472)
Propert y Label Panel
Propert y Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Propert y Label (page 443)
Copy Field Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Copy Field Label (page 443)
Copy Field Label Quick
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Copy Field Label Quick (page 443)
Edit Field Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Edit Field Label (page 443)
Replace Object Ref erences
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Replace Object Ref erences (page 443)
Set Single Click Field Label
See SC Ut ilit ies > Propert y Labels > Set Single Click Field Label (page 444)
SC Approval Menu
The SC Approval menu appears in approval drawings (see Approval Drawings (page 209)).
SC Approval > Insert Group
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Approval Drawi ng panel > Insert Group
Menu ............... SC Approval > Insert Group
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTAPPROVAL
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Approval
Procedure ....... Insert a Pl anar Group i nt o an Approval Drawi ng (page 2 1 0)
Insert s a planar group int o an approval drawing.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
464
Insert Pl anar group opt i ons
Show Current Unit Only – Limit s t he list of available drawings t o insert t o t he current unit t o make it f ast er t o show and
easier t o select f rom a smaller list .
Group Label Text Size – Each insert ed group has a label of t he group name as TEXT below t he geomet ry. This value
specif ies t he height of t hat t ext . The t ext st yle is St andard.
SC Approval > Save As Bound Approval
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Approval Drawi ng panel > Save As Bound Approval
Menu ............... SC Approval > Save As Bound Approval
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCBINDAPPROVAL
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Approval
Procedure ....... Save a Bound Approval Drawi ng (page 2 1 1)
Saves an approval drawing as a bound approval drawing.
SC Assembl y Menu
The SC Assembly menu is available wit hin assembly drawings. See Assembly Drawings (page 212).
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
465
SC Assembl y > Updat e Drawi ng
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Assembl y Drawi ng panel > Updat e Drawi ng
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Updat e Drawi ng
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUPDATEDWG
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Updat e Part s i n an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 223)
Updat es t he part s and keywords wit hin an assembly drawing. Annot at ions are not updat ed.
SC Assembl y > Ori ent at i on Icon
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Ori ent at i on Icon
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Ori ent at i on Icon
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCASSORIENT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert an Ori ent at i on Icon i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 230)
Insert s an orient at ion icon int o an assembly drawing. The orient at ion icon can be 3D f or iso drawings or 2D f or 2D
drawi ngs. The st yle of t he icon is not changeable current ly.
3D/ 2D Ori ent at i on Icon Window
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
466
Scal e – The size of t he icon in project unit s.
Axis Label Size – The size of t he direct ion t ext .
Creat e Arrows – Decides if t here are arrows at t he end of t he axis lines.
Type 3D, 2D
Show in current viewport only – If checked, will place t he icon on a layer t hat is only visible in t he current viewport .
SC Assembl y > CG Poi nt
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Assembl y Drawi ng panel > CG Poi nt
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > CG Poi nt
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCGPOINT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Mark an Assembl y’ s CG Posi t i on i n an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 231)
The command insert s a SConCGPoi nt object at a cent er of gravit y (CG) posit ion of t he current assembly. The SConCGPoint
is exact ly like an Aut oCAD POINT object except you cannot move it . The command also changes t he current Point st yle t o
(34). You can change t he st yle of t he CG point by using t he point st yle opt ions. The orient at ion of t he point is based
on t he orient at ion of t he current UCS. If a SConCGPoint already exist s in drawing, it will be moved t o t he correct CG
posit ion.
Not e: Running SC Assembly > Updat e Drawing (page 465) will move t he SConCGPoint t o t he updat ed CG posit ion.
SC Assembl y > Insert Keywords
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Insert Keywords
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Insert Keywords
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTKEYW
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert Keywords i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 225)
Insert s keywords int o an assembly drawing. See also SC Assembly Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 475).
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
467
SC Assembl y > Updat e Al l Keywords
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Assembl y Drawi ng panel > Updat e Al l Keywords
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Updat e Al l Keywords
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUPDATEALLKEYWORDS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Updat e Al l Keywords (page 225)
Updat es all keywords in paper space in t he drawing.
SC Assembl y > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure Di spl ay >
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure....... SC St ruct ure > Show / Hi de Opt i ons
Displays t he st ruct ure drawing opt ions.
SC Assembl y > Pi pe Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > Pi pe Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Pi pe Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ Pi pe >
Command ...... SCPIPEOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure...... See t he Pi pe manual f or det ai l s
Displays t he pipe drawing opt ions.
SC Assembl y > HVAC Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > HVAC Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > HVAC Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ HVAC >
Command ...... SCHVACOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure...... See t he HVAC manual f or det ai l s.
Displays t he HVAC drawing opt ions.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
468
SC Assembl y > Equi pment Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > Equi pment Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Equi pment Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ Equi pment >
Command ...... SCEQUIPDISPLAYOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure...... See t he Equi pment manual f or det ai l s.
Displays t he Equipment drawing opt ions.
SC Assembl y > Vi ewport Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > Vi ewport Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Vi ewport Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCVPORTOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Let s you indicat e whet her an assembly drawing viewport is a keymap viewport or a normal viewport and whet her
ShipConst ruct or will insert aut omat ic annot at ions int o t he viewport .
SC Assembl y > Set Vi ewport Di spl ay Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons panel > Set Vi ewport Di spl ay Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Set Vi ewport Di spl ay Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCVIEWPORTDISPOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure........Set Up Assembl y Drawi ng Templ at e Vi ewport s (page 214 )
Conf igure t he viewport specif ic display opt ions f or a specif ic viewport .
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
469
SC Assembl y > Insert BOM Tabl e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Insert BOM Tabl e
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Insert BOM Tabl e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTEMPTYBOM
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert a BOM Tabl e i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng Templ at e (page 216)
Insert s a BOM t able.
SC Assembl y > Updat e BOMs
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Updat e BOMs
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Updat e BOMs
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUPDATEBOMS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Updat e BOMs (page 228)
Updat es t he BOM Table.
SC Assembl y > Edi t Col l ect or Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Edi t Col l ect or Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Edi t Col l ect or Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCTWEAKBOMOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Edi t BOM Col l ect or Opt i ons (page 228)
Allows t he user t o change t he Pipe/ HVAC BOM Collect or opt ions.
SC Assembl y > Toggl e Li st Onl y Vi si bl e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Toggl e Li st Onl y Vi si bl e
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Toggl e Li st Onl y Vi si bl e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCTOGGLELISTVISIBLE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Li st Onl y Vi si bl e (page 229)
Toggles t he variable in t he BOM t o list only t hose part s visible or not .
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
470
SC Assembl y > Label > Manual Label f rom BOM
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Label i ng panel > Manual Label f rom BOM
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Label > Manual Label f rom BOM
Tool bar ............ Assembl y >
Command ...... SCLABELMANUAL
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Manual Label i ng f rom BOM (page 232)





SC Assembl y > Label > Copy Label f rom BOM
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Label i ng panel > Copy Label f rom BOM
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Label > Copy Label f rom BOM
Tool bar ............ Assembl y >
Command ...... SCLABELCOPY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Manual Label i ng f rom BOM (page 232)



SC Assembl y > Label > Rel abel Al l
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Label i ng panel > Rel abel Al l
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Label > Rel abel Al l
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCRELABELALL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Rel abel Al l (page 216)
Generat es labels f or all new BOM it ems and places t hem on t he _ANNOTATION layer.
Labels are generat ed only once. Subsequent commands only updat e t he label t ext t o ref lect t he Bill of Mat erials.
Even t hough labels are placed in Paper Space, t hey now t rack t he object s in Model Space so t hat if t he user pans, zooms,
or orbit s in t he viewport , t he labels t rack accordingly and remain synchronized t o t he object s t hat t hey represent .
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
471
SC Assembl y > Label > Rel abel f rom BOM
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Label i ng panel > Rel abel f rom BOM
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Label > Rel abel f rom BOM
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCRELABELFROMBOM
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Rel abel f rom a sel ect ed BOM (page 217)
Relabels part s f rom a select ed BOM and places t hem on t he _ANNOTATION layer.
Labels are generat ed only once. Subsequent commands only updat e t he label t ext t o ref lect t he Bill of Mat erials.
Even t hough labels are placed in Paper Space, t hey now t rack t he object s in Model Space so t hat if t he user pans, zooms,
or orbit s in t he viewport , t he labels t rack accordingly and remain synchronized t o t he object s t hat t hey represent .
SC Assembl y > Label > Rel abel f rom Part s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Label i ng panel > Rel abel f rom Part s
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Label > Rel abel f rom Part s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCRELABELFROMPARTS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Rel abel f rom Part s (page 217)
Relabels select ed part s f rom t he BOMs.
SC Assembl y > Adj ust Leader Spaci ng
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Di st ri but i on Li ne panel > Adj ust Leader Spaci ng
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Adj ust Leader Spaci ng
Tool bar ............ Leader Ut i l s
Command ...... SCCREATEDISTRIBUTIONLINE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Adj ust Leader Spaci ng
Adjust s minmum leader spacing based on user input . Labels t hat are closer t han specif ied minimum are shif t ed t o
minimum spacing.
SC Assembl y > At t ach t o Vi ewport Tracki ng
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Di st ri but i on Li ne panel > At t ach t o Vi ewport Tracki ng
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > At t ach t o Vi ewport Tracki ng
Tool bar ............ Leader Ut i l s
Command ...... SCATTDL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... At t ach t o Vi ewport Tracki ng
Viewport t racking allows cert ain object s t o t ranslat e in accordance wit h pan and zoom operat ions in t he viewport . The
f ollowing object s can be at t ached t o viewport t racking:
• Dist ribut ion lines
• ShipConst ruct or labels (SConLabel)
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
472
• Aut oCAD leaders
• MText
• Aut oCAD Text
• Li nes
SC Assembl y > Creat e Leader Di st ri but i on Li ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Di st ri but i on Li ne panel > Creat e Leader Di st ri but i on Li ne
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Creat e Leader Di st ri but i on Li ne
Tool bar ............ Leader Ut i l s
Command ...... SCCREATEDISTRIBUTIONLINE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Creat e Leader Di st ri but i on Li ne
Creat es a line t hat can be used t o easily align and move labels as a group.
SC Assembl y > Set Leader Insert i on Mode
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Di st ri but i on Li ne panel > Set Leader Insert i on Mode
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Set Leader Insert i on Mode
Tool bar ............ Leader Ut i l s
Command ...... SCDISTLINESETINSERTIONMODE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Set Leader Insert i on Mode (page 302)
Adjust s t he insert ion mode of all labels on line.
SC Assembl y > Toggl e Di st ri but i on Li ne St ret ch Mode
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Di st ri but i on Li ne panel > Toggl e Di st ri but i on Li ne St ret ch Mode
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Toggl e Di st ri but i on Li ne St ret ch Mode
Tool bar ............ Leader Ut i l s
Command ...... SCTOGGLEDISTRIBUTIONLINEBEHAVIOR
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Toggl e Di st ri but i on Li ne St ret ch Mode
Changes t he behavior when t he line is st ret ched. Changes f rom “ leave” t o “ st ret ch” In st ret ch mode t he leader posit ions
remain at t heir respect ive paramet ers along t he line.
SC Assembl y > Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Li ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Di st ri but i on Li ne panel > Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Li ne
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Li ne
Tool bar ............ Leader Ut i l s
Command ...... SCTRANSFERLEADERS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure...... Transf er Leaders t o Ot her Li ne
Move leaders f rom one dist ribut ion line t o anot her.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
473
SC Assembl y > Insert Wel d Symbol Tabl e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Insert Wel d Symbol Tabl e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTWELDSYMBOLTABLE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert a Wel d Symbol Tabl e i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 229)
Insert s an empt y 1x2 t able, which will be f illed wit h weld st andard and weld scenarios f or all welds in t he drawing’s
assembl y.
SC Assembl y > Updat e Wel d Symbol Tabl es
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Updat e Wel d Symbol Tabl es
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUPDATEWELDSYMBOLTABLES
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure ....... Updat e Wel d Symbol Tabl es i n an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 229)
Updat es all weld symbol t ables in t he current drawing, inst ead of having t o do a f ull drawing updat e.
SC Assembl y > Gl obal Di mensi on t o Poi nt
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Label i ng panel > Gl obal Di mensi on t o Poi nt
Menu ............... SC Assembl y > Gl obal Di mensi on t o Poi nt
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCDISTANCEFROMPOINT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Assembl y Drawi ngs - Edi t
Procedure........ Insert a Label or Di mensi on From a Poi nt t o a St ruct ural Group (page 197)
Indicat es t he dist ance f rom a given point t o a select ed plane as a label or a dimension.
SC Assembl y Templ at e Menu
The SC Assembly Templat e menu appears in assembly t emplat e drawings (see Set Up Assembly Drawings (page 213)).
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
474
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Ori ent at i on Icon
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Ori ent at i on Icon
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Ori ent at i on Icon
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCASSORIENT
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Procedure ....... Insert an Ori ent at i on Icon i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 230)
Insert s an orient at ion icon int o an assembly drawing. The orient at ion icon can be 3D f or iso drawings or 2D f or 2D
drawi ngs. The st yle of t he icon is not changeable current l y.
3D/ 2D Ori ent at i on Icon Window
Scal e – The size of t he icon in project unit s.
Axis Label Size – The size of t he direct ion t ext .
Creat e Arrows – Decides if t here are arrows at t he end of t he axis lines.
Type 3D, 2D
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
475
Show in current viewport only – If checked, will place t he icon on a layer t hat is only visible in t he current viewport .
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Insert Keywords
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Insert Keywords
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Insert Keywords
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTKEYW
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Procedure ....... Insert Keywords i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng Templ at e (page 2 1 5)
Let s you insert keywords int o an assembly drawing t emplat e.
Keyword Descri pt i on
<ASSEMBLY CG> The Cent er of Gravit y of t he assembly
<ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION 1> The Descript ion1 User Def ined At t ribut e of t he assembly
<ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION 2> The Descript ion2 User Def ined At t ribut e of t he assembly
<ASSEMBLY LCG> Longit udinal component of t he Cent er of Gravit y of t he
assembl y
<ASSEMBLY LEVEL> The level (rank) name of t he assembly
<ASSEMBLY NAME> The name of t he assembly
<ASSEMBLY PROPERTIES> The level name, weight , cent er of gravit y, and f inishes of
t he assembly
<ASSEMBLY TCG> The t ransverse component of t he Cent er of Gravit y of t he
assembl y
<ASSEMBLY VCG> The vert ical component of t he Cent er of Gravit y of t he
assembl y
<ASSEMBLY WEIGHT> The t ot al weight of t he assembly
<FULL ASSEMBLY NAME> The f ull pat h of t he assembly t ree t hat t his assembly
belongs t o
<SHORT ASSEMBLY NAME> The name of t he assembly and it s direct parent
<ASSEMBLY UDA> User Def ined At t ribut es of t he assembly in Primary Build
St rat egy. One keyword f or each UDA
SC Assembl y Templ at e > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > St ruct ure Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ St ruct ure Di spl ay >
Command ...... SCSTRUCTDISPLAY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure...... SC St ruct ure > Show / Hi de Opt i ons
Displays t he st ruct ure drawing opt ions.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
476
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Pi pe Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons > Pi pe Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Pi pe Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ Pi pe >
Command ...... SCPIPEOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure...... See t he Pi pe manual f or det ai l s
Displays t he pipe drawing opt ions.
SC Assembl y Templ at e > HVAC Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons > HVAC Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > HVAC Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ HVAC >
Command ...... SCHVACOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure...... See t he HVAC manual f or det ai l s.
Displays t he HVAC drawing opt ions.
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Equi pment Drawi ng Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons > Equi pment Drawi ng Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Equi pment Drawi ng Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ Equi pment >
Command ...... SCEQUIPDISPLAYOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure...... See t he Equi pment manual f or det ai l s.
Displays t he Equipment drawing opt ions.
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Vi ewport Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons > Vi ewport Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Vi ewport Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCVPORTOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Set Up Assembl y Drawi ng Templ at e Vi ewport s (page 214)
Let s you indicat e whet her an assembly drawing t emplat e viewport is a keymap viewport or a normal viewport and
whet her ShipConst ruct or will insert aut omat ic annot at ions int o t he viewport .
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
477
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Set Vi ewport Di spl ay Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Drawi ng Opt i ons > Set Vi ewport Di spl ay Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Set Vi ewport Di spl ay Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCVIEWPORTDISPOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure........Set Up Assembl y Drawi ng Templ at e Vi ewport s (page 214 )
Conf igure t he viewport specif ic display opt ions f or a specif ic viewport .
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Insert Wel d Symbol Tabl e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ None
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Insert Wel d Symbol Tabl e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTWELDSYMBOLTABLE
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Procedure ....... Insert a Wel d Symbol Tabl e i nt o an Assembl y Drawi ng (page 229)
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Insert BOM Tabl e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Insert BOM Tabl e
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Insert BOM Tabl e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTEMPTYBOM
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Procedure .......
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Edit Col l ect or Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Edi t Col l ect or Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Edi t Col l ect or Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCTWEAKBOMOPTIONS
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Procedure...... Edi t BOM Col l ect or Opt i ons (page 228)
Allows t he user t o change t he BOM Collect or opt ions.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
478
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Toggl e Li st Onl y Visible
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Toggl e Li st Onl y Vi si bl e
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Toggl e Li st Onl y Vi si bl e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCTOGGLELISTVISIBLE
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Templ at e Drawi ngs
Procedure...... Li st Onl y Vi si bl e (page 229)
Toggles t he variable in t he BOM t o list only t hose part s visible or not .
SC Assembl y Templ at e > Updat e f rom a Previ ous Versi on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Updat e f rom a Previ ous Versi on
Menu ............... SC Assembl y Templ at e > Updat e f rom a Previ ous Versi on
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUPDATEPREVIOUSTEMP
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure .......
SC Product Hi erarchy Menu
The SC Product Hierarchy menu appears in product hierarchy drawings (see Set t ing up Mult iple Product Hierarchies (page
109)).
SC Product Hi erarchy > Devel op Product Hi erarchy
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Navi gat i on > Devel op Product Hi erarchy
Menu ............... SC Producy Hi erarchy > Devel op Product Hi erarchy
Tool bar ............ Assembl y >
Command ...... SCPRODUCTHIERARCHY
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Product Hi erarchi es (page 108)
Opens t he Product Hierarchy window, let t ing you set up assembly levels and assemblies and assign part s t o assemblies.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Reference
479
SC Int erf erence Menu
The SC Int erf erence menu appears in int erf erence drawings.
SC Int erf erence > Check Int erf erences
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > Model i ng/ Product i on Ut i l i t i es panel > Check Int erf erences
Menu ............... SC Int erf erence > Check Int erf erences
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINTERCHECK
Permi ssi ons ... General > Edi t Int erf erence
Procedure ....... Check Int erf erences (page 192)
Checks t he current int erf erence drawing f or part s t hat int erf ere.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
480
Run Check – St art t he int erf erence checking procedure.
SC Pl at e Nest Menu
The SC Pl at e Nest menu appears in nest drawings (see Set Up Nest Drawings and Nest s (page 238)).
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > New
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > New
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTNEW
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert a Nest Int o a Nest Drawi ng (page 240)
Insert s a new nest int o a nest drawing. Nest s are based on a nest t emplat e. The t emplat e cont ains keywords. Some of
t he keywords are replaced wit h ShipConstruct or dat abase dat a during insert ion of a nest ; ot hers are replaced at a lat er
st age.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
481
New St ock Plat e Window
Nest Name – The f unct ion aut omat ically uses t he next available number f or t he nest name.
Creat e Like/ Mirror Nest – Select t his t o creat e a like-and-mirror nest .
St ock Name – The name of t he st ock assigned t o t he current drawing.
Thickness – The t hickness of t he st ock assigned t o t he current drawing.
Mat erial – The mat erial of t he st ock assigned t o t he current drawing.
Exist ing Nest s – Displays t he names of nest plat es already in t his nest drawing.
St ock Size – Displays t he available st ock sizes.
Remnant s – List s all available remnant s of t he same st ock. You can use a remnant inst ead of raw st ock f or a nest .
Templ at es – Displays t he available t emplat es.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
482
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Del et e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Del et e
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Del et e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTDELETE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Del et e a Nest (page 261)
Delet es a nest . Pick t he nest you want t o delet e. You can pick on t he nest border or t he act ual plat e t o select t he nest .
The color of each of t hese part s will change t o t he unassigned nest ing colors.
Not e: You can also use t he Aut oCAD erase command t o delet e a nest .
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Find
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Fi nd
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Fi nd
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTFIND
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Fi nd a Nest (page 2 6 1)
Let s you zoom int o any nest in t he project .
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Re-Nest
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Re-nest
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Re-nest
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTRENEST
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Re-nest a Nest (page 252)
Applies a dif f erent nest ing algorit hm t o a set of nest ed part s and aut omat ically re-nest t hem (f or example, if you are not
sat isf ied wit h t he original nest ing).
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Edit St ock Pl at e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Edi t St ock Pl at e
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Edi t St ock Pl at e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTEDIT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Edi t t he St ock Pl at e of a Nest (page 261)
Changes t he st ock plat e used f or t he nest . You can only change t he name, st ock size, or change bet ween using a f ull
st ock plat e or a remnant . You cannot change t he st ock t hickness or t ype of mat erial.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
483
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Plot
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Pl ot
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Pl ot
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTPLOT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Pl ot Nest s (page 273)
Plot s nest s t o a print er.
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Assi gn t o NC-Machi ne
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Assi gn t o NC-Machi ne
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest > Assi gn t o NC-Machi ne
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTASSIGNNCMACHINE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Assi gn t o NC-Machi ne (page 264)
Assi gns a nest t o an NC-Machine. The bridge widt h f or each nest is def ined by t he NC-Machine assigned t o t hat nest .
SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > New
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > New
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTNEWREMNANT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Creat e a Remnant (page 265)
Creat es a new remnant .
SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > Del et e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Del et e
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > Del et e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTDELETEREMNANT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Del et e a Remnant (page 268)
Delet es a remnant .
Not e: You can also use t he Aut oCAD erase command t o delet e a remnant .
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
484
SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > Edi t Remnant
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Edi t Remnant
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > Edi t Remnant
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTEDITREMNANT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Edi t a Remnant (page 267)
Redef ines a remnant ’s shape.
SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > Edi t Remnant Label
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Edi t Remnant Label
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Remnant > Edi t Remnant Label
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTEDITREMNANTLABEL
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Edi t a Remnant (page 267)
Changes a remnant ’s label.
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Insert
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Insert
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Insert
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCNESTINSERTPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert Part s Int o a Nest (page 241)
......................... Aut omat i cal l y Insert and Nest Several Part s (page 246)
Insert s part s int o a nest , eit her manually or aut omat ically (if you have a license f or Aut omat icNest ). Part s t hat have not
been insert ed int o a nest drawing are list ed.
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Re-i nsert
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Rei nsert
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Rei nsert
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTUPDATEPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Re-i nsert Part s Int o a Nest (page 270)
Re-insert s t he select ed part s using t he lat est st at e. A check f unct ion is run and will warn t he user if any of t he part s are
out -of -dat e.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
485
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Remove
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Remove
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Remove
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTREMOVEPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Remove Part s f rom a Nest (page 252)
Un-nest s t he select ed part s. The part s are removed f rom t he nest drawing.
Not e: You can also use t he Aut oCAD erase command t o un-nest a part .
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Sl i de Al ong
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Sl i de Al ong
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Sl i de Al ong
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCNESTSLIDEPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Sl i de a Part Al ong a Pl at e Edge or Part Edge (page 255)
The slide f unct ion allows you t o slide one part along t he plat e edge or any number of ot her part s. On t he part t o slide you
have t o select t wo point s. The f irst point is t he slide point ; t he second point indicat es a tangent direct ion. The t angent
direct ion will be aligned wit h t he out side of t he ot her part or t he plat e edge. A ghost image is displayed around t he sliding
part t o indicat e t he gap.
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Move/ Rot at e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Move/ Rot at e
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Move/ Rot at e
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCNESTMOVEPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Move or Rot at e Part s wi t hi n a Nest (page 257)
Moves and rot at es part s. In some cases it is t he easiest t o move and rot at e t he part around unt il it f it s an empt y space.
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Al i gn
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Al i gn
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Al i gn
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTALIGNPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure .......
Aligns a part wit h t he horizont al or vert ical.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
486
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Rot at e Short est Di mension
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Rot at e Short est Di mensi on
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Rot at e Short est Di mensi on
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTROTATEPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Move or Rot at e Part s wi t hi n a Nest (page 257)
Rot at es t he part so t hat it f it s int o t he smallest horizont al or vert ical rect angle.
Pl at e part bef ore Rot at e Short est Di mensi on
Pl at e part af t er Rot at e Short est Di m ensi on
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
487
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Li st
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Li st
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Li st
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCPARTLIST
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Fi ndi ng Part s i n a Nest Drawi ng (page 257)
Displays a list of all part s, similar t o SC St ruct ure > Part s > List (page 410). However, t he right -click menu is slight ly
di f f erent .
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Find
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Fi nd
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Fi nd
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCFINDPARTDWG
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
See SC St ruct ure > Part s > Find (page 411).
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Snap
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Snap
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Snap
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCNESTSNAPPART
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Posi t i on Part s Next t o each ot her (page 259)
Let s you place a part against t he edge of t he plat e or anot her part , leaving a specif ied gap bet ween part s.
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Al i gn wi t h H or V
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Al i gn wi t h H or V
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Al i gn wi t h H or V
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCNESTALIGNPARTHV
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Move or Rot at e Part s wi t hi n a Nest (page 257)
Aligns one side of a part wit h t he horizont al or vert ical axis.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
488
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Li st Un-nest ed Part s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Li st Un-nest ed Part s
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Li st Un-nest ed Part s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTLISTUNNESTED
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Li st Un-nest ed Part s i n an Assembl y (page 258)
List all un-nest ed part s wit hin an assembly (f or example, t o ensure t hat all part s f or an assembly are ready in t ime f or
product i on). It will list part s t hat are not current ly assigned t o a nest .
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DWG
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Export Nest Part s t o DWG
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DWG
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTEXPORTPARTS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Export Part s t o Indi vi dual Drawi ngs (page 272)
Creat es an individual drawing f ile f or each nest part select ed t o be export ed. Each generat ed drawing is opened, zoomed
t o t he ext ent s of t he object s and unused layers are purged.
SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DXF
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Export Nest Part s t o DXF
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Export Nest Part s t o DXF
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTEXPORTPARTSDXF
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Export Part s t o Indi vi dual Drawi ngs (page 272)
Creat es an individual drawing f ile f or each nest part select ed t o be export ed in DXF f ormat .
SC Pl at e Nest > Layers > Vi si bi l i t y
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Vi si bi l i t y
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Part > Vi si bi l i t y
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCNESTLAYER
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Hi de or Show Nest ed Part s, Revi sed Part s, or NC Cut t i ng Pat hs (page 260)
Cont rols t he visibilit y of t he nest ing layers.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
489
SC Pl at e Nest > Layers > Act i vat e Al l
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Act i vat e Al l
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Layer > Act i vat e Al l
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTLAYERALL
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Hi de or Show Nest ed Part s, Revi sed Part s, or NC Cut t i ng Pat hs (page 260)
Displays all layers in a nest drawing.
SC Pl at e Nest > Layers > Fl i p NC-Pyros
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Fl i p NC-Pyros
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Layer > Fl i p NC-Pyros
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTLAYERFLIP
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Hi de or Show Nest ed Part s, Revi sed Part s, or NC Cut t i ng Pat hs (page 260)
Flips bet ween t he nest ing and NC-Pyros layers. You can f lip back and f ort h. Use t his t o invest igat e specif ic areas of t he NC
pat h if problems occur.
SC Pl at e Nest > Insert Keywords
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Insert Keywords
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Insert Keywords
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTINSERTKW
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert Keywords i nt o a Nest (page 261)
Let s you insert keywords int o a nest . See al so SC Plat e Nest Templat e > Insert Keywords (page 497).
SC Pl at e Nest > Aut o Label f rom BOM Index
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Aut o Label f rom BOM Index
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Aut o Label f rom BOM Index
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTLABELAUTO
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Label l i ng Part s (page 258)
Labels t he nest ed part s wit h t heir index in t he BOM.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
490
SC Pl at e Nest > Label Propert i es
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Label Propert i es
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Label Propert i es
Tool bar ............ Label s >
Command ...... SCNESTLABELEDIT
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Label l i ng Part s (page 258)
Edit s t he propert ies f or a label.
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest Manager
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Nest Manager
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest Manager
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTMANAGER
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Displays t he Nest Manager.
The Nest Manager shows all t he nest s and let s you ent er heat numbers.
Nest St at us – Let s you modif y nest s t hrough t he st ages f rom Creat ed t o Issued t o Cut . Current ly t he nest st at us does not
have any ef f ect on t he part s.
Generat e Report – Creat es a log f ile wit h all t he inf ormat ion displayed in t he window.
Zoom t o Nest – Opens t he nest ’s drawing, and zooms t o it .
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
491
The columns can be sort ed by t yping in t he blank t ext box just below t he column headings.
The displayed columns can be modif ied by right -clicking on a column header and select ing f rom t he list shown.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
492
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
493
SC Pl at e Nest > Check Nest s and BOM
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Check Nest s and BOM
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Check Nest s and BOM
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTCHECK
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Check Nest Drawi ngs f or Errors and Un-nest ed Part s (page 2 6 8)
Checks a nest drawing f or errors and updat es t he BOMs.
SC Pl at e Nest > Updat e Nest s and BOM
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel >> Updat e Nest s and BOM
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Updat e Nest s and BOM
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTUPDATE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Updat e Nest Keywords and BOMs (page 269)
Updat es t he nest keywords and t he BOMs f or t he select ed nest s (wit hout perf orming ext ensive checks like SC Plat e Nest
> Check Nest s and BOM (page 493)).
SC Pl at e Nest > Nest Col l i si on Check
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Nest Col l i si on Check
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Nest Col l i si on Check
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTCOLLISIONS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Check Nest s f or Col l i si ons (page 269)
Checks if any of t he nest ed part s overlap each ot her, are t oo close t o each ot her or are t oo close t o t he edge of t he plat e
(based on t he part gap def ined in Manager f or each st ock).
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
494
Doubl e-clicking on t he each collision will highlight t he t wo colliding part s and show circles drawn at t he post ion of t he
int erf erence. The st ock’s Nest Part Of f set and Nest Edge Of f set are t he values t hat det ermine if t he it ems collide.
St at us
Sof t – The t wo it ems are wit hin t he of f set but do not overlap. The Measured Gap indicat es how close t he it ems are t o
each ot her.
Hard – The it ems overlap and would cut across each ot her if t he nest was cut .
SC Pl at e Nest > NC-Pyros > Export To
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Export To
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > NC-Pyros > Export To
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTEXPORTNCPYROS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Export Nest s t o NC-Pyros (page 270)
Export s nest s t o DXF f iles t hat you can read int o NC-Pyros f or creat ing cut t ing pat hs.
Export To NC-Pyros Window
Show only nest s f rom current drawing – If not checked, all nest s in t he project will be list ed. The f unct ion will open all
drawings and export t he nest s t hat have been select ed f rom t hat drawing.
Changed since last Export – If checked, will only list nest s t hat have been changed or are new since last export ing t o NC-
Pyros.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
495
Pick Nest s – Let s you pick t he nest s in t he drawing t o export .
Opt ions – Opens t he Export Opt ions window.
Shif t Plat e t o Origin – Check t his opt ion if you want t o move t he lower lef t edge of t he nest plat e t o 0,0 in t he export ed
drawing. While NC-Pyros can do t his f or you aut omat ically, ot her nest ing sof t ware may not . If you int end t o use t he Import
From command, t hen do not use t his opt ion because t he Import From will show all nest s at t he origin.
Explode Polylines – For NC sof t ware t hat cannot read polylines.
Remove Piecemark Bubble – This let s you remove t he bubble when t he part s cont ain t hem in t he model but you do not
want t hem marked.
Run Convert 3D t o 2D – NC code generat ion sof t ware may not handle object s wit h an ext rusion direct ion. This command
ensures t hat t he ext rusion direct ion is removed. Evidence of t his case is when geomet ry is placed in an unexpect ed
locat ion in t he NC code generat ion program.
Only Part s and plat e st ock – Export s only t he object s inside t he plat e st ock area. Use t his opt ion when you have some
object s in t he header of t he nest t hat are in a processed color.
All inside border – Export every object t hat is inside t he nest border.
Layers – NC-Pyros can dif f erent iat e processes by color or by layer. Colors or layers can be used t o dist inguish bet ween
out side, inside, marking, no process, inset , pl at e, bevel marking, bevel angles and bevel st andard angles. The colors f or
t he various object s t ypes are set t able in t he Manager > General > Project Set t ings > St ruct ure Colors > NC-Pyros Colors.
The layer names of t he various object s are separat ed using t he layer name specif ied here.
Out side – Out side cut s
Insi de – Holes in part s
Mark – Marklines and t ext on part s
No Process – Object s not t o be processed but are export ed
Inset – Part s inside holes of part s
Pl at e – The st ock plat e border
Bevel Mark – Marking f or bevel cut t ing. Bevel St andards are labeled marked on t his layer.
Bevel Angle – Variable and const ant bevel angles are placed as t ext object s on t his layer wit h XDATA t hat indicat es
det ailed inf ormat ion about t he cut .
Bevel St andard – Bevel cut s made f rom Bevel St andards.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
496
SC Pl at e Nest > NC-Pyros > Import From
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Import From
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > NC-Pyros > Import From
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTIMPORTNCPYROS
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Import Cut t i ng Pat hs i nt o Nest s (page 272)
Import s a DXO f ile (cont aining NC cut t ing pat hs and direct ion arrows) generat ed f rom NC-Pyros int o a nest drawing. The
generat ed pat h is insert ed on t op of t he nest and is place in an Aut oCAD block. You may want t o show t he pat h t he NC
machine f ollows when cut t ing a nest on t he plot of t he nest f or t he machine operat or.
SC Pl at e Nest > Bri dge > New
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > New
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Bri dge > New
Tool bar ............ Nest >
Command ...... SCNESTNEWBRIDGE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Insert a Bri dge (page 264)
Let s you insert a bridge bet ween t wo part s. A bridge connect s t wo part s so t hat t hey do not drop or t ilt in t he NC-Machine.
Bridges also reduce t he number of pierces of t he cut t ing head t hereby reducing wear on it . The widt h of t he bridge is set
f or each plat e st ock in Manager. See St ruct ure St ock Cat alog (page 324).
SC Pl at e Nest > Bri dge > Delet e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Del et e
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Bri dge > Del et e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTDELETEBRIDGE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... Del et e Bri dges (page 2 6 5)
Delet es select ed bridges in a nest drawing.
Not e: You can also use t he Aut oCAD erase command t o delet e a bridge.
SC Pl at e Nest > Bri dge > Updat e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest panel > Updat e
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest > Bri dge > Updat e
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTUPDATEBRIDGE
Permi ssi ons ... St ruct ure > Pl at e Nest > Pl at e Nest s - Edi t
Procedure ....... None
Updat es a bridge, if t he bridge widt h has changed in Manager.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
497
SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e Menu
The SC Pl at e Nest Templat e menu is available wit hin nest t emplat e drawings. See Set Up Nest Templat es (page 235).
SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Def i ne Border
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest Templ at e panel > Def i ne Border
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Def i ne Border
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTNEWTEMPLATE
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Def i ne a Nest Templ at e Border (page 237)
Uses a closed polyline t o def ine a border f or t he nest t emplat e.
SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Insert Keywords
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest Templ at e panel > Insert Keywords
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Insert Keywords
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTKEYW
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Insert Keywords i nt o a Nest Templ at e (page 238)
Let s you insert keywords int o a nest t emplat e.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
498
Keyword Descri pt i on
<COMPANY NAME> Company name f rom Project Set t ings
<FILE NAME> The f ile name only
<FILEPATH> The complet e pat h and f ile name
<HULL NUMBER> Hull number f rom Project Set t ings
<JOB NUMBER> Job number f rom Project Set t ings
<LAST UPDATE DATE AND TIME> The dat e and t ime of t he last updat e of t his drawing
<LAST UPDATE DATE> The dat e of t he last updat e of t his drawing
<NEST AREA> Area of t he nest
<NEST CUT DISTANCE> Combined dist ance of all cut s made
<NEST CUT FEED> Cut t ing speed of t he NC Machine used
<NEST DATE> Dat e of creat ion
<NEST ESTIMATED TIME> Est imat ed t ime t o cut and mark t his nest , based on
cut / mark/ f ast f eeds and dist ances, and piercing t ime
<NEST EXPORT DATE> Dat e when t he nest was export ed
<NEST EXPORT TIME> Time when t he nest was export ed
<NEST EXPORT USER> The user who export ed t he nest
<NEST FAR FINISHES> Common f inishes f or f ar side markings
<NEST FAST FEED> Fast t ravel speed of t he NC Machine used
<NEST FAST TRAVEL DISTANCE> Combined dist ance of all f ast t ravel made
<NEST FINISHES> Common f inishes f or bot h f ar and mark side
<NEST HEAT NUMBER> Heat number of t he plat e st ock used
<NEST ISSUE DATE> Dat e when t he nest was issued
<NEST ISSUE TIME> Time when t he nest was issued
<NEST ISSUE USER> The user who issued t he nest
<NEST LENGTH> Lengt h of t he nest
<NEST LIKE/ MIRROR> The LIKE alias if a single nest , or t he LIKE/ MIRROR alias
if a Like/ Mirror nest
<NEST MARK DISTANCE> Combined dist ance of all markings made
<NEST MARK FEED> Marking speed of t he NC Machine used
<NEST MARK FINISHES> Common f inishes f or mark side markings
<NEST NAME> Name of t he nest
<NEST NCCODE GENERATE DATE> Dat e when t he nest ’s NCCode was generat ed
<NEST NCCODE GENERATE TIME> Time when t he nest ’s NCCode was generat ed
<NEST NCCODE GENERATE USER> The user who creat ed t he nest ’s NCCode
<NEST NCCUT DATE> Dat e when t he nest was cut
<NEST NCCUT TIME> Time when t he nest was cut
<NEST NCCUT USER> The user who cut t he nest
<NEST NC-MACHINE NAME> Name of t he NC Machine used
<NEST NUMBER OF PIERCES> Amount of pierces on t he nest
<NEST PART AREA> Area of all part s assigned t o t he nest
<NEST PART WEIGHT> Weight of all part s assigned t o t he nest
<NEST REMNANT LIST> List s of all remnant s creat ed f rom t his of t he nest
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
499
<NEST REMNANT NAME> Name of t he remnant t his nest was creat ed f rom
<NEST REMNANT WEIGHT> Weight of all remnant s creat ed f rom t his nest
<NEST SCRAP UTILIZATION> Percent age of t he area t hat is not part s over t he area of
t he it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST SCRAP WEIGHT> Remaining weight af t er subt ract ing part and remnant
weight f rom t he nest st ock weight
<NEST SIZE> Lengt h x Widt h of t he nest
<NEST STOCK AREA> Area of t he it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST STOCK LENGTH> Lengt h of t he it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST STOCK NAME> Name of t he it em used t o creat e t he nest (remnant name
if creat ed f rom a remnant , or t he plat e st ock name if
creat ed f rom raw st ock)
<NEST STOCK PLATE LOCATION> Indicat or keyword f or t he locat ion of t he st ock plat e in
t he nest t emplat e drawing
<NEST STOCK SIZE> Length x Widt h of t he it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST STOCK UTILIZATION> Percent age of t he area t hat is part s and remnant s over
t he area of t he it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST STOCK WEIGHT> Weight of t he it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST STOCK WIDTH> Widt h of t he it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST TIME> Time of creat ion
<NEST USER> The user who creat ed t he nest
<NEST UTILIZATION> Percent age of t he area of all part s over t he area of t he
it em used t o creat e t he nest
<NEST WEIGHT> Weight of t he nest
<NEST WIDTH> Widt h of t he nest
<PLATE STOCK AREA> Area of t he original plat e st ock
<PLATE STOCK LENGTH> Lengt h of t he original plat e st ock
<PLATE STOCK MATERIAL> Mat erial of t he original plat e st ock
<PLATE STOCK NAME> Name of t he original plat e st ock
<PLATE STOCK SIZE> Lengt h x Widt h of original plat e st ock
<PLATE STOCK THICKNESS> Thickness of t he plat e st ock used
<PLATE STOCK WEIGHT> Weight of t he original plat e st ock
<PLATE STOCK WIDTH> Widt h of t he original plat e st ock
<PROJECT DESCRIPTION> Descript ion of t he project f rom Project Set t ings
<PROJECT NAME> Name of t he project f rom Project Set t ings
<USER> Current user
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
500
SC Nest Templ at e > Insert BOM Tabl e
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ St ruct ure Product i on t ab > BOM panel > Insert BOM Tabl e
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Insert Keywords
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTEMPTYBOM
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... None
Let s you insert a Part Bill of Mat erials int o a nest t emplat e. You must creat e a BOM def init ion in Manager bef ore insert ing
a t able (See General > Product ion Out put > Bill Of Mat erials (page 320)).
SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Updat e f rom a Previ ous Versi on
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest Templ at e panel > Updat e f rom a Previ ous Versi on
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Updat e f rom a Previ ous Versi on
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTUPDATETEMPDWG
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure .......
Updat es t he t emplat e drawing f rom a Previous Version (ShipConst ruct or2005 and earlier) t o t he f ormat used by
ShipConst ruct or.
SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Check Drawi ng
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Pl at e Nest Templ at e panel > Check Drawi ng
Menu ............... SC Pl at e Nest Templ at e > Check Drawi ng
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCNESTCHECKTEMPDWG
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Check Drawi ng Val i di t y (page 238)
Runs a check on t he t emplat e drawing t o conf irm t hat it has t he correct number of necessary object s insert ed, and can
be used f or nest ing.
SC Prof i l e Pl ot s Menu
The SC Prof i l e Pl ot s menu is available wit hin prof ile plot drawings.
SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Insert Prof i l e Pl ot s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Pl ot s panel > Insert Prof i l e Pl ot s
Menu ............... SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Insert Prof i l e Pl ot s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCINSERTSTIFFENERS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Insert Prof i l e Pl ot s Int o a Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng (page 281)
Insert s prof ile plot s int o t he prof ile plot drawing.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
501
Sel ect St i f f ener Window
Show Current Unit Only – When t his is checked only part s in assemblies under t he current unit will be displayed. If
unchecked part s in all assemblies are shown.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
502
St i f f ener Fi l t eri ng Wi ndow
Allows t he user t o f ilt er t he st if f eners displayed in t he St if f ener Select Window by t he f ollowing paramet ers:
Current Unit Only – This opt ion minimizes t he amount of inf ormat ion in t he t ree, speeding up t he window, and is
especially usef ul f or large project s.
St d Assemblies – If checked, t he f ilt er will display assemblies f rom st andard assemblies, and t heir part s.
Purchased – If checked, St andard Assemblies t agged as “ Purchased” will also be displayed.
Dist . Sys. Support s – If checked, Dist ribut ed Syst ems Support s are displayed.
Part Shape – Bent or St raight
St ock Type – Major st ock t ype.
Part Type – Faceplat es, St if f eners and Twist ed St if f eners.
End Cut s – St art and End endcut .
St ock Name – A specif ic st ock.
Lengt h – A specif ic range of lengt hs.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
50 3
Prof i l e Pl ot Updat e Wi ndow
Allows t he user t o select which prof ile plot s t hey would like t o updat e if part s wit hin t hose plot s have been changed in any
way.
Show Log – Select s whet her a log f ile will be displayed cont aining a list of all t he major changes made during t he updat e
of t he select ed prof ile plot s.
Reinsert Changed Part s – Select s whet her or not t he select ed part s will be re-insert ed.
Zoom – Zooms t he current view t o t he select ed drawing, sheet , plot or part .
SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Opt i ons
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Pl ot s panel > Opt i ons
Menu ............... SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Opt i ons
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSTIFFPLOTOPT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Set Up Prof i l e Pl ot s (page 280)
Opens t he St if f ener Pl ot Opt i ons window, let t ing you set up prof ile plot s.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
504
Prof i l e Pl ot Opt i ons Wi ndow
Sheet Templat e – The large t emplat e drawing is set up t o hold t he individual Prof ile Plot s. Cust omize t his t emplat e t o f it
your needs. See Prof i l e Sheet Templat e (page 276).
Pl ot Templat e – A t emplat e designed t o display one prof ile and all t he relat ed dat a. Cust omize t his t emplat e t o f it your
needs. See Prof ile Plot Templat e (page 277).
Di mensi on St yl e – Set s up specif ic paramet ers f or t he dimensions.
St yle t o Copy – Every t ime you add plot s t o a drawing, ShipConst ruct or has t o creat e a dimension st yle depending on how
t he prof iles will f it inside t he t emplat es (f or example, a scaling f act or). In general you will f irst adjust a dimension st yle of
your choice and t hen t ell ShipConst ruct or t o use t he set t ings of t hat st yle as a basis f or t he new st yle.
Dimension Text Size – Set s t he t ext size independent of t he dimension st yle select ed. These unit s are based on t he size of
t he t emplat es you use. If you set up your t emplat es t o be t he size of paper, t he dimension size will be in paper size unit s.
Dimension Spacing – Set s t he spacing of t he dimension f rom t he object . These unit s are based on t he size of t he
t emplat es you use. If you set up your t emplat es t o be t he size of paper, t he dimension spacing will be in paper size unit s.
Inverse Bending Opt ions – Set t ings t hat cont rol t he inverse bending layout .
Show Inverse Bend Lines – Select s whet her or not inverse bend lines will be displayed.
Overl ap – Dist ance in ship (model space) coordinat es t o overlap t he inverse bend lines if mult iple lines are needed.
Upper Margin – The smallest dist ance t hat an inverse bend line will come t o t he upper edge of t he st if f ener.
Lower Margin – The smallest dist ance t hat an inverse bend line will come t o t he lower edge of t he st if f ener (mold line).
The sum of t he upper and lower margins should not exceed t he height of t he inverse bend view. Ot herwise, the
height will represent t he web height if t he st if f ener is bending in t he plane of t he web or t he f lange widt h.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
505
Bend Hat ch St yle – The hat ch st yle t hat will be used when hat ching t he bent area of t he prof ile part . Select None if no
hat ching is desired.
Green Hat ch St yle – The hat ch st yle t hat will be used when hat ching t he green area of t he prof ile part . Select None if no
hat ching is desired.
Pl ot Scal e – Select s if you would like t o use t he scale of t he longest st if f ener f or all prof ile plot s creat ed during t he
current insert ion operat ion or use a separat e scale f or each plot.
Forming Of f set s – Set t ings t hat cont rol t he opt ions f or t he of f set s f or curved prof iles.
Bend f rom St art – Set s t he st art of t he prof ile horizont al and let s t he prof ile curve up or down f rom t here. This can result
in a very t all plot .
Bend at Best Point – This will rot at e t he prof ile so t hat it will f it int o a rect angle of minimum height .
Of f set Spacing (Full Scale) – Set s t he spacing of t he f orming of f set lines in t he original scale of t he st if f ener.
Of f set Base Height (Full Scale) – Set s t he minimum f orming of f set dimension line height in t he original scale of t he
st i f f ener.
Sheet Tiling – Specif ies t he direct ion and spacing of t he t iling when insert ing mult iple prof ile plot sheet s int o t he drawing
during one insert ion operat ion.
Sheet s Per Row – The maximum number of sheet s t hat will be placed in a row bef ore a new row is creat ed when
insert ing mult iple prof ile plot sheet s int o t he drawing during one insert ion operat ion.
Plot Tiling - Specif ies t he direct ion and spacing of t he t iling when insert ing mult iple prof ile plot s int o a prof ile plot sheet
during one insert ion operat ion.
Dimension Endcut s - Select s whet her or not t he endcut s are dimensioned in t he prof ile plot .
Label Endcut s in Web View - Select s whet her or not t he endcut s are labeled in t he prof ile plot .
Append Plot t o Last Sheet – When select ed subsequent prof ile plot s will be insert ed int o any available space in t he
prof ile plot sheet s t hat already reside in t he drawing. If t here is no room in any of t he exist ing sheet s t hen a new sheet
will be insert ed int o t he drawing and t he remaining prof ile plot s will be added t o it . When not select ed new sheet s will be
added t o t he drawing regardless t o if t here is st ill room in t he exist ing sheet s in t he drawing.
Show Trim Port ion – Select s whet her or not t o show t he out line of t he square end of t he st if f ener.
Show Green – Select s whet her or not t o show t he out line of t he green part of t he st if f ener.
Cut out Acad Table St yle – Select s t he Acad t able st yle t hat will be used f or t he cut out s t able in t his prof ile plot .
Prof ile Plot Out put
Bending inf ormat ion – The bending inf ormat ion shown below.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
506
The dimension is posit ioned at t he st art t angent (lef t side). The end t angent is not indicat ed. For non-radial bends,
ShipConst ruct or uses knuckling (bends of R0). The Manager Pref erence set t ing Faceplat e Bend Tolerance is used t o
det ermine how much t o knuckle. Since a dimension st yle is set up f or t he scale of every plot , you can manually
dimension t he of f set curve if you pref er.
R1.988 indicat es t he inside radius of bend. This is in t he Report Unit s set up in Manager.
A53.3º indicat es t he enclosing angle of t he bend
Inverse Bend Inf ormat ion
Inverse bending is used t o bend st if f eners t o t heir f inal shape by drawing curved inverse bending lines ont o t he st if f eners
and bending t he st if f eners unt il t hese lines are st raight . Inverse bending inf ormat ion only appears f or curved or t wist ed
st i f f eners.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
507
The dist ance bet ween of f set dimensions f or t he inverse bend is t aken f rom t he Of f set Spacing f ield in t he Forming
Of f set s.
The Upper and Lower margin lines are placed on t he Margin layer.
The Neut ral Axis is placed on t he Neut ral Axis layer.
The Inverse bend line is placed on t he Inverse Bend Lines layer.
The of f set s are placed on t he _PRD_DIM layer.
SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Zoom
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Pl ot s panel > Zoom
Menu ............... SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Zoom
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCZOOMTOPLOT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Zoom Int o a Prof i l e Pl ot Wi t hi n a Prof i l e Pl ot Drawi ng (page 284)
Let s you easily zoom in t o a specif ic prof ile plot or prof ile plot sheet wit hin a prof ile plot drawing.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
508
Prof i l e Pl ot Li st Wi ndow
SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Pri nt Pl ot s
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Pl ot s panel > Pri nt Pl ot s
Menu ............... SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Pri nt Pl ot s
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCSUBPLOTPRINT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Pri nt Prof i l e Pl ot s (page 284)
Let s you print all or some prof ile plot s t o a print er.
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
509
Print Plot s Window
Sheet s – Check t his opt ion if you want t o print t he prof ile plot sheet s as well as t he prof ile plot s.
Pl ot s – Check t his opt ion if you want t o print t he prof ile plot s wit hout print ing t he prof ile plot sheet s.
Pl ot St yl e – Select a predef ined plot st yle.
SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Check Prof i l e Drawi ngs
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Pl ot s panel > Check Prof i l e Drawi ngs
Menu ............... SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Check Prof i l e Drawi ngs
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCCHECKPLOTS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Check Prof i l e Pl ot s (page 284)
Checks prof ile plot s in t he project dat abase against prof ile plot drawings and correct s any errors (f or example, any
missing prof ile plot drawings t hat someone may have delet ed manually wit hout using ShipConst ruct or).
Appendi x B: St ruct ure Product i on Command Ref erence
510
Updat e Opt i ons Wi ndow
Sel ect ed Pl ot s Only – Let s you select t he plot s wit hin t his drawing.
Current Drawing Only – Checks all plot s wit hin t his drawing.
All St if f ener Drawings – Checks all plot s in all prof ile plot drawings.
Remove Unused Dimension St yles – Removes dimension st yles not used anymore (you may have delet ed specif ic plot s).
SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Updat e Al l BOMs
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Pl ot s panel > Updat e Al l BOMs
Menu ............... SC Prof i l e Pl ot s > Updat e Al l BOMs
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCUPDATEBOMS
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Updat e Prof i l e Pl ot BOMs (page 285)
Updat es all t he BOMs wit hin t he current prof ile plot drawing so t hey ref lect t he current inf ormat ion f rom t he plot t ed part s.
SC Prof i l e Pl ot Templ at e Menu
The SC Prof ile Plot Templat e menu appears wit hin prof ile plot t emplat e drawings (see Set Up Prof ile Plot Templat es
(page 276)).
SC Prof i l e Pl ot Templ at e > Draw Border
But t on .............
Ri bbon ............ Nest and Prof i l e Pl ot s t ab > Prof i l e Pl ot Templ at e panel > Draw Border
Menu ............... SC Prof i l e Pl ot Templ at e > Draw Border
Tool bar ............ None
Command ...... SCPROFILEPLOTSETPLOT
Permi ssi ons ... None
Procedure ....... Def i ne t he Drawi ng Border of a Pl ot Templ at e (page 278)
Def ines t he area of t he drawing.
Appendi x B: St r